HIDD

TENDER NO: 4605/2019/3100
EPC WORKS FOR ESTABLISHMENT OF NEW

SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE
BUILDING WORKS PACKAGE
VOLUME 2 OF 4
SECTION – 4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
EPC Works for Establishment of New System Control Centre
Building Works Package
Volume 2 - Section 4
Technical Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 25 00 00 Integrated Automation
SECTION 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cable
SECTION 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
SECTION 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 05 36 Cable Tray for Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 12 16 Dry-Type Transformers
SECTION 26 24 13 Switchboards
SECTION 26 24 16 Panel Boards
SECTION 26 24 19 Motor Control Center
SECTION 26 26 00 Power Distribution Unit
SECTION 26 27 26 Wiring Devices
SECTION 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Motor Controller
SECTION 26 31 00 Photovoltaic Collectors
SECTION 26 32 13 Engine Generators - Indoor
SECTION 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch
SECTION 26 36 33 Static Transfer Switch
SECTION 26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection
SECTION 26 51 00 Interior Lighting
SECTION 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
SECTION 27 05 11 Requirements for Communications Installations
SECTION 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems
SECTION 27 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Communications Systems
SECTION 27 11 16 Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures
SECTION 27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels
SECTION 27 11 23 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack
SECTION 27 11 26 Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips
SECTION 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling
SECTION 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
SECTION 27 20 00 Data Communications
SECTION 27 30 00 Voice Communications
SECTION 27 51 16 Public Address System
SECTION 28 05 13 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security
SECTION 28 13 00 Security Management System - Access Control
SECTION 28 23 00 Security Management System - Video Surveillance
SECTION 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm
Approved Vendor List
SECTION 25 00 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
EPC Works for Establishment of New System Control Centre: Building Works Package
CONTENTS
PART 1: GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 4

1.01 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 4
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................... 5
1.03 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 6
1.04 MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 6
1.05 SURGE / TRANSIENT PROTECTION .................................................................... 7
1.06 DUAL SOURCE OF POWER .................................................................................. 7
1.07 24V TRANSFORMER ............................................................................................. 7
1.08 CABLE SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................ 7
1.09 SYSTEM STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION ................................................... 7
1.10 EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS ................................................................................... 8
1.11 EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 9
2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................................... 9
2.02 SECURITY ............................................................................................................. 9
2.03 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................. 10
2.04 MAIN OPERATOR WORK STATION.................................................................... 11
2.05 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL ................................................................ 13
2.06 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES ...................................................................... 14
2.07 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLERS ................................................................... 20
2.08 DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES ................................. 22
2.09 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS .................. 24
2.10 OPERATOR INTERFACE..................................................................................... 27
2.11 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS ...................................................................... 30
2.12 SENSORS - GENERAL ........................................................................................ 33
2.13 THERMOSTAT ..................................................................................................... 34
2.14 TEMPERATURE SENSORS ................................................................................ 34
2.15 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR ..................................................................... 35
2.16 PRESSURE SWITCHES / SENSORS .................................................................. 35
2.17 HUMIDISTATS / RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSORS ............................................. 36
2.18 CONTROL DAMPERS .......................................................................................... 36
Volume 2: Section 4 Page 2 of 49

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.19 CONTROL VALVES ............................................................................................. 37

2.20 DAMPER / VALVE ACTUATORS - GENERAL ..................................................... 38
2.21 VALVE ACTUATORS ........................................................................................... 38
2.22 DAMPER ACTUATORS........................................................................................ 39
2.23 WATER FLOW SWITCHES / SENSORS .............................................................. 41
2.24 AIR FLOW STATIC / DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS / SWITCHES ....... 41
2.25 DUCT SENSORS ................................................................................................. 42
2.26 OCCUPANCY SENSORS: .................................................................................... 42
2.27 Outside Air Monitoring Station .............................................................................. 42
2.28 WATER METERS ................................................................................................. 42
2.29 Power METERs .................................................................................................... 42
2.30 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS............................................................................. 42
2.31 LIST OF POINTs SCHEDULES ............................................................................ 43
PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 44
3.01 COORDINATION .................................................................................................. 44
3.02 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 44
3.03 VERIFICATION..................................................................................................... 45
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND HANDOVER ................................................................. 46
3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING ........................................................................................ 48
3.06 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................... 48
3.07 LICENSE .............................................................................................................. 49

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Specification is intended to define the minimum functional, configuration and

equipment requirements for an acceptable system.
B. Scope
1. Supply and install a complete, interoperable, open Integrated Automation system
(BAS) for the control, operation and monitoring of mechanical and electrical
systems
a. HVAC
b. Plumbing
c. Electrical
d. Lifts
2. Provide all required services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful
operation of the entire BAS system, including engineering, installation supervision
and labor, calibration, software, programming etc. necessary for a complete and
fully operational building automation system.
3. Provide centralized supervision facility of all required equipment and locate it in a
designated room.
4. The system shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the
addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs, DDCs and operator devices.
5. Provide all equipment, software, programming etc. necessary to integrate the BAS
with the external systems.
6. Integrate BAS into overall Facility Management System (FMS) – if applicable.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Control sequences are specified in "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls"
section of HVAC specifications.
2. Refer to other relevant sections of the HVAC specifications and manufacturers
manuals as applicable for installation of all equipment, instrumentation and related
works e.g. instrument wells, valve bodies and dampers etc. in HVAC systems.
3. Refer to other relevant sections of plumbing, firefighting specifications and electrical
and fire alarm specifications to understand scope of work.
4. Refer to schedule of points to understand detailed scope of work.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers / Installers

1. Subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents the supply and installation
of the Building Automation System shall be carried out by an installer approved by
the Engineer and complying with the following requirements:
a. Having a local office staffed with factory trained and certified engineers fully
capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency
maintenance service on all system components.
b. Having a successful local experience record of minimum 7 years in the design
and installation of computerized building automation systems and full
integration knowledge similar in performance to that specified herein and
prepared to provide evidence of this history as a condition of acceptance and
approval.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. UL Listing / CE certification
a. The entire Building Automation System shall be approved and listed by

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or other equal and approved authority
acceptable to the Engineer.
b. Listing compliance shall include but not be limited to the following:
c. Building Automation System (UL 864)
d. Process management System (UL 864)
e. Proprietary Fire management System (UL 864)
f. NFPA 72
g. Energy Management Systems (UL 916)
h. All equipment employed in the system shall bear the appropriate UL listing
Mark to ensure compliance. Manufacturer must submit a copy of the
appropriate UL Listings Cards or equivalent certificates identifying system by
name and compliance with the above system compliance.
C. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to
assure us that all spare parts and consumables will be available for 15 years life span of
the equipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
are approved. Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are not
accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at delivery
to the site for inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate of Origin, will
result in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and the Contractor or his
Sub-Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and delays to the project
associated with the product delivery. In exceptional cases, Contractor shall submit the
necessary paperwork and documents to the Engineer and Client for approval prior to
shipment.
E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of
on-site manufacturing shall not be classified as Original Equipment Manufacturer.
F. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
without any derating to the capacity.
G. The above conditions (D,E and F items), shall superseded all other statements,
specifications, conditions mentioned anywhere else in the BoQ, Drawings, or
Specification documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, for all components of the system
including installation instructions and system generation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of installed system including wiring diagrams.
Outstation layout drawing, Single line/block diagram of network etc.
C. Installer Qualifications: Submit for the Engineer’s review and approval qualifications and
experience details of proposed installer's project manager, project engineer, engineering
staff and electronic technicians to be involved with the supervision, engineering and
installation.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall provide the client a comprehensive service contract during the
Maintenance Period specified in the contract.
B. The contractor shall cover preventive maintenance, breakdown call out and replacement
of consumable items

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.05 SURGE / TRANSIENT PROTECTION
A. Arrangements shall be made for all system equipment to be able to withstand transient
disturbances from the input power supply. Surge Suppressors or other approved means
shall be fitted to all devices input and output points for protection against voltage
transients, spikes etc.
B. Controllers shall be isolated against transient disturbances via optical couplers or other
approved means.
1.06 DUAL SOURCE OF POWER
A. Arrangements shall be made for every Data Gathering Panel fed from two different
power sources to be equipped with an inverter switch.
B. This inverter switch will provide every DGP fed from two different power sources with
primary & redundant power source.
1.07 24V TRANSFORMER
A. Arrangements shall be made for every Data Gathering Panel that uses devices with 24V
power source to be equipped with a 24V Transformer.
B. This Transformer shall be sized to support the power load needed
1.08 CABLE SPECIFICATION
A. Latest state of the art material and specification most suited to each application as
recommended by manufacturer shall be followed.
1.09 SYSTEM STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION
A. Provide the following system components:

1. All sensors, for all systems, including HVAC, plumbing, firefighting, fire alarm,
electrical system etc.
2. All required direct digital controllers.
3. All required Communication controllers for the monitoring and controlling

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Main Operator Workstations - (PC, Monitor, Printer).

5. Portable Operator Terminals
6. Hardware or Software supporting simultaneous Multi-viewing
B. The Personal Computer shall be referred to as the "Digital Panel (s)" throughout this
document.
1.10 EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS
A. The Supplier shall confirm the dimensions of the proposed equipment by submitting eq
layout showing the required clearances as per manufacturer recommendations
1.11 EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE
A. All controllers & BAS Modules shall be specified to run under a minimum of 50°C
operating temperature.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. The system shall be peer-to-peer networked, distributed control system with the
capability to integrate with Ethernet, BACNET, BACNET TCP IP, Arcnet and
LONWORKS technology communication protocols in one open, interoperable system.
The system shall be modular in design
B. The system shall utilize Ethernet / LONMARK / BACNET (ASHRAE standard 135) /
based peer to peer communication for system controllers and LONMARK / BACNET
TCP/IP ArcNet / Ethernet TCP/IP for unitary, application specific terminal controllers and
thermostats etc.
C. The system shall be Web Enabled and suitable for remote access and control through
Web by providing the necessary communication controller with embedded web server.
D. The system shall be capable of Communicating with Third Party Vendor Equipment for
all -aspects of the system.
E. The system shall have Standalone Capability in the event of a network failure. Failure of
any single component or network connections shall not interrupt the execution of control
strategies at the operational devices.
F. The basic elements of the BAS structures shall be manufacturer's latest standard
products that comply with the specification requirements and are kept in inventory or
obtained in short time by the BAS supplier / manufacturer. The components shall not
require customizing, other than adding software programming to perform required
functions.
2.02 SECURITY
A. Security shall be assured. Up to date authentication and encryption techniques shall be

used to prevent unauthorized access.
B. Password Protection: A minimum of three levels of password access protection shall be

provided to allow the user / manager to limit control, display, and data base
manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon the
assigned password. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.
Access shall be supported, for example:
1. Level 1 - Data Access and Display

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Level 2 - Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands.

3. Level 3 - Level 2 + Database Generation and Modification
C. A minimum of four passwords shall be supported at each Digital Panel
D. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to

prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices logged on.
2.03 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS
A. Inherent in the system design shall be the ability to monitor and control the system
either via a local network, remotely using standard web browsers through LAN /
Internet, or a combination of the two networking schemes.
B. Local Area Network

1. Personal Computer Support: The Personal Computer shall directly oversee the
local network such that communications may be executed directly to and between
ASCs.
2. Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up
modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application data on the
network.
3. Access to system data shall not be restricted by a hardware configuration of the
system.
4. The network architecture should consist of a high speed bus being capable of
transmission on multimedia such as the building Structured Cabling System, co-
axial cable or optical fiber.
5. Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global point broadcasting shall
allow point data to be shared between ASCs
6. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions:
a. Data transfer states for alarm reporting and quick point status from the multiple
ASCs. A minimum baud rate shall be 9600 baud.
b. Support of any combination of ASCs. They shall be powered by a minimum 16
bit main processor.
c. Detection of single or multiple failures of ASCs
d. Detection of failures of the network media.
e. Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be used.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
f. Use of an approved, industry standard protocol
D. Supervisory control
1. Server PC and Operating System
a. Web based supervisory software shall not require any proprietary software to
be installed on the Operators workstation. Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later
with Java Virtual Machine 1.5 03 or later shall be used for Web based control.
2. Supervising the BAS System
a. The supervisor shall directly connect to the Communication Controller’s internal

/ external web server.
b. The web server shall retrieve logged point data and alarm data if required. The
web server shall provide central alarm management for the entire system.
c. The web server shall provide central management of logged data for all input
and output
3. Browser Clients
a. The server shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 4 concurrent clients

using Microsoft Internet Explorer. Client workstations shall require no extra
software to be installed other than Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later with
Java Virtual Machine 1.5 03 or later.
b. The web pages shall allow these minimum functions:
1. Displaying of real-time values automatically without requiring a
manual ‘refresh’ of the web page.
2. All graphics shall be stored in the web server without a need for
storage of graphical screens on the client machine.
3. Support for animations in HTML pages
4. Automatically created tables for alarms, set-points, hardware points

and virtual points without the need to create graphics.
5. Automatically created menus and corresponding HTML pages for

data logs and data log groups without the need to create graphics.
6. Automatically created network page with navigation to other

Communication Controllers.
2.04 MAIN OPERATOR WORK STATION

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Group all operator I/O devices into stations which control, monitor buildings activity and
can all be used simultaneously. Each station shall be totally independent of the others.
B. The operator station shall have the following minimum specifications:

1. 3.9 GHz INTEL core i7 or latest processor
8 Gb RAM,
500 GB Hard Drive or better
32-Bit EISA SCSI Controller or latest
HDMI display Card (preferably Windows accelerated card) and support (1920 x
1080) resolution with 1 GB VRAM or latest.
24" non-interlaced flat panel Color monitor (1920 x 1080)
Latest version of windows, pre-installed
2. Provide operator station with all required and necessary software/hardware for
control reporting and commissioning of building systems.
3. The system should allow for TCP/IP protocol.
4. This is the minimum requirement. Latest technology / equipment shall be provided
to full satisfaction of Engineer.
C. Laser Printer
1. Provide high quality, printers for hardcopy change-of-state printouts, systems logs,
information summaries, and control system malfunction advisories. The Printer shall
be multi font, Color output.
2. It shall have a minimum operating speed of 200 characters / second or higher
3. The system shall be capable of establishing the line count per page on site for form
feed control
4. Printer shall be formatted to print on standard A3 and A4 paper.
D. Color LCD Display

1. Provide a Color flat screen Full HD monitor with 24 inch display screen.
2. The monitor shall output advisories in a dedicated and protected area of the viewing
screen, and sound a unique audible tone in the event of control system hardware
malfunctions or restorations, as well as to sound a unique audible tone in the event
of a computer or communications malfunction.
3. Individual point information shall be coded via a minimum eight different colors.
These colors shall be defined with respect to system type and condition.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. The unacknowledged change-of-state occurrences shall output in double size

characters.
5. Individual point information shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Point identifier and expanded identifier.

b. Analog value.
c. engineering units
d. Mode units.
6. A system display shall be a dynamic chromatic output, updating to the current point
condition at least every twenty (20) seconds.
2.05 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL
A. General: A state of the art Portable Operator's Terminal (POT) shall be provided for
readout of system variables; override; control and adjustment of parameters. POT will
be hand held and plug directly into individual DDC for power and data.
B. Functionality to include ability to:

1. Display / change minimum on / off, maximum off time
2. Set points to a fixed valve/state
3. Display diagnostic results
4. Display sequential all point summary and sequential alarm summary
5. Display / change digital point state, analogue point value
6. Display / change time and date
7. Display / change application and DDC parameters
8. Display / change analogue limits
9. Display / change time schedules
10. Display / change routine counts and runtime limits
11. Display / change time / event initiation
12. Display / change programmable off set values
13. Access DDC initialization routines and diagnostics
14. Enable / Disable points, initiators and programs
C. POT shall be complete with command keys, data entry keys, cursor control keys and a
24-character liquid crystal alphanumeric display. Access is to be via self-prompting
menu selection with arrow key control of next menu/previous menu and step
forward/step backward within a given menu.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Connection of a POT to a DDC shall not interrupt nor interfere with normal peer network
operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted, or preclude central
initiated commands and system modification.
2.06 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General
1. All necessary software to form a complete system shall be provided. The operating
system shall be the latest WINDOWS
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part
of the Digital Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher-level computer for
execution.
3. Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates
shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system
operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals,
and software documentation.
B. Basic Interface Description

1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the
use of English language prompting, English language point identification and
industry standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a
minimum, the following functionality:
a. Scheduling and override of building operations, Time Scheduling, Holiday

program
b. Collection and analysis of historical data
c. Conversion of graphics to HTML format for viewing with a Web Browser without
any loss of quality
d. Editing, programming, and storage of controller / system databases, data
logging
e. Interface with any existing personal computer networks owned or specified for
the site
f. Dynamic graphics
g. Analogue closed loop control
h. Optimization program
i. Interlocking program
j. Equipment cycling & lead/lag selection program, sequencing program

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
k. Maximum demand load shedding program

l. Totalisation program
m. Plant Maintenance monitoring
n. Alarms program
o. Fault diagnostics software
p. Reaction program
q. Recovery program
2. Software shall be provided to enable the following reports, as minimum, to be
generated
a. Maintenance report
b. Alarm report
c. Plant / equipment failure report
d. Power or utility consumption report
e. Analogue trend report
f. Historical event report
3. The system shall automatically collate log-on/log-off time for each user and shall
record the commands of each user.
4. Should the operating system screen saver be activated, then the system will
automatically log out the current user.
5. Software shall allow the operator to perform commands access and adjustment of
all specified parameters in the control programs of any DDC controller on the site.
C. Calendars
1. Monthly calendars for a 24-month period shall be provided which allow for simplified
scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days
shall be user-selected with the pointing device and shall automatically reschedule
equipment operation.
D. Help
1. Help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for
that particular screen.
E. Energy Management Applications: Digital Panels shall have the ability to perform any or
all of the following energy management routines
1. Time of Day Scheduling
2. Calendar Based Scheduling

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Holiday Scheduling
4. Optimal Start
5. Optimal Stop
6. Heating/Cooling Interlock
7. Average/High/Low Signal Select and Reset
F. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention,
and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization.
1. Optimal Run Time: (wherever applicable)
a. The Optimal Run time (ORT) program shall control the start-up and shutdown
times of HVAC equipment during both the heating and cooling seasons to
provide the most efficient operating strategy during potentially energy wasteful
periods of the day. The ORT program shall base it control decisions primarily
upon occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirement,
interior room mass temperature of the building etc.
b. For start-up, ORT program shall use outside air temperature / room mass
temperatures etc. to "learn" the building's thermal characteristic through an
adaptive modeling technique. The adaptive model shall allow the system to
predict how long the building shall take to warm-up (Heating mode) or cool-
down (cooling mode) under different outside and inside temperature conditions.
c. For shutdown, ORT program shall use the outside air temperature and other
required factors to determine how early it can shut down the system without
adversely affecting ventilation requirements.
d. The ORT program shall analyze multiple buildings mass sensors to
automatically determine the seasonal mode and worst case condition for every
day of the year. Analysis shall require occupancy schedule date and desired
mass temperatures etc.
e. Optimization Program: This program shall calculate automatically the optimum
start and stop times for HVAC plant consistent with internal and external
temperatures in order to conserve energy
G. Chiller Manager
1. The Chiller Manager (CM) feature shall be controlled and serviced by the Energy
Manager, which is the supervisory program which coordinates the activities of all energy

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
application features. The Chiller manager shall be a supervisory program overseeing

the functions of Chilled Water Temperature Reset and Chiller sequencing. The Chiller
manager shall be provided to support either Imperial or Metric units of measurement.
2. Each Chiller manager system shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded
identifier. The expanded identifier shall be used further identify or label the CM system.
A minimum of 32 CM systems shall be able to be defined.
3. Chiller Manager System, points and parameter shall be defined on-line by the user. Any
addition, modifications, or deletions shall be made on-line.
a. Chilled Water Reset: Chilled water Reset (CHR) program shall be provided to
automatically reset the chilled water temperature to the highest possible value which will
still satisfy the cooling coil requiring the greatest cooling.
b. Condenser Water Reset: Condensate Water Reset (CWR) program shall be provided to
automatically reset the condenser valve which will still satisfy both, the outside wet bulb
temperature and the load being handed by all chillers on the condenser loop.
4. The BAS shall completely integrate with the chillers by taking the values directly from
the microprocessor for its complete control, however the internal chiller management
shall be carried out by the chillers own controls.
H. Fire Management System

1. General
a. Coordinate with Fire Alarm System supplier.

b. Integrate the Fire Alarm system into the FMS (where local authorities allow)
c. Refer to Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls, for smoke control system.
I. Programming Capability: DDC shall be able to execute processes configured by the

user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any required data in a
configured process
2. Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any
combination of the following:
a. Time of day
b. Calendar Date
c. Other processes

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
d. Events (e.g. point alarms)

3. Data Access: A single process shall able to incorporate measured or calculated
data from any and all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to
issue commands to points in any and all the ASCs on the local network.
J. Alarm Management:
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to
operator workstations filter alarms to minimize operator interruption due to non-critical
alarms.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the
point's description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritizing: the user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each
point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed
operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be
provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each
point. The user shall also be able to define condition under which need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator
device.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition, to the point's description and the time and date, the
user shall be able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more
fully describe the alarm condition and / or operator response.
5. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote
operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping
and saving reports until a manual request is received, or until the buffer space is
full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms. When the receiving end
is a workstation, then alarms shall be displayed at the receiving terminal and have a
hard copy printed at the associated event printer
6. Remote Alarm Horn: The alarm horn feature shall be silenced when the critical
alarm is acknowledged.
K. A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display
system data.
1. Provide data logging capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve
records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
be data logged automatically at time-based intervals or changes of value (Time–

Stamped Data logs), both of which shall be user definable. Data log data shall be
automatically stored for future diagnostics and reporting.
2. Data log report graphics shall be provided to allow the user to view all data logged
point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre-defined
groups of up to 6 points. Provide additional functionality to allow any data logs to be
transferred easily to an off-the shelf spreadsheet package such as Microsoft Excel
either from archived data on hard disk or directly from any controller in real time.
This must allow the user to perform custom calculations such as energy usage,
equipment efficiency and energy costs and allow for generation of these reports on
high-quality plots, graphs and charts.
3. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view trended data on data log
graph displays. Displays shall be actual plots of both static and/or real-time dynamic
point data. A minimum of 6 points may be viewed simultaneously on a single graph,
with color selection and line type for each point being user-definable.
4. Provide capability to print any graph on the system printer for use as a building
management and diagnostics tool.
5. It shall be possible for any point in the BAS system to be data logged on a time
interval basis in real-time on the operator’s workstation PC.
6. All graphical trend displays of data shall be capable of multiple display styles,
including but not limited to 2-D and 3-D line, bar and pie charts.
L. Runtime Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
hours for binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this
specification.
1. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
M. Pulse totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store
consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected binary pulse
input-type points.
1. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2. The information available from the Pulse Totalization shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Peak Demand, with date and time stamp

b. 24-hour Demand Log
c. Accumulated KWH for day
d. Week KWH usage
e. Week Demand KW
f. Demand KW annual history for past 12 periods
g. KWH annual history for past 12 periods
N. Event Totalization: Digital Panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.
1. The Even Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user specified
message shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.07 COMMUNICATION CONTROLLERS
A. Communication Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of

32 bits. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors
consisting of a single modular unit and shall have mounting that provides ease of
replacement.
B. Each Communication Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own
operating system and databases, including:
1. Communication processes
2. Programmable local display applications
3. Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
4. Maintenance support applications
5. Dial-up communications
6. Time Schedules
C. Communication Controller Specifications:

1. High Speed 10Mbps peer-to-peer Communication link between each
Communications Controller and the Supervisory System with support for legacy
10Mbps systems.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Ethernet and TCP/IP technologies as standard to provide User Specific Web page
access using standard Web Browsers.
3. The communications controller shall include an internal / external web Server which
supports HTML 4.x or above and JavaScript 1.3 or above standards
4. All software to be stored in flash memory and upgradeable via a Service port
5. Optional LONMARK protocol to interface
6. Optional BACnet/IP protocol interface to third-party systems.
7. Serial Interface to a remote Keypad/Display unit supporting custom supervisory
menus, diagnostics and entry of configuration data.
8. USB Version 2.0 High Speed Local communications to the operators Portable or
PC Workstation
9. Independent serial communications port for external PSTN, Leased Line, GSM or
GPRS Modem support
10. Serial Interface for external Printer Support
11. Serial Interface for optional Service Port communications link to the operators PCT
or POW or PC Workstation.
12. Integral Keypad and Display supporting custom supervisory menus, diagnostics
and entry of configuration data such as the Internet Protocol (IP) address to be
entered during commissioning.
13. Independent fieldbus network terminal for connection of the DDC and ASC
controllers either locally or minimum 1000m at baud rates up to 78Kbps without use
of repeaters.
14. Standalone or networked operation
15. Monitoring of RAM backup Battery voltage over the network or via local serial
connection without opening the housing or disruption of the control program
16. Remote checking for ON/OFF status of all field bus Termination resistors
17. Maximum Top Row of connectors to bottom row of Connector distance of 14cm
maximum to allow efficient Panel box size when containing multiple
Communications Controllers
D. Each Communication Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,

communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The Communication
Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component
failures or repeated failure to establish communication

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be backup batteries fitted to prevent
the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be
incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be
provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 2 years.
F. Upon restoration of normal power, the Communication Controller shall automatically

resume full operation without manual intervention.
G. Each Communication Controller shall be capable of storing a buffer of at least 100 alarm
messages. Each message may be assigned to any number of points in the Controller.
H. All points associated with a given mechanical system (i.e. AHU) will be controlled from a
single Communication Controller
2.08 DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part
of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for
execution
B. Control Software Description

1. The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pretested control
algorithms
a. Two-position control
b. Proportional control
c. Proportional plus integral control
d. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
2. It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:
a. Any system measured point data or status

b. Any calculated data
c. Any results from other processes
d. User-defined constants
e. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /,square root, exponential, etc.)
f. Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
g. On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers
3. Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:
a. Time interval
b. Time-of-day
c. Other processes
d. Time programming
e. Events (e.g., point alarms)
C. Programming:
1. The custom control-programming feature shall be via a graphical programming
language (GPL) in each operator workstation documented via English language
descriptors.
D. Global Data:
1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any
and all other DDC Controllers or ASC Controllers on the network. In addition, a
single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC
Controllers or application specific Controllers on the network.
E. Messaging:
1. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator
I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified
device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a
printer or pager.
2. The system shall be able to be set to alert the operator in the form of emails or SMS
and screen alarms so the problems can be taken care of immediately
F. Data logging:
1. DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs
and outputs.
2. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for data logging. Two methods
of collection shall be allowed: Time interval Data logs with not less than 1000 data
samples or Time Stamped Data logs triggered by change of value with not less than
512 data samples.
3. Sample intervals of 1 second to 7 days shall be provided for Time Interval Data
logs. Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for data logs
and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 64,000 data samples in total.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.09 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS
A. Each Digital Panel shall be able to extend its monitoring and control through the use of
standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
B. Each ASC shall operate as standalone controller capable of performing its specified
control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall
be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data
bases including:
1. Control Processes
2. Energy Management Applications.
3. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
D. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through the Digital
Panel or portable operator's terminal connected to any ASC on the network.
E. ASCs shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal that can be
connected to the ASC via zone temperature or directly at the controller. The capabilities
of the portable service terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Display temperatures
2. Display status
3. Display set points
4. Display control parameters
5. Override binary output control
6. Override and log set points
7. Modification of gain and off set constants
F. Power fail Protection: All System set points, proportional bands, control algorithms, and
any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any
duration does not necessitate reprogramming the ASC.
G. Application Descriptions:
1. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers:
a. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall be LONMARK / Bacnet certified and shall
support, but not be limited to, the control of VAV boxes both Bypass type and
shut off type.
b. VAV Terminal unit controllers shall include an inbuilt air flow

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. Transducer that shall connect to the terminal unit manufacturer’s standard air
velocity averaging grid to measure directly the average air flow in the duct.
d. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs
and outputs:
1. Proportional Cooling and Heating Outputs
e. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following library of control
1. Daily Schedules
2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode
3. Economy Mode
4. Standby Mode
5. Unoccupied
6. Shutdown
7. Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
8. Temporary Override Mode
9. Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Based Control)
10. Boost
f. Occupancy-based Economy / Comfort Mode Control: Each VAV Terminal Unit

Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based Upon
the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing
device, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically select either
Economy or Comfort mode.
g. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall
provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the interface to an associated
lighting relay. Based upon the status of an occupancy sensing device or
manual wall switch, the output to automatically turn on or off the lights. This
accommodates occupant requirements while reducing electrical consumption.
Economy/Comfort (described in the previous section) and lighting overrides
shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
h. Temporary Override Modes

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Temporary Occupancy Mode: The controller interface the zone

temperature sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch
to change the mode of the controller from economy to comfort
and optionally interlock the room lights for a present amount of
time.
2. Boost Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature

sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch to override
the controller's output to full heating or cooling. This command
shall be active for a preset amount of time, to anticipate a
substantial change in the room's load.
i. Alarm Management: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall perform its own
limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by
reducing unnecessary communication
2. Unitary Controllers:
a. Unitary Controllers shall be LONMARK / BACNET certified.

b. Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control
c. Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the
interface to an associated lighting relay and a provision for occupancy sensing
overrides, as required. Based upon the status of either an occupancy sensing
device, the Unitary Controller shall provide a contact output to automatically
turn on or off the lights and either an Economy or Comfort mode. This
accommodates occupant requirements while reducing electrically consumption.
Economy/Comfort and Lighting overrides shall be served by the same
occupancy override input.
d. Temporary Override Modes
1. Temporary Occupancy Mode: The controller interface to the
zone temperature sensor shall allow of an optional momentary
switch to change the mode of the controller from economy to
comfort and optionally interlock the room lights for a preset
amount of time.
2. Boost Mode: The controller interface to the zone temperature

sensor shall allow for an optional momentary switch to override
the controller's output to full heating or cooling. This command
shall be active for a preset amount of time, to anticipate a
substantial change in the room's load.
3. Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controllers:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. AHU Controllers shall be UL Listed or equivalent certified stand alone.

b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to
perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
c. AHU Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to
perform the requested sequence of operation .
d. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall
automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone
temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment
performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall
be stored.
e. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status
monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing
unnecessary communications.
4. Chillers / Pumps / Fans / Heat Exchangers / Boilers DDC Controllers
a. DDC controllers for the above equipment shall be UL listed or Equivalent

certified
b. The DDC Controllers for the above shall comply with the specification
requirements mentioned above in this document and shall support all
necessary inputs points and output points to perform the specified control
sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
c. These DDC Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program
logic to requested perform the sequence of operation
d. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each DDC Controller shall
automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone
temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment
performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall
be stored.
e. Alarm Management: Each DDC Controller shall perform its own limit and status
monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing
unnecessary communications.
2.10 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Basic Interface Description:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The operator interface shall also have the option of using a mouse or similar
pointing device for a "point and click" approach to facilities management. Users
shall be able to start to stop equipment or change set points from graphical displays
through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.
2. Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user, the Operator
interface shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system
point and application data described in this specification. Point identification,
engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be
the same at all operator devices.
3. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform
commands including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment

b. Enable/Disable process execution
c. Enter temporary Overrides Schedules
d. Define Holiday Schedules
e. Change time/date
f. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits
g. Enable/Disable demand limiting
h. Enable/Disable duty cycle
i. Enable/Disable average/high/low signal select and reset
j. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
k. Add/Delete. Modify points of any type and all associated points parameters,
and tuning constants.
l. Add/Delete Modify alarm reporting definition for each point.
m. Add/Delete Modify energy management applications
n. Add/Delete Modify time and calendar-based programming
o. Add/Delete Modify totalization for every point.
p. Add/Delete Modify Historical Data Trending for every point.
q. Add/Delete Modify configured control processes
r. Add/Delete Modify dial-up telecommunication definition
s. Add/Delete Modify all operator passwords
t. Add/Delete Modify Alarm Messages

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Logs and Summaries: Report shall be generated manually, and directed to the
displays. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the
following types of reports:
a. A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
1. Points currently in alarm
2. Off-line points
3. Points Currently
4. Points in Weekly Schedules
5. Holiday Programming
b. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a
user selected sets of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to
the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no
conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller
to obtain system information.
B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system
schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled
water systems and hot water boiler systems shall be provided as specified in the
Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and
speed alarm recognition.
1. System Selection / Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access
the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme,
menu selection, or text-based commands.
2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values,
and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall
automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.
3. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to
allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
a. The FMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and

symbol depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans cooling coils,
filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-
terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electric symbols.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device
in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the
following:
1. Define symbols
2. Position and size symbols
3. Define background screens
4. Locate, orient and size descriptive text
5. Define and display colors for all elements
6. Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated

system points or other displays.
c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system

points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system,
building layout, or any other logical grouping of points, which aids the operator
in the analysis of the facility. The user shall be able to build graphic displays
that include point data from multiple application specific controllers.
C. System Configuration and Definition:

1. All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines
shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures
shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.
2.11 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS
A. Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) shall monitor and control all functions relating to building
automation.
B. DDC shall be powered by a minimum 16 bit main processor. The software program and
data shall reside in battery backed RAM.
C. DDC shall be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors consisting of

modular hardware within a protective enclosure
D. Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and databases, including, but not limited to:
1. Control processes
2. Energy management applications
3. Alarm management applications

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Data logs for points specified

5. Maintenance support applications
6. Custom processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Time Schedule information
E. Provide Digital System Controller that shall perform its assigned control functions as a
completely stand-alone unit. These stand-alone capabilities shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Control: Provide control algorithms, which shall be residents in the DDC to permit
Proportional, Integral and Derivative control modes in any combination to meet the
needs of the application. Other control modes such as incremental, floating or two
position must be available to adapt to job needs.
2. All DDCS shall be freely programmable for any required sequence with minimum
loops.
F. Calibration Compensation: To maintain long term analog accuracy in the controller

sensing circuits, the DDC shall sense the voltage being supplied to the resistance
sensing element and through firmware compensate for power supply changes due to
long term drift or drift due to ambient temperature changes at the power supply.
G. Associated hardware: Use electrical actuators and sensors that are compatible with the
output of the DDC.
H. Mis-Wiring Protection
1. All Input, Outputs and the network port will be protected against accidental mis-
wiring upto 24VAC
I. Spare Capacity
1. Each DDC Controller shall have a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future point
connection by adding additional units. In order to provide efficient expansion in the
future, every spare Point shall be completely configurable as an Input or an Output.
J. Manual Overrides
1. DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator
that automatic control has been inhibited.
K. Diagnostics Mis-Wiring Protection

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics and

communication diagnostics.
L. Power Failure
1. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration
data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all
volatile memory for a minimum of 2 years. Upon restoration of normal power, the
DDC Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual
intervention.
M. Configuration
1. A POT shall set the DDC address and Baud rates using standard Alphanumeric
characters. A laptop computer will alternatively perform these functions by
connecting directly to the DDC. A laptop computer or the host computer shall set all
remaining parameters.
N. DDC Universal Inputs& outputs

1. The DDC shall provide Inputs which can accept industry standard analog and digital
signals such as 4-20 ma, 0-10 VDC, NTC/PTC Thermistors, Potentiometers, digital
binary inputs, contact closures, 24Vac detection and pulse counting up to 20Hz.
The Universal Inputs will support a minimum of 15 types of standard NTC/PTC
Thermistors, Relay contacts 24Vac detect NO as outputs.
O. I/O Channels
1. The DDC shall provide Inputs & Outputs which can accept industry standard analog
and digital signals such as Active Input 0-10V DC@40Kohm, 9 Bit resolution, Active
output 0-10V DC @20mA maximum load, Digital volt free contact @ 25mA not
continuous 24Vac detect and NO 24Vac relay contact 2A continuous / 15A inrush.
P. DDC Controller Specifications:

1. Shall have independent fieldbus network terminal for connection to a
Communications Controllers at baud rates up to 78Kbps either locally or with
minimum of 1200m without use of repeaters
2. Shall have its embedded software stored in Flash memory an upgradeable
3. Shall have all of its I/O sensor and actuator interfaces (i.e. 0-10V, 4 – 20mA,
Thermistor etc) be setup automatically by the downloaded control software for rapid
error-free configuration i.e. no manual jumpers or Dipswitches permitted

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Shall have a range of points which can be configured by the downloaded control
program as either Inputs or Outputs to allow for maximum efficiency in controller
usage
5. Shall have quick connect facility for a POW service tool allowing diagnostics and
Password protected rapid entry of configuration data, manual overrides and reading
of sensor measurements
6. Shall have standalone as well as networked operation.
7. Shall have serial Interface to remote wall or panel door mounted Keypad/Display
units supporting custom supervisory menus.
8. Shall be able to Monitor RAM backup Battery voltage over the network or via local
serial connection without necessitating the opening of the housing or disruption of
the control program.
9. Shall have remote checking for ON/OFF status of all Fieldbus Termination resistors.
10. Shall allow efficient Panel box size when containing multiple DDCs.
11. The battery life should be a minimum of 2 years
Q. Cabinet
1. Enclose the DDC in a metal cabinet. Construct the cabinet such that it can be
mounted and electrical terminations made during the construction phase of the
Project. Cabinet shall be NEMA Class 1 enclosures having high quality factory
applied finish.
2. Provide the cabinet with a key lock. All cabinets on each installation shall utilize one
master key.
3. Electrically terminate all control wiring and system communications inside the DDC
cabinets.
2.12 SENSORS - GENERAL
A. Sensors shall be capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified
accuracy.
B. Input / output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the
DDC for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input / output.
C. Thermistor(s) can be used only in situations where RTD is not available. In no case
shall computer inputs be derived from pneumatic sensors. In no case shall
thermocouple be used.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.13 THERMOSTAT
A. Thermostat shall be microprocessor based, digital type and compatible with the control
system.
B. Thermostats shall work from software programmed memory and application control
program that is resident within the same enclosure as the input / output circuitry.
C. Thermostat shall be provided with LED indication of communication and controller

performance without cover removal.
D. Thermostat shall be provided with remote set-point adjustment and momentary override
button to circumvent day/night programming.
E. Application program shall be resident inside the thermostat circuitry
F. FCU thermostat shall be provided with 3 position slide switch for manual control of fan
speed apart from auto mode position and cool/heat change over.
G. Sensor for VAV Boxes and Small FCU’s: It shall be basic user function; LCD display, set
point adjustment and tenant override.
H. Sensor for AHU and large FCU’s: It shall be full user function; LCD display, network-
variable access and tenant override and shall conform to current industry standards.
I. Sensor / thermostat shall offer password protection.
J. Multiple network variables shall be accessible and editable from sensor / thermostat
2.14 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Type: Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) with the following characteristics:

1. Provide linear precision resistance elements and resistance averaging element for
temperature sensing
B. Dew-point sensor shall employ a non-reactive organic bobbin material to give precise
dew-point reading with accuracy of not more than _ 1.50_F. The unit shall incorporate
an integral draft shield as part of the instrument for air velocities in excess of 50 fpm.
Dew-point sensor shall operate over a minimum range suitable to application. One
additional bobbin assembly shall be provided with each dew point sensor.
C. Earth temperature sensors for greenhouse applications will have a range of –50 to
+90_C, pre-wired and have enclosure to IP 65.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Average Temperature Sensor for Air Ducts: A single PT 1000 sensor over a length of
3.6 m shall be used for sensing the average temperature in large air ducts with. Sensor
holders shall be included for installation.
E. Outdoor temperature sensors (also combined with humidity sensors) will be suitable for
-40 to +60°C range and have an extra cover for protection and shielding from sun. Pre-
wired and terminal block versions shall be available.
2.15 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A. Strap-on temperature sensors, for measuring the temperature in a water pipe, shall
have a range of –50 to +110_C. Pre-wired and terminal block versions shall be available
and shall be mounted on the pipe with a clamp.
B. Water temperature sensors will be provided with a separable copper, Monel or stainless
steel well.
C. Immersion temperature sensors, for measuring temperature in water pipes, with the
following characteristics:
1. Range of –50 to +130_C
2. Pre-wired and terminal block versions shall be available
3. Mounted in the pipe with a well
4. Lengths from 95 to 300 mm shall be available
5. Material shall be copper, brass or stainless steel depending on type
D. Fast temperature sensors, for detecting fast temperature changes, with the following
characteristics:
1. Stainless steel construction suitable for direct mounting into the pipe
2. Pre-wired, available with a NTC 20 element.
3. Lengths of 75, 220 and 300 mm, adjustable to pipe diameters.
2.16 PRESSURE SWITCHES / SENSORS
A. Differential pressure transmitters shall have the following characteristics:

1. Output signal: 0 to 10 volts
2. Pressure ranges: Selectable by jumper.
3. Zero point: Adjustment by potentiometer.
4. Display: 3-½ digit LCD, where required; with service and operation LED visible and
Neuron button accessible from outside.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Enclosure: IP 65.
6. Accessories: 2 M long silicone pressure hose and pressure joints.
2.17 HUMIDISTATS / RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSORS
A. Non-organic resistance type with adjustable set point and single pole, double throw
mercury switch, suitable for 24 volts, 1 phase, 50 hertz supply; with the following
operating ranges:
1. Temperature: 2 °C to 57°C (25°F to 135°F)
2. Humidity: 5 % to 95 % RH (non-condensing)
B. Relative Humidity Sensors:

1. Capacitance type with 10 to 90 % RH range.
2. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
3. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identical to temperature
sensors.
2.18 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Type: Automatic, ON / OFF type suitable for leak-tight shut-off.
B. Frame: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sheets with holes
for enclosed duct mounting.
C. Blades: Fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel sheets, stiffened
as appropriate, with maximum blade width of 200 mm (8 inch). Blades shall be secured
to 12 mm (½ inch) diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware. Nylon thrust
bearings shall be provided for each blade. Blade linkage hardware shall be of zinc-
plated steel and brass.
D. Operating Temperature Range: -29 to 93°C (- 20 to 200°F).
E. Type for standard applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with optional closed-
cell neoprene edging.
F. Type for low-leakage applications: Parallel or opposed blade design with inflatable seal
blade edging or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/ft2 of
damper area, at differential pressure of 1,000 Pa (4 inch WG) when damper is being
held under torque of 22.7 Kg (4.17 ft-lb).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. Outside air dampers shall have adjustable minimum settings so that ventilation can be
adjusted for each space or room.
2.19 CONTROL VALVES
A. General: Designed to high quality specifications for reliable long time use, with the
following:
1. Equal percentage or modified parabolic flow characteristics, range ability of 30:1 for
fan-coils and VAV reheat coils and 50:1 for large coils
2. Actual valve coefficient value (Cv) shall not deviate from the curve Cv and quoted
Cv by more than 10 %
3. Adjustable stroke limitation, pressure compensation and integrated flow control to
ensure optimization in hydraulic systems with high differential pressures and high
temperatures.
4. Optimized range, leakage rate, temperature range and close-off pressure.
5. Metal to metal seating and self-adjusting packing to ensure long life, where
appropriate.
6. Indicators clearly marked to show fully open and closed positions
B. Two-way Valves:
1. Type: Bronze with threaded ends (up to and including 50 mm ND) ductile / cast iron
with flanged ends (65 mm ND and above), globe pattern, two port valve with the
polished stainless steel trim and spring-loaded, self adjusting, Teflon packing.
2. Control valves shall be selected for a maximum pressure drop of 34.5 kPa (5 psig)
and shall be either equal or one size smaller than pipe size
3. The seat shall be replaceable type of chrome nickel.
4. The spindle/stem shall be stainless steel.
5. Plug shall be made of stainless steel for sizes less than 100 mm, for 100 and larger
it shall be made of gun metal/bronze.
6. Valves to have either replaceable composition disk or stainless steel ball.
7. Two way valves shall be modulating type.
C. Three-way Valves:
1. Type: Bronze with threaded ends (up to and including 50 mm ND) / cast iron with
flanged ends (65 mm ND and above), globe pattern, three port valve with polished
stainless steel trim and spring-loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon packing

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Control valves shall be selected for a maximum pressure drop of 34.5 kPa (5 psig)
and shall be either equal or one size smaller than pipe size. Pressure drop across
the bypass shall be equal or greater than coil pressure drop.
3. The seat shall be replaceable type of chrome nickel.
4. The spindle/stem shall be stainless steel.
5. Parabolic plug shall be made of brass for sizes less than 100 mm, for 100 and
larger it shall be made of gun metal/bronze.
2.20 DAMPER / VALVE ACTUATORS - GENERAL
A. Damper / valve motors shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide
smooth modulating action or two position action as specified.
B. Permanent split capacitor or shaded poles type motors of 24V/1 phase/50 Hz power
supply with oil immersed and sealed gear trains. Motors installed in outdoor locations
and in outside air intakes shall be furnished with ‘O-Ring" gaskets designed to make
motors completely weatherproof. Internal heater shall be provided to permit normal
operation at - 40°C (- 40°F).
C. Spring returned motors sized for running torque rating of 1.73 Kg-M (150 inch-lb.) and
break away torque rating of 150 inch pounds shall be provided where indicated on
drawings or stipulated in operational sequence. Spring shall be integral spiral type in
enclosed housing designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches,
auxiliary switches or feedback potentiometer. Running time of spring for 90 degree
should not be more than 15 seconds in case of damper motor and 18 sec in case of
valve stroke.
D. Non-spring return motors sized for running torque rating of 1.73 Kg-M (150 inch-lb.) and
breakaway torque rating of 3.46 Kg-M (300 inch-lb.) shall be provided for:
1. Dampers larger than 2.32 M2 (25 ft2).
2. Valves larger than 65 mm (2½ inch).
E. Electrical scope shall be from the outgoing terminal of isolators provided by electrical
discipline. It shall also include zonal transformers to supply actuators.
2.21 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Auxiliary switches and an external position indicator shall be available. Voltage

feedback valve position to the controller shall be included.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Actuators shall be suitable for 24 or 240 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hertz power supply and
selected to close valves against pump shut off head.
C. Actuators shall have enclosures to IP 44 (IP 54 for exposed type) as minimum.
D. Runtime shall be based on Low-torque High-speed or High-torque Low-speed as per

vendor requirements.
E. Modulating Actuators shall provide flexibility by allowing 2-10 volts / 0-10 volts switching
and reversible operating direction and available in 5, 10 and 30 Nm torque ranges.
F. Small Rotary Floating Actuators shall be pre-wired and be available in 24 volts ac and
240 volts ac versions
G. Actuators shall be rated for ambient condition of 55 C & 95% RH.
H. Actuators shall be modulating or ON/OFF type from MA or VDC signals.
I. Butterfly Valve Actuators shall:

1. Provide modulating or on / off control for air conditioning systems
2. Be protected against overload and blocking
3. Have quick and easy mounting without special linkages and parts.
4. Have a manual override to open/close the valve when control is off
5. Have long life at a high nominal torque level
6. Have auxiliary switches and a feedback potentiometer as optional features.
7. Actuators shall have 24 VAC or VDC input signal.
8. Actuators should be selected for maximum torque for smooth actuation of the
valves without loading the motor.
9. Actuators shall have limit switches, voltage input, fail safe operational UL / CSA
certification. The limit switches should be monitored by BMS.
2.22 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Small Linear Actuators without Spring Return:

1. Small linear actuators shall provide floating or modulating control suitable for
communications interfaces specified.
2. Suitable for use in electronic temperature control systems using hot and / or cold
water as the controlled medium.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Small linear actuators shall have a flexible platform, which can be adapted to meet
requirements for color, cable length, auxiliary switches, mechanical interface, and
integrated manual adjustment.
4. No load timing shall be to 60 seconds nominal
B. Small Linear Actuators with Spring Return

1. Small linear actuators with spring return will provide modulating and floating control
together.
2. Modulating actuator types shall be microprocessor-controlled for exact positioning,
and their direction of movement shall be reversible.
C. Large Linear Actuators.

1. Large linear actuators shall be used together with controllers providing switched or
floating single-pole / double-throw outputs or controllers with modulating control
outputs.
2. These shall have a standard mechanical interface where no linkage is required, and
no calibration or adjustments shall be necessary. Linkages, if any, shall be part of
standard accessory.
3. They shall be capable of simple manual operation and the option of spring-return
and non-spring-return models to guarantee a wide range of applications.
4. Modulating actuators without spring return shall also provide a failsafe function in
case of a faulty connection
5. It shall be possible to add auxiliary switches or a high temperature kit for high
performance applications.
D. Actuators without Spring Return.

1. Direct coupled damper actuators without spring return shall be compatible with a
proportional controller or a floating single-pole / double-throw control switch
2. These actuators shall be able to be mounted directly on round and square damper
shafts, and the angle of rotation shall be able to be limited to certain angles.
3. Simple installation and maintenance shall be ensured by a de-clutch button for
manual adjustment, field-added or directly-implemented auxiliary switches, and a
position indicator.
4. These products shall be suitable for air dampers, ventilation flaps, louvers, air
handlers and VAV units.
E. Actuators with Spring Return

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Spring return actuators shall combine safety and control functionality and provide
on / off, floating, and modulating control interfaces with a wide range of available
accessories.
2. These actuators shall have a bi-directional fail-safe functionality and a self-
centering shaft adapter or exchangeable hub insert to fit on all dampers quickly and
securely.
3. A manual override, a highly visible position indicator, dual-point mounting options
and auxiliary switches shall ensure quick start-up and service.
4. These products shall be suitable for ventilation and air-conditioning systems for
ventilation flaps and air handlers where the fail-safe functionality is required.
2.23 WATER FLOW SWITCHES / SENSORS
A. Water Flow Switches: UL listed, adjustable differential pressure or flow type as specified
in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be pressure rated, as
required. Differential pressure switches shall have manifold with isolating valve for
servicing. Water flow switches shall open an electrical contact as the differential
pressure falls below a pre-adjusted pressure range setting
B. Water Flow Sensors: Analogue, solid state, precision, industrial type with stainless steel
meter body, flow element and manifold with isolating valves for calibration and
maintenance. Maximum error shall not exceed 0.5% of range. Pressure rated as
required.
2.24 AIR FLOW STATIC / DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS / SWITCHES
A. Air Flow and Static Pressure Sensors: Analogue, high accuracy type suitable for low
velocity pressures encountered, with 4 to 20 mA output and adjustments for zero and
range. These shall be selected for approximately 50 % over range and connected to the
airflow measuring station, using lines for testing and calibration, through isolating
valves.
B. Differential and Static Pressure Sensor and Switches

1. Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be UL listed, adjustable set point and differential
pressure type
2. Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than
one inch WG.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. For fractional horsepower and non-ducted fans, relays or auxiliary contacts with
maximum pressure rating of 250 Pa (1 inch WG) may be used
2.25 DUCT SENSORS
A. Air duct temperature sensors will have a range of –40 to +120°C. Pre-wired and terminal
block versions shall be available to mount in and outside the duct. Duct temperature
sensors will be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of operation.
B. DDC duct sensors shall match the requirements of the associated controller
incorporating an electrical signal to insure exact and proportional relationship between
the measured variable and the transmitted signal.
2.26 OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
A. Occupancy sensor shall be of the passive infrared or ultrasonic receiver type. As a

minimum the occupancy sensor shall provide adjustments for timed-on delay and
sensor sensitivity.
2.27 OUTSIDE AIR MONITORING STATION
A. The outside air monitoring station shall consist of outside air temperature and relative
humidity sensors at roof level. The sensors shall be shielded from direct sunlight, and
shall be located away from any exhaust air outlets or other sources of heat which could
affect the accuracy of the temperature reading. The temperature and relative humidity
shall be transmitted globally to all systems requiring these values.
2.28 WATER METERS
A. Provide screwed or Flanged Water meters suitable for Cold or Hot water
B. For Cold Water Fluid Temperature range – 0º to 40ºC (ice free) and Maximum working
pressure, as required.
C. For Hot water Fluid temperature range – 0º to 90ºC (ice free) and Maximum operating
pressure, as required.
2.29 POWER METERS
A. Provide KWH meters that have a Modbus interface.
2.30 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Provide circuit breakers that have a Modbus interface.
2.31 LIST OF POINTS SCHEDULES
A. See related BMS list of points for specific points

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section shall not adversely affect the
work of other trades. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with
work of other trades, the Contractor shall work out satisfactory arrangements for the
approval of the Engineer.
B. At the operator’s workstation, sufficient 13A mains sockets shall be provided by the
electrical contractor to prevent the need for distribution adapters. At least one spare 13A
socket shall be provided.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forward to the Engineer submittal data relevant to valve schedules damper schedules
and other pertinent equipment information requiring approval prior to field installation.
Upon receipt of approval, proceed with installation, set up, calibrating and checking out
the various control and monitoring system
B. Conduits and wiring shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike
manner; run parallel to or at right angles to building structure when exposed and in
equipment rooms.
C. Wiring shall be installed in such a way that minimizes coupling of electromagnetic and
electrostatic interference on low voltage signals and data wiring, in order to avoid
disturbance of DDC equipment operation. This shall preferably be achieved by, but not
limited to:
1. Physical separation of greater than 50 mm between the power supply cables and the
signal and data cables
2. Use of braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork, where mixed wiring is
unavoidable (Tenderers shall clearly specify the methods by which he intends to
eliminate any such interference with his signal and data transmission)
D. DDC shall be protected from interference by the operation of hand held radio
transmitters, radio pagers, etc., within 1 meter of the equipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected.
3.03 VERIFICATION
A. When installation of the system is complete, Forward to the Engineer data relevant to
point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, and other pertinent information for
the system
B. Prior to on-line operation, calibrate equipment, verify transmission media operation and
perform in the presence of the Engineer a complete demonstration and readout of the
computer real-tile responsibilities of surveillance and command. This demonstration,
having satisfactorily met previously approved submittals, shall, with the Engineers
written acceptance, allow commissioning of the Building Automation System for on-line
operation.
C. Upon successful completion of system generation, the Engineer shall be requested to

inspect and approve the satisfactory operation of the Building Automation System, sub-
system(s) and accessories in writing. After all items appearing on the snag list are
completed, make a second written request for system approval to the Engineer. As each
or all items are approved, obtain signature of the Engineer. Make a copy of this report
for the Engineer
D. Provide a detailed cross-check of each sensor within the system by making a

comparison between the reading at the sensor and a calibrated standard.
E. Pressure Switches to be checked for switching thresholds and hysteresis settings.
F. Provide a cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison
between the control command and the field-controlled device.
G. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode
upon panel failure or loss of power.
H. Humidity sensors to be checked for accuracy using a wet/dry bulb thermometer.
I. All high priority alarm conditions to be simulated and the appropriate workstation
display/printer/pager/email etc responses verified.
J. Control interlocks and safety devices shall be simulated and verified.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
K. The BAS Contractor shall revisit the site after handover to check and adjust the
parameters for BAS control to optimize settings.
L. Calibration of all devices will be demonstrated using instruments carrying valid

certification (to be made available for inspection prior to the demonstration).
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND HANDOVER
A. Demonstration of the BAS system to the End User for acceptance shall be carried out
after a full system test has been passed and one week notice has been given to the
commissioning Engineer.
1. Field Equipment Demonstration shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the

system and observing the proper corrective system response.
b. Selected time and set point schedules shall be verified by changing the
schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
c. An output channel will be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and
operation verified.
d. An analog input channel will be verified for proper operation as displayed at the
operators workstation.
e. A digital input channel will be verified by changing the state of the field device
and observing the appropriate change of displayed value.
f. Typical occupancy control device function shall be demonstrated.
g. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed
point and all interlocked points.
2. Workstation Demonstration shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Communication with typical Main Plant and ASC controllers will be

demonstrated.
b. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.
c. Selected control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation.
d. Review of Time Schedules and Alarm priorities.
e. Selected system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the System
Workstation.
f. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.
g. Selected controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
h. The contractor shall demonstrate on-site all of the software features contained
in this specification
3. The specialist BAS Contractor shall commission and handover the system to the
client or client’s representative on a point-to-point basis.
4. Services of competent personnel, having at least five (5) years of experience in the
field and who have gained an intimate understanding of the project throughout its
design stages, shall be provided by the Contractor to commission the BMS.
5. Contractor shall prepare and submit a program of commissioning; clearly stating
other disciplines involved and services required for each activity.
6. Where work is being carried out in an occupied building the management of the
building shall be kept fully in.A.7formed regarding the nature of the testing and
commissioning. Steps shall be taken to ensure that any possible hazards or
inconvenience that may arise due to the testing and commissioning shall be
minimized.
7. Testing shall be done according to specification “01 00 00 general requirements for
testing and commissioning"
8. System Handover shall include but not limited to the followings:
a. Any issues required corrective actions to be documented and agreed date

determined for clearance.
b. All access levels and passwords recorded and backed up.
c. Two Copies of all system and database files supplied on CD with appropriate
identification.
d. An Operator's Reference Table listing the addresses of all connected points.
Settings shall be shown where applicable.
e. Two bound hardcopies of Maintenance manuals including datasheets for each
item of equipment.
f. Two bound hardcopies of Operations manuals including safety checks and
start-up and close down procedures.
g. Six (6) hardcopies of BAS system drawings matching the installed networks,
equipment and peripheral connections, plus two soft copies of CAD drawings
on separate CDs.
h. Two bound hardcopies of the Flow charts of the control software programs
utilized in the Temperature Control System.
i. Two bound hardcopies of the Control Programs used in each DDC controller.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
j. Consumables, printer ribbons, printer paper at agreed levels.

k. All keys necessary for access to panels and equipment.
l. Training of engineers and operators to be checked complete or program for
completion agreed.
m. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.
n. Recommended spare parts list with contact details for suppliers.
o. all the control logic softwares.
3.05 OPERATOR TRAINING
A. Provide operator instruction both prior to Substantial Completion of the Project and
throughout the Maintenance Period
B. The BAS Contractor shall provide detailed on-site and off-site operation and
programming training to selected client staff. Training will be carried out separately for
both engineering and operator staff. Factory trained control engineers and technicians
shall provide training sessions for the client’s personnel. Training shall include but not
limited to the followings:
1. Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
2. Overview of HVAC system
3. Walk-through of the job to locate control components.
4. Operator workstation and peripherals.
5. Operation of portable operator's workstation including any wireless equipment.
6. Use of Occupancy Controls.
7. Use of Keypad/Display devices with customized menus.
8. Use of Overrides and Passwords.
9. Use of Data logs, Time Schedules and Alarms handling.
10. Communication Controller, DDC Controller, ASC operation/function.
11. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel
programming.
12. Explanation of adjustment, tuning, calibration and replacement procedures
C. Since the Client may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the BAS
Contractor. If such training is required by the Client, it will be contracted at a later date.
3.06 MAINTENANCE

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. The specialist contractor shall maintain the system and its operation for a period as
stipulate in the contract documents
B. The contractor shall cover preventive maintenance, breakdown call out, replacement of
consumable items and a list of recommended spares for holding by the client.
3.07 LICENSE
A. Unlimited validity software license is required.
- - - E N D OF SECTION - - -

SECTION 26 05 13
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................... 3

PART 2 CODES AND STANDARDS ...................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................. 6
PART 4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES ......................................................................... 7
4.1 DESIGN AND SERVICE CONDITIONS: ...................................................................................... 7
4.2 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION(MULTI/SINGLE CORE) .................................................... 7
4.3 EARTH CABLE ............................................................................................................................. 8
4.4 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................... 8
4.5 CABLE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 9
4.5.1 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE INSTALLATION (IF REQUIRED): ........................................................ 11
4.6 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS............................................................................................... 11
4.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 12
PART 5 TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 13
PART 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................... 14
PART 7 OTHER REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 15
7.1 GUARANTIES ............................................................................................................................. 15
7.2 SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDELINES FOR PACKAGING ................................................................. 15

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - SCOPE
This engineering standard is applicable to medium voltage power cable for use in power generating
station and switchyard applications.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The latest edition and published addenda of the following publications in effect on the date of
Contract Award are a part of this Specification.
1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)
CS8, “Specification for Extruded Dielectric, Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV”
2. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM):
a) B 3, "Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire"
b) B 8, "Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium Hard, or Soft"
c) B 496, “Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors”
3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
a) S-93-639, (NEMA WC74) “Shielded Power Cable 5-46 kV”
b) S-97-682, “Utility Shielded Power Cable Rated 5-46 kV”
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a) 383, “Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Field Splices for Nuclear Power
Generating Stations”
b) 1202, “Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cable”
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
WC26, “Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard”
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)
7. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a) 1072, “Medium Voltage Solid Dielectric Cable”
b) 1685, “Standard for Safety Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for
Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables”
8. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO)
9. IEC 60228 Conductors for Insulated Cables
10. IEC 60502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Cables for rated Voltages from 1 KV up to 30
KV
11. IPCEA S61-402 Thermoplastic Insulated Cable and Wire, 0 to 35 KV

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Where the above referenced codes, standards, and guides contain recommendations in addition to
requirements, the recommendations shall be considered requirements and shall be followed, unless
stated otherwise by this Specification.
C. In case of any conflict between the reference codes, or this Specification and codes, the more
stringent requirement shall apply.
D. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - GENERAL
All Suppliers shall comply fully with the complete requirements of this standard specification and the
Contract documents, which are to be used in tandem. Any deviations shall be clearly defined in the
Proposal.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 4 - DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
4.1 Design and Service Conditions:

A. Distribution of alternating current to various plant auxiliaries and utilization equipment for power
functions.
B. The cable shall be suitable for wet or dry installation indoor or outdoor, in trays, conduits,
underground ducts, and direct burial per the requirements of the NEC.
C. Conductor temperature requirements as follows:
1. 105 degrees C for normal continuous conditions (wet and dry).
2. 140 degrees C for emergency overload conditions.
3. 250 degrees C for short-circuit conditions.
D. Voltage ratings and percent insulation level shall be as specified in Contract documents.
E. Capable of storage, handling, bending, and installation at ambient temperatures as low as - 10
degrees C without cracking the jacket or insulation.
F. UL listed Type MV-105 in accordance with the NEC.
G. Cable shall be manufactured for a service life of a minimum of 40 years at 90C operating
temperature.
H. Energy suppression or stress control materials or compounds applied to conductors and to primary
insulation shall have characteristics compatible with the insulation.
4.2 Materials and Construction (Multi/Single core)

A. Conductors: Soft-drawn or annealed bare copper with Class B concentric lay stranding per the
applicable standards. The conductor size and configuration shall be as specified on the drawings.
B. Conductor Screen: The conductor shall have an extruded, thermoset, semi-conducting strand
screen layer over the conductor per the applicable standards. The conductor screen shall bond to
the insulation and have the ability to be removed from the conductor with strip tension as per the
applicable standards.
C. Insulation: The insulation shall be thermosetting Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) per the
applicable standards.
D. Insulation Screen: The insulated conductor shall have an extruded, semi-conducting strand screen
layer over the insulation per the applicable standards. The insulation screen shall have the ability to
be removed from the insulation with strip tension per the applicable standards.
E. Metallic Shield: A helical-wrapped bare copper tape with a minimum overlap of 25 percent or
corrugated copper drain wires longitudinally applied.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Overall Jacketing Materials: Flame Retardant Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) per the applicable
standards. All jacketing materials shall have long-term resistance to sunlight, moisture, oils and
chemicals, flexibility, and resistance to abrasion.
G. The short circuit ratings of all MV cables shall be coordinated with associated MV switchgear and
short circuit study/calculations
H. Single core cables shall neither run individually in a ferous enclosure or pipe nor shall be surrounded
by any ferrous material
I. Armoured single core MV cables shall have non-magnetic armor wire (aluminium type)
4.3 Earth Cable

A. Provide separate earth cables in all medium voltage ring and radial circuits in accordance with
applicable International Standards and the requirements.
B. The Size of earth cable for each MV cable or circuit shall be based upon short circuit calculations,
but in any case not less than 95 mm2.
C. In case the MV cable is armoured cable (steel or aluminium), armouring can be used as the earth
cable.
4.4 Marking and Identification

A. Markings as follows on the outer jacket of each cable:
1. Name and year of manufacturer.
2. Type or name of insulation and thickness.
3. Number and size of conductors.
4. Maximum operating voltage.
5. Type or Name of jacket.
6. Temperature rating.
7. UL rating as applicable.
B. Printing of Cable Marking: Color that is in sharp contrast to the cable surface. Applied with the
vertical axis of the printed characters perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the cable.
C. Cable markers and identification discs for all MV Cables shall be provided in accordance with the
applicable codes and regulations.
D. The supports for all MV Cables shall be approved galvanized cast steel clamps/ cleats with 10 mm
hexagon headed zinc plated fixing bolts and studs.
E. All MV Cables shall be tied on cable trays/ladders by non-releasing type cable cleats or any other
approved clamps.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. The clamps for single core cables shall be of cast aluminium type or other equal and approved non-
ferrous material.
4.5 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and ascertained
that the area is free from drains or other underground services. The Contractor shall obtain approval
of the routes for external cables with appropriate installation details on shop drawings prior to
commencement of any excavation on site.
B. Pull cables off drum mounted on cable jacks or a stationary cable trailer. Care shall be taken to
protect the cable at all times during the installation process. Cable rollers shall be used to prevent
undue friction below the cable and at all changes in direction. The Contractor shall comply with all
other Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Pull cables into position using a conductor pull or a wire basket over the metallic insulation screen.
D. When installing into a duct system via a manhole, utilize a feeding tube long enough to reach from
the conduit entrance to the outside of the manhole.
E. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cable ducts exceeding 10 m length, use cable stockings for
hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well as on the
sheath. The pulling tension of the cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended by the
Cable Manufacturer.
F. Utilize both manual and power types puling mechanisms on site as required with the rated capacity
(in Newton) clearly marked on the mechanism. A dynamometer shall be used to show the tension on
the cable during all pulls and the indicator shall be constantly watched. If any excessive strain
develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty determined and corrected.
The dynamometer shall have a maximum tension indicator to show the maximum tension developed
during a pull. The cable play-out reel shall be equipped with a suitable brake and shall be constantly
manned during all pulls.
G. Under no circumstances shall cable be pulled using equipment not monitored by a dynamometer.
The use of motor vehicles in pulling cable is prohibited. Any cable so pulled shall be removed and
replaced.
H. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in raceway runs, Do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
I. Support cables at all times without excessive sag. Cables shall be located in such a way as to
minimize interference with other cables to be installed.
J. Provide adequate length of cables in manholes to avoid distorting pressures on the cables at conduit
bushings. Provide cable protection such as a layer of light rubber belting, friction tape or similar
material where required before permanently fixing the cables in place.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
K. Exercise extreme care to prevent tension during bending of MV Cables. The permanent and
installation bending radius at any location after installation shall not be lesser than the cable
manufacturer’s recommendations.
L. Seal cable ends during pulling and immediately after cutting if splices or terminations are not to be
made immediately.
M. Arc proof all MV cables in manholes and building entrances. Arc proofing in a manhole shall be
extended in one helically wound half lapped layer from one duct end along the cable to the other
duct end. Secure arc proofing in position with glass tape randomly wrapped to the instructions of the
arc proofing tape Manufacturer.
N. Provide moisture seal in conduit/building transition after all MV Cables are installed. A special
caulking compound of a putty-like consistency shall be used, which shall be workable with the hands
at temperatures as low as 1.7 C, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 C or less. It shall
not be hardened materially when exposed to air.
O. Install earth cable and its associated MV cable(s) in same conduit or together with the MV cable(s)
when they are direct buried. Ground earth cable in every manhole. Shields and armour of MV cables
shall be earthed at both ends.
P. Install cable markers and identification discs in accordance with the applicable codes and regulation
and locate them so that they are readily visible when cable is permanently fixed in position.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4.5.1 Direct Burial Cable Installation (if required):

1. Cables shall be laid out along the trench from moving reels. The cables shall be laid in the
trench to allow for expansion and contraction.
2. Cables operating above 600 volts shall be buried at a minimum depth of 1000 mm.
3. Cables shall have a horizontal separation of 1000 mm minimum from water and sewer
pipelines.
4. Precast concrete blocks shall be provided over the primary cables. Concrete blocks shall be
referring to drawings. Caps shall be within 200 mm above the top of the cable, and shall be
placed on sand which has been hand placed and compacted around the cables. Concrete for all
caps shall be Type V cement and have a compressive strength of 14 MPa at 28 days. A
continuous orange or yellow colored plastic maker tape minimum 150 mm wide shall be placed
above the concrete cap 300 mm below grade level. The tape shall be imprinted with the words
"Caution Buried Electric Line Below" in Arabic and English spaced 1500 mm on center.
5. Concrete cable markers, minimum 600 mm long and 200 mm square shall be placed at all
changes in direction and at all splices/joints, and as noted on plans.
6. Primary cables shall be terminated with heat shrinkable termination or other types as per cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Avoid splices as much as possible.
7. The contractor shall submit names of their qualified MV cable jointers/splicers and make a
sample splice/demonstration in the presence of Engineer prior to start of cable splicing for
approval.
4.6 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splicing and terminations of all MV cables shall be carried out by the personnel certified by Saudi
Electric Company (SEC).
B. Utilize appropriate crimping tools for splicing and terminations of all MV Cables, with guides to
position the connectors or lugs in the tool correctly. The connectors, lugs and associated dies shall
be of correct type and size suitable for the MV cable under splicing or terminations. Crimping tools
shall be designed with steps to prevent over crimping and shall be of a type which have provision to
prevent the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed. Crimping tools shall be an
approved product by the connector Manufacturer.
C. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for splicing and terminations of MV
cables, provided these do not contradict with the applicable standards. Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer any contradictions found prior to work commencements.
D. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable. When cables are being installed into a
duct system with manholes, the splices shall only be provided within the manholes and no splice
shall be allowed outside the manholes.
E. Keep work areas dry, dust free and ventilated during splicing and terminating MV cables.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Before making final splice or termination of MV cables, ensure conductor phasing is correct.
G. Where the shape and configuration of terminal fittings make workmanlike insulation of the bare
connection impractical, the contours of the connection shall be smoothed by filling voids and
moldings over irregular surface with electrical putty before application of the recommended thickness
of insulating material.
H. Cable splicing or jointing shall not be allowed in any circumstances, except where the required run
length of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as Manufactured in the factory.
Obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable.
I. Splices and terminations for all MV Cables rated up to 8700/15000 Volts shall be furnished in kit form
and shall conform to the recommendations of the cable Manufacturer. All material shall be furnished
in factory sealed packages and shall not be opened until required for use.
J. Splices for all MV Cables shall be pre-molded and rated for continuous duty and short circuit duty at
the rating of the services to which they are connected. They shall be suitable for direct buried
underground installation or mounted on cable trays/ladders as per the requirements on site.
K. Termination shall be insulated using the materials specified and the procedures recommended by
the Manufacturer of the kit being used.
L. Splices for the earth shall be made exothermally or as per the recommendations of MV cable splice
Manufacturer.
4.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. After completion of the installation of all MV cables, test each conductor for phasing, continuity and
insulation resistance. Carry out a high voltage DC insulation test between each conductor and earth
at 2½ times the phase to earth working voltage for 15 minutes. Full tests shall be carried out only
once. Where preliminary tests are required on sections of cable prior to terminating or jointing they
shall be carried out at reduced time and voltage. Test procedures shall be in accordance with the
appropriate IEC standard.
B. All MV cables shall be tested when splicing and terminations are fully prepared and completed
except for final connections of cable tails onto equipment.
C. In addition to above, carry out any test(s) required to comply with the procedures of Saudi Electric
Company (SEC) for power connection requirements, and any other test required by the Engineer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 5 - TESTING
A. General
All inspection/tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and trial operation shall be in
accordance with applicable codes and standard requirements. Where no standard is available, tests
shall be carried out in accordance with Manufacturer’s standard, subject to prior approval of the
Client. The Manufacturer is required to develop an inspection and test plan to document required
testing.
B. Test Certificates
All principal test records, test certificates and performance details for all tests carried out in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract shall be supplied to the Client. These tests records,
certificates and performance details shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not the Client has
witnessed them. The information given on test records, test certificates and performance details
shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers. Certificates
shall also bear the contract reference and heading.
C. Tests at Site
These tests shall be carried out for different equipment, material and systems prior to and during
commissioning of the equipment. The Supplier shall submit a detailed test schedule including the
procedure for the site tests for Client’s approval.
D. Production Tests: All cables shall meet or exceed production test requirements per the applicable
standards to the cable being furnished.
E. Flame Test: All cables shall meet or exceed the flame test requirements in accordance with
methods prescribed in IEEE 383 and 1202(CSA-FT4).
F. Testing shall be done according to specification 01 00 00

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 6 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Seller shall follow their standard procedures for quality assurance and control. Seller’s standard
QA Manual shall be submitted in both electronic and hard copy for review and should be in such a
form as to enable an assessment to be made of the manufacturing sequence and inspection set up
and other control procedures.
B. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source, including the Client
name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the request of the Client, the Seller
shall furnish to the Client satisfactory evidence of the quality of the work being performed. Such
evidence, at the discretion of the Client, shall consist of any or all of the following:
C. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications.
1. Seller qualification procedures and specific documentation of the results of the Seller’s
qualification of the sub-supplier.
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier including history with the
sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time delivery.
3. The reason the Seller changed sub-supplier (quality, delivery, bankruptcy, etc.).
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Client to verify the quality and acceptability
of the sub-supplier.
D. As a minimum, the following shall be provided:
1. Description of Seller’s quality assurance plan.
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing relationship to other groups.
3. Typical inspection, test and QA audit procedures.
E. After award of purchase order, the Client will identify the inspection points to the Seller that will be
witnessed by the Client, if any.
F. During the execution of the purchase order, manufacturing and quality control procedures shall be
available for reference by the Client or its representative at the site.
G. Inspection release for work at site does not relieve the Seller of the responsibility from complying
completely with the requirements of this specification, except for deviations specifically brought to the
Client’s attention and specifically waived in writing.
H. The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this Specification
have been complied with by providing Certificates of Conformance.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 7 - OTHER REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Guaranties
Suppliers shall identify any guaranties that apply to the specified cable. The guaranty shall be
submitted with the quotation.
7.2 Supplemental Guidelines for Packaging

A. Ship on standard size non-returnable reels protected to prevent damage during shipment and
storage all in accordance with the applicable standards.
B. Ship as one continuous length per reel with both cable ends sealed with a heat shrink cap that
contains a sealing compound to prevent entrance of moisture.
C. Reels and/or packing slip affixed to reels shall contain the following:
1. Reel number
2. Purchase order numbers and item number
3. Cable identification by voltage, number of conductors, conductor material, and size
4. Cable length in circuit-feet
5. Gross weight
6. Manufacturer's name
7. Client's name, address, and project designation
8. Reel rolling direction
9. Storage restrictions

SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ............................................................................................. 3
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS .................................................................................... 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 4
1.05 COORDINATION .................................................................................................... 6
1.06 GUIDELINES FOR PACKAGING............................................................................ 6
1.07 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 7
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................... 7
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........ 7
2.03 CABLES ................................................................................................................. 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 13
3.01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 13
3.02 CABLE TRAYS ..................................................................................................... 15
3.03 FIRESTOPPING ................................................................................................... 15
3.04 TESTING .............................................................................................................. 15
END OF SECTION ............................................................................................................. 16

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
SECTION 26
05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 1000 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 1000 V and less.
3. Cable Glands, Cable Sealing Compounds and Cable Markers
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The latest edition and published addenda of the following publications in effect on the
date of Contract Award are a part of this Specification.
1. American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM):
a) B 3, “Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire”

b) B 8, “Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft”
c) B 33, “Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a) 383, “Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Field Splices for Nuclear Power
Generating Stations”
b) 1202, “Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cable
a) WC26, “Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard”

b) WC57, “Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
Instrumentation Cables - ICEA S-73-532”
c) WC70, “Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of
Electrical Energy
70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)

5. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a) 44, “Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables”

b) 1277, “Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with
Optional Optical-Fiber Members
6. Where the above referenced codes, standards, and guides contain
recommendations in addition to requirements, the recommendations shall be
considered requirements and shall be followed, unless stated otherwise by this
Specification
7. In case of any conflict between the reference codes, or this Specification and
codes, the more stringent applies.
8. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit full technical details including cable sizing calculations and catalogue
2. Including information of each type of cable or wire proposed approval before
ordering
3. Submit copy of test certificates from the manufacturer or an independent testing
authority confirming that cables comply with the Specifications
4. Submit certificate of origin of cables.
5. Submit exact route of the cable runs and relevant items in the shop drawings,
including fixing details and termination details.
A. Validate suitability of the size of cables selected to be used for the selected electric
energy-operating equipment. Refer to the technical tables of the cables available from
the approved manufacturer, with due consideration to the following parameters:
1. Type of cable and wire
2. Ambient conditions
3. Method of installation
4. The disposition of each cable relative to other cables
5. Fault power level
6. Protective device ratings

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Voltage drop at the final point of utilization shall not exceed 5% as per NEC, our
recommendation is not to exceed 4% or shall be as in local power supply authorities
regulation (if stricter) and measured from the main electric service of the installations.
C. Voltage drop and current ratings shall be calculated according to local power supply
Authorities Regulations or NEC regulations, whichever is more stringent.
D. All cables and wires shall be suitable for installation and continuous service in the
ambient conditions and shall be manufactured to ISO 9000 or equivalent.
E. Cable routes and equipment power ratings indicated on the Project Drawings are for
guidance for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall determine exact cable lengths
from site measurements and calculate cable size from the power ratings of the actual
equipment being proposed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any increase in
costs or design work associated with proposed equipment, which has different
electrical characteristics than the equipment on which the design was based.
F. Cables selected shall be from manufacturers whose product has been in satisfactory
use in similar services and environments. Substantiate with certification.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
H. The Seller shall follow their standard procedures for quality assurance and control.
Seller’s standard QA Manual shall be submitted in both electronic and hard copy for
review and should be in such a form as to enable an assessment to be made of the
manufacturing sequence and inspection set up and other control procedures.
I. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source,
including the Client name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the
request of the Client, the Seller shall furnish to the Client satisfactory evidence of the
quality of the work being performed. Such evidence, at the discretion of the Client,
shall consist of any or all of the following:
J. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications

1. Seller qualification procedures and specific documentation of the results of the
Seller’s qualification of the sub-supplier
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier including
history with the sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time delivery

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Client to verify the quality
and acceptability of the sub-supplier.
K. As a minimum, the following shall be provided:

1. Description of Seller’s quality assurance plan
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing relationship to
other groups
3. Typical inspection, test and QA audit procedures
L. After award of purchase order, the Client will identify the inspection points to the Seller
that will be witnessed by the Client, if any.
M. During the execution of the purchase order, manufacturing and quality control
procedures shall be available for reference by the Client or its representative at the
site.
N. Inspection release for work at site does not relieve the Seller of the responsibility from
complying completely with the requirements of this specification, except for deviations
specifically brought to the Client’s attention and specifically waived in writing
O. The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this
Specification have been complied with by providing Certificates of Conformance.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components
as they are constructed.
1.06 GUIDELINES FOR PACKAGING
A. Ship on standard size non-returnable reels protected to prevent damage during

shipment and storage all in accordance with the applicable standards
B. Ship as one continuous length per reel with both cable ends sealed with a heat shrink
cap that contains a sealing compound to prevent entrance of moisture.
C. Reels and/or packing slip affixed to reels shall contain the following:
1. Reel number
2. Purchase order numbers and item number

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Cable identification by voltage, number of conductors, conductor material, and size

4. Cable length in circuit-feet
5. Gross weight
6. Manufacturer’s name
7. Client’s name, address, and project designation
8. Reel rolling direction
9. Storage restrictions
1.07 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Markings as follows on the outer jacket of each cable:

1. Name and year of manufacturer
2. Type or name of insulation
3. Number and size of conductors
4. Maximum operating voltage
5. Type or name of jacket
6. Temperature rating
7. UL rating as applicable
B. Printing of Cable Marking: Color that is in sharp contrast to the cable surface. Applied
with the vertical axis of the printed characters perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the cable.
C. Conductor Insulation Marking: Identify each conductor of a multi-conductor power

cable with a surface printed number in accordance with NEMA WC57 (ICEA S-73-
532), Appendix E Method 4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide

products from the approved list of manufacturers only.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. The Contractor shall be aware of the need to supply and install all wire and cables for
this Contract, which are most suitable for the special environmental conditions
prevailing in country.
B. All conductors shall have good fatigue resistance and not be subject to breaks due to
nicks or cuts when terminating.
2.03 CABLES
A. Unless otherwise specified, cables and wires of the following specified voltage ratings
shall be used as indicated.
1. 600/1000 V rated cables: Main and sub-main distribution panels, motor control
centers, circuits serving process equipment
2. 450/750 V rated cables: Final sub-circuit supplies for lighting, socket outlets, etc.
3. 300/500 V rated cables: Instrumentation
4. 250 V rated cables: Extra low voltage wiring, communication circuits where the
maximum voltage is 50V.
B. General:
1. Conductors shall be high conductivity copper, Soft-drawn or annealed bare
copper or tinned soft or annealed copper with Class B concentric lay stranding
per the applicable standards. The conductor size and configuration shall be as
indicated on the drawings
2. Insulation: The insulation shall be thermosetting Ethylene Propylene Rubber
(EPR), or Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene (XLPE) per the applicable
standards. The insulation shall have adequate stripping characteristics with
respect to the conductor as per the applicable standards.
3. Flexible cords shall have fine stranded conductors
4. Cable color: In addition to the safety compliance and quality assurance issues,
cables should fully align with those widely-used national and international
standards. 4. All cables shall be as far as practicable, of one manufacturer
only.
5. Cable Core: Fillers used in the assembly of multi-conductor cables that are
applied to achieve a circular cross section shall be non-hydroscopic, flame
retardant, not supporting combustion or flame propagation when tested. An
overall binder type shall be used as necessary.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Overall Jacketing Materials: Flame Retardant Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE)

per the applicable standards. All jacketing materials shall have long-term
resistance to sunlight, moisture, oils and chemicals, flexibility, and resistance to
abrasion.
C. PVC Insulated armored cables:

1. PVC/SWA/PVC cable: 600/1000 V Grade.
2. Conductor: Annealed high conductivity copper, stranded, shaped and laid in an
approved manner
3. Armor: Single layer of galvanized steel wires for multi-core cables
4. PVC for sheath and insulation.
5. Cables shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
adequate mechanical support by locking on the armor and ensuring high earth
continuity.
D. Single core PVC Insulated Wires:

1. Cable shall be to BS 6004, rated 450/750 V, with high conductivity copper
conductors and PVC compound insulation. Color coding shall be as shown in
color coding section.
2. Wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made
except within outlet and junction boxes. A separate neutral wire shall be
provided for each circuit. Wires shall be left sufficiently long enough (minimum
150 mm) to permit making final connections.
E. Flexible Cable:
1. Rated in accordance with manufacturer’s tables.
2. for DC cables applications provide double insulation flexible cables.
F. 600/1000V rated XLPE Insulated Cable:

1. 600/1000V grade, designated XLPE/SWA/PVC for armored multi-core cable,
and XPLE/PVC for unarmored cable
2. Conductors: plain annealed copper
3. Cable shall comprise of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated with
an adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
4. Conductors shall be laid up together and warmed circular with suitable
performed fillers and warnings, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
and covered with an extruded PVC sheath, minimum 1.4 mm thick for multicore
cable
5. Armored multicore cable shall have steel wire armoring and extruded sheath of
black PVC
6. Armored single core cable shall have aluminum wire armoring and extruded
sheath of black PVC
7. Outer sheath of single core cables shall be at least 2.5 mm thick
8. Conductor screen: non-metallic comprising either semi-conducting tape or a
layer of extruded semi-conducting material for MV/HV Cables and if required by
applicable standards for LV Cables.
9. Prevent void formation in insulation by careful control of its passage through
10. Temperature graded water baths
11. Cable shall be terminated with compression glands as specified below, giving
12. Adequate mechanical support by locking on the armor and ensuring high earth
continuity.
G. Cable Glands
1. Cable glands shall be used for terminating cables to switch gear, switch boards,
motor control centers, motors and other equipment
2. They shall be brass compression.
3. Glands for armored or screened cables shall have suitable clamps
4. External compression glands shall have close fitting PVC shrouds
5. Earthing for armoring and metallic sheaths: suitable brass or copper clamps, and
copper strip conductor in accordance with local power authority requirements,
and not less than 2.5 sq. mm
H. Cable Markers:
1. Shall be precast concrete, minimum size 300 x 300 mm x 100 mm deep
2. The markers shall be engraved “HV CABLE”, “ELECTRIC CABLE”, “ELV
CABLE”, “EARTH PIT” or “CABLE JOINT”, as applicable cable marker
construction details and engravings shall be as per local power authority
regulations.
I. Color Coding
Use following colors in lighting and power wiring:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
400/230 VOLT
Phase 1 Red
Phase 2 Yellow
Phase 3 Blue
Neutrals Black
Ground Yellow-Green
J. LSF material shall be extruded type, certified to be in compliance with BS 6724/ IEC
60754 for armored cables and BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in
construction of LSF cables are to be nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine
and bromine). When material is tested in accordance with BS EN 50267: Parts 1-3
and IEC Publication 60754, Part 1, the acidic gas evolved during combustion is to be
less than 0.5 percent. Smoke density within 40 percent. When tested in accordance
with ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of sheathing materials is not to be less
than 35. Completed cable is to meet the requirements for tests under fire conditions
when tested in accordance with BS EN 50265, Part 1 and NMV 1.5 of BS EN 50266.
Cores and cross sectional area are to be as shown on the Drawings. Cables shall
comply with IEC 60331 and IEC 60332.
K. Design and Service Conditions:

1. Distribution of both alternating current and direct current to various plant
auxiliaries and utilization equipment for power functions
2. The cable shall be suitable for wet or dry installation indoor or outdoor, in trays,
conduits, underground ducts, and direct burial per the requirements of the NEC
3. Conductor temperature requirements as follows:
a. 90 degrees C for normal continuous conditions (wet and dry)

b. 130 degrees C for emergency overload conditions
c. 250 degrees C for short-circuit conditions
4. Capable of storage, handling, bending, and installation at ambient temperatures
as low as -10°C without cracking the jacket or insulation
5. UL listed type TC in accordance with the NEC

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Cable shall be manufactured for a service life of a minimum of 40 years at 90C

operating temperature

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installing cables:
1. Pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate number of
operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable length
2. Obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance
3. When pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into the haulage
line between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not exceed the limit
recommended by the cable manufacturer
4. Do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis
5. Lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this is not
possible obtain instructions.
6. Install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed without
disturbing the remainder
7. Underground cable horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 150 mm
8. Damaged cables shall be removed, unless agrees to a repair.
B. Bending Radius: Both permanent (in-situ) and during installation bending radii shall not
be less than the manufacturer recommended min radius.
C. Underground Cables in u-PVC Ducts:

1. Cables shall be installed in ducts where there is hard standing or vehicular
passage. Ducts where there is vehicular passage shall be concrete encased
2. Cable duct size shall be as specified in the Drawings.
3. Run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the latter run
parallel or transversely to cable trench. Use pulling compound, or lubricant to
avoid excessive stress on the cable, if required
4. Ducts shall not be filled with cables to more than 60 % of their capacity
5. Nylon draw cords shall always be left in empty ducts
6. Ducts shall be suitably sealed with polyurethane foam or proprietary cable
sealing arrangements as applicable.
7. Empty ducts shall be plugged with removable plugs
8. Ducts shall have a minimum diameter of 100 mm.
D. Direct Buried Cables:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. LV cables shall be laid at depths not less than 700 mm, measured from the final
finished ground level after all earthworks have been completed
2. A 100 mm layer of dune sand shall be provided on the bottom of the cable
trench for the cables to lie on. The cables shall be covered by a further 100 mm
layer of sand before the trench is backfilled
3. Cables shall be protected by precast concrete tiles laid above the top layer of
sand
4. PVC warning tape shall be provided above the cables or concrete tiles, after
partial backfilling and approximately 300 mm below finished ground level. All
backfilling shall be with dune sand free from stones on other hard particles.
5. Concrete cable markers shall be provided at:
a. Every 20 m for straight runs

b. Road crossings
c. Joints
d. Deviations
e. Entries to buildings
f. Entries to draw pits
6. Inspect the cable installation at each of the different stages above.
E. Cables above Ground:

1. Protection shall be provided where mechanical damage is possible
2. Cables shall be protected from direct sunlight
3. Cable spacing and layouts shall be as per NEC requirements.
a. Cables shall be run at least 150 mm from other services.
F. Underground Cables in trenches

1. In areas of hard standing cables may also be installed in concrete or brick cable
trenches with removable covers, like Plant Rooms and Main Electrical Rooms.
2. Cables may be laid in a single layer on the trench floor, otherwise they shall be
supported on the sides of the trench on cable tray by cleats or ladders
G. Flexible Cables:
1. Flexible cable shall be kept to a minimum and concealed if possible.
2. Mechanical retainment shall not depend on electrical connections.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.02 CABLE TRAYS
A. Generally:
1. Install cables on trays in a single layer, unless otherwise specified
2. Use purpose made straps or saddles to maintain cables in a neat regular
disposition
3. Secure cables with load bearing cleats securely fixed to the tray, where trays do
not directly support the cables
4. Space cleats, saddles and straps at maximum centers shall be as recommended
by cable manufacturers.
3.03 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly
3.04 TESTING
A. Perform insulation resistance test on each feeder conductor.
B. Testing may be performed by the Contractor.
C. Testing shall be in accordance with conductor manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Provide test report of all tests performed.
E. All inspection/tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and trial operation

shall be in accordance with applicable codes and standard requirements. Where no
standard is available, tests shall be carried out in accordance with Manufacturer’s
standard, subject to prior approval of the Client. The Manufacturer is required to
develop an inspection and test plan to document required testing.
F. The information given on test records, test certificates and performance details shall
be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers.
Certificates shall also bear the contract reference and heading.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. These tests shall be carried out for different equipment, material and systems prior to
and during commissioning of the equipment.
H. Production Tests: All cables shall meet or exceed production test requirements per
the applicable standards to the cable being furnished.
I. Flame Test: All cables shall meet or exceed the flame test requirements per IEEE 383
and 1202.
J. Testing shall be done according to specification section 01 00 00.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
. Technical Specifications
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES .................................................................................................. 3
1.02 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................... 5
2.01 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 5
2.02 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 7
3.01 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 7
3.02 TESTING ....................................................................................................................10
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Specification covers the technical requirements for the design, furnishing,
manufacturing, inspection, packaging, storage and handling, delivery and installation
of the following:
1. Earth Continuity Conductors
2. Main Earth Grid
3. Rod Electrodes
4. Earth Pit Covers
1.02 REFERENCES
A. IEC - International Electro-technical Commission

IEC 60364 Electrical installations of buildings (all parts)
IEC 60364-5-54 Earthing arrangement and protective conductors
IEC 60079-32-1 Explosive atmospheres: electrostatic hazards
B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL 467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A Wiring connectors and Soldering Lugs for With Copper Conductors
UL 486B Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors
UL 869 Service Equipment
D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface
E. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of

grounding features including the following:
1. Earth continuity conductors
2. Main Earth Grid
3. Rod Electrodes
4. Earth Inspection Pits
5. Grounding Bus bars
6. Grounding arrangements and connections
7. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Materials and equipment together with method of installation shall comply in all
respects with IEC and IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations, latest edition and
other applicable Codes and Standards specified herein.
B. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
stamped) are approved. Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin
are not accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at
delivery to the site for inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate of
Origin, will result in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and the
Contractor or his Sub-Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and
delays to the project associated with the product delivery. In exceptional cases,
Contractor shall submit the necessary paperwork and documents to the Engineer and
Client for approval prior to shipment.
C. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of
D. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
E. The above conditions (B,C and D items), shall superseded all other statements,
F. Contractor shall submit detail design drawings with all calculations showing the
conductor and cable sizes for approval.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Products used in the earthing system shall be copper or an approved copper alloy,
unless otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the purpose.
B. Earth Continuity Conductors
1. Sizes shall be as specified by local power-supply authorities, unless otherwise
indicated, but in no case shall size be less than half that of the associated phase
conductors.
2. Insulation shall be of the same material as insulation in associated sub-circuits.
C. Main Earth Grid
1. Tinned Bare copper wire, Size as indicated on drawings and shall be confirmed by
design.
D. Rod Electrodes
1. Shall be the earth rod electrode type, unless impracticable to drive deep into the
articular soil.
2. Earth rod electrodes: 20mm diameter pure copper, comprising a high strength core
with a molten welded copper covering.
3. Shall be a minimum of 3 m long, or in 3 m sections coupled by strong bronze
couplers.
4. Rods for triangular earthing rods shall be a minimum of 1.2m long and spaced by
the rod length.
E. Earth Connectors
1. For connection of rod electrodes: bolted type.
F. Earthing Bus Bars for Electrical System
1. Shall comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete with
studs, nuts and washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately sized
for the final connection of the earth electrode.
G. Bolts, Washers and Nuts in Bolted Connections
1. High copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. Earth Pit
1. Shall be SEAL earth pit or SEAL earth Rod for installations that require the
penetration of the waterproof layer.
I. Earth Inspection Pit Cover
1. Shall be of medium duty cast iron cover.
2. Shall have a recessed lifting hook.
3. Shall have a brass plate, engraved "Electrical Earth Below".
J. Truck earthing clamp
1. Truck earthing clamp shall be provided near the loading dock and near the filling
point of fuel tanks.
2. The clamp earthing and connection to truck shall comply with IEC 60079-32-1.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit Wiring
1. Shall have a green/yellow colored insulated earth continuity cable connecting the
earth bus or earth terminal in switchboards, switchgears, motor control centers and
panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by earthing lugs. All
hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially live metal surface shall
be earthed.
B. Main Earth Grid
1. Fix in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas indicated on the drawings, in
convenient locations, allowing two return paths to earth.
2. Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make tees
and straight joints by riveting and seating, welding or brazing.
3. Make copper tape joints by exothermic-weld process particularly at the exposed
and wet locations.
4. Make branch connections between main Grid and major equipment, such as
switchboards, large motors and motor control boards, with copper tape of same
size as main Grid tape.
5. Make other branch connections to equipment with copper conductors of size not
less than half that of the relative phase conductor.
6. For buried connections use exothermic weld.
C. Removable Earth Links
1. Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected for
testing.
2. Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode.
D. Exposed Earth Cables
1. Install and locate to provide maximum mechanical protection, utilizing ceiling
corners, suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as possible.
E. Bolted Connections
1. Multiple bolt type.
2. Where bare copper has bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver
electroplated.
F. Brazed Connections
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly

clean metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
G. Connections Between Dissimilar Metals
1. Protect by painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
2. Protect by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
H. Splices and Taps:
1. Conductors shall contain a minimum number of splices throughout each run.
Grounding conductor splices and taps shall be made by the exothermic weld
process. Where an X connection is required, such connections shall also be
exothermic welded. All ground cable shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush at
connections before welding. All concealed welded joints will be checked and
inspected by the Company for good fusion of joints and that the joint cross
sectional area has not been reduced, before being covered. Molds shall not be
used to make joints when three consecutive unsuitable connections are made by
the mold. Unsuitable welds shall be corrected in accordance with Company’s
instructions.
I. Equipment Earthing
1. Connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical
installation to the earthing system.
2. Non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include:
a. Metal conduit cable armor (steel and aluminum) raceways, outlet boxes,
cabinets, and the like.
b. Exposed metal parts of apparatus.
c. Enclosures, doors, grilles, barriers and the like protecting or shielding electrical
equipment from direct access.
5. Series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable.
J. Generators and Transformers Earthing
1. Each generator and transformer shall be grounded separately.
2. Proper grounding of generators and transformers is by using the method of
triangle ground electrode.
3. Electrode spacing shall be equal to the rod length with a minimum of 1.2 m rod
length.
K. Main Switchboards, Switchgears, Motor Control Centers Earthing
1. Connect the special earthing lug or bus bars inside the cabinet to the main earth
copper tape.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and motor control centers other
than "live" parts, to the earth bar in the board in an approved manner.
L. Fire Fighting Equipment Earthing
1. Earth on a separate ring system.
M. Motors Earthing
1. Connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth Grid. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible.
2. Extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the
connection box and connect to the frame.
N. Distribution Boards Earthing
1. Connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth bus bar to an earth
connector welded to the cabinet and earthing bushings on the incoming and
outgoing feeder conduits.
O. Bus Bar Trunking (Bus Ways) Feeders Earthing
1. Connect the green/yellow coded earth bus bar directly to the earth busbar in main
switchboard with earth copper tape.
P. Cable Armor Earthing
1. Connect steel and aluminum armor to the earthing system.
Q. Cable Tray/Cable Trunking
1. Connect each piece of cable trays/cable trunking and accessories to the earthing
system with couplings and copper links.
2. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Local Regulations and the BS
7671.
R. Earth Rod Electrodes
1. Drive extensible rods of the same diameter into the ground, either manually or by
power driven hammer, to a suitable depth to obtain low resistively in the particular
soil.
2. Bolt earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make
connection with all incoming cables.
S. Earth Inspection Pit
1. Construct a small concrete pit, complete with removable heavy gauge cast iron
cover with recessed lifting hook, at the head of the earth rod, to protect the rod and
allow access to connections for testing.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
T. Cladding support grounding is mandatory to minimize side strike potential during a

lightning storm.
U. All architectural and civil metal works shall be connected to the earthing system (steel
balustrade, steel doors, false ceiling metal suspension, etc…)
3.02 TESTING
A. All testing shall be done in accordance with the specifications listed in 01 00 00

“Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Systems”
B. Contractor shall measure the ground resistance of the ground well, of the completely
driven ground rod at each location before connecting it to the ground grid. Upon
completion of the entire grounding system of the site, including all necessary
connections and backfilling, Contractor shall measure the ground resistance at a
location designated by the Engineer,
C. Measurement shall be made with ground tester. All measurements and tests shall be
witnessed by the Engineer. An acceptable grounding resistance shall not be more than
1 ohm for computer equipment and for general building grounding. If test
measurements exceed this value, the Contractor shall install and connect additional
ground rods as directed by the Engineer until this value is obtained, unless otherwise
approved by local electrical power authority.
END OF SECTION
10
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Technical Specifications
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3

1.02 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................... 6
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................. 6
2.02 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 6
2.03 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .................................................................... 6
2.04 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .................................................................... 8
2.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS ............................................................... 9
2.06 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS ..................................................... 9
2.07 CABLE TRUNKING .................................................................................................10
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................11
3.01 PREPARATION ..........................................................................................................11
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT ................................................................................11
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ..............................................................12
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS.............................................13
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRUNKING .................................................................13
3.06 Installation of electrical booxes ...................................................................................13
3.07 FIRESTOPPING .........................................................................................................14
3.08 CLEANING .................................................................................................................14
3.09 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................14
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 2 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of all conduit works in
accordance with the Project Documentation.
1. Rigid PVC conduit and fittings
2. Rigid Steel conduit and fittings
3. Flexible Steel conduit and fittings
4. Hinged cover enclosures and cabinets
5. Cable Trunk
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. C80.1, "Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)"
2. C80.3, "Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)"
3. C80.6, "Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC)"
4. FB 1, "Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable"
5. FB 2.10, "Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Non-Flexible
Metallic Conduit or Tubing (Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, and
Electrical Metallic Tubing)"
6. TC 2, "Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit"
7. TC 3, "Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing"
8. OS1, “Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports”
9. 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment” (1000 Volts Maximum)
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, “National Electrical Code”
C. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. (UL):
1. 50, “UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-
Environmental Considerations”
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 3 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Cut-away samples of all sizes of conduits, conduit boxes and fittings of each
type fixed to a board and submitted.
B. Product Data: When submitting samples submit manufacturer’s details, catalogues and
copies of test certificates confirming that offered types comply with the Specification.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of proposed conduit layouts and obtain approval before
commencing work.
D. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
E. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involves:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
G. Source quality-control test reports.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical Power Authority.

B. Conform to the related latest standards for metallic and non-metallic conduits and
accessories stipulated in this Section.
C. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements
to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at delivery to
the site for inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate of Origin, will result
in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and the Contractor or his Sub-
Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and delays to the project
shipment.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 4 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
site manufacturing shall not be classified as Original Equipment Manufacturer.
specifications, conditions mentioned anywhere else in the BoQ, Drawings, or Specification
documents.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 5 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products
from the approved list of manufacturers only.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Light and power circuits, fire alarm, telephone, signal and other low current system wiring
shall be drawn in conduits unless otherwise indicated
B. Conduit system shall generally be concealed and installed as indicated, unless otherwise
indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 20mm diameter.
C. Light and power circuits, fire alarm wiring, telephone wiring, signal wiring and low current
system wiring shall each be run in separate conduit and wire way.
D. Cable insulated for two different categories of circuit shall be segregated.
E. Irrespective of service, conduit and fitting used shall be:
1. Where embedded: heavy gauge rigid PVC complying to BS 4607.
2. Where surface mounted, exposed: galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS)
3. Where installed above false ceilings and in voids: GRS
4. Where installed in flame proof and hazardous areas: GRS
5. From terminal box to machine/device: flexible steel conduit
6. Liquid tight flexible steel in wet/damp areas.
2.03 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Physical Properties:
1. Conduit and fittings shall be:
a. Resistant to high temperatures
b. Non-hygroscopic
c. Self-extinguishing
d. Of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength
e. Inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential, commercial and
industrial premises
f. Suitable for installation, storage and transportation at temperatures normally
below -5°C. or above 85°C. and at these temperatures shall not:
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 6 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1) Soften or suffer any structural degradation

2) Show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot be easily
drawn in or are likely to be damaged when drawing in, when bent,
compressed or exposed to extreme temperature
g. Of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability
h. Suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall include nominal
size and be easily legible.
i. Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp edges. Surfaces
and corners over which cables may be drawn shall be smooth and well
rounded.
2. Sizes of Conduit:
a. Minimum 20 mm, internal diameter unless otherwise indicated
b. Where size is not indicated: select in accordance with the regulations and as
proper to the number and size of conductors.
3. Fittings:
a. Conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.
4. Expansion fittings:
a. Provide fittings that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.06 mm
per meter of length of straight run per degree of temperature change.
b. Provide expansion fittings for each of the following locations and provide
type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature changes listed
below:
1) Outdoor locations not exposed to direct sunlight: 70°C, 5°C
temperature change.
2) Outdoor locations exposed to direct sunlight: 86°C, 5°C
temperature change.
3) Indoor spaces: 70°C, 5°C temperature change.
5. PVC Conduit Boxes:
a. PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway system
b. metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be used
alternatively if required for PVC conduit raceway system
c. all boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws
d. all boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or metallic
type and their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the switches, sockets
and other accessories.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 7 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.04 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. All metallic conduits shall be of steel screwed type having an interior and exterior zinc
coating of uniform quality and appearance throughout all surfaces
2. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter size, and shall be complete with all
necessary compression fittings, couplings and connecting devices having galvanized
equivalent finish
3. Conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric wiring purposes.
When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both inside and
outside the tube shall be completely removed prior to galvanizing
4. All conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on delivery to the site
and shall be properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from mechanical
damage and damage by weather and water whilst stored on the site
5. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male bushes.
All such bushes shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty compression type
6. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or
equivalent to that of the conduit with which the coupling is to be used, having factory
installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture. All coupling
shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor
7. All conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less than 3
mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed. Saddles shall
have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured to the bar by
means of brass screws.
B. Metallic Conduit Boxes:
1. Metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout metallic conduit raceway systems. All
boxes and covers shall be galvanized, zinc plated or rust-proof finish equivalent to
conduit finish
2. Circular and/or rectangular boxes shall be used for pull boxes and terminating boxes,
according to size and number of conduits connected to box. Boxes shall be either
malleable iron or heavy duty steel construction with welded joints and tapped holes to
receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self-tapping screws will not be
permitted
3. All boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be directly mounted
shall be fitted with covers screwed to the box by brass screws. Malleable iron covers
shall be used with malleable iron boxes and heavy gauge steel covers shall be used
with sheet steel boxes
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 8 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. All covers and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned that the fixing screws
lie completely clear of cable entering the box. All fixing screws shall be of brass
5. All boxes installed in exterior locations, plant rooms, ducts, etc., shall be fitted with
approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof seal between box and cover or other
items fitted to the box
6. All boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are specified or permitted,
shall be provided with fixed terminal blocks. Such boxes shall be of suitable size to
contain the terminal block and sufficient cable to allow neat connections to be made.
The terminal blocks shall be fixed to the box by brass screws and shall comprise
brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping screws enclosed in porcelain or
other heat resisting insulation material which will not distort or otherwise have its
properties damaged by temperatures below the highest temperature at which the
insulation of any cable connected to it is destroyed.
7. All metallic conduit boxes shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with part I, IV,
V, VII and X of article 250 (NEC).
2.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible Conduit:
1. Watertight, PVC sheathed, spiraled metal type. The conduit shall be terminated at
boxes and equipment by means of approved compression glands
2. To be of the unpacked type for normal atmospheric conditions and non-asbestos
packaged for damp situations. Adapters shall be of the solid type
3. Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of rigid conduit to the
terminal boxes of machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or where
vibrations is likely to occur.
B. Flexible Connections:
1. Where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the final
termination shall be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and adequate
slack cable in the form of a loop or spiral being left to allow for the movement of
motors necessitated by belt re-tensioning, vibration, etc.
2.06 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Design
1. Surface-mounted or free-standing type, fabricated from zinc coated or galvanized
sheet steel minimum 1.5mm thick, Paint finish as approved for distribution boards.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 9 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Fixed cover and padlocked hinged door; operable without obstruction.

3. Protected IP-31 for internal and IP-65 for outdoor use.
2.07 CABLE TRUNKING
A. Steel Trunk and Accessories: Factory made from minimum 16 SWG sheet steel with 15
microns zinc coating.
B. Trunk Covers: Manufacture to fit firmly on the body. Design of covers and fixings shall
prevent wires entangling on them. Covers shall be attached and removed from trunking
with simple tools.
C. Accessories (Bends, Tees, Flanged Connectors etc.): Factory made by the trunking
manufacture.
D. Multi-compartment Trunking: Provide 16 SWG galvanized steel segregation barriers
without sharp edges.
E. Cable Retaining Clips: Galvanized spring ‘W’ wire type.
F. Cable Support Fixings: Projecting pin type with heat shrunk sleeve.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 10 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Sets and Bends:

1. Conduits up to 32 mm diameter; form on site with an approved bending machine
using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform conduit.
2. Conduits over 32 mm diameter: use coupling fittings.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. General
1. Run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls and
in accordance with the accepted practice
2. Conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after installation.
All conduit system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self-draining
3. Conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to local Regulations
regarding number of bends and extent of straight run
4. Conduit fill shall generally be less than 45%.
5. Keep conduits at least 100 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services
6. Where conduit runs are to be concealed in the structure or are to pass through
floor slabs, the Contractor shall be responsible for marking the accurate positions
of all chases and holes on site. The Contractor shall arrange the conduit routing to
make maximum use of any preformed conduit holes and slots provided in
structural beams. Conduit installation on shear walls shall be kept to a minimum.
All routings necessary on shear walls shall be agreed with the Engineer’s
Representative before work is put in hand
7. Install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation outlets
8. Earth continuity of steel conduits shall be mechanically & electrically continuous
throughout.
9. Provide pull wire in all empty conduits.
B. Runs in Reinforced Concrete:
1. Obtain approval for placing PVC conduits before pouring concrete
2. Run conduits in concrete slabs parallel to main reinforcing steel
3. Additional openings in finished slabs, where approved, shall be made by drilling, not
by breaking
4. Conduit boxes shall not be nailed to shuttering boards.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 11 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Horizontal or Cross Runs:

1. To be avoided in partitions and side walls.
D. Surface Mounted Conduit (including conduit installed above false ceiling):
1. Fix with distance spacing saddles to allow conduits to be taken directly into
accessories without bends or sets.
E. Concealed Conduit:
1. Fix securely to prevent movement before casting of concrete and screeds,
application of plaster and the like.
2. Spacing of clips shall be not greater than as follows:
Conduit size Spacing

600 mm
Up to 25 mm
900 mm
32-38 mm
1000 mm
50 mm
3. Supports for exposed conduit shall be fixed at each side of bends.

F. Expansion Fittings:
1. Fix in conduit wherever it crosses as expansion joint in the structure to which it is
fixed.
G. Terminations:
1. Make with a flanged coupling, lead washer and hexagonal male brass bush, where
conduit runs terminate in cable trunk, distribution boards or any sheet metal
structure.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by placing
locknuts on outside of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
B. Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must be flexible
metallic conduit 20 mm minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit dropping
of the fixture below the ceiling and to gain access to the junction box.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 12 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors, the final
connection being made with liquid tight flexible conduit and suitable liquid tight
connectors.
D. A green insulated 4 mm2 (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made
between the solid conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being run
inside the flexible conduit. Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic equipment
etc. shall be bonded to the earthing terminal of the equipment etc. Where changes to
flexible conduits occur, a watertight outlet box with threaded entries shall be inserted and
the earth connection made to an internal terminal. The cover screws shall not be used for
earthing connections.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Anchor enclosures and cabinets securely to wall and structural supports at each corner.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRUNKING
A. Install trunk with lid on top or side.

B. Support trunk at 1.0m intervals with trapeze type hangers or wall brackets.
C. Retain cables in trunk with cable retaining clips.
D. Support cables in vertical runs with pin-type supports at maximum 15m centers.
E. On vertical runs exceeding 6m support cable with projecting pin-type supports with heat
shrunk sleeve fixed to trunk body by welding or pop riveting.
F. Make connections to accessories with pop riveted or welded joints. Radius or gusset
bends and tees.
G. Provide tinplated copper link at joints and terminations.
H. Fire-stop cable trunk at floor slabs and at fire walls by packing inside the trunk with
mineral wool.
I. Provide galvanized draw wire in every trunk conduit which is left for wires and cables. Not
less than 300mm slack shall be left at each end of the draw wire.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOOXES
A. Fasten covers of pull and junction boxes with minimum No. 10 brass machine screws.
Hinge and fasten covers of termination boxes with latches.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 13 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Flush Installations of Outlet Boxes in Suspended Ceilings.

C. Flush Installations of Outlet Boxes in Partitions and Walls.
D. Install boxes in locations as shown on drawings, and as required to accommodate splices,
taps, wire pulling and equipment connections.
E. Use galvanized steel boxes only in finished areas where they are completely concealed
within walls or ceilings.
F. All metallic conduit boxes shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with part I, IV, V,
VII and X of article 250 (NEC).
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install conduits sealing where they enter or leave hazardous locations. Provide fire
stopping at fire compartment areas. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible
locations and fill them with approved sealing compound.
3.08 CLEANING
A. The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed by means
of well-fitting wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in, conduits
systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until they are dry and clean.
B. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings & devices, inspect
exposed finish; remove burrs, dirt & construction debris and repair damages finish
including chips, scratches & abrasions.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Site Engineer
to ensure that coating, finishes & cabinets are without damage or deterioration at
substantial completion.
B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
C. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch up coatings per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 14 of 15
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
END OF SECTION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 15 of 15
SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................ 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ...................................................................................................................... 3
1.02 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .......................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.02 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 5
2.03 CABLE TRAYS MATERIALS AND FINISHES .................................................................................... 6
2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................... 6
2.05 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS .......................................................................................................... 6
2.06 LADDER RACK ............................................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................................ 9
3.01 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION ................................................................................ 9
3.02 CABLE INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 9
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL................................................................................................................ 9
3.04 PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................... 10
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of Cable trays, Ladder racks, Wire
basket cable Trays, and accessories work in accordance with the Project Documentation.
1. Cable trays and accessories
2. Wire basket cable trays and accessories
3. Ladder racks and accessories
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition and publishing addenda of the following publications in effect on the date of Contract
Award are a part of this Specification and, where referenced to by title or basic designation only, are
applicable to the extent indicated by the specific reference:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A 123, “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.”
b. A 1008, “Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution
Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.”
c. A 1011, “Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
and Ultra-High Strength.”
d. B 633, “Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.”
e. B 766, “Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium.”
2. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code-Steel.”
a. VE1, “Metal Cable Tray Systems.”
a. 70, “National Electrical Code.”
B. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in addition to the
requirements, the recommendations shall be considered requirements and shall be followed unless
stated otherwise by this Specification.
C. In the event of any conflict between codes, or Specifications and codes, the more stringent regulation
shall apply.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray/ ladder racks
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray/ ladder racks.
1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray/ ladder racks, including plans, elevations,
and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories to include clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors,
expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray/ ladder
racks layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical
elements. Show the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays/ ladder racks.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays/ ladder racks above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local Electrical power Authority.

B. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain cable tray/ ladder racks components through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Select a firm experienced in manufacturing cable trays/ ladder racks,
which has a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped) are approved.
Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are not accepted. Certificate of Country of
Origin shall be submitted with the product at delivery to the site for inspection by the Engineer. Failing
to submit the Certificate of Origin, will result in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and
the Contractor or his Sub-Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and delays to the
project associated with the product delivery. In exceptional cases, Contractor shall submit the
necessary paperwork and documents to the Engineer and Client for approval prior to shipment.
E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-site
manufacturing shall not be classified as Original Equipment Manufacturer.
F. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions without any
derating to the capacity.
G. The above conditions (D,E and F items), shall superseded all other statements, specifications,
conditions mentioned anywhere else in the BoQ, Drawings, or Specification documents.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering of cable tray/ ladder
racks.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products from the
approved list of manufacturers only.
2.02 GENERAL
A. The cable tray ladder racks system shall include factory-made trays/ladders, tray/ladders fittings,
connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a complete cable support system.
B. The cable tray/ladders system shall include the following factory-made tray elements:
1. Straight cable trays, ladder racks
2. Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes, reducers,
vertical riser elements
3. Connectors
4. All necessary fixing accessories.
C. Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall not be permitted.
D. Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray/ladder racks and exposed to direct sunlight shall be provided
with covering at higher level to allow for ventilation.
E. Determine the sizes of the power cable trays based on the number and size of cables laid on the cable
trays plus 20% space for future growth. Cables laid on cable trays shall be spaced by one diameter
considering the largest cable diameter as reference.
F. Design calculations to validate suitability of selected trays to support permissible cables loads (weight)
over a continuous span in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Submit
manufacturers loading graphs.
G. The tray and support systems for covered trays shall be designed considering the effect of ice, snow,
and wind loadings, as applicable.
H. Connect the fittings to the trays in a manner that provides a smooth interior for the tray; bolt ends to be
of the convex head type. Use lock-washers with bolts and nuts.
I. Cable trays are not to be used in place of copper conductors as an equipment grounding conductor.
J. Unless otherwise specified, support trays on 10 foot (3 meter) maximum intervals; provide additional
tray supports at changes in tray direction and at fittings in accordance with NEMA VE1.
K. Additional bracing shall be provided for the hangers where necessary to ensure rigidity.
L. Barriers for cable trays shall be the same height as the inside loading depth. The barriers shall be
securely anchored to the trays with smooth head bolts, nuts, and lock-washers. Where tray changes
direction, care shall be exercised in bending the barrier to maintain width of path in the tray.
M. Provide dropout fittings wherever cables must exit the bottom of the tray; maintain the minimum cable
bending radius. Cable openings exiting the top of covered trays to have protection against cable
damage from sharp edges.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
N. Grounding of Tray System: In accordance with the Specification 26 05 26 and as follows:

1. Provide continuity between tray components.
2. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical connectors.
3. Install a bonding jumper across gaps in tray runs to provide continuity.
2.03 CABLE TRAYS MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Materials and finishes:

1. The cable tray material shall be hot rolled steel sheet. The whole of the tray work, trays, fittings,
and supports shall be of mild steel hot dipped galvanized after. The thickness of the protective
sheath on any element shall not be less than 55 microns.
2. Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel hot dip galvanized.
3. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated.
4. Tray work shall have oval perforations.
5. All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a heavy duty returned
flanged, perforated type, unless specified otherwise. The minimum thickness of heavy duty
returned flanged cable trays shall be 1.5mm for trays up to 300mm wide and 2.0mm for trays up
to 1000mm wide.
6. Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerances and all edges
rounded. Flanges shall have full round smooth edges.
7. For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
8. Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit the number of cables as
shown on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
9. Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive environments shall
be heavy duty GRP or stainless steel.
B. Sizes and Configurations: As shown on the Drawings.
2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as
cable tray.
B. Covers: Same materials and finishes as cable tray to be used for outdoor installations.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
2.05 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Tray Materials:

1. Carbon steel wire. Wire welded, bent, and surface treated after manufacture.
B. Cable Tray Finishes:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing after fabrication.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Cable tray shall consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system, to
allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices
where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC). Provide splices, supports, and other fittings
necessary for a complete, continuously grounded system. Wire mesh cable tray shall have continuous
Safe-T-Edge T-welded top side wire to protect cable insulation and installers.
1. Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).
2. Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm).
3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application load
requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight.
4. Safety Edge: Patented Safety Edge technology on side wire to protect cable insulation and
installers’ hands.
5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Cable Tray Size:
1. As shown on the drawings
E. Load Span Criteria:
1. Install and support cable management system in accordance with one of the following:
2.06 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder rack shall be supplied and installed in the locations indicated on the drawings.
B. The cable ladder system shall be based on two longitudinal outward facing side members with returned
edge flanges to improve safety during handling, installation and cable pulling activities. The longitudinal
side members shall form the main structural elements of the cable ladder system and shall be
longitudinally ribbed for enhanced stiffness and rigidity.
C. The profile of the side members shall remain constant for the straight cable ladder and the cable ladder
fittings.
D. The longitudinal side members shall have a height of 125mm and a flange width of 25mm.
E. The longitudinal side member shall have a wall thickness of 2.0mm.
F. The two longitudinal side members shall be connected by individual transverse members (rungs) which
shall be welded at low level to the inside face of the side members.
G. The transverse members shall be evenly spaced at 300mm centers along the length of the straight
cable ladder.
H. The transverse members shall have a wall thickness of 1.5mm.
I. Ladder racks shall be manufactured from Steel and shall be deep galvanized after manufacture and
capable of carrying cables in a single layer formation with a maximum deflection of 14mm (between
supports) when the rack is fully loaded.
J. Racks, unless otherwise stated, shall be of heavy duty.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
K. The couplers shall be profiled to match the profile of the cable ladder. The couplers shall be secured
using M10 square-shouldered bolts with rounded heads. The bolts shall be secured with M10 hex nuts
and M10 shake-proof washers as standard. The couplers shall have a slot pattern which prevents slip
between adjacent straight ladder lengths and between cable ladder fittings. The couplers shall have a
slot pattern which allows for easy connection to cut lengths of straight cable ladder without the need for
onsite drilling.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION
A. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support
systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and
crosses.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays/ ladder rack.
C. Fasten cable tray/ ladder rack supports to building structure.
D. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray/ ladder rack and to
equipment. Support cable tray/ ladder rack independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray/
ladder rack on equipment enclosure.
E. Install expansion connectors where cable tray/ ladder rack crosses building expansion joint. Space
connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
F. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
G. Make cable tray/ ladder rack connections using standard fittings.
H. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke.
I. Workspace: Install cable trays/ ladder rack with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
A. Install cables only when cable tray/ ladder rack installation has been completed and inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties. Tighten clamps only enough to secure
the cable, without indenting the cable jacket.
C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 450 mm. Install intermediate supports when cable weight
exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray/ rungs.
D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray/ ladder rack.
E. Install covers (where indicated) after installation of cable is completed.
A. After installing cable trays/ ladder racks and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable
tray/ ladder rack, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause
or have caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that could
damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray/ ladder rack ventilation.
10
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Visually inspect each cable tray/ ladder rack joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-torque in
suspect areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified
hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray/ ladder rack earthing; verify
that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray/ ladder rack.
B. Report results in writing.
3.04 PROTECTION
C. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray/ ladder
rack manufacturer.
2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays/ ladder racks to protect exposed cables
from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable
tray/ ladder rack can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.
END OF SECTION
10
SECTION 26 12 16
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
EPC Works for Establishment of New System Control Center:
”building works package”
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 references ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................... 5
1.5 Delivery, storage and handling...................................................................................................... 5
1.6 warranty......................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 2 - PRODUCT ..................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 transformers .................................................................................................................................. 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 9
3.1 examination ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 installation ..................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3 testing ............................................................................................................................................ 9
3.4 acceptance , energization and spare parts ................................................................................. 10
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 2 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This part of the specification covers the design, manufacture, delivery, transportation, and
commissioning of DRY-TYPE cast resin Transformers. This specification is applicable for indoor
installation of transformers as specified on drawings.
B. Deem of inclusion of all necessary equipment for the control, protection and supervision of the
transformers.
C. Mount the transformer at factory to a maximum possible extent to reduce the work required at site.
D. Transformer design shall be as compact as possible in order to reduce space requirements.
E. The DRY-TYPE Transformer shall meet maximum site ambient temperature as per specified site
location. Ambient temperature @ 55 ⁰C.
1.2 REFERENCES
Contract Award are a part of this Specification.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
1. C57.12.01, “Standard General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers”
2. C57.12.51, “American National Standard for Ventilated Dry-Type Power Transformers, 501
kVA and Larger, Three-Phase, with High-Voltage 601-34,500 Volts, Low Voltage 208Y/120
to 4160 Volts – General Requirements”
3. C57.12.91, “Standard Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers”
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1. TR 1, “Transformers Regulators and Reactors”
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. 70, “National Electrical Code
E. Where the above referenced codes, standards, and guides contain recommendations in addition to
requirements, the recommendations shall be considered requirements and shall be followed,
unless stated otherwise by this Specification.
F. In case of any conflict between the reference codes, or this Specification and codes, the more
stringent applies.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 3 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The contractor shall submit for approval Shop Drawings prepared in accordance
with the specifications, design drawings and final material submittal.
B. Approval of all submittals and shop drawings by the consultant shall be before procurement or
fabrication of material and equipment.
C. The bidders shall list the exceptions taken from the specification with their quote. If no exceptions
listed with the bid, our understanding is that the bidder shall meet the requirements of this
specification and applicable Codes and Standards.
D. Submit shop drawings indicating outline dimensions, clearances, connection and support points,
weight, specified ratings, impedance, insulation class, temperature rise, sound level and materials,
etc...
E. Submit the certification of the transformer nameplate diagram.
F. Submit certified test data:
1. Factory test data, including but not limited to the following:
a) Resistance measurements of all windings
b) Ratio tests
c) Polarity and phase relation tests
d) No-load loss at rated voltage
e) Impedance
f) Voltage and load loss at rated current
g) Dielectric tests
2. Previous test data on similar unit, in lieu of factory tests on actual units furnished, including
but not limited to the following:
a) Impulse tests
b) Temperature rise tests
c) Sound tests
d) Power factor tests
e) Bushing tests
f) Short circuit tests
G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
H. Submit seismic certification as specified.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit operation and maintenance manual.
2. Include procedures for cleaning unit, and replacing components.
3. Furnish a list of, and prices for, any recommended special tools and spare parts to permit
proper maintenance and repair of the transformer.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 4 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Electrical equipment and materials shall be new and within one year of manufacture, complying
with the latest codes and standards. No used, re-built, refurbished and/or re-manufactured
electrical equipment and materials shall be furnished on this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in distribution transformers with 10 years’
experience.
C. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source, including the
company name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the request of the
Company, the Seller shall furnish to the Company satisfactory evidence of the quality of the work
being performed.
D. Supplier quality plans and quality certifications:
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing relationship to other groups.
E. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications:
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier including history with
the sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time delivery.
3. The reason the Seller changed sub-supplier (quality, delivery, bankruptcy, etc…) (if
applicable)
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Company to verify the quality and
acceptability of the sub-supplier.
F. The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this Specification
have been complied with by providing Certificates of Conformance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate the point of delivery with the Project Manager and related site personnel.
B. Delivery Schedule: Coordinate of on-site delivery date of equipment with the Project Manager and
related site personnel.
C. Provide a minimum of five (5) business days advance notice of delivery date and time when
components must be unloaded by a crane.
D. Handle and store the equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Copy of these
instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 5 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Vendor shall provide the cost per day for storing the equipment at Vendor's facility beyond the
delivery dates.
F. Equipment shall be provided in dust and moisture impervious shrouding and shall be adequately
crated to ensure protection from transit damage and exposure to weather.
G. Packaging shall be labeled and numbered so that each section or assembly may be identified upon
arrival at the jobsite. Any items not fully assembled shall be packaged separately.
H. Protect and prevent damage of all connections by metal covers during shipping.
I. Ship the transformer with tamper-proof impact recorders. Record continually using either a chart or
strip output or digital memory from the factory floor to the site. Daily date and time stamps shall be
included in the recording. Install the recorder as close as possible to the transformer’s center of
gravity.
J. Equipment openings, entrances to internal wiring, control devices and the like shall be protected
against entrance of dirt, dust, moisture, or other deleterious elements. All connections to be
protected by metal covers to prevent damage during shipment.
K. Complete installation instructions for any parts shipped separate from the tank and core assembly
shall accompany the transformer shipment.
L. Remove detachable accessories when shipping in order to be suitably crated and protected against
corrosion, dampness, breakage, or vibration injury that might be encountered in transportation and
handling.
M. All shipping locks, bindings, etc. shall be clearly marked so that their removal prior to energization
is assured. Any special precautions that must be observed in the removal of these shipping
restraints shall be clearly marked on the shipping container or crate.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty period of two (2) years minimum shall start at the date of equipment installation after
consultant acceptance.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 6 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 TRANSFORMERS
A. Three phase ventilated dry type distribution transformer.

B. Capacity as indicated on drawings.
C. The transformer(s) shall be capable of carrying 100% of nameplate kVA rating at site
average ambient temperature.
D. High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers of the windings
shall be by Insuldur paper or equal.
A. Conductor material shall be Copper.

B. The design of the transformer shall be for rolling or skidding in any direction. Provide lifting hooks
on the enclosure and provisions for jacking. Also, provide adequate means for lifting by forklifts and
cranes.
C. Transformer core shall be manufactured from quality non-aging, cold rolled, grain-oriented
silicon steel laminations. Cores are to be precisely cut to close tolerances to eliminate
burrs and improve performance. Design configuration is to be step-lap, fully mitered
construction for optimum energy efficiency and low noise level. Cores are to be carefully
assembled and rigidly held secure with structural steel clamps to minimize gaps. Core is
to be protected from corrosion by painting after assembly. Core dipping is not acceptable
as the sole means of protection.
D. Transformer design, including internal conductors and bushings, shall be suitable for the additional
kVA allowed by the forced-air cooling fans and fan control. Fans shall be single-phase, and wired
to a terminal box for power connection by the EPC Contractor. Motors shall be in accordance with
the Technical Specifications.
E. The transformer shall have an off circuit tap changer in the high-voltage winding with steps at +5%,
+2.5%, 0%, -2.5% and -5%.
F. Transformers shall have Class H insulation. Temperature rise shall be 80 degrees C over an
ambient temperature unless otherwise indicated.
G. Solid insulation in the transformer shall consist of inorganic materials such as porcelain, glass fiber,
electrical grade glass polyester, electrical grade epoxy, or Nomex.
H. The insulation between the high- and low-voltage coils shall be more than sufficient for the voltage
stress without the need of a varnish.
I. Transformer shall have alarm for high temperature.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 7 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. Installation of transformers shall be on vibration-isolated pads.

K. When air terminal chambers are provided, the covers shall be bolted to the chamber. Hinged
covers with locks are not acceptable.
L. Tag all devices with device name and wiring item numbers.
M. Transformer shall include the following accessories:
1. Diagram instruction plate
2. Provisions for lifting and jacking
3. Removable center panel for access to high-voltage strap-type connector taps for de-
energized tap changing
4. Two ground pads with continuous ground bus
N. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, and capacity based on rated allowable
temperature rise. Provide nameplate indicating minimum ventilation clearance.
O. Provide Supplier's standard stainless steel nameplates and tap changer warning/instruction plates.
P. Transformer shall have differential relay for negative sequence current for better sensitivity of turn-
to-turn faults.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 8 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that pads are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use.
D. Observe all restrictions imposed by safety tags and locks.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install safety labels.
3.3 TESTING
A. The transformer manufacturer shall include in his bid the provision of assistance by the Technical
Representative. The assistance shall include, but not be limited to, supervision of transformer,
unloading, setting, support, installation, and inspection. After inspection, the Technical
representative shall test the equipment in accordance with an approved site test procedure.
B. Do tests in the presence of the Electrical AHJ’s designated representative.
C. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. Using a calibrated torque wrench, test and record
values at all terminations.
D. Perform Routine Tests as per IEEE C57.12.01, Table 17, and in accordance with IEEE C57.12.91.
E. Perform all electrical tests. The tests shall include but not limited to resistance measurements,
insulation-resistance tests, Insulation Tests on Auxiliary Devices and Wiring, turns-ratio tests,
insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on all windings, power-factor or dissipation-factor
tests on each bushing, excitation-current tests, testing of space heaters, testing of surge arresters,
testing the insulating liquid and lightning impulse test.
F. Also, perform operational tests to ensure correct functioning of all devices related to transformer.
G. In addition to the above, perform the temperature rise test and zero sequence impedance test on
one transformer only of each type, unless test results are available from identical transformers
previously manufactured, in which case these test results shall be submitted.
H. All inspection/tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and trial operation shall be in
accordance with applicable codes and standard requirements. Where no standard is available,
tests shall be carried out in accordance with Supplier’s standard, subject to prior approval of the
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 9 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Company. The Supplier is required to develop an inspection and test plan to document required
testing.
I. The information given on test records, test certificates and performance details shall be sufficient to
identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers. Certificates shall also bear the
contract reference and heading.
J. The Company shall have free access to the Supplier’s facility during the design, fabrication, and
testing of the Equipment covered by this Specification. The Supplier shall make the necessary
arrangements to provide access. Any inspection by the Company shall not be considered a waiver
of any warranty or other rights.
K. The Company may or may not elect to witness tests, but the Supplier shall notify the Company at
least 15 days in advance of all scheduled tests.
L. The Supplier indicating their accuracy and conformance with applicable codes and Contract
requirements shall certify all test reports. Certified test reports covering all tests performed shall be
submitted to the Company.
M. All tests conducted with proper regard for the protection of the Equipment, and the Supplier shall
be responsible for adequate protection of all personnel during such tests.
N. The Company may or may not elect to witness tests, but the Supplier shall notify the Company at
least 15 days in advance of all scheduled tests.
O. The Equipment shall meet all the conditions of this Contract prior to acceptance by the Company.
P. The Supplier shall provide Equipment for all tests conducted.
Q. Testing shall be done according to specification 01 00 00.
R. The Project Manager reserves the right to require that the contractor/supplier perform and repeat
tests that are necessary to complete or check the tests or the certified records of the
contractor/supplier at any time during the course of the work. The contractor/supplier shall correct
unsatisfactory portion of his work that is revealed by the tests or that may be due to progressive
deterioration during this period, unless the item in question was a direct specification.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE , ENERGIZATION AND SPARE PARTS
A. Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory performance of the transformer under test.
B. After tests have been reviewed and approved, energization may proceed in accordance with the
approved Equipment Energization Plan.
C. Along with the equipment specified above, the Supplier shall provide individual prices for normally
supplied spare parts with the Proposal. The spare parts may be purchased with the order.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 10 of 11
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
END OF SECTION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 11 of 11
SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES .................................................................................................... 3
1.02 SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................. 3
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................. 5
1.04 RELATED STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 7
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING...................................................................... 8
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................... 9
1.07 COORDINATION ..........................................................................................................10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................11
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ......................................................................................................11
2.02 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................11
2.03 MAIN SWITCHBOARDS (MDB) ....................................................................................11
2.04 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS ......................................................................................23
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................27
3.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................27
3.02 IDENTIFICATION ..........................................................................................................27
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .........................................................................................27
3.04 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................30
3.05 DEMONSTRATION .......................................................................................................30
3.06 NAMEPLATES AND WARNING SIGNS ........................................................................30
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 2 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all
Switchboards including Main Switchboards, Sub-main Switchboards, UDPs etc in
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, over-current protective device, transient
voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for each type.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and over current protective

devices.
d. Arc Flash calculation shall be submitted.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 3 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over current
protective device.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 4 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. The distribution equipment shall be factory Type-Tested Assembly (TTA). In

situations where certain steps of assembly need to take place outside the factory of
the manufacturer of the TTA conforming thereby to Clause 2.1.1.1 of the IEC 61439-
1:1999, prior approval would be necessary.
B. Prior to placing order of the equipment, ensure that the physical dimensions of the
equipment do not infringe the working space required by the applicable standards.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Ensure that each category of selected material or
equipment shall be of a particular range of one manufacturer who would take full
responsibility of the product.
D. The switchgear manufacturer must have a previous record of satisfactory service for
at least (10) years.
E. All main switchboards and motor control centers manufactured by overseas
manufacturer shall be submitted for testing by an internationally approved laboratory
testing agency and test certificates issued accordingly shall be submitted prior to
delivery to shipment. Locally manufactured switchboards and control centers shall be
tested at the manufacturer’s testing laboratory witnessed. The tests shall be done in
accordance with IEC 439 and shall include mechanical test, voltage test, short circuit
test, degree of protection test, creepage distances and clearances in air test and
other required tests as approved.
F. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to
assure us that all spare parts and consumables will be available for 15 years life span
of the equipment.
G. The Seller shall follow their standard procedures for quality assurance and control. Seller’s
standard QA Manual shall be submitted in both electronic and hard copy for review and
should be in such a form as to enable an assessment to be made of the manufacturing
sequence and inspection set up and other control procedures.
H. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source, including
the company name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the request of
the Company, the Seller shall furnish to the Company satisfactory evidence of the quality of
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 5 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
the work being performed. Such evidence, at the discretion of the Company, shall consist of
any or all of the following
I. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications.
1. Seller qualification procedures and specific documentation of the results

of the Seller’s qualification of the sub-supplier.
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier

including history with the sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time
delivery.
3. The reason the Seller changed sub-supplier (quality, delivery,

bankruptcy, etc.).
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Company to verify

the quality and acceptability of the sub-supplier.
J. As a minimum, the following shall be provided:
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing

relationship to other groups.
K. After award of purchase order, the Company will identify the inspection points to the
Seller that will be witnessed by the Company, if any.
L. During the execution of the purchase order, manufacturing and quality control
procedures shall be available for reference by the Company or its representative at
the site.
M. Inspection release for work at site does not relieve the Seller of the responsibility
from complying completely with the requirements of this specification, except for
deviations specifically brought to the Company’s attention and specifically waived in
writing.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 6 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
N. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 year warranty started from final Testing and
commissioning.
The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this
O. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
are not accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product
at delivery to the site for inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate
of Origin, will result in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and the
Contractor shall submit the necessary paperwork and documents to the Engineer
and Client for approval prior to shipment.
P. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of
Q. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
R. The above conditions (O,P and Q items), shall superseded all other statements,
1.04 RELATED STANDARDS
A. Applicable standards and its amendments referred to in this Section:

1. IEC 61439-1:1999 LV switchgear and control gear assemblies.
2. IEC 60947-1:2000 LV switchgear & control gear-General Rules.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 7 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. IEC 60947-2:1999 Circuit breakers.

4. IEC 60947-3:1999 Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-
combination units.
5. IEC 60947-4:2000 Contactors and motor starters
6. IEC 60947-4-1: 2000 Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
7. IEC 185 Current Transformers
8. IEC 337-2: Control devices.
9. IEC 51 Indicating measuring instruments.
10. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
11. BS 88 Cartridge fuses.
12. BS 142 Electrical protective relays.
13. BS 159 Busbar & connections.
14. BS 37 Electricity meters-General
15. Local power supply Authority Requirements
B. For those parts of equipment, where no mention is made of the relevant standard,
reference is made to the latest IEC standards.
C. In a situation where a conflict occurs between these standards, the most stringent
shall be applied.
A. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 8 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchboards to provide protection from

weather, dirt, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside switchboards; install temporary cooling to
prevent condensation.
D. Packaging shall be labeled and numbered so that each section or assembly may be
identified upon arrival at the job site. Any items not fully assembled are to be
packaged separately.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installations Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the

following conditions, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 55 deg C.
2. Humidity: 90%
3. Operation temperature=40C (For indoor panels in a cooled room)
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 9 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other

construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
A detail for installation on raised floor systems shall be submitted to the engineer
for approval.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 10 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

B. Product shall be assembled and tested by Authorized Local Partner only
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide complete distribution equipment which shall include Main Switchboards

(MDB), & Sub-main Switchboards (SMDB).
2.03 MAIN SWITCHBOARDS (MDB)
A. General
1. The Main Switchboards shall be of indoor construction, dead front, metal
enclosed multi-cubicle type, free standing, dust and vermin protected, front
operated and of clean and modern appearances. IP rating shall be as follows:
IP31 for indoor applications, IP54 for Technical rooms and technical
services/attics, and IP65 for Outdoor areas.
2. The Main Switchboards shall be assembled and coordinated by one
manufacturer and shall be constructed to Form-4 Type 4 in accordance with the
requirements of IEC61439–1.
3. The Main Switchboards shall be made of folded steel construction; minimum
2mm thickness, fully rust proofed and stove enameled.
4. All exposed bolts or screw heads shall be chrome or cadmium plated.
5. All doors and removable covers or plates shall be provided with suitable PVC or
neoprene gaskets to prevent the ingress of dust, vermin and insects.
6. Each unit of the Main Switchboards shall be housed in its own cell fitted with a
hinged door.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 11 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
7. Adequate cableways shall be provided in the switchboard accessible by hinged

lids or removable covers.
8. The Main Switchboards shall have top or bottom cable entry as required. Cables
shall be installed with necessary cable glands.
9. The Main Switchboards shall contain the air circuits breakers, busbars, bus
couplers, MCCBs, instruments, etc.. Ratings and arrangement shall be designed
as shown on drawings.
10. The Main Switchboards shall be tested, at the manufacturer’s premises as well
as after installation in accordance with tests stipulated in IEC 61439-1 and
witnessed. TTA certificates by the manufacturer shall be submitted.
11. Each panel shall have its own DC Battery system to power the spring charger
motor of all motorized circuit breakers.
12. A light switch, lights and a convenience receptacle shall be provided inside each
outdoor enclosure. The bottom of the entire housing shall be undercoated with a
sealing material.
13. Structures shall be manufactured to allow for future expansion on either end as
practicable
14. Lifting angles shall be provided to facilitate installation.
15. Channel sills shall be provided to maintain rigidity of the structure during
shipment and positioned to serve as floor leveling members.
16. MIMIC BUS diagram shall be provided on the front side of the panel. This is
applicable for Main and Sub-Main Switchboards.
17. Switchboards should be Double ended panel.
18. Surge protection (SPD) shall be incluced and to follow the latest standards of
NEMA, NFPA, ANSI/UL
19. MDB input and Branch Draw out Breakers and SPD, to be connected to BMS
through BacNet.
20. MDB Power metering should be ModBus ready to be connected to BMS.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 12 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
21. Connection to MDB incomer/outgoing will be as shown on Power Single Ligne

Diagram (PSLD).
22. All lamps shall be LED type.
23. Doors shall be equipped with Mimic of power flow.
24. 10cm upstand with steel frame upstand when mounted on raised floor.
25. Back of all panels not facing the wall shall be powder coated with the same front
side color
B. Busbars
1. Busbars shall be of electrolytic hard drawn copper to B.S. 159 with rating as
indicated on the Drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non-
hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators so as to withstand forces due to thermal
expansion under normal operating conditions and the fault currents specified and
neatly arranged for 500 V, 50Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire operation.
2. Busbars shall extend through the length of the board with the same cross
section.
3. Busbars bracing shall maintain the same mechanical strength and current
carrying capacity under normal operating conditions and fault conditions as
indicated on the drawings.
4. Busbars shall be housed in separate adequately ventilated compartment, which
shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for connection
to busbars. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by
removal of covers secured by bolts or studs. Busbars shall be covered with
colored PVC sleeves or painted for phase identification.
5. Bus joints may be brazed or bolted. Bolts and associated hardware shall be of
non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant material.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 13 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. A copper ground bus extending the entire length of each SWBD assembly shall
be provided, and shall have compression type terminal lugs at each end for the
Company’s ground cable connections. The ground cables shall be either 120
mm2 or 300 mm2. All of the metal parts of the control center structure shall be
effectively connected to this bus. Ground bus shall be of rectangular cross
section, not less than 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) thick by 25.4 mm (1 inch) wide.
C. Air Circuit Breakers
1. The air circuit breakers shall be featuring the followings:
a. Shall be air break, trip free or Positive Trip, draw out type with the main
contacts encased in a reinforced polyester casing and offer double insulation
from the operators on the breaker front face.
b. Shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as defined in IEC 68.2.30 and shall have salt
spray resistance as per IEC 68.2.11.
c. Shall comply with IEC 947.2 utilization category B and shall accept reverse
feeding without reduction of performance.
d. Shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC 947.2 section
7.1.2 and shall have minimum 690V 50 Hz operational voltage, 1000 V 60
Hz rated insulation voltage and 12kV withstand surge voltage (Vimp).
e. 3-pole and 4-pole versions shall have ratings as shown in the drawings. In
the 4-pole version the neutral pole shall have the same current rating as the
other poles from the 800 to 4000A.
f. Breaking capacities shall not be less than 50 kA symmetrical for 1 sec. at

400 volt. Evidence of the service breaking capacity (Ics) shall be produced
by test certificates from a member of LOVAG, the internationally recognized
HV testing laboratories.
2. The operating mechanism shall be of the O-C-O stored energy spring type with a
closing time less than or equal to 80milliseconds. Electrically operated circuit
breakers shall have the spring charging motor connected so that the springs
remain charged always with the motor disconnected after charging. A standby
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 14 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
manual operating handle for spring charging shall be provided for operating the
circuit breaker in case of power or motor failure. Anti-pumping function shall be
provided by integral devices to prevent re-closing after a close-open operation if
the closing impulse is maintained after the breaker has opened.
3. Each ACB shall be provided with but not limited to the following components and
accessories:
a. auxiliary Contacts
b. arc Chutes
c. folding Extension Rail
d. charging Handle
e. open and Close Push-buttons
f. over Current Trip Indicator
g. key lock on Trip Button
h. Spring Charge Condition Indicator
i. breaker Position Indicator
j. making Current Release
k. automatic Shutters for the B/B Terminal
l. 2 Trolleys to be provided for each Power room
m. operation Counter
n. shunt trip mechanism.
4. The circuit breaker shall have three positions of the draw-out mechanism,
namely service position where all main and auxiliary contacts are made, test
position where main contacts are open but auxiliary contacts are closed and
isolated position where all contacts are open. Mechanical indication on the front
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 15 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
of the ACB shall be provided to indicate a) main contacts closed 'ON', b) main
contacts open 'OFF', c) springs charged, d) springs discharged e) service
position, f) test position, and g), isolated position for draw-out mechanism.
All main breakers shall have ON-OFF button cover with locking hole.
5. Any attempt to withdraw or insert the breaker when it is 'ON' shall trip the breaker
automatically. An interlocking shall be provided to prevent insertion of a circuit
breaker having a rating higher than the current rating of the ACB cradle.
6. Insulated safety shutters shall screen all live parts in the ACB cradle when the
breaker is in the isolated or racked out position.
7. The moving contacts comprising the main and arcing contacts shall have visual
wear indicator and be of the spring-loaded type. The main contacts and clusters
shall be site replaceable.
8. The circuit breakers shall have sufficient number of auxiliary contacts for
interlocking system. It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wirings from the
front face of the air circuit breakers and these wirings shall be taken through a
set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary wirings are automatically
disconnected in the isolated and draw-out positions.
9. The long time over-current protection shall have a setting range between 40 and
100 per cent of sensor rating in steps of 10%. The corresponding time delay shall
be adjustable from 3 to 140 seconds. The short time overcurrent protection shall
have a setting range from 1 to 10 times the sensor rating. The corresponding
time delay shall be adjustable from instantaneous to 750 milliseconds with a
possibility to select time inverse characteristic for improved discrimination. The
instantaneous over-current protection shall be adjustable from 1.5 times to 15
times rated current.
10. The ACB shall be equipped with a trip unit which shall have the following
functions:
a. The interrupted current & phase currents shall be displayable on the
ammeter. LED's on the front face shall indicate the type of fault.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 16 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. A maintenance indicator shall give an indication of the main contact wear

according to the number of operations.
c. The trip unit shall have thermal memory, which should in the event of
repeated overloads of faults memorize temperature rise by using thermal
integration. Internal overheating of the control unit shall be indicated by a
self-monitoring alarm.
11. The ACB used on the bus-section shall be identical to the ACB specified but
without any protection. It has the following indications:
a. Circuit breaker closed.
b. Circuit breaker open.
D. Current Transformers
1. Current transformer shall be of the bar primary type, air cooled and suitably
insulated. They shall be of Class 1 accuracy for measurements and of Class
10P10 accuracy for protection in accordance with IEC185. The secondary
windings shall be rated at 5A.
2. Current transformers shall have thermal and mechanical ratings and insulation
class not less than those of the associated circuit breakers.
E. Instruments
1. The measuring instruments shall include ammeters, voltmeters, power factor
meters, maximum demand indicators and selector switches and associated
accessories (such as measuring circuit protection) as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Measuring instruments shall be moving iron vane type, flush pattern with dust
and moisture-proof enclosures. The instruments shall have anti-glare glass
fronts, anti-parallax scales and white faces with black numerals and markings.
The instrument cases shall be semi-flush mounted. Accuracy shall be one per
cent of full-scale values. Moving elements shall be provided with zero
adjustments external to the cases, located at face of dial.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 17 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Ammeters shall be moving iron type, to BS 89 scaled in accordance to their

circuit breakers. Ammeters shall be capable of withstanding twice the rated
current for ten (10) minutes and overload sustained under fault conditions,
without damage or loss of accuracy.
4. Voltmeters shall be moving iron type to BS 90 scaled 0-500V and provided with
6-position selector switches allowing reading of line to line and line to neutral
voltages.
5. Voltmeters shall withstand twice the rated full-scale voltage, for 1.0minute,
without damage.
6. Digital indictors for above-mentioned measuring instruments shall be provided if
indicated.
7. Power Monitoring Unit: The unit shall be microprocessor- based and shall be
capable of measuring and indicating incomer currents on each phase, voltages
between phases and phase to neutral, active and reactive powers, power factor
and total energy consumed. The KWH meter reading shall be stored in password
protected non-volatile memory. The unit shall be mounted on the incomer cubicle
at a height not more than 1.6m from floor level. The backlit display unit shall be
high contrast type, having light emitting characters, of height not less than 15mm.
The unit shall work on the system voltage, without the need for any separate
auxiliary power. The function of power monitoring unit for remote indication and
alarm shall be included.
F. Meters
1. Kilowatt-hour meters shall be provided where shown on drawings. They shall be
dust and vermin proof and shall be of robust construction so that they will keep
their accuracy over many years of service under the local climatic conditions.
The counters shall be of the cyclometer type with six digits to give direct reading
of power consumptions, the lowest figure being units and not tenths of units.
Pointer type counters are not acceptable. The calibrating adjustment should be
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 18 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
operated by screwdriver only. Meters should have not less than 5-mm diameter
terminal holes and shall be operated through three suitably rated current
transformers and the counter of the meter should be calibrated to read the
primary KWH.
2. All Kilowatt-hour meters shall be equipped with a pulse output (equivalent to the
metered energy), to provide an energy consumption scheme at a remote control
and monitoring system.
G. Molded Case Circuit Breaker

1. The molded case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC60947-1 and IEC 60947-
2 standards quick make and quick break type free toggle mechanism of
utilization category 'A' having rated service breaking capacity (Ics), suitable for
isolation as per IEC 60947-2 The breaker shall be available in 3 or 4 pole
version. . Evidence of the service breaking capacity (Ics) shall be produced by
test certificates from a member of LOVAC, the internationally recognized HV
testing laboratories.
2. All MCCBs shall be factory tested by the manufacturer before dispatch and
routine test certificates shall be available. Random sampling test by the
manufacturer is not acceptable.
3. Breakers contacts shall be made of non-welding and non-corrodible composition.
Circuit breakers shall be actuated by a toggle or handle having ON/OFF/TRIP
markings such that the toggle or handle can only be in OFF position if the poles
are all actually separated. The breaker to be suitable to be equipped with a
locking device in the "isolated" position and there shall be a "push to trip" button
in front to test the operation and the opening of the poles.
4. Tripping Characteristic: Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping
characteristic with automatic release secured through action of a combination of
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 19 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units, tripping free the handle in case of an

overload or a short circuit.
5. Motor Mechanism: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where
applicable, with a motor mechanism of the stored energy type that could operate
in less than 100ms.
6. Residual Current Device: Circuit breakers shall be suitable to be equipped where
applicable, with a residual current device directly to the circuit breaker case and
shall operate without an auxiliary power supply. The add-on RCDs shall comply
with appendix B of IEC 947-2 standard.
7. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: MCCB with ratings up to 250A shall be
equipped with thermal magnetic or electronic trip units, which are fully
interchangeable. The MCCB over 250 A up to 630A frame size shall be equipped
with electronic trip units and shall sense the actual RMS values for the following
field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
8. Communication Capability: The Circuit-breaker shall be equipped with

communication module with functions and features compatible with power
monitoring and control system.
H. Earth Leakage Relays

1. General
a. The relay shall comply with IEC 60755-1983.
b. The relays shall be protected against nuisance tripping cause by switching

surges or by lightning surges.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 20 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. The relays shall be of solid state type (mechanical type shall not be
accepted).
d. Self-protected from high magnitude earth-faults and protected against dirt,

vibration and moisture.
e. The relays shall be able to operate in the presence of fault currents with DC
components.
f. Each relay shall accept a wide range of auxiliary supply voltages from 48V
to 240V AC and 48V to 300 V DC as per the requirement in the drawings.
g. The sensitivity of relays shall be adjustable as per the requirement in the

drawings. The relays shall have time delay option if required selectable in
eight steps from instantaneous to 1 sec.
h. The size of the relays shall be compact. They shall be suitable for mounting
on a symmetrical rail horizontally or vertically.
i. The relays shall be equipped with one changeover output contact. The
continuity of the measurement circuit shall be monitored to ensure that the
toroid circuit is not open.
2. Current Sensors (Toroids)

a. Shall be a rectangular type for bus-duct feeders
b. Shall be circular/ring type for cable feeders
c. The toroids shall be of the closed type with an inside diameter ranging from
30 to 200mm.
d. The toroids shall have cable guides to ensure that feeder cable is centered
within the toroid.
e. The maximum link resistance from the toroid to the relay must not exceed 3
ohms.
I. Protection Relays
1. Protection relays shall comply with BS 142.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 21 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Thermal overload relays shall be used for motors ratings, up to and including
11kW, giving protection against:
a. Over-current unbalance
b. Single phase
c. Earth fault
3. For motors rated above 11KW, multi-functional relays shall be used. Multi-
functional relays include protection, metering, control, monitoring and
annunciating functions. It is envisaged that the following functions are available.
a. Overload
b. Over-current
c. Single phase
d. Earth fault
e. Under voltage
f. Over voltage
4. Plus digital indication of:

a. Relay settings % of FLC that the motor is taking
b. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of motor
c. Thermal capacity used during start of motor
d. If tripped, how much time before restart to take place
e. Stall or short circuit trip
f. Earth fault trip
g. Starting
5. Documentary evidence must be produced, showing the current/time

characteristic of each overload at its setting (hot/cold for the thermal overload)
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 22 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
overlaid on the motor manufacturers thermal stability time/current characteristic,

for comparison. Consideration must be given as to the requested method of
starting (DOL, star delta, soft starter, VFD etc., All starting equipment shall be
weather proof minimum IP55 and capable of operation at 50°C without de-
rating).
6. All motor overload relays shall include a manual resetting facility above but
without protection.
K. Earth Bus
1. The earth bus shall be copper, minimum half the size of the main busbars
extending throughout the length of the switchboard and fixed to brass nuts
brazed to the steel members of the switchboards. The earth bus shall be
extended at the ends for connection to the earth electrodes and shall have
provision for terminating earth continuity conductors.
2.04 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS
A. General:
1. The sub-main switch boards shall comprise of main isolator, busbars, branch
circuit molded circuit breakers, ammeters, voltmeters, indicating lamps etc. all
housed in a sheet steel cabinet, rustproof stove enameled, equipped with a
hinged door fitted with a suitable locking device.
2. The switchboards shall be assembled taking into account the requirement of
sample space and adequate clearance to allow for wiring terminations and air
circulation to encounter heat dissipation.
3. Each panel shall have its own DC Battery system to power the spring charger
motor of all motorized circuit breakers.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 23 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Construction
1. The sub-main switch boards shall be floor standing, totally enclosed, cubicle
type, dust protected and vermin proof, containing the main components shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein. IP rating shall be as indicated on
drawings.
2. Switchboards shall be factory assembled and constructed to Form 2 type 2 in
accordance with IEC 61439-1, unless indicated otherwise elsewhere in the
Project Documents.
3. Cabinet to be suitable to withstand the fault current stresses available.
4. Cabinet to be constructed from sheet metal panels built up on main/ substantial
rolled steel or folded sheet steel sections framework.
5. Sheet metal for the buildup of large panels shall be not less than 16 SWG.
6. Access doors shall have concealed hinges, stops and interlocks where required,
and a dust excluding gasket contained in a rebate.
7. Door handles shall be the rotating type closing onto ramps, of approved pattern,
finished in a black, hard wearing non-conductive material.
8. Cabinet shall have adequate means for lifting and shall be capable of being
rolled or moved into the installation position and bolted directly to the floor.
9. Switchboards shall have necessary cut-outs, drillings and the point of entry of
feeders.
10. After fabrication, steelwork shall be cleaned; zinc sprayed and stove enameled
with one primer coat, two undercoats and one finishing coat, the surface being
rubbed down after each coat.
11. Breaker Type (fix, or draw out) shall be as shown on drawings
C. Components:
1. Components shall be the product of one manufacturer.
2. Switching and protective devices shall have clear on/off identification.
3. Components shall be labeled for easy identification.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 24 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Internal Wiring:
1. PVC insulated, color coded cables.
2. Factory installed, neatly bunched and supported and extended on to labeled
terminal boards for the connection of external services.
3. Terminals: anti-turn solder less type suitable for cable sizes shown on the
Drawings.
4. SWBD shall be furnished with provision for hardwire interlocks (i.e. vibration
switch) to be used by the EPC Contractor
5. SWBD compartments shall be wired in accordance with the drawings and this
specification. All control devices, interlocking contacts, and overload relay
contacts shall be wired on the ungrounded side of the operating coil of each
contactor.
6. Wire size shall be appropriate with the intended electrical duty and mechanical
requirements.
7. Power wiring shall be No. 4 mm2 minimum, control wiring shall be 600 volt, flame
retardant, type SIS, No. 2.5 mm2 minimum. Current transformer secondary
wiring shall be No. 6 mm2 (19/22 stranding) minimum, and terminated with ring-
tongue lugs. No PVC insulated cable shall be supplied.
8. All control wiring shall be wired out to terminal blocks. All spare contacts on
instruments or similar devices shall be wired to accessible terminal blocks for
external connection. Internal wiring shall have no splices in any circumstance,
nor shall more than two wires be terminated on one terminal point. Wiring
connections shall be made from the front of the SWBD.
9. There shall be a physical separation of at least three inches (76 mm) between
terminal blocks used for power leads and those used for control.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 25 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
10. Exposed wiring to all space heaters, lamps, lamp switches, and receptacles used
with outdoor enclosures shall be armored cable or insulated wires in electrical
metallic tubing or rigid conduit.
11. All devices shall be tagged with device name and wiring item number.
12. All internal cables shall be wire marked
G. Bus Bars:
1. Electro-tinned, hard drawn, high conductivity copper suitably sleeved for phase
identification.
2. Rating: as indicated on the Drawings.
3. To be adequately supported by porcelain or molded insulators spaced at suitable
centers so that the complete assembly can withstand the maximum mechanical
stresses to which it may be main/ subjected under fault conditions.
4. An earth bus bar, minimum half size of the main bus-bars, shall be provided for
the full length of each switchboard with each separate section of the board
bonded to it.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 26 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conform to the requirements of the local power supply authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Prior to energization of the switchboards, check with megger tester to ensure
requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations are fulfilled.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified
and required.
B. Label each switchboard with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplate mounted
with corrosion resistant screws.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory
authorized service representative to supervise the pre-testing and adjustment of
switchboard components.
B. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following
preparations for tests:
1. Make insulation resistance tests of switchboard buses, components, and
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits
2. Make continuity tests of circuits
C. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:
1. Program Objectives: To assure switchboard installation meets specified
requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, provides appropriate
protection for systems and equipment, and is suitable for energizing.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 27 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare switchboard for
satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
these specifications.
3. Schedule tests and notify at least one week in advance of test commencement
4. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report
defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments
and remedial efforts.
5. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, person responsible, and date.
6. Protective Device Ratings and Settings; verify indicated ratings and settings and
make the final system adjustments of Overcurrent Protection Devices.
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following Inspections and related
work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and
nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections.
2. Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection and
current transformers meet specified requirements.
3. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other
operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
4. Check switchboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of
components.
5. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
6. Clean switchboard interior and exterior-using manufacturer's approved methods
and materials.
7. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for Overcurrent
Protective Devices
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 28 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with

manufacturer’s instruction:
1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect
from solid state devices through normal disconnecting features.
2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
3. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
4. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of
control power elements including control power transformer and control power
wiring.
5. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.
6. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified for compliance.
7. Contractor shall conduct and submit IR scan for all Breakers at zero load (but
energized), at part load (50%), and at full load (100%).
8. Conduct and submit breaker discrimination study (showing all breakers settings).
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest

switchboards. Verify by the retests that switchboards meet specified requirements.
G. Testing:
1. All test reports shall be certified by the Manufacturer indicating their accuracy
and conformance with applicable codes and Contract requirements.
2. All tests conducted with proper regard for the protection of the Equipment, and
the Manufacturer shall be responsible for adequate protection of all personnel
during such tests.
3. Tests shall verify the ability of all Equipment to perform its intended functions
within the applicable tolerances such that when the Equipment is shipped and
correctly connected to external devices, the complete system is operable as
intended
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 29 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. The Equipment shall meet all the conditions of this Contract prior to acceptance
by the company.
5. The Manufacturer shall provide Equipment for all tests conducted.
6. Testing Shall be done according to specification 01 00 00 General Requirements
For testing and commissioning
3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of
finish to match original finish.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives
to demonstrate switchboards and train Employer's maintenance personnel.
3.06 NAMEPLATES AND WARNING SIGNS
1. MCC assemblies shall be labeled with a laminated white on black engraved

label, approximately 75 x 30 mm (3 x 2 1/4-inches), letters to be approximately
12 mm (1/2-inch) high. Each cell to be labeled with a laminated white-on-black
engraved label, letters shall be approximately 5 mm (1/4-inch) high. Each device
(relay, etc.) on the exterior of the apparatus shall be labeled, letters to be
approximately 5 mm (1/4-inch) high. All labels shall be fixed with screws
2. Company will provide nameplate lettering charts, which will show engraving
information for all nameplates. The Supplier shall furnish spare blank
nameplates of each size.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 30 of 31
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. A stainless steel nameplate showing the Manufacturer’s name, type, and

identification number, continuous current rating, bus bracing in asymmetrical
amperes, and maximum voltage rating shall be provided on each lineup.
4. Nameplates shall be provided where necessary to warn of live circuits for
operator safety.
5. Warning signs shall be provided on all starter compartment doors next to the L-
O-R switch. The sign shall state "WARNING – OPERATION IN LOCAL
POSITION DEFEATS ALL PROCESS INTERLOCKS".
END OF SECTION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 31 of 31
SECTION 26 24 16
PANEL BOARDS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 4

1.01 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 4
1.02 RELATED WORKS ...................................................................................................... 4
1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................... 4
1.04 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 5
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 7
1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................ 9
1.08 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................. 9
1.09 PACKAGING AND DELIVERY....................................................................................10
1.10 HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION .............................................................10
1.11 COORDINATION ..........................................................................................................11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................12
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ...................................................................................................12
2.02 MATERIALS ...............................................................................................................12
2.03 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................12
2.04 INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................12
2.05 CLEANING AND PAINTING .......................................................................................13
2.06 PANELBOARDS .........................................................................................................14
PART 3 – EXECUTION.............................................................................................................18
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION ...........................................................................18
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................18
3.03 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION ...................................................................19
3.04 CONNECTIONS .........................................................................................................19
3.05 IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................................................19
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................................19
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 2 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.07 CLEANING .................................................................................................................20

3.08 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................20
3.09 CORROSION PROTECTION/COATINGS ..................................................................20
3.10 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................20
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 3 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers the technical requirements for the design, furnishing, manufacturing,
shop testing, inspection, packaging, storage and handling, delivery and installation of the
following electrical Equipment:
1. Panelboards
2. Transformers
3. Breakers
4. Cabinets
B. All Manufacturers shall comply fully with the complete requirements of this standard
Specification. Any deviations must be clearly defined in the Proposal.
1.02 RELATED WORKS
A. General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of
Division 26.
1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The latest edition and published addenda of the following publications in effect on the date
of Contract Award are a part of this Specification and, where referred to by title or by basic
designation only, are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific reference:
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
PB 1 Panelboards
250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V Maximum)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
70E-2004 Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 4 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
67 Panelboards
94 Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances
489-09 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
E. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) British Standard (BS) European Norms
(EN)
IEC 60898/BS EN60898 Specification for circuit breakers for over-current protection
for household and similar installations.
IEC/BS EN61008-1-1996 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB) without integral
over-current protection for household and similar uses.
IEC/BS EN61009-1-1996 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCBO) with integral
over-current protection for household and similar uses.
IEC 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 2: Circuit-
breakers
IEC 60529 Degree of protection of enclosures.
F. In the event of any conflict between codes, or this Section & codes, the more stringent
applies
G. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in addition to
requirements, the recommendations shall be followed unless stated otherwise by this
specification
H. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of distribution board, over-current protective device,
accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each distribution board and related equipment.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 5 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for each type.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of distribution boards and over-current protective
devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over-
current protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
D. Distribution board Schedules: For installation in distribution boards. Submit final versions
after load balancing.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For distribution boards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain distribution boards, over-current protective devices,

components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 6 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to
the equipment.
C. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 year warranty started from final Testing and
commissioning.
shipment.
E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
documents.
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Panelboards
1. Provide circuit breaker panelboards as scheduled on the drawings.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 7 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Panelboards for 415 Volt AC Service: three-phase, three-wire service, with ambient
compensated thermal magnetic trip, bolt-on type circuit breakers having a minimum
interrupting capacity of 65,000 amperes symmetrical.
3. Panelboards for 415Y/240 Volt AC Service: three-phase, four-wire service, with
ambient compensated thermal magnetic trip, bolt-on type circuit breakers having a
minimum interrupting capacity of 14,000 amperes symmetrical.
4. Panelboards for 208Y/120 Volt AC Service: Three-phase, four-wire service, with
ambient compensated, thermal magnetic trip, bolt-on type circuit breakers having a
5. Panelboards for 240/120 Volt AC Service: Single-phase, three-wire service, with
ambient compensated, thermal magnetic trip, bolt-on type circuit breakers having a
6. Panelboards for DC Service: two-wire service, with ambient compensated, thermal
magnetic trip, bolt-on type circuit breakers having a minimum interrupting capacity of
22,000 amperes symmetrical unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
7. Panelboards: Copper main bus, isolated neutral bar with capability of bonding to
cabinet and a grounding bar bonded to the cabinet adjacent to the neutral bar.
Panelboards shall be initially designed to have 20% spare load capacity and 20%
spare circuit breakers and 10% space for future load additions.
8. Panelboards for feeding power, lighting and appliance loads shall be dead front with
main circuit breaker or main lugs type.
9. Use NEMA 3R galvanized cabinets in outdoor locations and NEMA 1, gasketed
cabinets in dry, indoor areas. Panelboards in corrosive environments including but
not limited to cooling tower and water treatment areas shall be NEMA 4X.
B. Circuit Breakers
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 8 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Provide molded case circuit breakers of the thermal-magnetic ambient-

compensating (to 50 degrees C) type. Panelboard main and branch circuit breakers
shall be molded case, bolt-on, quick-make quick-break type.
2. Provide ground fault current interrupting (GFCI) circuit breakers for 120 Volt, single-
phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle circuits where required by the latest issue of
the National Electrical Code (NEC).
3. Interrupting Ratings: In accordance with UL 489 test procedures, interrupting
ratings shall be more than the available fault current at the installed location.
4. Circuit breakers shall be in accordance with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
C. Transformers
1. Transformers: Indoor/outdoor dry type step down transformers, 415-415Y/240V
three phase, 415-240Y/120V three phase, or 415-240/120 single phase in
accordance with NEMA ST 20.
2. Provide indoor/outdoor dry type transformers in sizes and quantities as required to
serve lighting and small loads. Transformers shall be initially sized to have 20%
spare capacity for future load additions.
3. Transformers shall have Class H insulation and be factory tested for conformance
with the NEMA and ANSI standards for performance, and have a maximum noise
level in an anechoic test chamber as determined by NEMA Standards.
4. Maximum allowable temperature rise, as measured by resistance shall be 150 C
over an ambient of 50 C for Class H transformers. Four (4) 2-1/2 percent full
capacity taps, two above and two below normal voltage, to be provided on the high-
voltage (primary) windings.
1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet the requirements of the NEC and referenced standards.
1.08 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 9 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Panelboards: Supplied with a directory card mounted in a holder located on the inside of
the door, to be typewritten with the circuit identification.
B. Panelboard Identification: White laminated phenolic nameplate etched in 13 mm black
letters, mounted on the outside of the door with self-tapping screws including the following
information:
1. Panelboard name
2. Numerical designation
3. Operating voltage
C. Branch Circuit Numbering: Shown on the drawings based on standard-width, double-row
panelboards with distributed phase bussing.
1. Any 2 or 3 consecutive even or odd numbered circuits shall have different phase
connections for 3-phase, 4-wire panelboards.
1.09 PACKAGING AND DELIVERY
A. Packaging:
1. All Equipment shall be packaged to ensure cleanness and freedom from damage
during shipment, storage and installation.
2. Equipment openings shall be protected against entrance of dirt, dust, moisture or
other deleterious elements. Such surfaces as may be subject to corrosion or
oxidation shall be protected in accordance with Contractor's standards.
3. Crate, box, or otherwise prepare all items for shipment to prevent damage during
handling, shipping, and outdoor storage for a period of up to six months.
B. Delivery:
1. Where groups must be separated for shipment, all materials and Equipment
required to facilitate re-assembly and reconnection of interconnecting bus work and
wiring in the field shall be furnished.
1.10 HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 10 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Storage:
1. Prior to delivery, the Contractor shall identify to the Company in writing all special
storage and preventive maintenance requirements to be applied after receipt of
electrical equipment at the construction site.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting equipment he is to install from
mechanical damage, and for maintaining such equipment in a dry condition. The
latter may be accomplished by the use of space heaters where furnished with the
equipment, external lamps or other heat-producing sources, or by the application of
reduced voltage where practicable.
3. Preservation, packing, marking, and shipping shall be in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panel boards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 11 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
B. Distribution shall be assembled and tested by Authorized Local Partner only
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide non-combustible material used for barriers, covers, and the like meeting the
flammability test criteria of UL 94 for materials classed 94 V-O.
B. Do not use polyvinyl chloride (PVC) in any equipment, components, or insulations.
C. Flame-retardant materials shall be supplied as specified herein, which are self-
extinguishing and do not support combustion.
D. Construct cabinets of code-gage sheet steel, each with a hinged and gasketed door, for
surface or flush mounting, as indicated on the drawings.
2.03 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide panelboard cabinets equipped with thumb latches and pin-cylinder locks all keyed
alike.
B. Provide cabinets with no knockouts.
2.04 INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with the Manufacturer’s standard requirements.

B. The Contractor shall employ a quality plan.
C. The distribution equipment shall be factory Type-Tested Assembly (TTA). In situations
where certain steps of assembly need to take place outside the factory of the
manufacturer of the TTA conforming thereby to Clause 2.1.1.1 of the IEC 60439-1:1999,
prior approval would be necessary
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 12 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.05 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Internal Surfaces:
1. All internal surfaces shall be free of gross contaminants such as heavy deposits of
mill or heat-treating scale, oil, oxide films, slag, flux, weld splatter, dirt, metal chips,
and abrasive particles. Achievement of this criterion shall be determined by visual
inspection.
2. The Contractor’s cleaning plan shall assure that cleaning materials do not adversely
affect the surface or base metal in the cleaning, manufacturing, or operational
environments. Once obtained, the cleanliness level will be maintained during
subsequent manufacturing, shipping, and storage operations.
3. Mechanical, solvent, or chemical methods may be used subject to the following

restrictions:
a) Abrasive blasting shall not be used on surfaces containing areas where grit
can accumulate and not be readily removed by subsequent cleaning, rinsing,
or flushing operations.
b) Acid cleaning or pickling shall not be used where other cleaning methods are
sufficient. Specifically, nitric-hydrofluoric acid shall not be used on austenitic
stainless steel and other alloy surfaces, which may be sensitized after welding
or improper heat treatment.
c) Chlorinated cleaning materials shall not be used on stainless steel or nickel
base alloy surfaces. In addition, only alkaline cleaners and water shall be
used on ferrous and nickel based alloy surfaces containing areas in which
cleaning materials may collect and not be removed by subsequent cleaning,
rinsing, or flushing.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 13 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Internal surfaces, which rust, shall be protected against corrosion during shipment,
storage, and installation with a protective coating which shall be removable using a
water flush and shall present no disposal problems after removal.
B. External Surfaces:
1. External surfaces shall be smooth and free of gross contaminants such as heavy
scale, rust, sand, blisters, weld splatter, metal chips, and heavy deposits of oil or
grease.
2. External surfaces, with the exception of stainless steel or machined flange surfaces
shall be given a shop coat of corrosion-resistant paint capable of withstanding
temperatures to the design temperature +50°F without loss of its protective integrity.
3. Machined flange surfaces shall be protected against corrosion during shipment,
storage, and installation with the application of one (1) coat of a water-soluble, rust-
inhibiting coating.
C. Finish color of control panels and cabinets inside and outside shall be former ANSI #61,
light gray.
D. Touch-up paint, in a quantity equivalent to one-quarter pint per linear foot of exterior
control cabinet or panel surface (from the same lot or batch of paint as used on the control
cabinets and panels) shall be shipped with the control cabinets and panels.
2.06 PANELBOARDS
A. PanelBoards feeding lights, fans, sockets outlets and other appliances:

1. To be totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof, recess mounting type,
containing all the necessary switching and protective devices, busbars and molded
circuit neutral connector block.
B. Cabinet:
1. Construction: robust sheet steel, fully rust proofed and stove enameled.
2. Cabinet shall have a hinged door fitted with a lock and key.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 14 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. The cabinet shall be constructed so that it is necessary to open the door to operate
miniature circuit breakers. Access to interior components and internal wiring shall be
gained by dismantling and removing a separate barrier within the enclosure.
C. Bus Bars:
1. To be of appropriate current carrying capacity at least equal to the rating of the main
incoming MCCB isolator.
2. To be copper.
D. Molded Circuit Neutral & Earth Connector Block:
1. To be of ample size to ensure a separate way is available on the connector block for
the neutral & earth conductor of each circuit.
E. Miniature Circuit Breakers:
1. MCB shall comply with IEC 947-2 or IEC 60898 and shall be symmetrical rail
mounted type available in one, two, three or four poles version.
2. They shall be trip free type with quick make and quick break mechanism.
3. The rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB's shall be at least equal to the
prospective fault level at the point of the distribution system where they are installed.
4. The minimum rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCB shall be 10kA if not
5. It shall be possible to reverse feed the MCB without reduction in performance.
6. Trip ratings as indicated on the schedules of points.
7. The MCB shall have thermal overload trip to accept 5% overload and to trip at 30%
of rated current as per IEC 947-2. They shall have an operating temperature from -5
to +60 C.
8. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall operate at 5 to 10 times the rated current for
1P, 2P, 3P or 4P breakers, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
9. It shall be possible to replace 3 single-phase units with one 3-phase unit.
10. The breakers shall be of DIN type.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 15 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
11. Evidence of the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) shall be produced by test
certificates from one of the internationally recognized High Voltage Laboratories
(ASTA, CESI, ESEF/ASEFA, KEMA, or PEHLA).
12. The operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle
so as to prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit and
overload conditions. It shall be "automatic resetting type".
13. All final distribution MCBs shall have curve C tripping characteristics.
14. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection
and magnetic element for short circuit protection.
15. Current discriminations tables shall be provided for each rating of the breaker.
16. The terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP-20) in order to minimize the risk of
direct contact.
17. It shall be possible to fit at the site auxiliaries like shunt trip coil, under voltage
release, ON-OFF switch, alarm switch or residual current device 30 or 300 mA with
remote tripping possibility.
G. Over Current Protective Device:
1. Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload (RCBO)
2. RCBO shall comply with IEC 61009-1-1996.
3. RCBO shall have 10kA breaking capacity as a minimum.
4. Test push button shall be incorporated to verify breaker operation.
H. Residual Current Circuit Breaker
1. RCCB shall comply with CEE 227 or IEC 61008-1-1996 standards. The RCCB shall
provide the functions of isolation, switching and earth leakage protection of electrical
circuits. They shall have a residual current operated electromechanical release,
which operates, without auxiliary source of supply to an earth leakage fault between
active conductor and earth. RCCBs shall incorporate a filtering device preventing
the risk of unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. They shall provide a high
degree of protection against earth faults, fire hazards and electric shock.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 16 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. RCCBs shall be available in 2 and 4 pole versions with current ratings from 16A to
100A and an earth leakage trip rating as specified in the schedule of points. They
shall be suitable for operation on 415V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply. They shall
have an operating temperature from -5 to +60 C. RCCB shall have a trip indication
on the front face by a red mark. It shall be possible to achieve vertical discrimination
with RCCBs.
3. RCCB alone shall have a short circuit withstand capacity of 10 kA. RCCB must be
protected with short circuit protective devices installed upstream.
4. RCCB shall consist of the following parts mounted in a robust body of all insulated
material:
a. A current transformer
b. A tripping coil with contact assembly
c. Main supply contact
d. On/off switch
e. A test button
f. A trip free mechanism
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 17 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall perform a visual inspection for damage upon receipt and prior to
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical installations shall be in accordance with the latest issue of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70.
B. Cabinets:
1. Mount the cabinets rigidly and with proper alignment on the building structure with
the top of the cabinet 2 meters above the finished floor. Install the cabinet interior
after all conduit connections are completed. Close unused cabinet openings per the
requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70.
2. Install all surface mounted cabinets at least 25 mm off the wall. Use steel supports
fabricated from standard rolled structural steel shapes, or prefabricated structural
systems manufactured by Kindort Electrical Products Co. or Unistrut Corporation.
Install supports in such a manner as to not block the vertical flow of air in back of the
cabinet.
C. Flush Mounted Panelboards: Extend from each flush mounted panelboard a 19 mm
empty conduit into an accessible location for every three spare branch breakers and
spaces.
D. Set all adjustable instantaneous trips to minimum, unless indicated otherwise.
E. Transformers:
1. Install transformers in an approved workmanlike manner in accordance with the
drawings and Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Enclose primary and secondary connections to transformers in flexible metallic
conduit from the frame of the transformer or its terminal compartment.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 18 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.03 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Distribution board shall be flush mounted/surface mounted to suit the situation and as
directed at site. They shall be installed with the vertical sides plumb and the top of
Distribution Board at 180cm above finished floor level or as directed.
B. The boards shall be properly earthed by connecting an earthing conductor from the main
distribution earth bus bar to an earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing
bushings on the incoming and outgoing feeder circuits.
C. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
D. Stub four 25mm empty conduits from distribution board into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 25mm empty conduits into
raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
E. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after
completing load balancing.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing distribution board
loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory;
handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Distribution board Nameplates: Label each distribution board with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 19 of 20
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each distribution board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3.07 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish
3.08 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment in a neat manner using competent individuals in
complete accordance with the drawings and the Equipment Manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations.
3.09 CORROSION PROTECTION/COATINGS
A. Following installation, touch up all scratched or marred areas of manufacturer’s primed or

finished paint. Use the same paint as manufacturer’s original finish or prime paint with
surface preparation and paint application in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Equipment shall be protected against damage including weather damage during storage.
END OF SECTION
Volume 2: Section 4
Page 20 of 20
SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
I. SCOPE ................................................................................................................................... 3
II. CODES AND STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 3
III. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 5
IV. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES ...................................................................... 6
4.01 STRUCTURES ............................................................................................................... 6
4.02 SPACE HEATERS ......................................................................................................... 7
4.03 CONTROL WIRING. ...................................................................................................... 8
4.04 COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................. 8
4.05 NAMEPLATES AND WARNING SIGNS: .......................................................................15
4.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS: ....................................................................................................16
4.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: .....................................................................................16
4.08 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES....................................................................16
4.09 CLEANING, PACKAGING, AND SHIPPING..................................................................17
V. TESTING ..............................................................................................................................18
VI. SPARE PARTS ...................................................................................................................19
VII. QUALITY ASSURANCE .....................................................................................................20
7.1 SUBMITTALS..................................................................................................................21

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
I. SCOPE
A. This engineering standard is applicable to the technical requirements, for the design,
manufacture, and delivery of Low Voltage Motor Control Centers.
II. CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The latest edition and published addenda of the following publications in effect on the date
of Contract Award are a part of this Specification.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
1. C57.13, "Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers"
C. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. ICS 1, "General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems"
2. ICS 2, "Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000
Volts AC or 750 Volt DC for Industrial Control and Systems"
3. ICS 3, "Factory Built Assemblies for Industrial Control and Systems"
4. ICS 4, "Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use"
5. ICS 5, "Control Circuit and Pilot Devices for Industrial Control and Systems"
6. ICS 6, "Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems"
7. ICS 18, “Motor Control Centers”
8. PB 1, "Panelboards"
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, “National Electrical Code.”
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. 67, "UL Standard for Safety Panelboards"
2. 94, "UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability for Plastic Materials for Parts in
Devices"
3. 489, "UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures"
4. 508, "UL Standard for Safety Standards for Industrial Control Equipment"

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. 845, "UL Standard for Safety Motor Control Centers"

F. Where the above referenced codes, standards, and guides contain recommendations in
addition to requirements, the recommendations shall be considered requirements and shall
be followed, unless stated otherwise by this Specification.
G. In case of any conflict between the reference codes, or this Specification and codes, the
more stringent applies.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
III. GENERAL
A. All Suppliers shall comply fully with the complete requirements of this standard specification
and the Contract documents, which are to be used in tandem. Any deviations shall be
clearly defined in the Proposal.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
IV. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
4.01 STRUCTURES
A. The MCCs shall be rated per the drawings.

B. All motors above 15HP earth leakage protection with shunt trip shall be provided
individually for each motror
C. Each vertical section shall be fabricated from not less than 12 gauge (2.7 mm) steel.
D. Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead front, freestanding assemblies. Structures shall
contain a horizontal wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus, and shall be
readily accessible through a hinged cover. Adequate space for incoming and outgoing
cables, conduit and wiring to enter either the top or bottom shall be provided without
structural interference.
E. Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar and distributed throughout
whole motor control center.
F. Earth copper busbars minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full length of motor control center.
G. One voltmeter with commutator, range 0-415 V.
H. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as for terminating incoming supply cables
and isolating the busbar system
I. Ammeters on main supply with necessary current transformers.
J. Busbars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum possible short circuit
current.
K. Compartments for mounting control units shall be incrementally arranged such that not
more than six (6) size 1 starters for front mounting can be mounted within each vertical
structure.
L. A vertical wireway with adequate cross sectional area shall be adjacent to each vertical unit
and shall be covered by a hinged door. Wireways shall contain steel rod cable supports.
M. All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 4 shall be of the drawout type. Draw-out
provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure
alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall have a tin-plated stab

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to these stabs shall extend into the
bus compartment. All draw-out units shall be secured by spring-loaded fastening devices.
N. Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual hinged front door. Interior of all
units shall be painted white for increased visibility.
O. Indoor service enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1A gasketed.
P. Outdoor service enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1A gasketed, installed in an overall NEMA
Type 3R walk-in weatherproof housing or the MCC shall be installed in pre-fabricated
electrical building.
Q. A light switch, lights and a convenience receptacle shall be provided inside each outdoor
enclosure. The bottom of the entire housing shall be undercoated with a sealing material.
R. The MCCs shall be of the NEMA class 2 with class 2B wiring.
S. Where back against back arrangement is specified, MCCs shall be furnished with
connecting buses between the two sections.
T. Structures shall be manufactured to allow for future expansion on either end as practicable.
U. Lifting angles shall be provided to facilitate installation.
V. Channel sills shall be provided to maintain rigidity of the structure during shipment and
positioned to serve as floor leveling members.
4.02 Space Heaters (IF required)

A. Each MCC shall be furnished with a dry type distribution transformer and panelboard to
feed all vertical section and motor space heaters. The electrical rating of the distribution
transformer and panelboard shall be in 15 kVA at a minimum. Branch circuit breaker rating
and quantity of each rating shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's standard.
B. Space heaters shall be provided in each MCC vertical section. Vertical section space
heaters shall be of the low temperature type, thermostatically controlled, and rated at 120-
volt AC. Each heater shall have a single-pole circuit breaker. The heater shall be of
adequate size to maintain the air temperature above the dew point.
C. The Supplier shall provide MCC compartment terminal point wiring for motor space heater
circuits. This shall consist of the line connection terminal points for the 120-volt AC power
source and load connection terminal points for the motor space heater wiring. Provide

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
circuit breaker and compression type connectors for connection to external 120-volt AC
power source. Provide internal 120-volt AC power bus to supply each motor space heater.
4.03 Control Wiring.

A. MCC shall be furnished with provision for hardwire interlocks (i.e. vibration switch) to be
used by the EPC Contractor.
B. MCC compartments shall be wired in accordance with the drawings and this specification.
All control devices, interlocking contacts, and overload relay contacts shall be wired on the
ungrounded side of the operating coil of each contactor.
C. Wire size shall be appropriate with the intended electrical duty and mechanical
requirements.
D. Power wiring shall be No. 4 mm2 minimum, control wiring shall be 600 volt, flame retardant,
type SIS, No. 2.5 mm2 minimum. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be No. 6 mm 2
(19/22 stranding) minimum, and terminated with ring-tongue lugs. No PVC insulated cable
shall be supplied.
E. All control wiring shall be wired out to terminal blocks. All spare contacts on instruments or
similar devices shall be wired to accessible terminal blocks for external connection. Internal
wiring shall have no splices in any circumstance, nor shall more than two wires be
terminated on one terminal point. Wiring connections shall be made from the front of the
MCC.
F. There shall be a physical separation of at least three inches (76 mm) between terminal
blocks used for power leads and those used for control.
G. Exposed wiring to all space heaters, lamps, lamp switches, and receptacles used with
outdoor enclosures shall be armored cable or insulated wires in electrical metallic tubing or
rigid conduit.
H. All devices shall be tagged with device name and wiring item number.
I. All internal cables shall be wire marked.
4.04 Components
The MCCs shall contain motor control and feeder units as indicated on the drawings.
A. Starter Units

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Starters shall be NEMA Size 1 or larger.

2. Starters shall be of the combination type, using molded case circuit breakers and
magnetic contactors.
3. All components and wiring shall be readily accessible for ease of maintenance.
4. Starter units shall provide for connection to the bus by means of self-aligning tin-plated
connectors having free floating spring construction so as to ensure a positive contact
with both sides of the bus.
5. The design of the starters shall include provisions for accurately guiding the units from
the disconnected or withdrawn position to the connected position and positively prevent
mis-stabbing.
6. All similar devices and components shall be of one Manufacturer to facilitate
maintenance and repair.
7. Starter units size 4 and larger shall be equipped with ground fault protection.
8. Dial adjustable setting for full load amps.
9. Starters for three phase motors to be magnetic type to automatically disconnect motor
from power supply in case of supply failure, excessive voltage drop, overcurrent and
lack of balance in phases. Overload trips to be provided for three phases.
10. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor starter, or
check motor nameplate for full load current rating and allowable temperature rise in
order to select proper overload thermal element for motor starter.
11. Short circuit protection device fitted to starter to be independent of controller and
overload protection.
12. Control Circuit Protection: Use high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.
13. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively
isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator..
14. Control devices on starters to be as follows unless otherwise indicated or required by
driven equipment: start stop push buttons, one red pilot light for "running", one group
pilot light for "stopped" and one reset push button.
15. All motors more than 1HP shall have starter inside the MCC.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
16. Starter type A for single phase motors not exceeding 1/2 HP to be surface or flush
mounted, manual two pole toggle type, for non reversing across the line starting, fitted
with one overload element.
17. Starter type B for three phase motors not exceeding 10 HP to be direct on line, non
reversing, magnetic type, with manual reset, 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
18. Starter type C for three phase motors over 10 HP, but not exceeding 50 HP, to be
automatic star delta magnetic non reversing type, with 3 pole overload relay and low
voltage protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
19. Starter type D for three phase motors over 50 HP to be multiple step auto transformer
non reversing magnetic type, with 3 pole overload relay, under voltage protection,
unless otherwise required by local regulations. Auto transformer to be dry type, Class F
insulation, Class B temperature rise over ambient temperature. Starter to be suitable
for 15 starts per hour repeated after 2 hours for motors up to 200 HP and 3 starts per
hour repated after one hour for motors over 200 HP.
20. Starter to comprise molded case motor circuit protector (with magnetic trip only) for
short circuit protection. Starter to be rated for 125% of the continuous current rating of
the motor. Short circuit rating of start to be at least 110% of the short circuit level at
starter location, or as indicated in the motor control centre schedules. Soft starters for
pumps to comprise smooth soft facility for linear voltage deceleration with adjustable
deceleration time.
21. Individually mounted starters to be totally enclosed in sheet steel enclosure with baked
enamel finish. Design is to suit location and application. It is to be impossible to open
enclosure door unless isolator is in open position.
22. Nameplates: Starters and controls to have engraved nameplates identifying system or
defining its function.
23. Contactors: Comply with IEC 60947-4, utilization category AC3, and be 3-phase, 4-
pole, magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated
current inductive or non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to
have replaceable main arcing contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to
withstand, without welding or burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal
rating for 4 seconds upon closing and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest
short-circuit of the system and withstand the short-circuit for period required by

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
upstream short-circuit protective device to operate. Three N.O. and three N.C. spare
contacts are to be provided on each contactor.
24. Starter Co-Ordination: Motor starter devices shall be of type 2 co-ordination to IEC
609474-1
25. The drive shall include MODBUS RTU, BacNet, Ethernet IP or [ModBus TCP
communication protocols
26. Electronic Solid State Reduced Voltage Motor Soft Starter" to be UL listed, consisting
of silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) based power section, digital logic board and
paralleling bypass contactor to provide smooth, step less acceleration for AC, 3-phase,
400 V, 60 Hz induction motors. The minimum peak inverse voltage rating of the SCR's
to be 1500 V. Contactor to be rated for full voltage across the line motor starting duty.
Starter enclosure to be NEMA 12 for indoor installation and NEMA 3 for installations in
wet and outdoor areas and provided with necessary ventilation fans. starter to be
incorporated within motor control centre. The starter is to provide the following
protections and adjustments:
a) Adjustable electronic overload
b) Overhead protection for the starter
c) Phase sequence protection
d) Phase loss/unbalance protection
e) Undervoltage protection
f) Ramp time
g) Initial torque
h) Start current limit
i) Motor full load current
B. Control Power Transformers

1. Each starter unit shall be equipped with a control transformer. Minimum sizes of
control power transformers shall be 100 volt-amperes for starter size 1, 150 volt-
amperes for starter size 2, and 250 volt-amperes for starter size 3 and larger. Control
power transformers shall be fused on one secondary terminal side, the other
secondary terminal side shall be grounded.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Control power transformer primary shall be 480V and secondary voltage shall be 120V.
C. Magnetic Contactors:
1. Magnetic contactors for all 3-phase motor control units shall be equipped with three bi-
metallic, ambient compensated overload relays or a solid state overload relay.
2. Contactors for electric heater loads shall not be equipped with overload relays.
3. Contactors shall be capable of closing when a minimum of 80 percent nominal voltage
is applied to the primary of the control transformer.
4. All contactors shall be equipped with a minimum of six reversible auxiliary contacts.
D. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case type rated for 55C ambient temperatures
in free air.
2. Incoming main circuit breakers for MCCs if provided shall be single throw, with inverse-
time, thermal and magnetic element overload protection, and trip-free mechanism.
3. Circuit breakers for motor starter units shall be single throw, magnetic only type, with
adjustable instantaneous trip elements and trip-free mechanism.
4. Circuit breakers for feeder circuits shall be single throw, with inverse time, thermal and
magnetic element overload protection and trip-free mechanism. They shall be
provided in removable units with bus connectors and guides the same as described for
starter units.
5. Circuit breakers shall have the interrupting capacities for the unit starter assembly as
6. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with external operating handles with “Open”,
“Close”, and “Trip” indications. Means shall be provided to lock the handle in the
“Open” position with padlocks. It shall not be possible to open the compartment door
with the circuit breaker in the closed position, except by actuating a defeat mechanism.
7. Circuit breakers rated 250 Amps and larger shall be equipped with ground fault
protection.
E. Buses:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Power shall be distributed to the control units by means of horizontal and vertical
buses. The horizontal and vertical buses shall be rated as indicated on the drawings.
Vertical buses shall have ample current capacity in excess of the total load connected
to them. All bus connections and contact surfaces for connections to control units shall
be tin-plated.
2. Power buses shall be constructed of high conductivity copper, with insulated supports
designed to withstand the maximum available short circuit current as indicated on the
drawings. Buses shall not be tapered.
3. Bus joints may be brazed or bolted. Bolts and associated hardware shall be of non-
magnetic, corrosion-resistant material.
4. A copper ground bus extending the entire length of each MCC assembly shall be
provided, and shall have compression type terminal lugs at each end for the Client’s
ground cable connections. The ground cables shall be either 120 mm2 or 300 mm2. All
of the metal parts of the control center structure shall be effectively connected to this
bus. Ground bus shall be of rectangular cross section, not less than 6.35 mm (1/4
inch) thick by 25.4 mm (1 inch) wide.
F. Motor Control Panels:
1. Type: Wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, IP 42 for indoor installation.
2. Construction: Minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one
coat etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally.
3. Panels installed outdoors and in wet areas to have weatherproof totally sealed water
and dustproof IP 55 enclosures.
4. Components: Panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, push button
switches, selector switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock
wiring and all devices and accessories required for automatic or manual operation of
equipment as specified under equipment concerned.
5. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in
English as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each
component.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on

inside of panel door. Diagrams are to show each component cross referenced with
component labels.
G. Control Switches:
1. Float Switch: Level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for
application in open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two
stops, floor mounting stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust
tight enclosure and 2 pole double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise.
2. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for water
service, with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm². Switch
to be good for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom
connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw
contacts and setting adjustment.
3. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated
type, suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at
factory to 3 kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm
pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole
double throw contacts, range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut.
H. Automatic Transfer Switch(es) (if required)
1. The Supplier shall size and locate Automatic Transfer Switch(es) within the MCCs.
2. Automatic Transfer Switch(es) shall consist of an inherently double-throw power
transfer switch unit and a control module interconnected to provide complete automatic
operation.
3. The Automatic Transfer Switch contact transfer time in either direction shall not exceed
one-sixth (1/6) of a second.
4. A manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes.
5. The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or

momentary outages so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and
temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
7. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible
positions - "Normal" or "Alternate".
8. All main contacts shall be silver plated copper. Switches rated 600 amperes and
above shall have segmented, blown-on construction for high withstand current
capability and shall be protected by separate arcing contacts. Contacts shall be the
type intended for continuous duty and repetitive switching or transfer between two
active power sources.
9. If a neutral bus is required, the switch(es) shall be provided with fully-rated, overlapping
neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources
shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation. They
shall remain connected together until the power source contacts close on the source.
Overlapping neutral transfer contacts shall not overlap for a time duration greater than
100 milliseconds.
10. Sensing and control relays shall be continuous duty industrial control type with a
minimum contact rating of 10 amperes.
11. The transfer switch(es) shall be equipped with two (2) form “C” dry auxiliary contacts to
allow for connection by to verify the transfer switch position.
4.05 NAMEPLATES AND WARNING SIGNS:
A. MCC assemblies shall be labeled with a laminated white on black engraved label,
approximately 75 x 30 mm (3 x 2 1/4-inches), letters to be approximately 12 mm (1/2-inch)
high. Each cell to be labeled with a laminated white-on-black engraved label, letters shall
be approximately 5 mm (1/4-inch) high. Each device (relay, etc.) on the exterior of the
apparatus shall be labeled, letters to be approximately 5 mm (1/4-inch) high. All labels shall
be fixed with screws.
B. Client will provide nameplate lettering charts, which will show engraving information for all
nameplates. The Supplier shall furnish spare blank nameplates of each size.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. A stainless steel nameplate showing the Manufacturer’s name, type, and identification
number, continuous current rating, bus bracing in asymmetrical amperes, and maximum
voltage rating shall be provided on each lineup.
D. Nameplates shall be provided where necessary to warn of live circuits for operator safety.
E. Warning signs shall be provided on all starter compartment doors next to the L-O-R switch.
The sign shall state "WARNING – OPERATION IN LOCAL POSITION DEFEATS ALL
PROCESS INTERLOCKS".
4.06 Terminal Blocks:

A. Terminal blocks for all external control connections shall be 600 volt, barrier type, having a
minimum rating of 20 amperes, with marker strips identifying all internal and external wiring.
B. Terminal blocks shall have at least 25 percent spare terminals and shall be in accordance
with NEMA ICS 4.
C. Terminal blocks for current transformer secondary connections shall be of the short-
circuiting type.
4.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. The quantity and ratio of current transformers will be shown on the drawings.
B. Current transformers shall have thermal and mechanical ratings and insulation class not
less than those of the associated circuit breakers.
4.08 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES
A. Control Equipment:
1. Pushbuttons, control switches, indicating lamps, relays, timers, and other accessory
devices required for proper operation of the equipment, as indicated in this
specification, shall be furnished by the Supplier.
2. Indicating lamps shall be LED type.
3. Relays shall be rated for operation at the control transformer secondary voltage and
shall be compatible with the control schematics.
4. Time delay relays are to be of the solid state type or pneumatic.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Interposing relays shall be provided for each starter unit as required.

6. Transducers shall be of the self-powered type, having an output as indicated on the
drawings. Transducer accuracy shall be 0.2% minimum.
B. Power Transformers:
1. Transformers required for distribution panels shall be of the dry type, with class H
insulation, and rated for 150°C rise.
4.09 CLEANING, PACKAGING, AND SHIPPING
A. Steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and properly prepared, followed by the
Supplier's standard painting procedure.
B. Equipment to be provided in dust and moisture impervious shrouding to ensure protection
from transit damage and exposure to weather.
C. Packaging shall be labeled and numbered so that each section or assembly may be
identified upon arrival at the job site. Any items not fully assembled are to be packaged
separately.
D. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated
E. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor control centers. Provide temporary
heaters as required to prevent condensation.
F. Handle motor control centers according to Standards recommendations. Use factory-
installed lifting provisions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
V. TESTING
A. Perform the standard tests called for in NEMA ICS 1 and as follows:
1. Mechanical operation tests to ensure proper functioning and interchangeability.
2. Control wiring correctness, continuity checks and polarity check where applicable.
3. A 60 Hz one minute high potential test on all devices and circuits of each MCC except
for certain low voltage and solid state equipment noted in NEMA ICS 1.
B. All inspection/tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and trial operation shall
be in accordance with applicable codes and standard requirements. Where no standard is
available, tests shall be carried out in accordance with Manufacturer’s standard, subject to
prior approval of the Client. The Manufacturer is required to develop an inspection and test
plan to document required testing.
C. The information given on test records, test certificates and performance details shall be
sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers. Certificates
D. These tests shall be carried out for different equipment, material and systems prior to and
during commissioning of the equipment. Testing, inspection, and acceptance criteria shall
adhere to applicable codes and standards as specified in Section 1.3.
E. The Client shall have free access to the Manufacturer’s facility during the design,
fabrication, and testing of the Equipment covered by this Specification. The Manufacturer
shall make the necessary arrangements to provide access. Any inspection by the Client
shall not be considered a waiver of any warranty or other rights.
F. The Client may or may not elect to witness tests, but the Manufacturer shall notify the Client
at least 15 days in advance of all scheduled tests.
G. The Manufacturer shall record all test values of tests performed by the Manufacturer on all
Equipment, giving both “as found” and “as left” conditions.
H. All test reports shall be certified by the Manufacturer indicating their accuracy and
conformance with applicable codes and Contract requirements.
I. All tests conducted with proper regard for the protection of the Equipment, and the
Manufacturer shall be responsible for adequate protection of all personnel during such
tests.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. Tests shall verify the ability of all Equipment to perform its intended functions within the
applicable tolerances such that when the Equipment is shipped and correctly connected to
external devices, the complete system is operable as intended.
K. The Equipment shall meet all the conditions of this Contract prior to acceptance by the
Client.
L. The Manufacturer shall provide Equipment for all tests conducted.
VI. SPARE PARTS

A. Along with the equipment specified above, the Supplier shall provide individual prices for
normally supplied spare parts in the Proposal. The spare parts may be purchased with the
order.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
VII. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Seller shall follow their standard procedures for quality assurance and control. Seller’s
standard QA Manual shall be submitted in both electronic and hard copy for review and
should be in such a form as to enable an assessment to be made of the manufacturing
sequence and inspection set up and other control procedures.
B. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source, including
the client name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the request of the
Client, the Seller shall furnish to the Client satisfactory evidence of the quality of the work
being performed. Such evidence, at the discretion of the Client, shall consist of any or all of
the following:
C. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications.
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier including history
with the sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time delivery.
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Client to verify the quality and
acceptability of the sub-supplier.
D. As a minimum, the following shall be provided:
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing relationship to other
groups.
E. After award of purchase order, the Client will identify the inspection points to the Seller that
will be witnessed by the Client, if any.
F. During the execution of the purchase order, manufacturing and quality control procedures
shall be available for reference by the Client or its representative at the site.
G. Inspection release for work at site does not relieve the Seller of the responsibility from
specifically brought to the Client’s attention and specifically waived in writing.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this
I. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 year warranty started from final Testing and
commissioning.
J. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and delays to the project associated
with the product delivery. In exceptional cases, Contractor shall submit the necessary
paperwork and documents to the Engineer and Client for approval prior to shipment.
K. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
L. All products shall be rated to work under 55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions without
any derating to the capacity.
M. The above conditions (J,K and L items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.
7.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and components.
B. For Variable Frequency Drives: Submit manufacturer's performance data including
dimensional drawings, customer connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, installation
and maintenance manuals, warranty description, VFDs FLA rating, certification agency file
numbers and catalogue information.
C. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center, and prior to ordering
materials and equipment, specified in this Section. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
and component lists. Show ratings, including short time and short-circuit ratings, and
horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Complete technical schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings

on all motor starters, motor protection relays, sensing units, control accessories, etc.
2. Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers and panels.
3. Installation details of motor control centers and panels and of control and sensing
accessories.
4. Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits.
5. Feeder termination details at motor control centers, starters, motors, isolating switches,
control and sensing accessories etc.
6. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams (of all power and control circuits)
pertinent to class and type specified for motor control center. Schematic diagram of
each type of controller unit indicated.
7. Wiring Diagrams: Submit for approval detailed control wiring diagrams and a list of
control equipment with descriptive literature.
8. Free hand field wiring diagrams or sketches will not be accepted.

SECTION 26 26 00
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................... 4
1.5 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................ 4
PART 2 – PRODUCT .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER .................................................................................................... 5
2.3 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER (IF INDICATED ON DRAWINGS) .......................................... 5
2.4 OUTPUT PANEL BOARDS .................................................................................................... 6
2.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROL ............................................................................ 7
2.6 MONITORING, STATUS, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION ..................................................... 7
2.7 SOUND LEVEL ....................................................................................................................... 8
PART 3 – EXECUTION........................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTING.................................................................................................... 9
3.3 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................................. 9

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of freestanding, prepackaged,
power distribution units for transforming, conditioning, and distributing electrical power.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General: The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where
differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall
apply. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of
commencement of the Work.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA ST20 Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications
NEMA PB-1 Panel boards
NEMA AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 67 Panel boards
UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances,
terminations, weight, temperature rise, wiring and connection diagrams, plan, front,
side, and rear elevations, accessories, and device nameplate data.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Manuals: Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete
maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and
information for ordering replacement parts.
A. Products shall be tested, approved and labeled/listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or by

a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).
B. Electrical equipment and materials shall be new and within one year of manufacture, complying
with the latest codes and standards. No used, re-built, refurbished and/or re-manufactured
electrical equipment and materials shall be furnished on this project.
C. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of equipment to assure us that
all spare parts and consumables will be available for 15 years life span of the equipment.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. The power distribution unit shall be warranted for a minimum of 2 year from the date of
commissioning against defects in material, equipment and workmanship.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. Assembly of power line-conditioning and distribution components packaged in a single cabinet

or modular assembly of cabinets. Include the following components:
1. Input-power, circuit-breaker section
2. Isolation transformer
3. TVSS system
4. Power metering
5. Output panelboard(s)
6. Alarm, monitoring, and control system
B. Unit shall carry indicated RMS kilovolt-ampere load continuously without exceeding rated
insulation temperature for the following input voltage and load current:
1. Input Voltage: Within rated input-voltage tolerance band of unit.
2. Load Current: Maximum of 3.0 crest factor
2.2 INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. 3-pole, thermal-magnetic type, rated for indicated interrupting capacity and 125 percent of input
current of unit at 100 percent rated load.
1. Dual-Input Units
a) Two input circuit breakers arranged to provide transfer between two input-
voltage sources
b) Controls and interfaces to allow both open- and closed-transition transfer
between two input-voltage sources.
2.3 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
A. Dry-type, electrostatically shielded three phase, common-core, convection-air-cooled isolation

transformer.
1. Comply with UL 1561.
2. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel, one leg per phase.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Coil Material and Insulation: Copper windings with a 220 deg C insulation class.
4. Temperature Rise: Designed for 80 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient.
5. Output Impedance: 3.5 plus or minus 0.5 percent.
6. Regulation: 2 to 4 percent maximum, at full-resistive load; 5 percent maximum, at rated
nonlinear load.
7. K-factor: K13 or 20.
8. Taps: 6 full-capacity compensation taps at 2.5 percent increments; 2 above and 4
below nominal voltage.
9. Full-Load Efficiency: Minimum 96 percent at rated load.
10. Magnetic-Field Strength External to Transformer Enclosure: Less than 0.1 gauss at
450 mm.
11. Audible Noise: Comply with NEMA ST 20.
12. Electrostatic Shielding: Independently shield each winding with a double-copper,
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
a) Coil leads and terminal trips shall be arranged to minimize capacitive coupling
between input and output connections.
a) Shield Terminal: Separate, and marked "Shield" for grounding connection.
b) Capacitance: Limit capacitance between primary and secondary windings to a
maximum of 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz
c) Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: 120 dB minimum, 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minus 65
dB minimum, 1.5 to 100 kHz.
d) Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dB minimum, 1.5 to 10 kHz.
13. Neutral Rating: 2 times the system full-load ampere rating.
2.4 OUTPUT PANEL BOARDS
A. Description: Mount in front of power distribution units behind flush doors. Include the following
features:
1. Construction: 400 V, 3 phase; capable of accepting branch circuit breakers rated to 100
A. Number of poles shall be as indicated on drawings.
2. Bus Rating: As indicated on drawings with a minimum of 42 poles.
3. Phase, Neutral and Ground Buses: Copper, with neutral bus at least 2 times the
nominal phase bus rating.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Branch Circuit Breakers: Bolt on.

5. Cable Racks: Removable and arranged for supporting and routing cables for panel
board entrance.
6. Access Panels: Arranged so additional branch-circuit wiring can be installed and
connected in the future.
2.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROL
A. Include the following control features:

1. Emergency, power-off switch integral with power distribution unit.
2. Emergency, power-off input terminals for connection to remote power-off switch.
3. Over-under alarm shutdown with automatic unit disconnection for the following alarm
conditions:
a) High temperature
b) High and low input or output voltage
c) Phase loss
d) Ground fault
e) Reverse phase rotation
4. Ground-fault protection with automatic system shutdown.
5. Alarm Contacts: Electrically isolated, Form C (one normally open and one normally
closed), summary alarm; contact set shall change state if any monitored function goes
into alarm mode.
6. Remote Power-Off Control: Control circuit with connection to shunt trip of power
distribution unit main power circuit breaker and terminals for connection to one or more
remote power-off, push-button stations.
2.6 MONITORING, STATUS, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION
A. Description: Microprocessor-based monitoring, status, and alarm annunciation panel mounted

flush in front of power distribution unit to provide status display and failure-indicating interface
for the following:
1. Power Monitoring
a) Input Voltage: Line to line, RMS
b) Output Voltage: Line to line, RMS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c) Output Voltage: Line to neutral, RMS

d) Output current
2. Status Indication: Unit on.
3. Alarm Annunciation
a) High temperature
b) High and low input voltage
c) High and low output voltage
d) Phase loss
e) Ground fault
f) Frequency
g) Phase rotation
h) TVSS module failure
4. Audible Alarm and Silencing Switch: Alarm sounds when alarm indication occurs.
Silencing switch shall silence audible alarm but leave visual indication active until
failure or other alarm conditions are corrected.
2.7 SOUND LEVEL
A. General: Fully assembled products comply with minimum sound-level requirements in NEMA
ST 20 for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to IEEE
C57.12.91.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of power distribution units with access flooring for proper support of
units.
B. Arrange power distribution units to provide adequate access to equipment and circulation of
cooling air.
C. Anchor or restrain floor-mounting power distribution units according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components,

assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing to the
Resident Engineer.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Verify that power distribution units are installed and connected according to the
Contract Documents.
2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.
4. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
5. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
6. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been
removed.
7. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench
method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
8. Perform functional tests of power distribution units throughout their operating ranges.
Test each monitoring, status, and alarm function.
9. Adjust power distribution units to provide optimum voltage to equipment served
throughout normal operating cycle of loads served. Record input and output voltages
and adjustment settings, and incorporate into test results.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Government maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power distribution units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 RELATED WORK ................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ............................................................................. 3
1.5 SUBMITTAL ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.6 Applicable publications ............................................................................................................ 6
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .............................................................................. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 7
2.01 WALL SWITCHES .................................................................................................................. 7
2.02 LIGHTING SWITCHES ........................................................................................................... 7
2.03 EXTERNAL LIGHTING SWITCHES ....................................................................................... 7
2.04 SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS................................................................................................. 8
2.05 SINGLE PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES ........................................................... 8
2.06 MULTI-PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES ............................................................. 8
2.07 TIME SWITCHES .................................................................................................................... 9
2.08 CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES ............................................................................ 9
2.09 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS ....................................................................................... 10
2.10 TELEPHONE, DATA AND TV OUTLETS ............................................................................. 10
2.11 FLOOR BOX FOR RAISED FLOOR ..................................................................................... 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 EXAMINATION...................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 PREPARATION..................................................................................................................... 11
3.3 EXISTING WORK ................................................................................................................. 11
3.4 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................... 11
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS ............................................................................. 12
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................. 12
3.7 ADJUSTING .......................................................................................................................... 12
3.8 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................ 13

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices.
B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract. [FROM 1.2 B]
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.[FROM
1.2 A]
B. electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.
C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits
and outlets boxes.
D. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for
possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A. This Specification applies to wiring devices used as accessories for the electrical
installations as indicated on the drawings or schedule and elsewhere within this
specification.
B. Types of electrical wiring devices required for the installation in this project include:
1. Lighting switches.
2. External lighting switches.
3. Switches socket outlets.
4. Single phase isolators and switch fuses.
5. Multi phase isolators and switch fuses

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Time switches
7. Connections to fixed appliances.
8. Industrial socket outlet
9. Telephone, data and TV outlets.
A. Standards: The equipment and installation shall comply with the standards and codes
of practice or their approved equivalents. In the event of the discrepancy between this
specification and any relevant standard or code of practice, the specification shall be
followed and the Engineer informed.
B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and
ratings required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years.
C. Source Quality Control: Before installation, wiring devices shall be tested in
accordance with standards mentioned elsewhere and have relevant listing or
certificates of approval.
D. Workmanship: All work undertaken in part or whole shall be carried out and completed
to the standards mentioned elsewhere and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any
defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring devices to the
building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
F. E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu
of on-site manufacturing shall not be classified as Original Equipment Manufacturer.
G. F. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient
conditions without any derating to the capacity.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. G. The above conditions (E,F and G items), shall superseded all other statements,
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete and detailed manufacturer's
data relating to the wiring devices offered.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine
compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials,
grade and termination information.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate illustrating
materials, construction, color, and finish. For approval submissions shall include the
following:
1. Name of the manufacturer.
2. Country or origin.
3. Name and address of agents is project local area stating whether any
manufacturing or fabrication is carried out in the project local area.
4. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient
for a 2 years period.
5. Technical performance of the equipment selected.
6. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance.
7. Delivery time from the date of orders.
8. Submit copies of test reports or certificates.
9. Control schematic and wiring.
D. The Contractor shall provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the
above submittal.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
date of Contract Award are a part of this Specification and, where referred to by title or
by basic designation only, are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific
reference:
B. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements,
and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by designation only.
70 ......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

WD 1 .................................... General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
WD 6 ................................... Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements
E. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

5 ........................................... Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
20 ......................................... General-Use Snap Switches
231 ....................................... Power Outlets
467 ....................................... Grounding and Bonding Equipment
498 ....................................... Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
943 ....................................... Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
F. In the event of any conflict between codes, or this Section & codes, the more stringent
applies
G. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in
addition to requirements, the recommendations shall be followed unless stated
otherwise by this specification.
A. Box crate or otherwise completely enclose and protect all equipment from dirt,
construction debris, traffic and operation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL SWITCHES
A. Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of metal or plastic
material as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards, as
mentioned elsewhere. The finish and/or color shall be standard throughout the
installation unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Switches shall comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification and be
suitable for use on inductive and resistive loads. They shall be single pole, unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer, and where mounted adjacent one to
another they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common switchplate.
D. Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. This lamp shall be a led
lamp with resistor and red coloured lens unless otherwise indicated.
E. Socket outlets for different systems and voltages shall have different configurations to
avoid engagement of plugs dedicated for other system voltages.
2.02 LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. Lighting switches for interior use, grid type, shall be of 240 Volts A.C., minimum 13A
and mounted on adjustable grid enclosed in metal box. The switches shall be of the
quick make, slow break type and shall comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in
this specification.
B. Key switches for office lighting shall be 240 VAC, single pole, 13A rating, flush
mounted in a metal box. The key barrel shall be flush with the coverplate. The key
being withdrawable in both "On" and "off" positions. The switch mechanism shall be of
the snap action type and conform with the standards mentioned elsewhere in this
specification.
C. Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover
plates finished flush with the sides of the metal box.
2.03 EXTERNAL LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. All external lighting switches shall be one way, two way or multigang arrangements
and be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dustproof enclosures. The
switches shall also comply with standards and regulations mentioned elsewhere.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. A suitable drain hole must be provided.
2.04 SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Switch socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on drawings, and shall have two-
pole and earthing pin (SHOKO).
B. Switch socket outlets shall comply with NEC standards and other codes of practice
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
C. Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push-on cap retaining ring without
switch.
D. All wall mounted switch socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in services
or plant rooms shall be 3-pin shuttered pattern, flush mounting type with front plates as
indicated elsewhere. Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal box. Where
surface mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be of the flush pattern,
mounted on suitable adaptor boxes.
E. All surface sockets shall be provided with a 13A unbreakable plug top complete with
fuse. Each twin socket shall be counted as two sockets.
F. Plugs shall be provided with all socket-outlets, and handed over the Engineer.
G. Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or
flush mounted as indicated elsewhere.
2.05 SINGLE PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES
A. These shall be of the double pole single throw type with neon, complying with
regulations and standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
B. Finishes shall be either of plastic for flush isolators or rust proof metal for surface
isolators and switch fuses.
C. All fuses shall be of HRC type as described elsewhere in this specification. These
items of switchgear are to be used for the isolation of single phase items of fixed
equipment fed by an individual circuit.
D. Type of equipment required is described elsewhere in this specification and on
drawings.
2.06 MULTI-PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES
A. Multiphase isolators and switchgear shall be used for the isolation of multiphase items
of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Switches shall be of multi-pole, single throw operation and must comply with standards
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
C. Types of equipment are described elsewhere in this specification.
D. These items are to be manufactured from rust proofed, metal-clad material.
E. All fuses shall be of HRC type, as described elsewhere in this specification.
2.07 TIME SWITCHES
A. Time switches shall be of the self-starting, self-winding, synchronous-motor driven

type.
B. The rated voltages and rated current shall be as indicated on the drawings.
C. Time switches shall, unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer,
incorporate the following:
1. A 150 hours spring reserve to drive the mechanism during electricity supply
interruptions.
2. An easily replaceable cartridge fuse-link, complying with codes mentioned
elsewhere, inserted in the motor circuit.
3. An ON-OFF manual switch to enable the circuit to be controlled at will without
affecting normal dial operation.
2.08 CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES
A. Final connections to this type of equipment shall be carried out by using either an
insulated copper sheathed cable or a flexible metallic conduit with heat resisting cables
run through the conduit.
B. Supply and install a double pole isolator adjacent to each fixed appliance. Conduit for
kitchen equipment shall not be run in the floor screed.
C. Flexible Conduit
1. Final connections made using flexible conduit are to comprise a metallic flexible
conduit covered with continuous PVC.
2. Sufficient length shall be allowed for vibration and movement of the equipment.
3. A separate circuit protective conductor wire must be run inside the conduit.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.09 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multiple types and rating as indicated on
drawings.
B. Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67 integrated with switch or
without it.
C. Socket outlets shall be single phase with two poles and earthing pin or three phase
with three poles, earthing pin with or without neutral pin.
D. Socket outlet shall be integrated with 30 mA (RCD) residual current device as earth
leakage protective.
2.10 TELEPHONE, DATA AND TV OUTLETS
A. All outlet plates where specified shall be of similar style and finished to that specified
for the associated lighting switches and socket outlets and shall be suitable for
mounting recessed or flush.
B. Refer to the low current specifications for details.
2.11 FLOOR BOX FOR RAISED FLOOR
Totally discreet installation under the desk to supply workstations with power and data.
The boxes should be fitted with:
- ArteorTM mechanisms on support plates
- sockets standard or staggered configuration for easier plug connections.
The numbers and types of outlets shall be installed as per drawings indications.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection
to wiring devices.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.

B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.
C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, applicable requirement of NEC, and in accordance with recognised
industry practices to ensure that products serve their intended function Install devices
plumb and level.
B. Install switches with OFF position down.
C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for
ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to [outlet box with bonding jumper] [and]
[branch circuit equipment grounding conductor].
F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
G. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other noncombustible material, boxes and fittings
shall be so installed that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set back from the
finished surface more than 5 mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished surface
or project there from.
H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install
stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded
conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device
terminations, do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws
I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
J. All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing screws
or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective coating of
zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanised finish shall be used complying with
relevant standards and codes of practice.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated or required by arch/ID engineers

1. Install wall switch [48 inches (1.2m) above finished floor
2. Install convenience receptacle [16] inches (450mm) above finished floor
3. Install convenience receptacle [6] inches (150 mm) above [counter] [back splash
of counter]
4. Install dimmer [48] inches (1.2 m) above finished floor
5. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with under floor raceway service fittings.
6. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service fittings.
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 29 23
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLER
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 3

1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 3
1.02 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.04 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ....................................... 3
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 4
1.07 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 5
PART 2: PRODUCT ................................................................................................................... 6
2.01 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 6
2.02 ELECTRICAL RATINGS .............................................................................................. 6
2.03 DESIGN ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.04 PROTECTIVE FEATURES .......................................................................................... 7
2.05 FEATURES AND ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................. 8
2.06 KEYPAD INTERFACE ................................................................................................10
2.07 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ...............................................................................10
PART 3: EXECUTION...............................................................................................................11
3.01 EXAMINATION ...........................................................................................................11
3.02 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION ...............................................................................11
3.03 START-UP AND TRAINING .......................................................................................11

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This specification provides the requirements for an adjustable frequency drive, factory
integrated with branch circuit protection, power circuit components, control components
and door mounted operator devices into an enclosure.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code (NEC)

B. UL 50 – UL Standard for Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
C. UL 508A – UL Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels
D. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
E. NEMA – Application Guide For AC Adjustable Speed Drive Systems
F. NEMA ICS 7.1 – Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation
and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems
G. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. A submittal package shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval prior to factory
assembly of the drive. The submittal package shall consist of the following:
1. Elementary diagrams showing factory power and control wiring along with field
wiring connections for line and load power connections and control wiring
connections.
2. Outline diagrams showing the overall enclosure and mounting dimensions with front
and side views and weights as a minimum. The outline drawings shall also include
conduit entry/exit locations along with intended conduit sizes.
3. Voltage, horsepower, current rating and product features will be furnished from
standard catalog sheets.
4. Installation, maintenance and operating instructions shall be provided for each VFD.
1.04 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Manufacturer shall provide a copy of installation, operation and maintenance procedures

to owner.
B. Instruction manual shall include programming manuals, wiring diagrams, operating and
maintenance instructions.
A. Manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacture and assembly of low voltage
control panels for 25 years.
B. All drives shall be 100% factory tested to ensure proper performance.
C. All drives are insulation tested at their input and output terminal connections.
D. All drives are load tested at > 100% of their nominal operating current at assorted speed
references.
E. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
shipment.
F. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
G. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
H. The above conditions (E,F and G items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Contractor shall store, protect and handle products in accordance with recommended
practices listed in manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Contractor shall inspect and report concealed damage within 48 hours.
C. Contractor shall store in a clean, dry space. Cover with heavy canvas or plastic to keep
out dirt, water, construction debris and traffic. Heat enclosures to prevent condensation.
D. Contractor shall handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to avoid
damaging equipment, installed devices and finish. [Lift only by installed lifting eyes.]
1.07 WARRANTY
A. VFD’s shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for 2 calendar years from date of certified
start -up. The vendor, at his expense and without extra charge, and within a reasonable
period of time after being contacted.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide enclosed variable frequency drives suitable for operation at the current, voltage,
and horsepower indicated on the schedule.
2.02 ELECTRICAL RATINGS
A. VFD must operate, without fault or failure, when voltage varies plus 10% or minus 15%
from rating, and frequency varies plus or minus 5% from rating.
B. Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 over entire range of operating speed and load.
C. Service Factor: 1.0
D. Operating Ambient Temperature: -10C to 55C without any derating.
E. It should be supplied taking into consideration the ambient temperature its mounting
procedure and recommended switching frequency in case of lost od cooling in the room.
F. Humidity: 0% to 95% non-condensing
G. Minimum Efficiency: 96% at half speed; 98% at full speed
H. Starting Torque: 100% starting torque shall be available from 0.5 Hz. to 60 Hz
I. Overload capability: 110% of rated FLA (Full Load Amps) for 60 seconds; 150% of rated
FLA peak
J. Controlled speed range of 40:1
K. The VFD’s shall include EMI/RFI filters
2.03 DESIGN
A. Refer to Contract Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components;
current ratings of devices, bus bars and components; voltage ratings of devices,
components and assemblies; interrupting and withstand ratings of devices, buses and
components; and other required details.
B. The drive shall use a fix voltage and frequency AC line to generate an adjustable voltage
and frequency to control the motor.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. The drive will convert the AC mains to a fixed DC voltage using full wave bridge diode or
SCR rectifiers.
D. The drive will use power semiconductors (IGBTs) to change the fixed DC voltage to an
adjustable voltage and frequency to control the motor. The drive shall be an IGBT based
PWM type AC drive capable of operating a squirrel cage induction motor with a full load
current equal to or less than the continuous output rating of the drive.
E. All drive panels and enclosures will meet UL508A and will be UL / cUL listed.
F. The drive panel shall include a fused input disconnect or a Mag-Break motor circuit
protector with a through-the-door handle interlocked to the enclosure door to provide a
local and lockable means of removing all AC input power from the drive panel.
G. Branch circuit protection fuses shall be provided to protect the drive [and bypass starter].
Fuses shall be sized to provide proper branch circuit protection and be coordinated with
other power circuit components.
H. The drive panel will include door mounted operator devices and keypad to facilitate
programming, control functions and diagnostics.
I. The drive shall have an EMC / RFI filter meeting A2 standards.
J. Matrix Harmonic Filters will be provided as an integral part of panel. These multi-stage
low pass filters will limit full load current distortion to less than 5% THID and are isolated
from the line when the drive is not in a running state.
K. Loss of Speed Reference control shall be supplied and will enable the drive to run a t a
preset speed in the event of the loss of a non-zero based analog signal speed reference.
L. The drive panel will include a control power transformer with at least 150VA of additional
control power and provisions for motor space heater control.
2.04 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
A. The drive shall provide protection against AC line and DC bus overvoltage and under-
voltage conditions.
B. The drive shall provide protection against phase to phase and phase to ground short
circuits.
C. The drive shall monitor and protect against adverse drive thermal conditions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. The FP drive shall contain a Fire Override Mode that ignores all drive protective features
and keeps motor running. This function can be enabled and assigned to a logic input in
the event the drive’s operation is deemed critical and must continue to run regardless of
fault conditions.
E. The drive shall have a programmable Torque Limiting function for both acceleration
(driving) and deceleration (braking). For deceleration, braking torque limit shall be
programmable to automatically extend the deceleration time to avoid over-voltage trips on
large inertia loads.
F. The drive shall contain a programmable inverse time thermal overload function UL-508C
listed and as required by the National Electric Code, with load and speed sensitive motor
overload protection and thermal memory retention in the event of an unintentional power
loss or via intentional shutdown.
G. The drive will include automatic high ambient de-rate functionality to prevent drive thermal
overloads.
H. The drive will include automatic motor overload de-rate functionality to prevent motor
thermal overloads.
I. The drive shall contain LED indication of DC bus voltage, which, when lit signifies
potentially dangerous voltage is present on the DC bus.
J. The drive shall protect against internal memory and CPU errors and internal and serial
communication errors.
K. VFD shall be IP 54 for indoor installation and IP 55 for Outdoor.
2.05 FEATURES AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. In addition to programmable motor characteristics, the drive shall contain a motor Auto-
tune feature that determines the connected motor characteristics to optimize operation.
B. The drive panel will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional devices.
C. The drive shall be capable of at least 4 different acceleration and 4 different deceleration
rates. Each acceleration and deceleration rate shall be independently adjustable from
0.01 to 3600 seconds.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. The drive shall contain selectable acceleration and deceleration patterns - linear, S-curve
and non-linear - to meet the starting and stopping characteristics of the applied load.
E. The drive shall record and store in its memory run status and fault type of the past 10
faults for diagnostic assistance. For the two most recent faults, the drive will record at the
time of trip the motor input volts, amps, frequency, speed reference, DC bus voltage and
(for FP only) date and time of fault.
F. In the event of a momentary power failure, the drive shall contain 4 different selectable
stopping modes.
G. The drive shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and shall
smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the speed reference set point without experiencing
the drive tripping on a fault or a component failure.
H. The drive shall contain a selectable energy savings function that, when selected,
automatically reduces the drive output voltage at steady state operation to the level only
required to meet the torque requirement of the load. This function shall automatically
deactivate during acceleration or deceleration of the load.
I. In order to reduce audible motor noise, the drive shall be capable of selecting the
switching frequency via different parameter settings.
J. The drive shall provide selectable slip compensation, which will sense output current and
adjust output frequency, to improve motor speed fluctuations.
K. The drive will provide closed loop speed / torque control as standard.
L. The drive shall be capable of stopping by selectable DC injection braking. DC injection
braking will have a braking level that is adjustable from 0 to 100%, a programmable
starting frequency 0.0 Hz to the drive’s Motor Speed High Limit setting and a
programmable braking time of 0.0 to 60.0 seconds.
M. The drive will track and display kW Hours, Operating Hours and Running Hours.
N. The drive shall have both low and high frequency limits programmable from 0 to the
drive’s maximum output frequency.
O. The drive shall provide an adjustable analog output signal that is proportional to output
frequency, output current, output torque, load factor, input power, or other user selected
functionality.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.06 KEYPAD INTERFACE
A. The drive shall contain a backlit graphic liquid crystal display (LCD) and shall display 6
alphanumeric lines providing display for programming, diagnostics, I/O check, operation
status and copy functions. The LCD display shall provide indication of output current,
output voltage, output frequency, frequency reference, motor speed, line speed, kW
power consumption, feedback value and calculated torque value. The LCD display shall
function independently of the programming mode to allow programming and monitoring of
the drive simultaneously.
B. The keypad shall be common for the entire horsepower and input voltage ratings and shall
be capable of copying (uploading and downloading) 4 sets of drive parameters between
the different horsepower and voltage ratings.
C. The drive keypad will include help functions for integrated parameter and diagnostic
assistance.
D. The drive keypad allows for 2 levels of password protection with independent password.
E. The drive will support multiple languages with English and Arabic as minimum.
2.07 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A. The drive shall include MODBUS RTU, BacNet, Ethernet IP or [ModBus TCP
communication protocols.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The contractor shall perform the following procedures:

1. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install panel.
2. Check concrete pads or mounting surfaces for uniformity and level surface.
3. Inspect for any physical damage.
4. Verify that equipment is ready to install.
5. Verify field measurements are as shown on drawings and instructed by
manufacturer.
6. Verify that required utilities and control interfaces are available, in proper location
and ready for use.
7. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
3.02 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall perform the installation.

1. The contractor shall install drives in accordance with standards listed in this
specification.
2. Install per manufacturer's instructions outlined in installation, operation and
maintenance documentation.
3. Install required safety labels.
3.03 START-UP AND TRAINING
A. Manufacturer shall have Factory Trained personnel at Field locations convenient to the
installation site, available for Trouble-Shooting and/or Start-Up assistance.
B. Drive operational and maintenance Training and/or Start-Up Service shall be provided.
C. Personnel performing Start-Up must check / adjust drive settings circuit breakers,
overload relay, switches, doors and operating handle, for proper mechanical and/or
electrical operation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 31 00
PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 4
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................... 4
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................... 5
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING .......................................................................................... 5
1.8 WARRANTY .................................................................................................................................. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 7
2.1 SOLAR ELECTRIC MODULES .................................................................................................... 7
2.2 INVERTERS .................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3 MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR MODULES ................................................................................ 8
2.4 PV SYSTEM MONITORING ......................................................................................................... 8
2.5 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................... 9
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING ................................................................................................... 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 EXAMINATION............................................................................................................................ 10
3.2 PREPARATION........................................................................................................................... 10
3.3 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 11
3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP .................................................................................................................... 11
3.6 ADJUSTING ................................................................................................................................ 11
3.7 TRAINING ................................................................................................................................... 11
END OF SECTION ................................................................................................................................. 12

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Installation of complete and fully functional Solar Photovoltaic Systems ("PV System").
B. Work includes all design services, materials, labor, equipment, services, commissioning, and
incidentals necessary to the design, procurement, supply and installation of a complete PV
System for 80kW On-grid Solar system, complete with polycrystalline solar modules, Solar
inverters & steel structure for car shades including boxes, conduits, wiring cables with and all
necessary accessories and fittings”.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. NOCT: Normal operation cell temperature.

2. STC: Values of standard test conditions.
B. Reference Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. ANSI/UL 1703 Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.
2. International Electrical Commission (IEC):
a. IEC 61215 International Standard (Extended Version) - Crystalline silicon

terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design qualification and type approval.
b. IEC 61730-1 International Standard - Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification
- Part 1 - Requirements for construction
c. IEC 61730-2 International Standard - Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification
- Part 2 - Requirements for testing.
3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a. ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.

b. ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems.
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. UL 790 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

b. UL 1703 Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC):
a. ULD/ORD-C1703 Requirements for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions.
B. Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:
1. Manufacturer's product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product sheet.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows:
1. Layout and orientation of modules.

2. Roof surfaces and slopes.
3. Location of inverter, combiner box and disconnects.
4. Penetration plan.
5. Mounting details.
6. Electrical connection details.
7. String, wiring, and grounding plan details.
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions
B. Test and Evaluation Reports:
1. Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's storage and installation instructions.
D. Source Quality Control: Submit documentation verifying that components and materials
specified in this Section are from a single manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer’s Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified.
F. Qualification Statements:
1. Submit letter of verification for Manufacturer's Qualifications.

2. Submit letter of verification for Installer's Qualifications.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products, Including:
a. Manufacturer's instructions detailing maintenance requirements.
C. Warranty Documentation: Submit warranty documents specified.
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Having a minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing components similar to or

exceeding requirements of project.
b. Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without
causing delay in work.
c. Capable of providing field service representation during construction.
d. Manufacturing facility certified to ISO 9001 and to ISO 14001.
2. Installer:
a. Acceptable to the manufacturer, experienced in performing work of this section

and has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.
B. Mock-Up: Construct mock-up where indicated by the Client.
1. Purpose: Construct showing solar electric module to judge quality of work, substrate
preparation, and operation of equipment and material application.
2. Dimensions and Process: Construct mock-up using proposed procedures, colors,
textures, finishes and quality of work.
3. Locate where indicated.
4. Do not proceed with work prior to receipt of written acceptance of mock-up.
5. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this
work. Approved mock-up may remain part of finished work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Deliver material in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels intact and
in sizes to suit project.
B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at

temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.
C. Packaging Waste Management:
1. Remove packaging materials from site and dispose of at appropriate recycling facilities.
2. Fold metal and plastic banding. Flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
3. Remove:
a. Pallets from site and return to supplier or manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty

document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to,
and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under other Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Term:
a. Freedom from Defects in Materials and Workmanship: 5 years, commencing on

date of substantial completion.
b. 93 Percent of Minimum Power Output: 12 years, commencing on date of
c. 85 Percent of Minimum Power Output: 25 years, commencing on date of

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLAR ELECTRIC MODULES
A. PV modules must be IEC 61215 compliant and IEC 61730-1 compliant, and manufactured in an
ISO 9001 certified facility.
B. PV modules must be of polycrystalline technology and for rack-mounting.
C. PV module efficiency must be greater than 15 percent.
D. PV modules must be of the same manufacturer and model number and consistent sub-
components.
E. Submit on cut sheets PV module performance data from the manufacturer that must include a
flash test data in accordance with IEC 61853-1, and temperature coefficients at: STC, nominal
operating cell temperature (NOCT), low irradiance conditions (LIC), high temperature conditions
(HTC), and low temperature conditions (LTC).
F. PV module bypass diodes must be inside the solar PV module's single conductor cable junction
box.
G. Photovoltaic wire, wiring methods, and utilization of locking-type connectors must comply with
the requirements of NFPA 70. Provide USE-2 or RHH or RHW-2 wire, and sunlight-resistant
wire when exposed to sunlight.
2.2 INVERTERS
A. Array-to-inverter kW ratio must not exceed manufacturer recommendations. Inverter must be

IEEE 1547 compliant, listed to UL 1741, comply with the latest applicable ANSI and FCC
standards and addenda, and inspected before commissioning, testing, and operation of the
system. Submit documentation validating system performance requirements.
B. All same-sized inverters supplied must be of the same manufacturer and model number.
C. Provide inverter with anti-islanding protection to prevent back-feeding inverter generated power
to the grid in the event of a utility outage. Anti-islanding protection must be listed to UL 1741
and IEEE 1547.
D. Overcurrent protection, ground fault protection, arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI), and rapid
shutdown must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70.
E. Provide inverter with self-diagnostics routines, and remote and local display of operating status
and remote monitoring capabilities. Provide inverter compatible with monitoring system and

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
metering system. If capability for remote monitoring and control does not exist, then it must be
added.
F. Provide inverter with integrated monitoring system.
G. Match inverter DC input to the design of the PV module array outputs and account for the
following:
1. The inverter low voltage is 50 percent of the maximum system

2. Voltage decrease due to high temperatures at project site.
H. Provide isolation transformer via built into each inverter system central transformer for multiple
inverters to provide safe galvanic separation between the AC side of the inverter and the grid.
I. Inverter must include AC and DC disconnecting means. DC and AC disconnecting means must
be listed with ratings suitable for the intended use and purpose. System disconnecting means
must meet the requirements of NFPA 70.
2.3 MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR MODULES
A. Racking must be suitable for Seismic Design Category of the site project as defined by ASCE 7
and ICC IBC.
B. Submit seismic and wind load design calculations for the array mounting system and its
attachment to the structure showing compliance with seismic and wind requirements while
supporting the PV modules.
C. Provide the mechanical hardware for mounting the PV arrays and all other hardware required
for assembling the PV modules, and the attachments to the building structure.
D. Use array mounting hardware compatible with the site considerations and environment. Select
mechanical hardware for corrosion resistance and durability. Use a stainless steel, galvanized
steel, or aluminum support structure. Do not use wood or plastic components for support.
2.4 PV SYSTEM MONITORING
A. Provide a PV system monitoring panel
B. The following quantities must be viewable
1. DC Input Voltage from PV

2. DC Input Power from PV

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. DC Input Current from PV

4. AC Phase Current
5. AC Voltage
6. AC Real Power
7. Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly, and Cumulative Energy Production
8. Fault Status Report
9. DC Ground Current Report
10. AC Neutral Current
11. AC Reactive Power
12. AC Apparent Power
13. AC Power Factor
14. AC Phase Current from inverter (A, B, C)
15. AC Voltage from inverter (A, B, C)
16. AC Voltage and Current Balance.
C. Provide additional data acquisition sensors to measure
3. Irradiance
4. wind speed
5. Ambient temperature
6. PV module temperature
2.5 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections
for use by the operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions include the
following:
1. Wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, interconnection diagrams, control diagrams, and

control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.
2. Array layout showing the locations of all DC and AC disconnects.
3. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, and shutdown procedures.
4. Safety precautions.
5. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item

of equipment.
B. Print operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post
instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-
resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions do not fade when
exposed to sunlight and secure to prevent easy removal or peeling.
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide properly sized equipment grounding conductors.
B. Provide bonding fittings on concentric/eccentric knockouts with metal conduits for circuits over
250 volts in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Provide bonding fittings for ferrous metal conduits enclosing grounding electrode conductors in
accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Provide grounding lugs for aluminum PV solar module frames of either stainless steel or tin-
coated copper.
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other
sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to solar electric module installation.
1. Inform client of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

2. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and
after receipt of written approval from client.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure structure or substrate is adequate to support solar electric module(s).
B. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's written

recommendations

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate solar electric module work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to
avoid construction delays.
B. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects.
A. Manufacturer Services:
1. Have manufacturer review work involved in handling, installation/application, protection

and cleaning of product[s], and submit written reports in acceptable format to verify
compliance of work with Contract.
2. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services, consisting of
product use recommendations and periodic site visits, for product installation inspection
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Schedule site visits to review work at stages listed:
a. After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory work on which work
of this Section depends is complete, but before installation begins.
b. Twice during progress of work at 25% and 60% complete.
c. Upon completion of work, after cleaning is carried out.
4. Obtain reports within three days of review and submit immediately to client.
3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. List actions applicable to operational systems and equipment startup.
1. Commission the system to ensure that it complies with applicable code requirements and
manufacturer's requirements.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust components and systems for correct function and operation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 TRAINING
A. Instruct designated maintenance personnel in care, adjustment and operation of solar electric
module system.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Provide competent instructor for not less than four-hour training session(s) after completion and
acceptance of work.
C. Forward statement to client countersigned by maintenance personnel confirming that these

instructions have been provided.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS - INDOOR
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ....................................................................6
1.5 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 7
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE .......................................................................................... 7
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 7
1.8 TESTING ..................................................................................................................... 7
1.9 RELATED STANDARDS ............................................................................................. 9
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................12
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ...................................................................................................12
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................12
2.3 DIESEL GENERATOR SET ........................................................................................13
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE AND AUXILIARIES .........................................................................13
2.5 GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR) ..................................................................................15
2.6 FRONT DISPLAY PANEL: ..........................................................................................17
2.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: .............................................................................19
2.8 VENTILATION SYSTEM: ............................................................................................19
PART 3 - EXECUTION.............................................................................................................20
3.1 EXAMINATION ...........................................................................................................20
3.2 CONCRETE BASES ...................................................................................................20
3.3 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................20
3.5 COMMISSIONING ......................................................................................................22
3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTING .......................................................................................22

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.7 NAME PLATES ...........................................................................................................23

3.8 DEMONSTRATION ....................................................................................................23

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes standby/emergency power plant installation comprising the following:
1. Diesel generating set(s), with associated auxiliaries, exhaust system, start-up
system, cooling system, fuel system, batteries and charger etc.
2. Instrumentation, protection and control equipment
3. Inter-plant cabling and wiring
4. Earthing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
1. General description and characteristics of engine- generating sets, standards with
which components comply, site rating and overload capability, overall efficiency, and
fuel consumption at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% of rated load. Derating of
generator capacity based on the required type, site altitude and ambient
temperature.
2. Description and operating criteria of engine; type, model, manufacturer, fuel and
lubricating oil types and specific consumption, starting conditions and starting
periods from cold to full- load pick-up, governor and response characteristics due
to sudden load changes, super- charger, fuel injection system, cooling system and
radiator, air filters, fuel filters, oil filters and pumps.
3. Description and operating criteria of generator, exciter and voltage regulator, with
loading response and short-circuit characteristics, insulation, cooling and
accessories.
4. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection

etc.
5. Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional
features.
6. Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
7. Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
8. Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
9. Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating
instruments and all other devices or components.
10. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
11. Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel,
including technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with
characteristic curves etc.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
12. Calculated noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at various
locations inside and outside.
13. Generator capacity shall be continuous with unlimited runtime capacity.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Certified manufacturers' dimensional drawings, templates and installation
instructions for equipment and accessories, showing weights and distribution of
forces, location and size of cabling (power and control), piping connections to
equipment, and other pertinent data.
2. Plans and elevations of all equipment.
3. Separate unit wiring diagrams, schematics and interconnecting wiring diagrams.
4. Constructional details of daily service fuel tank, including outline drawings
showing piping arrangements, connections and dimensions.
5. Complete execution drawings of associated auxiliaries.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment is to be
tested at the factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests are to be carried out
under site simulated conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the
Specification, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
E. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection
records relative to compliance with performance requirements.
F. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with specified
requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
G. Sound measurement test report.
H. Field test report of tests specified in Part 3.
I. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include
maintenance manuals.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional
advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare
parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC
34, IEC 85 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards and
recommendations of

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such standards meet with or
supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.
the equipment.
D. The Seller shall follow their standard procedures for quality assurance and control.
Seller’s standard QA Manual shall be submitted in both electronic and hard copy for
review and should be in such a form as to enable an assessment to be made of the
manufacturing sequence and inspection set up and other control procedures.
E. Before procuring, the Seller (and Seller’s Sub-suppliers) shall identify the source,
including the company name and country of origin, of any material or component. At the
request of the Company, the Seller shall furnish to the Company satisfactory evidence
of the quality of the work being performed. Such evidence, at the discretion of the
Company, shall consist of any or all of the following:
F. Sub-supplier quality plans and quality certifications.
1. Seller qualification procedures and specific documentation of the results of the
Seller’s qualification of the sub-supplier.
2. Evidence of the Seller’s business relationship with the sub-supplier including history
with the sub-supplier in terms of quality and on time delivery.
4. Any other documentation deemed necessary by the Company to verify the
quality and acceptability of the sub-supplier.
G. As a minimum, the following shall be provided:
2. Organizational chart of quality assurance department showing relationship to other
groups.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. After award of purchase order, the Company will identify the inspection points to the Seller
that will be witnessed by the Company, if any.
I. During the execution of the purchase order, manufacturing and quality control procedures
shall be available for reference by the Company or its representative at the site.
J. Inspection release for work at site does not relieve the Seller of the responsibility from
specifically brought to the Company’s attention and specifically waived in writing.
K. The Seller shall certify that all applicable codes, standards and requirements of this
L. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 years’ warranty started from final testing and commissioning.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
M. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
stamped) are approved. Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are
not accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at
Origin, will result in rejecting the delivery and refusing the installation, and the Contractor
or his Sub-Contractors shall be held solely responsible for all cost and delays to the
project associated with the product delivery. In exceptional cases, Contractor shall
submit the necessary paperwork and documents to the Engineer and Client for
approval prior to shipment.
N. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors’ components and assemblies in lieu
of on-site manufacturing shall not be classified as Original Equipment Manufacturer.
O. All products shall be rated to work under 50 degrees’ Celsius ambient conditions without
any derating to the capacity.
P. The above conditions (M, N and O items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent
damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe
from such hazards.
B. Equipment shall be provided in a dust-and moisture-impervious shrouding. All entrances
to internal wiring, control devices, and the like shall be effectively protected or
otherwise sealed to prevent entrance of moisture, dust, dirt, or other deleterious matter.
All connections shall be protected by metal covers to prevent damage during shipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Equipment shall be adequately crated to insure protection from transit damage.

D. Packaging shall be labeled and numbered so that each section or assembly may be
identified before being uncrated. Any items not fully assembled to the diesel generator
structure shall be packaged separately.
E. Adequate means shall be provided for lifting by fork lifts and cranes or moving the
Equipment on rollers.
F. Where sections of the Equipment must be separated for shipment, all materials and
Equipment to facilitate re-assembly and re-connection of interconnecting bus work and
wiring in the field shall be furnished.
G. The Supplier shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written procedures for the handling,
storage, shipping, and preservation of the Equipment to prevent degradation of the
supplied Equipment prior to installation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing

to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer. Include
monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
a. Response Time: 4 hours or less.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours
operation of the plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours
operation together with current prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and
identify with labels describing contents.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.8 TESTING
A. Perform the standard production tests called for in the referenced standards.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. All inspections/tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and trial operation

shall be in accordance with applicable codes and standard requirements. Where no
standard is available, tests shall be carried out in accordance with the Supplier’s
standard, subject to prior approval of the Company. The Supplier is required to develop
an inspection and test plan to document the required testing.
C. The information given on test records, test certificates and performance details shall be
sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers. Certificates
D. These tests shall be carried out for different equipment, material and systems prior to
and during commissioning of the equipment. Testing, inspection, and acceptance
criteria shall adhere to applicable codes and standards as specified in Section 2.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. The Company shall have free access to the Supplier’s facility during the design,
fabrication and testing of the Equipment. The Supplier shall make the necessary
arrangements to provide access. Any inspection by the Company shall not be considered
a waiver of any warranty or other rights.
F. The Company may or may not elect to witness test, but the Supplier shall notify the
Company at least 15 days in advance of all scheduled tests.
G. The Supplier shall record all test values of tests performed by the Supplier on all
Equipment, giving both “as found” and “as left” conditions.
H. All test reports shall be certified by the Supplier indicating their accuracy and
conformance with applicable codes and Contract requirements.
I. All tests shall be conducted with proper regard for the protection of the Equipment,
and the Supplier shall be responsible for adequate protection of all personnel during such
test.
J. Tests shall verify the ability of all Equipment to perform its intended functions within the
applicable tolerances and performance guarantees, such that when the Equipment is
shipped and correctly connected to external devices, the complete system is operable as
intended.
K. The Equipment shall meet all the conditions of this Contract prior to acceptance by the
Company.
L. The Supplier shall provide Equipment for all tests conducted by the Supplier.
M. Testing shall be done according to specification 01 00 00 General Requirements for
Testing and Commissioning.
N. Shop Tests:
1. The Supplier's standard shop tests shall be performed on all Equipment. The
Supplier shall provide to the Engineer for review, copies of certified test reports
covering shop tests conducted on the assembled diesel generator within 5 days
of the test, to show that all Equipment will perform as specified herein and per the

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
essential requirements of applicable codes and standards as follows:

a) Mechanical operation tests to ensure proper functioning and interchangeability.
b) Control wiring correctness and continuity checks, and polarity check where
applicable.
c) 60 Hz withstand tests on primary circuits and secondary wiring in accordance

with the standards.
2. Diesel Engine Tests:

a) The diesel engine shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
ASME PTC 17 with the following exceptions and modifications:
1) The tests shall be performed with the engine connected to the

generator to be supplied.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2) Prior to performing the required tests, the engine shall be operated for a
break- in period for the length of time required to pass through the initial
failure period for the design of the engine.
3) The tests shall be performed using all auxiliaries to be supplied,
including control, air intake, exhaust, fuel handling, starting, and
cooling equipment.
3. Generator Tests:
The generator shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEEE C50.13,
NEMA MG 1, and IEEE 115.
2. Before the diesel generator is shipped, a factory certified test log shall
be submitted for approval. This log shall indicate that the generator set
has been fully tested for a minimum of 8-hours, with at least ½-hour of
continuous operation at the full load rating. Tests shall include
operational tests to prove all alarm, trip, and control, and switching
capabilities specified herein.
3. Neither the satisfactory performance of the Equipment in the factory nor

the witnessing and approval of tests by the Company will relieve the
Supplier from its responsibility for the design and the satisfactory
performance of the Equipment when installed at the site.
B. Field Tests:
The Supplier shall, after installation of the diesel generator, conduct field tests to
verify the overall performance of the Equipment against referenced standards
and the system requirements specified in the Technical Specifications. The
diesel generator unit shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 110 and shall include the following requirements:
1. Functional tests to verify the diesel generator's capability to meet the

design requirements of the Technical Specifications.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Electrical and functional tests to demonstrate the properties of the

generator, exciter, voltage regulator, engine governor, and all
auxiliary equipment.
1.9 Related Standards
A. The latest edition and published addenda of the following publications in effect
on the date of the Contract award shall be a part of this Specification and,
where referenced to by title or by basic designation only, are applicable to the
extent indicated by the specific reference:
1. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and

Electronic Engineers, Inc. (ANSI/IEEE):

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1) C37.2, “Standard Electrical Power System Device Function

Numbers and Contact Designations.”
2) C37.102, “Guide for AC Generator Protection.”
3) C57.13, “Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.”
4) 115, “IEEE Guide for Test Procedures for Synchronous Machines.”
2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
7-05, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.”
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1) B31.1, “Power Piping.”
2) PTC 17, “Reciprocating Internal-Combustion Engines

(Performance Test Codes).”
3) PTC 19.3, “Part 3: Temperature Measurement

Instruments and Apparatus (Performance Test Codes).”
4. ASTM International (ASTM)
D 396, Rev. A, “Standard Specification for Fuel Oils.”
5. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
29CFR1910; Title 19—“Labor”, Part 1910—“Occupational Safety and

Health Standards”
6. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1) C50.13, “Cylindrical-Rotor 50 Hz and 60 Hz Synchronous

Generators Rated 10 MVA and Above.”

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2) 446, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby

Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications
(Orange Book)”
1) 30, “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code “

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2) 37, “Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion

Engines and Gas Turbines”
3) 70, “National Electrical Code.”
4) 110, “Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems”
8. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) ICS 1, “Industrial Controls and Systems – General Requirements”
2) ICS 4, “Terminal Blocks”
3) ICS 6, “Industrial Control and Systems – Enclosures”
4) 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)”
5) MG 1, “Motors and Generators.”
9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1) 50, “UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment, Non- Environmental Considerations”
2) 94, “UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability for Plastic
Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.”
3) 142, “UL Standard for Safety Steel Aboveground Tanks for

Flammable and Combustible Liquids.”
4) 508, “UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment”
5) 508A, “UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels”
6) 1446, “UL Standard for Safety Systems of Insulating Materials”
7) 2200, “UL Standard for Safety Stationary Engine Generator

Assemblies”

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Where the above referenced codes, standards, and guides contain

recommendations in addition to requirements, the recommendations shall be
considered requirements and shall be followed unless stated otherwise by this
Specification.
C. In the event of any conflict between codes, or Technical Specifications and

codes, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Generator Set Assembly: Compact package type, with all equipment mounted on one
rigid steel bed frame suitable for skidding. Radiator is to be mounted on the set or
remotely as shown on the Drawings. Design is to permit easy operation, maintenance and
repair.
B. Vibration reduction is to be achieved by appropriate design and careful balancing at
factory. Compact set is to have approved anti-vibration isolators of steel spring or
resilient neoprene between rotating equipment and bed-frame, limiting transmission of
vibration to building to a maximum of 0.04 mm amplitude throughout the operating
vibration frequency range.
C. Noise reduction is to be achieved by insulating the room by using heat resistant fiber
sheets of high density and minimum thickness of 100mm installed in sheet steel. Sound
level measured 1m outside the room is to be limited to 56 dBA @20 Hz, 60 dBA @1000
HZ down to 41 dBA @10,000 Hz in accordance with ISO standards for residential areas.
D. Cold Starting: Engine is to be fully equipped to start and pick up initial load specified at
specified minimum ambient temperature. Provide coolant heater.
E. Equipment ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard ratings
provided by the manufacturer. Ratings are to be net Continuous power with no limited
operational hours at 100% load to consumer, excluding fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary
drives and losses, delivered at specified frequency, voltage and power factor and under

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
worst climatic conditions on site.

F. The Generator assembly shall have the capability of communicating with local /
remote control device via RS485/ Ethernet connection.
G. The generator shall be supplied with an output circuit breaker.
H. All generator batteries shall be nickel cadmium
I. Redundant communication switches and Ethernet connections are required between
the Master PLC Control and each Generator Control.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.3 DIESEL GENERATOR SET
A. Components: Set is to basically consist of diesel engine, brushless synchronous

generator with direct flexible coupling to engine and single or parallel control cubicle as
required and shown on the Drawings.
B. Governing is to be to ISO 3046/IV or BS 5514, electronic type governor with limits of
speed control as specified.
C. Starting and Stopping: When in the automatic mode the set is to start and stop
automatically by a signal sensed through an auxiliary contact in the load transfer
switchgear. The set is to stop, after an adjustable cool- down period (2 - 30 minutes).
D. Duty: Generator is to reach full speed within 10 seconds from start impulse and accept
immediately 100 % of net rated output (load being mixed, steady and inductive, with
motor starting loads as shown on the Drawings). Transient voltage variation is not to
exceed 10% under any step-load application for which the system is intended, up to full
rated load, recovering to within +/-2% within a few cycles.
E. Failure To Start: Should engine fail to start following a start impulse, the system is to come
to rest for a few seconds. Two further starting attempts are to be automatically made with
intermediate 20- second maximum periods of rest. Should the set fail to start after three
attempts, an alarm is to sound and a 'start failure' signal illuminate.
F. Hand operation is to be possible for testing or normal operation through a
test/manual/off/auto selector switch.
G. Regular Exercising: While on 'auto', the set is to start regularly and automatically every
week and is to operate for 30 minutes before stopping.
h. The Generator should have a hot start, Class G2/G3.
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE AND AUXILIARIES
A. Design: Diesel engine is to be designed for type of load and application required.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Engine and governor are to be selected to meet operating requirements and response
specified.
B. Engine Type: Compression-ignition type, with direct solid-injection, turbo-charged after-
cooled, for ratings over 100 kW, water cooled, with air-cooled radiator inline or V-type
cylinder arrangement suitable for direct coupling to driven machine.
C. Engine Cycle: 4-stroke cycle.
D. Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
E. Engine rating is to be such that alternator can deliver net specified rated output as
specified earlier, with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by the Standards.
F. Accessibility: It is to be possible to:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Remove rocker-box covers without disturbing fuel injection pipes or other components.
2. Remove and replace pistons and piston rods, liners, big and small end shells
and caps without dismounting engine.
3. Bar engine over by hand for spill timing check and adjustment.
G. Measuring Instruments: Engine mounted instruments are to include, at least, water
temperature gauge, lubricating oil temperature gauge and pressure gauge,
speedometer and running time meter. It is to be possible to measure, with extra
instrumentation, coolant temperature at lower end of radiator, air depression after air
filter, air boost and temperature using methods recommended by manufacturer.
Instrument accesses are to be normally sealed by threaded blanking caps. Speed is
to be sensed via a magnetic pickup off the Engine Thy Weed Ring Gear.
H. Cooling System: Engine is to be water cooled with gear- driven water pumps. System
is to be pressurized, with heavy-duty tropical radiator cooled by reverse flow fan. Fan
cowl and hand protection guards are to be fitted. Coolant temperature is to be controlled
by one or more thermostats as determined by design of system. Radiator is to be sized
for continuous performance at 110% rated load at worst operating ambient conditions
with a 7 to 8 deg. C temperature differential. Radiator is to be non-ferrous metal,
incorporating pressure valve, radiator cap and drain cock and with integral expansion
tank. Direct acting modulating thermostatic diversion valve is to control engine cooling
water temperature. Under normal operation, by-pass is not to be fully closed. Treated or
fresh cooling water and anti-corrosion and anti-freeze additives are to be used as
recommended by Manufacturer for Specific Conditions of Installation.
I. Cooling Airflow: Obstructions in path of cooling air flow (openings, louvers, grilles,
mesh, ducts, bends etc.) are not to reduce air flow below that needed at full rated
output. Fan and radiator characteristics are to be selected accordingly. Advise if
additional booster fans are required and provide necessary control gear for automatic
operation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. Cylinders are to have removable liners. Wet type liners are to have witness hole
between liner sealing rings of each cylinder for early detection of coolant or oil leakage.
Each cylinder is to have drilled and tapped hole and valve for connections of pressure
indicator.
K. Lubricating Oil System: Pressurized circulating type, using two engine-driven, gear type
lubricating oil pumps with full flow filters and replaceable elements and lubricating oil heat
exchanger. Filter system is to have spring loaded by-pass valve to permit oil circulation
if filters become clogged. Audible and visual alarms are to cut-in when valve starts
opening. Lubricating oil cooler is to be shell and tube heat exchanger with water from
engine radiator as the cooling medium. Direct acting thermostatic diversion valve is to
control oil temperature. Under normal operation by-pass is not to be fully closed.
L. Fuel system is to have injection pump and injectors that are easily removable and
replaceable for servicing. Engine is to have integral, gear type, engine driven transfer
pump to lift fuel against a
head of 2.5 m and supply it through filters to injection pump at constant pressure. Fuel
filter elements are to be easily replaceable.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
M. Exhaust system is to be complete with flanged, bolted, galvanized, seamless steel pipe
sections, long sweep elbows, flexible expansion sections, clean-outs, residential silencer,
wall thimbles and supporting steelwork. Silencer is to be independently supported.
Indoor hot exhaust parts are to be insulated with mineral wood / rock wool material, not
less than 50 mm thick, retained by wire ties and cladded with sheet metal aluminum (22 -
SWG) covers to protect insulation. Exhaust system is to be designed to reduce back-
pressure to below maximum specified by the manufacturer, in relation to exhaust pipe
length shown on the Drawings.
N. Electric Starting System: Engine starting is to be manual by push-button or automatic
through control system at control panel. System is to consist of heavy-duty starter
motor, heavy-duty battery and battery charger. Cranking motor and battery are to be
rated for cranking the engine when cold and at lowest temperature recorded. Starting
pinion is to automatically disengage when engine fires.
O. Storage Battery: Lead-acid, sealed-in-plastic type, complete with battery rack and inter-
cell connectors. Battery is to have sufficient capacity to provide minimum four cranking
periods.
P. Battery Charger: 25% over-rated, solid state, full-wave rectifier type, adequate to fully
recharge depleted battery in not more than 8 hours and to automatically control rate of
charge (providing a high-charge rate to a depleted battery and reducing to a trickle-
charge rate when battery is fully charged). Ammeter is to be provided to indicate
charging rate, which is to be adjustable. Battery charger is to be mounted in control
cubicle, unless otherwise approved.
Q. Electronic Governor is to provide isochronous governing, paralleling and load sharing of
generator sets. Governor is to have zero percent (isochronous) setting and adjustable
droop from zero percent to 10% droop. System is to include power supply unit,
magnetic speed pick-up, control module and actuator using fast response D.C. motor
drive or equally approved alternative. Governor is to be designed for fast-response and

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
high precision of speed (frequency) control, automatic paralleling and load sharing and
is to include speed adjustment to +/-5% of normal, while running, and with remote control
interface. Frequency deviation under 25% sudden load change is not to exceed 0.5 Hz,
recovering to stable speed condition of +/-0.1 Hz in 0.5 seconds.
R. Governor over-speed trip is to automatically close fuel pump racks in event of engine
over-speed. Device is to be separate and independent from governing mechanism.
S. Protective system is to comprise automatic engine shutdown and generator trip with
visual and audible alarms in event of over-speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling
water temperature and over cranking.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, permanent magnet constant

excitation type sized to pick up effective load without exceeding transient and steady-
state voltage deviation limits specified up to its full nominal rating and designed for the
performance stipulated in the Specification. It is to be two-bearing construction with
bearings of the sleeve or sealed ball type.
B. Leads and Cables: Phase leads are to be brought out fully insulated to a terminal
cable box of heavy gauge sheet steel, protection IP 44. Control and protection cables are
to be brought out to a separate terminal box.
C. Maximum voltage difference between the three phases at 100%-balanced load is not to
exceed 1%. With unbalanced load up to 8% on one phase at unity power factor and
zero load on other phases, the line-to-neutral voltages are not to differ by more than 2%.
D. Characteristics:
1. Number of Phases: 3.
2. Rated Voltage, Frequency, and Net Rated Output: As shown on the Drawings.
3. Rated power factor: 0.8.
4. Winding Connection: Re-connectable with ends brought out and fully insulated.
5. Maximum Unbalanced Load Current, (negative sequence component of current)
with None of the Phase Currents Exceeding Rated Current: 8% of the rated current.
6. Overload: 10% nameplate rating for 1 hour every 12 hours.
7. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection
for other voltages if required.
8. Voltage Regulator: Automatic, with readily accessible controls for voltage level.
9. Insulation: Class H for stator and class H for rotor & exciter, with class F
temperature rise, unless other indicated on the drawings.
10. Enclosure: Drip proof and screen protected (IP 21 to IEC 144).
11. Cooling: Built-in centrifugal fans.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
12. Maintained Short Circuit: 250% for 2 seconds.

13. Over-speed: 120% (minimum) for 2 minutes.
14. Waveform Distortion Factor at no Load: 5% max.
15. Anti-condensation heater if required.
E. Voltage Regulation: Overall voltage deviation within normal speed variations is to be
within limits specified from no-load to full-load, from hot to cold and with load power
factor from 0.8 lagging to unity. Regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load
exceeds capacity of generator. Voltage build-up is to be positive and rapid even when
full load is suddenly applied. Line-to-line voltage waveform deviation factor is not to
exceed +/-5%. Total harmonic content is not to exceed 5% and that of one harmonic not
to exceed 2%. Radio interference suppression is to be within the limits set by the
Standards, grade (N).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Exciter: A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable

source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance.
The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied
to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not
more than 10 seconds.
G. Voltage Regulator: Solid state, digital, volts/Hz type, utilizing silicon semi-conductor
devices in control and power stages, with built-in Electro-magnetic interference
suppression and designed for single or parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of
regulated voltage level is to be possible by a potentiometer at control panel. All
components are to be sealed, moisture and heat resistant, with a suitable environmentally
protected enclosure. Voltage regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds
capacity of generator and is to sustain a 3-phase short- circuit current at the generator
terminals for the period for which the short-circuit protection operates and at least for 3
seconds. Voltage regulator power is to be supported by generator voltage and current to
maintain excitation field power.
H. Two-position switch is to be provided for selection of manual or automatic mode of
regulated voltage control.
I. Sets Operating In Parallel: Cross-current compensation and necessary paralleling
modules are to be provided to effect sharing of active and reactive loads equally between
generators.
2.5 FRONT DISPLAY PANEL:
A. The front panel shall be digital and shall contain the following instruments and devices:
1. 1% accuracy generator set AC output instruments; Ammeter, Voltmeter,
Frequency Meter, Wattmeter, KW-hour meter, Power Factor Meter. Selector
switches to allow viewing of voltage and amperes for each phase shall be
provided. For 3-phase/4-wire systems the voltmeter shall indicate line to line and

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
line to neutral conditions. Voltmeter and frequency meter shall be analog

instruments. Switches and/or other provisions shall be included to allow reading
of bus voltage and frequency from this metering set.
2. Running Time Meter, Start Counter
3. Generator Set Mode Selector Switch: Switch shall provide run, off, and automatic
functions for control of the generator set.
4. Breaker trip/close switch with breaker status indicating lamps. The switch shall be
interlocked with the control system such that breaker closure is not possible unless
the mode select switch is in the run position and the generator set is
synchronized with the system bus.
5. Control Reset push-button switch with indicating lamp. Lamp shall flash to
indicate that generator set is locked out due to a fault condition.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Lamp test push-button switch. Operation of this switch shall cause all lamps on the
panel to be simultaneously tested.
7. The control panel shall be provided with a set of DC-powered lamps with a switch
to allow viewing of all functions on the front panel when normal lighting systems are
not available.
8. Emergency Stop switch. The emergency stop switch shall be a red, mushroom head
switch which maintains it’s position until manually reset.
9. Precision voltage and frequency adjust raise/lower switches. Switches shall allow
the generator set frequency and voltage to be adjusted plus or minus 5% when the
generator set is operating independently of the system bus. Voltage and
frequency adjustment switches shall be located adjacent to the generator set and
bus metering, breaker control switches, synchroscope and manual paralleling
panel, for ease of use by the operator.
10. Alarm and status indicating panel to indicate the following conditions (alarm horn
shall be located on master control):
Function Lamp Color Alarm Horn Shutdown Unit
Low DC Voltage Amber *
High DC Voltage Amber *
Weak Battery Amber *
Fail to Sync Amber *
Low Oil Pressure Alarm Amber *
Low Fuel – day tank Amber *
High Engine Temp Alarm Amber *
Ground Fault Amber *
Overcurrent Alarm Amber *
Breaker Failure Red * *
Breaker Tripped Red * *
Not in Auto Red * *
High Engine Temp Red * *
Volume 2: Section 4 Low Oil Pressure Red * Page 34 of
* 43
Overcurrent Red * *
Short Circuit Red * *
Loss of Excitation Red * *
Reverse Power Red * *
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Over Voltage Red * *

Phase Rotation Red * *
Low Coolant Level Red * *
Automatic Green
Generator Green
Running Breaker Green
Open Breaker Green

Green
Closed Timing
Green
for Start
Timing for Shutdown
2.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. Engine-generator system shall the environmenta conditions withou

withstand following l
mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: t
1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 50 deg C.

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000m
B. If Day tank is provided by Generator supplier three level indicators are required, high for
pump stop, medium for pump start, and low for generator shutdown.
2.8 VENTILATION SYSTEM:
A. The ventilation system of the generators room is of the non-forced type (by natural air
flow). However, the system shall be verified by the Manufacturer in accordance of
approved calculations. The Contractor shall provide an auxiliary forced ventilation system
if necessary at no extra cost to comply with Manufacturer requirements as such. This
auxiliary system shall comprise centrifugal fresh air fan and an exhaust air fan for each
generator and to be operated in synchronization with the respective generator. The
fan(s) shall be compatible with the rating of the generator(s). The complete system
including fans, ducts, motor controllers shall be designed in compliance with the

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
mechanical specifications of the project and the manufacturer's recommendations,

otherwise supplier shall provide a letter from the manufacturer for the capacity derating
expected

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged
engine generator performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine roughing-in of cooling-system piping systems and electrical connections.
Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required for packaged engine
generators.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings and manufacturers' equipment drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and
provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of drivers and accessories.
C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or
building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
D. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,
particularly in making connections and adjustments.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
F. Generating Set: Install to maintain alignment and minimize engine and generator stresses.
Protect instrumentation and control equipment including engine mounted instruments from
machine vibration. Mountings and method of mounting are to be as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
G. Engine exhaust piping is to be slightly sloped away from engine to avoid condensation
returning to engine and is to have drain plugs or clean-out at lower end as required.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. Engine Hot-Air Exhaust Duct: Install approved canvas duct with metal frames between
radiator and louvered opening in wall for radiator exhaust air.
I. Tank Vent Pipe: Extend to nearest outside wall of building and carry up to at least 2
m above ground level with end at least 1 m away from any building opening. Slope vent
pipe back to tank without traps and support securely. Provide replaceable dust filter and
gooseneck bend or approved weatherproof vent cap at top of pipe.
J. Pipe Hangers And Supports: Fasten securely to building structure with approved masonry
expansion bolts, minimum 20 mm diameter and install in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
K. Earthing: Install earthing system in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems" of the Specification.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage to
Engineer.
B. Earthing resistance tests if any are to be carried out to verify specified requirements.
C. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check
for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
D. Load tests are to be carried out at low loads to overload conditions, at various power
factors. Measurements are to include voltage and frequency deviations and regulating
time under various step loading conditions, temperature measurements and pressure
measurements at various locations, and in accordance with an approved plan under
conditions equal to worst site ambient conditions.
E. Tests are to include:
1. Full load test for 8 hours continuous, immediately followed by 10% overload test,
without interruption.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Insulation measurement.
3. Functional tests for voltage sensing, automatic start and synchronization, transfer
of load and load sharing as applicable.
4. Operation of engine shutdown and alarm signaling and indication, under
simulated fault conditions.
5. Measurement of vibration transmission to building structure.
6. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level
and specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all
connectors. Perform an integrity load

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
test and a capacity load test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for each
element of battery after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer's
specifications.
7. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
F. Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing,
provide load banks to carry out complete test cycle of the system under loading and
switching conditions necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.
G. Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each
system to 1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or
to pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from
manufacturers' published data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment.
Remove or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and devices that might
be damaged by test pressure. Maintain test pressure on system for 24 hours during
which time there is to be no noticeable drop in pressure. Check for leaks using soap
solution. Isolate source of pressure during testing.
H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
K. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to
applicable standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make
calibration records available for examination on request.
3.5 COMMISSIONING

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Battery Equalization: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean
components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Cleanliness of the Equipment prior to painting shall be such that it is smooth and free of all
foreign matter such as scale, sand, blisters, weld splatter, metal chips and shavings, oil,
grease, organic matter and rust.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Equipment openings, terminals and connections shall be protected against entrance of

dirt, dust, moisture, or other deleterious elements. All surfaces shall be protected from
corrosion and oxidation in accordance with Supplier's standard methods.
D. All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and properly prepared for painting,
followed by Supplier’s standard painting procedure. Paint coatings shall be free of sags,
runs, and incomplete coverage. One gallon of finish enamel shall be supplied for field
touch-up. Paint colors shall be Manufacturer’s standards.
3.7 NAME PLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided for front and rear face of each major device. The
nameplates shall include the Equipment tag number and Equipment description.
B. Nameplates shall consist of letters and numbers engraved on a laminated thermosetting
plastic material, providing black letters and numbers on a white background. Size of
letters and figures shall be approximately 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) for component
nameplates and 1 inch (25.4 mm) for major assembly designations.
C. Nameplate mounting screw holes shall be slotted to permit expansion.
D. The Manufacturer's name, address, type designation, identification reference, rated
voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated rpm, rated kW output and rated power
factor shall appear on a suitable nameplate, securely fastened to the diesel generator
skid. The Supplier’s name and address shall also appear on a suitable nameplate,
securely fastened to the diesel generator skid.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 36 23
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 3
1.1 DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 3
1.2 REFERENCES ......................................................................................................... 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................... 3
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................... 5
1.5 COORDINATION...................................................................................................... 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS............................................................................................................ 7
2.1 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ........................... 7
2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES.................................................................... 8
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES: ................................................... 9
2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES ......................................................................... 11
2.5 FINISHES ............................................................................................................... 12
2.6 CIRCUIT BEAKER BASED ATS (SOURCE - CHANGEOVER SYSTEM): ........... 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 13
3.1 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 13
3.2 CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................... 13
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................. 13
3.4 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................ 15

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes automatic transfer switches (ATS) rated 600V and less,
including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
2. Bypass/Isolation switches.
3. Engine exerciser.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of the
following standards:
1. IEC 947-6-1 Low voltage switchgear and control gear, multifunction

equipment, automatic transfer switching equipment
2. IEEE Standard 446 – IEEE Recommended practice for emergency and standby
power systems for commercial and industrial applications.
3. NEMA Standard ICS 10-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) – AC Automatic transfer
switches.
4. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
5. NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
6. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby power systems
7. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
8. UL 1008 – Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
9. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features, devices,
and material lists for each switch specified.
1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation

switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each
combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

C. Qualification Data: For supplier and manufacturer.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts,

and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from
time of notification.
B. Testing Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the manufacturer to supervise on-site
testing
C. Source Limitations: Obtain all automatic transfer switches and bypass/isolation switches
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with IEC 947-2
F. Comply with NFPA 70/99/110 as applicable
G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
H. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to assure
us that all spare parts and consumables will be available for 15 years life span of the
equipment.
I. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 year warranty started from final Testing and commissioning.
J. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped) are
approved. Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are not accepted.
Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at delivery to the site for
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
“Building works package”
inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate of Origin, will result in rejecting the
delivery and refusing the installation, and the Contractor or his Sub-Contractors shall be held
solely responsible for all cost and delays to the project associated with the product delivery. In
exceptional cases, Contractor shall submit the necessary paperwork and documents to the
Engineer and Client for approval prior to shipment.
K. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-site
L. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions without
M. The above conditions (J,K and L items), shall superseded all other statements, specifications,
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases, trench and steel frames. Cast anchor-bolts
inserts into bases. Concrete.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total
system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch
ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by
protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated,
based on testing according to UL 1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and
trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent
or better over an operating temperature range of -20ºc and +70ºc (degree Celsius).
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-

surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEC related standard.
Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or

electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both
directions.
F. ATS shall be supplied with a built-in circuit breaker on the Utility Feeder if specified so in
drawings.
G. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full- rated current
between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case

circuit-breaker components are not acceptable
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

Automatic Transfer Switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing
contacts.
H. Overlapping Neutral.
I. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches

for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator
and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.
J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at
terminations.
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or
bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
K. Enclosures: complying with UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position

stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation
D. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote monitoring and control.
E. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with IEC 947-2.
F. If Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and

characteristics:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation.

2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power
sources not exceeding 100ms.
3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and
sensors confirming both sources are present and acceptable.
a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator.
4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.
G. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors
before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer.
Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch.
Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds,
and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and
seal currents are rated for actual currents to be encountered.
H. 4 poles, dual bypass isolation switch consisting of a double throw transfer switch and
microprocessor controlled ATS for both generator and utility feeder.
I. NEMA 1, IP 31, 16mm panel thickness
J. The transfer system should be Break-before-make (Open Transition)
K. ATS should be Modbus ready, in order to be connected to BMS
L. Connection from and to ATS will be as shown on Power Single Line diagram (PSLD).
2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES:
A. Under-voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to- ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory
set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
B. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer
and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one
second.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage

shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent.
Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for
pickup at 95 percent.
D. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory
set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained
undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
E. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
G. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.
1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
H. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for
each switch position, rated 10 A at 220-V ac.
I. Communication port so that the ATS can be monitored by the building management
system.
J. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer

switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal
source. Pilot light indicates override status.
K. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally
open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.
L. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory
set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine- generator controls
after retransfer of load to normal source.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
M. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine

generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and
shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset
intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30
minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-
minute cool-down period.
N. Exerciser features include the following:
1. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without
load transfer.
2. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
3. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.
2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES
A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly
to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the
following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:
1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch
with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while
isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer- switch operation, except for
testing or maintenance.
2. Draw-out Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live
parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.
3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit
Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer
switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.
4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those
of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.
5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be
performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall
describe operating instructions.
7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front
without removing other parts or main power conductors.
C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-

installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated
available short-circuit current.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Enclosures: Manufacturer’s standard enamel over corrosion-resistant

pretreatment and primer.
B.
2.6 CIRCUIT BEAKER BASED ATS (SOURCE - CHANGEOVER SYSTEM):
A. It is accepted to use circuit breaker based source – changeover system to integrate the
ATS function in the same switchboard (if indicated on drawing). The system shall include:
1. Circuit breaker as indicated and used in the same switchboard with ratings as shown
on drawings.
2. Interlocking mechanism (electrical and mechanical).
3. Automatic controller shall be microprocessor based and shall fulfill all the function
required for ATS including the engine weekly exerciser.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. A detail for installation on raised floor
systems shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to
control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by
manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to
accommodate required wiring.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-
resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages
and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity
of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual
transfer operation.
5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational
function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-
switch operations.
f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values
exceeding 500 µΩ (micro-ohms) and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50
percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine
cool-down and shutdown.
6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for

power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. All tests and commissioning shall be as specified in 01 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR TESTING COMMISSIONING.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment."
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 36 33
STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 3
1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
1.5 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 5
PART 2 – PRODUCT ................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 8
2.3 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................... 8
2.4 THEORY OF OPERATION .......................................................................................... 9
PART 3 – EXECUTION.............................................................................................................15
3.1 EXAMINATION ...........................................................................................................15
3.2 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................15
3.3 DEMONSTRATION ....................................................................................................15
3.4 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................15

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited to, solid state, three-
phase STS to be used for connecting critical loads to one of two independent sources in
redundant power supply systems. In addition to hardware and software design criteria, the
theory of normal operation and operation under various other conditions (fault included)
are specified for the STS design.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The
edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the latest date as of the date of the
Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1. ANSI/IEEE 446, "Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI
approved).
2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, "Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage
AC Power Circuits" (copyrighted by IEEE, ANSI approved).
C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1. ISO 9001, "Quality Management Systems - Requirements."
1. NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches."
2. NEMA ST 1, "Specialty Transformers (Except General-Purpose Type)."
3. NEMA ST 20, "Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications”
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code"
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL 1008, "Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches" (copyrighted by UL, ANSI
approved).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. UL 1950, "Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient
information to determine compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required. Include
information fully detailed information and manufacturer’s standard product data.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing power, signal, and control systems,
clearly differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring, and
between components provided by the manufacturer and those provided by others.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: The contractor shall furnish data covering model,
type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each major item
of equipment or apparatus in accordance with the requirements of the contract
documents. Operating instructions shall cover all phases of control.
A. Qualification:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the
manufacture of static transfer switches of types and sizes required, and whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 10
years.
2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five
years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing static transfer
switches similar in type and scope to that required for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes,
ordinances, and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction.
Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencing the installation, meet at the Project site
to review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination with other
trades. Pre-installation conference shall include, but shall not be limited to, the Contractor,
the Installer, and any trade that requires coordination with the work. Date and time of the
pre-installation conference shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer.
D. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to
the equipment.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant the work of this Section to be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and free from faults and defects in materials
and workmanship for period indicated below. This special warranty shall extend the one
year period of limitations contained in the General Conditions. The special warranty shall
be countersigned by the Installer and the manufacturer.
1. The static transfer switches shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty
from the manufacturer for a period of 12 months from date of installation or
acceptance by the Owner.
B. Additional Owner Rights: The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
A. The digital STS shall be a solid state, three-phase, break-before-make, dual position
switch designed to connect a critical three-phase load to one of two separate,
independent, synchronized sources of three-phase power and provide voltage to its output
terminals for any load from 0 percent to 100 percent of its rating. The STS shall consist of
six pairs of SCR’s connected in an AC switch configuration. Each three-phase input shall
be fed through a molded case automatic switch which shall provide short circuit protection
by means of a magnetic trip only. The switch shall then feed three pairs of hockey-puck
SCR’s, each pair consisting of two SCR’s in an anti-parallel arrangement. The SCR
outputs for each corresponding phase from both inputs shall then be connected and fed
through an output isolation molded case switch to the output terminals. These SCR’s shall
be rated to carry the full 100 percent load (continuous rated) while operated as stipulated
herein and at the maximum ambient temperature specified.
B. The source, to which the load shall be normally connected to, shall be designated as the
preferred source; and the other redundant, standby source as the alternate source.
Selection of which input source is preferred will be Owner-selectable from the operator
control panel, by control contact inputs, or through the communications port(s).
C. In normal operation, the load shall be connected to the preferred source as long as all
phases of the preferred source are within the acceptable limits. Upon failure of the
preferred source (more degraded than the alternate source), the load shall be transferred
to the alternate source until such time as the preferred source returns to within acceptable
limits. If while on the preferred source, the alternate source falls outside acceptable limits
(out of tolerance), then automatic transfer shall be inhibited until the alternate source
returns to within acceptable limits.
D. The STS solid state switching devices shall be hockey-puck type SCR’s with a minimum
peak inverse voltage rating of 1800 volts continuous at 125 degree junction temperature
and open gate conditions for reliability. The thermal margin on junction temperature at full
load current shall be at least 25 °C below maximum junction temperature for an ambient
temperature of 40 °C. Cooling shall be natural convection two-sided cooling with heat
sinks on models rated 200 amperes and lower. Forced air cooling using fans (with one
redundant fan) shall be used on models rated 400 amperes and higher.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. SCR’s shall have a rupture rating or be protected in a manner compatible with the
specified fault current availability. Rupture protection may be eliminated if the SCR
overload capability can sustain a dead short on the load side. Fuses shall not be used on
the SCR’s if possible. Molded case switches with magnetic trips shall be used to provide
short circuit protection only. Upstream and/or downstream devices shall provide
overcurrent protection.
F. Transfers and re-transfers between sources shall be break-before-make and control logic
shall have protective sensing circuits to ensure that there is no cross-connection between
the two sources.
G. A separate redundant circuit for back-feed protection shall be provided to ensure that
there is no cross-connection between the two sources in the event of a shorted SCR on
the inactive side with the upstream circuit breaker open.
H. Keyed interlocks shall be provided on the two bypass switches to prevent closure of both
at the same time. An optional interlocking scheme shall be offered for additional keyed
interlocks on the source isolation switches to ensure that prior to bypassing to a particular
source, the STS shall transfer the load to that source (if the load is not already being
powered by that source). On closure of a bypass switch, the control logic shall also shunt
trip opposite bypass and input isolation switches if necessary to prevent cross-connection
of the two sources.
I. The microprocessor-based core control shall use FPGA’s for input and output signal
processing and control sequencing. Separate analog-to-digital (A/D) circuits shall allow
selection of faster and more accurate devices to optimize sensing time.
J. The enclosure protection shall be IP 31
K. Transfer shall be fast break-before-make with no overlap in conduction from one source to
the other.
L. Hot-swappable circuit breakers
M. 4 poles.
N. Fault tolerant; has protective devices to prevent fault propagation upwards.
O. Triple-redundant DSP digital logic
P. STS should be Modbus ready to be connected to BMS.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.2 ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCTION
A. Active electronic devices shall be solid state. Relays shall be sealed with covers.
Capacitors shall be non-PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) type and internally protected in
accordance with applicable UL standards. Circuit boards and relays shall have
mechanical restraints designed to prevent loosening of these devices while in transit,
being relocated, or in service.
B. The design shall allow a minimum of 25 °C operating margin from the maximum allowable
junction temperature of solid state semiconductor devices.
C. Subassemblies shall be constructed for ease of access and replacement of parts.
Subassemblies shall be front, top, or side accessible. Circuit boards shall use industry-
accepted connectors. The equipment shall be constructed so that each power component
can be replaced without soldering. MTTR (mean time to recover) for any assembly shall
not exceed 15 minutes.
D. Internal circuit cards shall employ connectors with corrosion-resistant pins for reliability.
Some circuit boards shall have LED indicators to annunciate critical board functions for
ease of troubleshooting and maintenance.
E. Circuit cards shall be screened against premature failure and shall have the ability to
report diagnostics and failures to the central display.
2.3 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Technical Ratings:
1. Nominal Input Voltage: as specified on drawings.
2. Nominal Output Voltage: as specified on drawings to correspond with input
voltage.
3. Maximum Continuous Current: 60, 100, 200, 400, 600A or as specified on
drawings.
4. Molded Case Switch Rating: 250, 400, 600A or as specified on drawings.
5. Input/output Frequency: as specified on drawings, ±5 hertz
6. Load Power Factor: Unity to 0.60 lagging or leading.
7. Non-Linear Loads Capability: 100 percent of its rating up to maximum crest factor
of 3.5
8. Overload Rating: 150 percent for 15 minutes; 1000 percent for three cycles.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
9. Source Voltage Distortion: Up to 10 percent THD with notching and ringing

transients.
10. Output Voltage Distortion: Less than 1 percent added.
11. Voltage Transient Withstand: Up to 6 kV (6000 volt spike) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41
for Category B3, and shall meets EN 50082-1 (with optional TVSS installed). Such
transient levels shall not affect the operation of the STS. The STS may transfer on
overvoltage conditions.
12. Short Circuit Withstand: Up to 100 kA.
13. Harmonic Current Feedback from the Load: Unlimited.
14. Sense and Transfer Time: 1/4 cycle total sense and transfer time maximum.
15. Control Power Supplies: Triple redundant with failure alarm.
16. SCR Detection: Open and shorted SCR detection.
B. Environmental Characteristics:
1. Operating Temperature: 10 °c to 40 °c.
2. Storage Temperature: -10 °c to 60 °c.
3. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 95 percent non-condensing.
4. Operating Altitude (Above Sea Level): 0 m to 1000m.
5. Audible Noise: Less than 65 dB at 1.5m.
2.4 THEORY OF OPERATION
A. Automatic Transfers:
1. Automatic fast transfer of the load from one source to the other shall be
accomplished by turning off the active source SCR’s and turning on the inactive
source SCR’s in a sequence and timing that shall allow a combined sense and
transfer time of less than 1/4 cycle.
2. Automatic transfer shall be initiated under any of the following conditions,
provided transfer is authorized and the inactive source is not more degraded than
the active source:
a) Under-voltage (fast or slow) on any phase of the active source. On sensing a
peak current overload condition, a check shall be made for an under-voltage
condition indicating that the under-voltage condition caused the overload. In
this case, automatic transfer shall be inhibited, the fault shall be memorized
(manual reset required) and the load shall stay on the active source until the
overload condition is cleared and the system is reset.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b) Over-voltage (slow) on any phase of the active source.

c) Under-frequency of the active source.
d) Over-frequency of the active source.
e) Open SCR on the active side (transfer to inactive side, then shunt trip active
CB and inhibit re-transfer until repair is made and the system is reset).
f) Shorted SCR on the inactive side (transfer to shorted inactive side, then
shunt trip previously active CB to prevent re-transfers. Inhibit transfers and
re-transfer until repair is made and the system is reset).
g) SCR over-temperature on the active side (if there are no current overload
faults, transfer to inactive side and inhibit re-transfer until repair is made and
the system is reset. If inactive side subsequently fails, transfer back to the
active side if it is within acceptable limits, including, but not limited to, over-
temperature limits).
h) SCR gate drive power supply failure on the active side (transfers to inactive
side and inhibit re-transfer until repair is made and the system is reset).
i) MOV based TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Suppression) failure on the
active side.
B. Manual Transfers:
1. The STS shall be able to be operated as a manual switch when the manual control
keyed switch on the front panel is in the on position, enabling the manual control
pushbuttons and some set-point changes, for the following manual operations:
a) Manual Change Preferred Source Pushbutton: Shall select other source as
preferred, causing a transfer (without break) to the selected source if it is
available and within acceptable limits and is not the active source. If the two
sources are outside the preset in-sync phase window, a transfer (with break)
shall be able to be made by pressing the manual override limits pushbutton
simultaneously (pre-conditions shall be manual control switch in on position;
inactive source is available and within acceptable limits).
b) Manual Return to Preferred Source Pushbutton: If auto-re-transfer is
disabled, pressing this pushbutton shall temporarily enable auto-retransfer
and initiate a re-transfer back to the preferred source, overriding Owner-
selected auto-retransfer time delay. Then auto-retransfer shall again be
disabled after this manual retransfer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. To prevent normal automatic transfers, the operator can use the change preferred
source pushbutton to transfer to the desired source, and then shut down the
feeder to the other inactive source.
C. Automatic Re Transfers
1. Automatic re-transfer of the load from the alternate source back to the preferred
shall be accomplished by turning off the active alternate source SCR’s and turning
on the inactive preferred source SCR’s. This shall be done in a sequence and
timing that shall allow a combined sense and transfer time of less than 1/4 cycle.
Providing the inactive preferred source is not more degraded than the active
alternate source, re-transfer shall occur under the following conditions:
a) If re-transfer is not prohibited, re-transfer shall occur after an Owner-selected
time delay after the preferred source becomes available and within
acceptable limits.
b) If re-transfer is prohibited, re-transfer shall be able to be manually initiated by
pressing the manual return to preferred source pushbutton (pre-conditions
shall be manual control switch in on position; inactive preferred source is
available and within acceptable limits). Transfer shall be temporarily
authorized for a preset time.
D. Transfer Authorization/Prohibition
1. Transfer shall be prohibited under the following conditions (memorized conditions
require manual system reset):
a) Transfer prohibits input from the operator control panel, control contact input,
or communications port.
b) Peak current overload.
c) External power fault (peak current overload caused by under-voltage),
memorized.
d) Over-temperature (active or inactive switch), memorized.
e) Shorted SCR (active or inactive switch), memorized.
f) Open SCR (active switch), memorized.
g) Reverse power.
h) Inactive source out-of-tolerance.
i) Inactive source power supply fault.
j) Phase rotation fault.
k) Inactive input isolation switch open.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Maintenance Bypass/Molded Case Switches/Live System Test

1. Switch Arrangement:
a) A manually operated maintenance bypass switching arrangement shall be
included to permit complete isolation of the static switch SCR assemblies for
servicing without disrupting power to the critical loads. The maintenance
bypass shall consist of:
1) STS input isolation switch. One for each static switch SCR
assembly.
2) STS output isolation switch. One for both static switch SCR
assemblies. A second redundant output isolation switch shall be
available as an option.
3) Maintenance bypass switch. One for each static switch SCR
assembly.
b) STS circuit breakers shall be automatic switches with magnetic trip only with
plug-in bases for ease of removal for replacement, calibration or testing,
without interruption of power to the critical load. Switches shall be equipped
with shunt trips and auxiliary contacts. Continuously activated shunt trips
shall not allow closing of the switch (not even as much as a contact-to-
contact touch).
2. Electrical Bypass Switch Interlock: If either maintenance bypass switch is closed,
the opposite maintenance bypass switch shall be electrically shunt-tripped.
3. Electric Input-Bypass Switch Interlock: If the output switch and either maintenance
bypass switch are closed, the opposite input isolation switch shall be electrically
shunt-tripped.
4. Mechanical Key Interlocks: Mechanical kirk key interlocks shall be provided on the
two maintenance bypass switches to prevent an operator from closing both bypass
switches at the same time. A single key shall allow closure of one switch at a time.
Additional key interlocks on the two STS input isolation switches to ensure that the
STS is on the source that the operator intends to bypass to, shall be available as
an option.
a) Live System Test: While in maintenance bypass, and with the STS output
isolation switch off, the STS shall be able to be tested with both sources
connected to the STS through the input isolation switches (using the SCR’s
to make actual transfers).
F. Preferred Source Selection (Symmetrical Operation)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. At the operator’s option and without any degradation of performances or loss of

protective features, the unit may be operated with either source designated as the
preferred source. Also, the current alternate source shall be able to be switched to
be the preferred source (using LCD screen, the manual hard key, communication
port or remote input contact).
G. Sensing and Transfer Times
1. Voltage and/or current sensing using fast digital conversion techniques shall be
employed for both sources to meet a maximum 2 milliseconds sensing time
requirement (to sense a deviation of power quality outside of the Owner
parameters).
2. Total sense and transfer time shall be 1/4 cycle maximum.
H. Overload Operation
1. On sensing a peak current overload (crest factor setting, 3.5 maximum), automatic
transfers shall be inhibited and the load shall stay on the active source until the
overload condition is cleared. On sensing peak current overload condition, a check
shall be made for an under-voltage condition indicating that the under-voltage
condition caused the overload. Automatic transfer shall be inhibited and the load
shall stay on the active source until the overload condition is cleared and the
system is reset (this fault condition shall be memorized).
2. An overload alarm shall be given if the load current exceeds the RMS current
overload setting for more than 30 seconds. This overload condition shall not cause
an automatic transfer.
I. Shorted SCR Protection (Including Back-Feed Protection)
1. The STS design shall include, but shall not be limited to, sensing circuits to detect
a shorted SCR and in addition to the following actions, shall initiate audible and
visual alarms:
a) In the event of a shorted SCR in the active side powering the load, the unit
shall alarm, and stay on the active side. Then the SCR isolation switch on
the inactive side shall be shunt-tripped to prevent transferring to the inactive
source. Automatic transfer and re-transfer shall be inhibited until repair is
made and the system is reset.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b) In the event of a shorted SCR in the non-conducting SCR in the inactive side
that is not powering the load at the time, the unit shall alarm. The STS shall
immediately transfer the load to the inactive side to eliminate cross-connect
current between the shorted sources. The SCR isolation switch in the
previously active side shall be shunt-tripped to prevent re-transfer. Automatic
transfer and re-transfer shall be inhibited until repair is made and the system
is reset. A separate redundant back-feed protection circuit shall be provided.
J. Open SCR Protection
1. The STS design shall include, but shall not be limited to, sensing circuits to detect
an open SCR and in addition to the following actions, shall initiate audible and
visual alarms:
a) In the event of an open SCR in the active side powering the load, the unit
shall alarm and immediately transfer to the inactive side. Then the SCR
isolation switch on the previously active side shall be shunt-tripped.
Automatic retransfer shall be inhibited under such conditions until repair is
made and the system is reset.
K. Source Cross-Connection Protection
1. The STS transfer logic shall check that the two input sources, of any combinations,
are never connected in a fashion to allow current flow from one source to the other
without first passing through the load. The logic circuitry shall have protective
sensing circuits that prohibit this conduction. Transfers and re-transfers between
sources shall be break-before-make to prevent any cross-conduction, even in out-
of-phase conditions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be
installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the
Architect/Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as
satisfactory by the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation and installation shall be in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop
drawings, manufacturer’s written recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative of the manufacturer to

provide start-up service and to demonstrate and train the Owner’s personnel.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
2. Train the Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in operation and maintenance manuals with the Owner’s personnel.
4. Schedule training with the Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, with at least
seven day’s advanced notice.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer,
which shall ensure that the static transfer switches shall be without damage at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 41 00
FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................. 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 6
3.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................. 6
3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING .................................................................................................. 8
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION/COATINGS ................................................................................ 8

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a complete master labeled lightning
protection system, complying with NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Isometric and plan views showing layout and connections to the required metal
surfaces.
2. Show the methods of mounting the system to the adjacent construction.
B. Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer has had suitable and adequate experience
installing other lightning protection systems, and is capable of installing the system as
recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.
C. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following
certifications to the Resident Engineer a certification that the lightning protection system
has been properly installed and tested.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and

errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
UL 96 Lightning Protection Components
UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
D. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
SASO 1614 Protection of structures against lightning – Part1: General

Principals – section 1: Guide A. Section of protection
levels for lightning protection systems.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Attach master labels to each item by its manufacturer as evidence that the materials have
been manufactured in conformance with the UL Standards for master label lightning
protection materials.
B. In additional to conformance to UL 96, the component material requirements are as
follows:
1. Conductors: Electrical grade copper. Conductors shall be in accordance with
NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I or Class II materials as applicable.
2. Air terminals: Solid copper, 300 to 500mm long, not less than 13mm diameter, with
sharp nickel-plated points.
3. Ground rods: Copper cladded steel, not less than 19mm diameter by 3000mm
long. Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467.
4. Ground plates: Solid copper, not less than 2mm thick.
5. Tubing: Stiff copper or brass.
C. Anchors and fasteners: Bolt type which is most suitable for the specific anchor and
fastener installations. Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL
96, class as applicable, Class 2, style and size as required for the installation. Clamp-type
connectors shall only be used for the connection of the roof conductor to the air terminal
and to the guttering. All other connections, bonds, and splices shall be done by
exothermic welds or by high compression fittings. The exothermic welds and high
compression fittings shall be listed for the purpose. The high compression fittings shall be
the type which requires a hydraulically operated mechanism to apply a minimum of 10,000
psi.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be coordinated with the roofing manufacturer and installer.

B. Install the conductors as inconspicuously as practical and with the proper bends.
C. Install the vertical conductors within the concealed cavity of exterior walls. Run the
conductors to the exterior at elevations below the finished grade and make the ground
connections to the earth outside of the building or stack perimeter.
D. Make connections of dissimilar metal with bimetallic type fittings to prevent electrolytic
action.
E. Use the exothermic welding type connections that form solid metal joints in the main
vertical and horizontal conductors, and for connections that are not exposed in the finish
work.
F. For the earth connections, install ground rods and ground plates, and the conductor
connections to them and the main water pipes in the presence of the Resident Engineer.
For the conductors located outside of the building or stack, install the conductors not less
than 600mm below the finished grade.
G. For structural steel buildings, connect the steel framework of the buildings to the main
water pipe near the water system entrance to the building.
H. Connect lightning protection cables to all metallic projections, equipment, and components
above the roof as indicated on the drawings.
I. Connect exterior metal surfaces, located within 900mm of the lightning protection system
conductors, to the lightning protection system conductors to prevent flashovers.
J. Maintain horizontal or downward coursing of main conductor and insure that all bends have
at least an 8-inch radius and do not exceed 90 degrees.
K. Conductors shall be rigidly fastened every 900mm along the roof and down to the building
to ground.
L. Air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be
protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently and rigidly

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
attached to the building or structure. Install air terminal bases, cable holders and other
roof-system supporting means without piercing roof metal.
M. Use clamp supports to secure supporting means to roof standing seams only.
N. Use through-roof connectors for down-conductor attachment to roof system.
O. Down-conductors coursed on or in reinforced concrete columns or on structural steel
columns shall be connected to the reinforcing steel or the structural steel member at its
upper and lower extremities. In the case of long vertical members an additional
connection shall be made at intervals not exceeding 30m.
P. A counterpoise, where shown, shall be 70mm2 copper cable or equivalent material having
suitable resistance to corrosion and shall be laid around the perimeter of the structure in a
trench not less than 600mm deep at a distance not less than 900mm nor more than 2.5m
from the nearest point of the structure.
Q. On construction utilizing post tensioning systems to secure precast concrete sections, the
post tension rods shall not be used as a path for lightning to ground. Down conductors shall
be provided on structures using post tensioning systems. Down conductors shall have
sufficient separation from post tension rods to prevent side-flashing. Post tension rods shall
be bonded to the lightning protection and grounding systems only at the base of the
structure; this bonding shall be performed in strict accordance with the recommendations of
the post tension rod manufacturer, and shall be done by, or in the presence of, a
representative of the manufacturer.
R. Grounding: Test the ground resistance to earth by standard methods and conform to the
ground resistance requirements specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
S. For smoke stacks, the following additional requirements shall apply:
1. Extend air terminals from approximately 900mm below the top of the smoke stacks
to approximately 900mm above the top of the stacks.
2. Securely seat and rivet the vertical conductors into bronze cable connectors.
Cross-connect the vertical conductors at approximately the midpoint between the
top and bottom of the smoke stacks.
T. For obstruction lights, the following additional requirements shall apply:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Extend air terminals 300mm above the top of the light fixtures and securely clamp to
the light fixture supports.
2. Install 600 volt class lightning arresters. Connect the arresters to the lightning circuit
conductors at suitable locations, and ground and bond them to the lightning
protection system.
3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Remove any protective, non-permanent coatings applied by the Equipment Manufacturer.
B. Clean external surfaces of all Equipment and materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose rust.
3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION/COATINGS
A. Copper materials used on the upper 8 meters (25 feet) of a stack shall have a continuous
covering of lead having a minimum thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) to resist corrosion by
flue gases. Such materials shall include conductors, strike termination devices,
connectors, splicers, and cable holders. Stacks that extend through a roof less than 25
feet (8 meters) shall have a lead covering only on those materials above the roof level.
B. Where lead covering is used, provide connections from copper to copper after lead
covering has been removed. After copper to copper joints have been made, recover
these joints with lead either by wiping or casting, so that bare copper is not exposed on
any part of the work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES.......................................................................................................................... 3
1.02 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 4
1.04 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.05 DESIGN GUIDELINES ........................................................................................................................ 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................................... 8
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.02 LAMPS ................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES) ............................................................................................... 9
2.04 TERMINATION/EARTHING .............................................................................................................. 10
2.05 CEILING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.06 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES .................................................................................................................... 11
2.07 LED LIGHT FIXTURES ..................................................................................................................... 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................................... 13
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION ................................................................................................. 13
3.02 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................. 13
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.............................................................................................................. 14

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixture supports.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3. Ballast.
4. Energy-efficiency data.
5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture
type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the
lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be
certified by the manufacturer.
7. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated
life
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers
of the items involved:
1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
4. Other items in finished ceiling including but not limited to the following:
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. Sprinklers.
d. Smoke and fire detectors.
e. Occupancy sensors.
f. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in Interior
Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:
1. Lamps: Specified units installed.
2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to assure
equipment.
Contract Award are a part of this Specification and, where referred to by title or by basic
designation only, are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific reference
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
C62.41-91 Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power
Circuits
70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
101 Life Safety Code
D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
C82.1-97 Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications
C82.2-02 Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
C82.4-02 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps
C82.11-02 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
SSL-1-10 Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-96 Edison-Base Lampholders
542-99 Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
935-01 Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1029-94 High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
1029A-06 Ignitors and Related Auxiliaries for HID Lamp Ballasts
1598-00 Luminaires
1574-04 Standard for Track Lighting Systems
2108-04 Standard for Low-Voltage Lighting Systems
8750-09 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products
F. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES):

IESNA HB-10 IESNA Lighting Handbook 10th edition
LM-79-08 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products
LM-80-08 Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources
LM-82-12 Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and
Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature
G. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
IEC 60061 Lamp Caps and Holders together with Gauges for the Control of
Interchageability and Safety Part 1: Lamp Caps.
IEC 60061-2 Lamp Caps and Holders together with Gauges for the Control of
Interchageability and Safety Part 2: Lamp Holders
IEC 60061-3 Lamp Caps and Holders together with Gauges for the Control of
Interchageability and Safety Part 3: Gauges
IEC 60064 Tungsten Filament Lamps for Domestic and Similar General Lighting
Service
IEC 60081 Tubular Fluorescent Lamps for General Lighting Service
IEC 60068-2-6 Environmental Testing
IEC 60188 High Pressure Mercury Vapor Lamps
IEC 60529 Degrees on Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60598-1 Luminaires Part 1: General Requirements and Tests

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
IEC 60598-2-1 Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements; Section 1 - Fixed General

Purpose Luminaires
IEC 60598-2-2 Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements; Section 2 -Recessed
Luminaires
IEC 60598-2-3 Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements; Section 3 – Luminaires
for Road and Street Lighting
IEC 60598-2-22 Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements; Section 22 – Luminaires
for Emergency Lighting
IEC 60662 High Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps
IEC 60920/921 Ballast for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
IEC 61048 Capacitator for Use in Tubular Fluorescent and Other Discharge Lamp
Circuits.
IEC 62034 Automatic test system for battery powered emergency escape lighting.
H. European Norms (EN)
EN 55015:2006+A1 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment.
EN 55022 Information Technology Equipment – Radio disturbance
characteristics – Limits and methods of Measurements
EN 60598-2-22 Luminaries – Part 2-22: Particular Requirements –Luminaries for
Emergency Lighting –AMD 14393: June 20, 2003
EN 60925 Performance Requirements for D.C. Supplied Ballasts for
Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
EN 60929 A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps,
performance requirements.
EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -Testing and Measurement
Techniques
EN 61347-2-3 Lamp control gear - General safety and requirements
EN 61547 Specification for equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC
immunity requirements
I. In the event of any conflict between codes, or this Section & codes, the more stringent applies
J. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in addition to
requirements, the recommendations shall be followed unless stated otherwise by this
specification
K. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.05 DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. An emergency light should be present with 3m of any fire extinguisher point.

B. The illuminance needed on the task depends on how much detail need to be seen. It alse
depends on the age of the worker, the speed and accuracy by which the task needs to be
performed. These performances related requirements and light levels are detailed in the
Illumination standards.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 LAMPS
A. General:
1. Lamps shall be furnished and installed in all luminaires covered under the Contract
2. Lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be utilized in the final use in fixture
units
3. Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures until so directed, and
this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are ready for occupancy by
the Employer
4. Generally, high output, low consumption, Light Emitting Diode lamps shall be used,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; and instant-start lamps
shall comply with ANSI C78.3.
2. Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376.
3. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color
temperature between 2700 and 6500K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) greater than
80, average rated life of 20,000 hours, and be suitable for use with dimming ballasts,
unless otherwise indicated. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity
Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample
preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
1. T4, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and suitable for use with dimming
ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Long Twin-Tube Fluorescent Lamps:
1. T5, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature between 2700 and 6500K, 20,000 hours
average rated life.
E. High Intensity Discharge Lamps:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature

1900K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
2. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000K.
3. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), and color temperature
4000K.
4. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800K.
F. Light Emitting Diode (L.E.D.):
1. CRI 70 minimum & color temperature 4000K if otherwise not indicated in Lighting
fixture schedule.
2. 35,000 hours average rated life.
3.
2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)
A. All types of lighting fittings shall be as described on the Drawings.

B. All lighting fittings shall be supplied complete with appropriate control gear where necessary,
lamps, mounting and fixing accessories etc. whether explicitly mentioned in the description of
each light fitting or not. All the fittings shall have the same appearance, material, technical
details and approximate dimensions.
C. Luminaires shall be connected to the main circuit wiring with heat resistant flexible cables of a
minimum conductor size of 2.5 mm2 insulated with silicone rubber.
D. Standard fluorescent luminaires shall have two suspension or fixing points.
E. All fittings shall be easy to clean inside and outside, when mounted.
F. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 1598, as shown on drawings, and as specified.
G. Lighting fixtures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for installation in Class and Group areas
as defined in NFPA 70, and shall comply with UL 844.
H. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps
with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are
prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures (not the lamp).
Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.
I. Metal Finishes:
1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a
corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt
and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping
or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting,
blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication.
2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be shown on the LIGHTING FIXTURES
SCHEDULE.
3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the LIGHTING FIXTURES SCHEDULE.
2.04 TERMINATION/EARTHING
A. Fused terminal blocks shall be fitted and be of sufficient capacity for the wiring involved. Each
terminal shall be capable of accommodating two 2.5 mm2 conductors.
B. Connector strip terminals shall have a current rating not less than the rating of the circuit
protective device and shall be encapsulated in self-extinguishing grade polyethylene.
C. Where connector strips are provided in boxes behind heat producing appliances, porcelain
connectors shall be used where temperatures in excess of 70 °C are likely.
D. Conductors shall be clamped between metal surfaces such that no screws make direct
contact with the conductor. The metal used in construction of the connector shall be at least
85 °C copper alloy such that good conductivity and electrolytic compatibility are maintained at
all times.
E. All light fittings shall be provided with an earthing terminal which shall be connected to the
earth continuity lead of the final sub-circuit.
F. The earthing of all pendant or semi-pendant fittings shall be by a separate core in the
connecting flex or cable securely bonding the earth terminal on the fitting to the glanded joint
of interconnecting cables. In no case shall pendant chains or conduit support tubes be used
as a means of earthing.
2.05 CEILING SYSTEM
A. In false ceilings, luminaires whether surface or recessed mounted shall not be supported by
the false ceiling construction. Separate independent supporting systems shall be provided for
each luminaire, comprising drop rods, chains or similar.
B. Luminaires installed in false ceilings shall be connected to the lighting circuit using
mechanically coupled plug-in ceiling roses.
C. Luminaires shall be positioned to provide ease of access for maintenance, cleaning etc., while
not impairing the distribution of light.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire manufacturer has the correct details of the
ceiling system, including suspension, tiles, etc. He shall ensure that the luminaires are

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
supplied with the correct trim, suspension system and are fully compatible with the ceiling
system.
2.06 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and UL 924.
B. Housing and Canopy:
1. Shall be made of die-cast aluminum.
2. Optional steel housing shall be minimum 20 gauge thick or equivalent strength
aluminum.
3. Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte black or ivory
white primer.
C. Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch.
D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.
E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.
F. Fixtures:
1. Maximum fixture wattage shall be 8 watts.
2. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 0.090 inch
[2.25mm] thick, stenciled with 6 inch [150mm] high letters, baked with red color stable
plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in
center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall be rated
minimum 25 years life.
3. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on
drawings.
4. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where
required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of
similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.
G. Voltages: Refer to LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
H. Exit signs as well as any signage should be as per the latest sign convention of Health and
Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations, U.K. (3rd Edition). Signage and pictograms
should be used for exit signs and not just text. However, pictograms can be supplemented by
text.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.07 LED LIGHT FIXTURES
A. General:
1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified.
2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.
3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚C - +55˚C.
c. Input Voltage: refer to lighting fixture schedule
d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.
e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.
f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.
g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.
b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.
d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
B. LED Downlights:
1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.
C. LED Troffers:
1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable
from below the ceiling.
2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Upon receipt at the site, inspect for damage and notify the Company if any damage occurs
prior to installation. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for location and for the
lamps specified.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on
the drawings or specified.
B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
C. Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls. Attachment to
gypsum board only is not acceptable.
D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 1200 mm, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
E. Lighting Fixture Supports:
1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of
the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition,
or above a suspended ceiling.
2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and re-lamping.
3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.
4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures:
a. Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture
opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural
members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to
resist spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling
system.
b. Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the
fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the
building structure at four points.
5. Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings:
a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a
grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The
bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch [6mm] secured to channel members attached

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Non turning studs
may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by
special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require
simple tools for removal.
b. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to
ceiling structural members at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture.
Pre positioned 1/4 inch [6mm] studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling
structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the
above, 1/4 inch [6mm] toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling
provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or
cracking.
F. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing lighting
fixtures reinstalled under this project.
G. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting
fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips,
trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.
H. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section
26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
I. Exercise electronic dimming ballasts over full range of dimming capability by operating the
control devices(s) in the presence of the Resident Engineer. Observe for visually detectable
flicker over full dimming range.
J. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly. Burn-in period to be
100 hours minimum, unless a lesser period is specifically recommended by lamp
manufacturer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed,
for at least 100 hours at full voltage. Replace any lamps and ballasts which fail during burn-in.
K. At completion of project, relamp/reballast fixtures which have failed lamps/ballasts. Clean
fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt/fingerprints during
construction. Replace damaged lenses, diffusers and louvers with new.
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped) are
approved. Products made in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are not accepted.
Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the product at delivery to the site for
inspection by the Engineer. Failing to submit the Certificate of Origin, will result in rejecting the
delivery and refusing the installation, and the Contractor or his Sub-Contractors shall be held
solely responsible for all cost and delays to the project associated with the product delivery. In
exceptional cases, Contractor shall submit the necessary paperwork and documents to the
Engineer and Client for approval prior to shipment.
D. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-site
E. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions without
F. The above conditions (C,D and e items), shall superseded all other statements, specifications,
END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 3
1.2 RELATED WORK ................................................................................................... 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 3
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ............................................................................... 4
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .............................................................. 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 8
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................. 8
2.2 POLES.................................................................................................................... 8
2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES ................................................................................ 9
2.4 LUMINAIRES .......................................................................................................... 9
2.5 LAMPS ................................................................................................................. 10
2.6 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS ........................................................ 11
2.7 METAL HALIDE CORE AND COIL BALLASTS .................................................... 11
2.8 METAL HALIDE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS ......................................................... 11
2.9 LED drivers ........................................................................................................... 12
2.10 EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 12
2.11 series lighting systems .......................................................................................... 14
2.12 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING .................................................................................. 16
2.13 led light fixtures ..................................................................................................... 16
2.14 Control systeM ...................................................................................................... 17
PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 18
3.1 INSPECTION & PREPARATION .......................................................................... 18
3.2 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 18
3.3 GROUNDING ....................................................................................................... 19
3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTS ................................................................................... 19

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaires,
poles, and supports.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General

electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of
Division 26.
B. Section 26 05 13, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES: Medium voltage cables for series-
connected street lighting.
C. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighting wiring.
D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible
ground fault currents.
E. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits,
fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.
F. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground
handholes and conduits.
G. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Clearly present sufficient information to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required
clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data,
ballasts, poles, luminaires, lamps, and accessories Include electronic

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
photometric files in IES format, or provide link (URL) to manufacturer’s website

that contains photometric data for each specific fixture used, excluding wallpack
fixtures.
C. Manuals: submit operating and maintenance manuals. Include technical data sheets,
wiring and connection diagrams, and information for ordering replacement lamps,
ballasts, and parts.
D. Certifications: submit the following:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials are in accordance with the
drawings and specifications.
2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly
installed and tested.
E. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of each equipment to
assure us that all spare parts and consumables will be available for 15 years life span
of the equipment.
date of Contract Award are a part of this Specification and, where referred to by title or
by basic designation only, are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific
reference:
B. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements,
C. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):
AAH35.1-06 .......................... Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum
D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

LTS-5-09 ............................. Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and
Traffic Signals
E. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

318-05 ................................. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C81.61-09 ........................... Electrical Lamp Bases – Specifications for Bases
(Caps) for Electric Lamps

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A123/A123M-09 .................. Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
A153/A153M-09 ................... Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
B108-03a-08 ........................ Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
C1089-06 ............................ Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Poles
H. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA):

AC 70/7460-IK-07 ................. Obstruction Lighting and Marking
AC 150/5345-43F-06 ............ Obstruction Lighting Equipment
I. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

HB-9-00 ................................ Lighting Handbook
RP-7-00 ................................ Industrial Lighting
RP-8-05 ................................ Roadway Lighting
RP-20-98 .............................. Lighting for Parking Facilities
RP-33-99 .............................. Lighting for Exterior Environments
LM-5-96 ................................ Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting
Installations
LM-50-99 .............................. Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting
Installations
LM-52-99 .............................. Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign
Installations
LM-64-01 .............................. Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas
LM-72-97 .............................. Directional Positioning of Photometric Data
LM-79-08 .............................. Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-Sate Lighting Products
LM-80-08 .............................. Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
LM-82-12 .............................. Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps
for Electrical and Photometric Properties as a
Function of Temperature

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

C78.41-06 ............................ Electric Lamps – Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium
Lamps
C78.42-07 ........................... Electric Lamps – Guidelines for High-Pressure Sodium
Lamps
C78.43-07 ........................... Electric Lamps – Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps
C78.379-06 ......................... Electric Lamps – Classification of the Beam Patterns of
Reflector Lamps
C78.1381-98......................... Electric Lamps – 70-Watt M85 Double-Ended Metal-
Halide Lamps
C82.4-02 ............................. Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure
Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)
C136.3-05 ........................... For Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Luminaire
Attachments
C136.17-05 ......................... Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Enclosed
Side-Mounted Luminaires for Horizontal-Burning High-
Intensity-Discharge Lamps – Mechanical
Interchangeability of Refractors
ICS 2-00 (R2005) ................ Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated
600 Volts
ICS 6-93 (R2006) ................ Enclosures
SSL-1-10 ............................. Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems
K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-08 ................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-08 ................................. Lampholders
773-95 .................................. Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area
Lighting
773A-06 ............................... Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting
Control
1029-94 ................................ High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1598-08 ............................... Luminaires

8750-08................. ............... Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in
Lighting Products
M. In the event of any conflict between codes, or this Section & codes, the more stringent
applies
N. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in
addition to requirements, the recommendations shall be followed unless stated
otherwise by this specification.
O. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard provisions for protecting pole finishes during

transport, storage, and installation. Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they
are at least 12 in [305 mm] above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove
factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.
B. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
C. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of
D. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
E. The above conditions (B,C and D items), shall superseded all other statements,

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown
on the drawings and specified.
2.2 POLES
A. General:
1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. Finish shall be as
specified on the drawings.
2. The pole and arm assembly shall be designed for wind loading of 75 mph [121
km/hr], with an additional 30% gust factor, supporting luminaire(s) and
accessories such as shields, banner arms, and banners that have the effective
projected areas indicated. The effective projected area of the pole shall be
applied at the height of the pole base, as shown on the drawings.
3. Poles shall be embedded or anchor-bolt type designed for use with underground
supply conductors. Poles shall have handhole having a minimum clear opening
of 2.5 x 5 in [65 x 125 mm]. Handhole covers shall be secured by stainless steel
captive screws.
4. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite handhole openings, designed to prevent
electrolysis when used with copper wire.
5. Provide a base cover that matches the pole in material and color to conceal the
mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.
6. Hardware and Accessories: All necessary hardware and specified accessories
shall be the product of the pole manufacturer.
7. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Types:
1. Aluminum: Provide round or square aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion-
resistant AA AAH35.1 aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS-4. Poles
shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type.
2. Steel: Provide round or square steel poles having minimum 11-gauge steel with
minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized or iron-oxide

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
primed factory finish. Galvanized steel poles shall comply with ASTM A123 and
A153.
3. Concrete: Provide round, square or multi-sided concrete poles conforming to
ASTM C1089 with integral cast bases. Poles shall have hollow core suitable as a
raceway.
2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES
A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete, having 3000 psi minimum 28-day

compressive strength.
B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified pole, arm(s),
luminaire(s), and accessories, such as shields, banner arms, and banners, under wind
conditions previously specified in this section.
C. Place concrete in spirally-wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations, and
construct forms for square foundations.
D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 0.25 in [6 mm]
radius.
E. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on
the drawings. Anchor bolts shall be in a welded cage or properly positioned by the
tiewire to stirrups.
F. Prior to concrete pour, install electrode per Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
2.4 LUMINAIRES
A. Per UL 1598 and NEMA C136.17. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty,
outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and
ballast heat, and safe cleaning and relamping.
B. Light distribution pattern types shall be as shown on the drawings.
C. Adjustable flood lights to be provided on rooftop
D. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the
drawings.
E. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic
refractors, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
housing by hinges or chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
F. Lamp sockets for high intensity discharge (H.I.D.) fixture shall have locking-type
porcelain enclosures in conformance to the applicable requirements of ANSI C81.61
and UL 496.
G. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.
H. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable
slip-fitters with locking screws.
I. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal.
J. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where
indicated on drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
Where indicated on drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 09 06 00,
SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.
K. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast
information.
2.5 LAMPS
A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed and every existing luminaire
relocated or reinstalled.
B. Lamps shall be general-service, outdoor lighting types.
C. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), wattage as
indicated. Lamps shall have minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours.
D. Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.43.
E. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381.
F. LED sources shall meet the following requirements:
1. Operating temperature rating shall be between -40˚ F [-40˚ C] and 120˚ F [50˚
C].
2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): between 2700K and 6500K.
3. Color Rendering Index (CRI):  65.
4. The manufacturer shall have performed JEDEC (Joint Electron Devices
Engineering Council) reliability tests on the LEDs as follows: High Temperature
Operating Life (HTOL), Room Temperature Operating Life (RTOL), Low

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Temperature Operating Life (LTOL), Powered Temperature Cycle (PTMCL),

Non-Operating Thermal Shock (TMSK), Mechanical Shock Variable Vibration
Frequency, and Solder Heat Resistance (SHR).//
G. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.
2.6 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS
A. Per NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Ballasts shall be encapsulated single-lamp, copper-
wound, constant-wattage autotransformer type, designed to operate on the voltage
system to which they are connected, and capable of open-circuit operation without
reducing lamp life.
B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply
conductor.
C. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variations of 10%, with a maximum 20%
lamp wattage regulation spread.
D. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.
E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -30˚ C, and a normal ambient
operating temperature of 50˚ C.
F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer
recommendations.
2.7 METAL HALIDE CORE AND COIL BALLASTS
A. Shall be pulse start, linear reactor type 230 volt luminaires and constant-wattage
autotransformer (CWA) type for other voltage luminaires (if not otherwise specified).
B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply
conductor.
C. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.
D. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variations of 5% for linear reactor type
and 10% for CWA, with a maximum 20% lamp wattage regulation spread.
E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -40˚C.
F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer
recommendations.
2.8 METAL HALIDE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Ballast shall be low-frequency electronic type, and shall operate pulse start and
ceramic metal halide lamps at a frequency of 90 to 200 Hz square wave.
B. Ballast shall be labeled Type ‘1’ outdoor, suitable for recessed use, Class ‘P’.
C. Ballast shall have auto-resetting thermal protector to shut off ballast when operating
temperatures reach unacceptable levels.
D. Ballast shall have an end of lamp life detection and shut-down circuit.
E. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.5 or less.
F. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI
Standards.
G. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.0.
H. Input current THD shall not exceed 20% for the primary lamp.
I. Ballasts shall have ANSI C62.41, category ‘A’ transient protection.
J. Ballasts shall have power factor greater than 90%.
K. Ballast shall have a Class ‘A’ sound rating.
2.9 LED DRIVERS
A. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements:

1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.
2. Starting Temperature: -40˚ F [-40˚ C].
3. Input Voltage: 120 to 480 (±10%) V.
4. Power Supplies: Class I or II output.
5. Surge Protection: The system must survive 250 repetitive strikes of “C Low” (C
Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 μs, 10kA/8 x 20 μs) waveforms at 1-minute intervals with less
than 10% degradation in clamping voltage. “C Low” waveforms are as defined in
IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1 Location Category C.
6. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90.
7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%.
8. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.
9. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.
2.10 EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. For modifications or additions to existing lighting systems, the new components shall
be compatible with the existing systems.
B. New poles and luminaires shall have approximately the same configurations and
dimensions as the existing poles and luminaires, except where otherwise shown on
the drawings.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.11 SERIES LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. Series-Type Systems:
1. Provide components specifically for constant-current series type lighting
systems.
2. Constant-Current Transformers:
a. Self-cooled by natural convection, liquid-immersed, fully automatic,
outdoor type.
b. Liquid shall be oil, conforming to ASTM D3487, except where otherwise
shown.
c. Temperature rises shall not exceed the following test values for the
respective insulation systems:
1) Standard, 131˚F [55˚C] by resistance and 149˚F [65˚C] hottest spot.
2) Thermally upgraded, 149˚F [65˚C] by resistance and 180˚F [80˚C]
hottest spot.
d. Core Coil Assemblies:

1) Braced to withstand the stresses caused by the maximum current
possible under all conditions and rough handling during shipment.
2) Cores, silicon steel.
3) Coils, continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
e. Bring primary and secondary leads out through wet-process, porcelain

bushings, pressure-tight. Terminals shall be suitable for the specific cables
being connected to them.
f. Series-type systems shall have capacitors for power factor improvement.
The value of power factor under the percent of full load rating shall be as
shown on the drawings.
g. Series-type systems shall regulate the secondary current within 1% over
the entire load rating range while the primary voltage remains within 5% of
the rated voltage.
h. Operation of the transformers shall not be adversely affected while the
transformers are mounted five degrees off of perpendicular.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
i. Provide tanks and covers of steel to meet NEMA and ANSI requirements,
cleaned, phosphatized, and painted at the factory with primer and the
manufacturer's standard extremely durable finish.
j. Sound levels shall not exceed 45 db.
k. Standard ANSI features and accessories including a pressure relief
device, ground pad, lifting provisions, and diagrammatic nameplate.
l. Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the spaces designated for
installations.
m. Install the transformers such that they will have adequate air circulation for
heat removal.
3. Controllers:
a. Oil-immersed, rated-load-interrupter, outdoor type, with heavy duty, silver-
alloy contacts.
b. Oil, ASTM D3487.
c. Operate at 230 V, 60 Hz.
d. Have an auxiliary hand lever for manual operation during emergencies.
e. The depth below the oil surface of the contacts shall be not less than the
depth of the switch mechanism.
f. Bring leads out through wet-process, porcelain bushings, pressure-tight.
Terminals shall be suitable for the specific cables being connected to
them.
g. Provide steel tanks and covers, thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized, and
painted at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard durable
finish.
h. Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the spaces designed for
installations.
4. Provide protective relays to de-energize the control circuits for the controllers,
thereby de-energizing the series lighting load circuits when open circuit faults
occur in the series lighting load circuits.
5. Transformer, equipment enclosure, lightning arresters, and primary and
secondary protection shall be provided.
6. Disconnecting devices shall be watertight, submersible type, suitable for the
cables being installed and for use in outdoor lighting systems.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.12 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING
A. For Buildings:
1. Luminaires shall comply with FAA, AC 70/7460-1K, and AC 150/5345-43E, and
be Type L1-810 duplex units with red Fresnel lenses and 100 W, type A-21,
clear, traffic-signal lamps.
2. Mount the luminaires on galvanized rigid steel pipe masts attached to the roof of
the buildings so the luminaires extend 12 in [305 mm] above the level of the
highest item on the building, including items attached to the roof.
3. Locate luminaires in accordance with the applicable FAA Standards.
B. For Smoke Stacks: Luminaires shall be in accordance with the referenced details
shown on the drawings. All lamps shall be the type shown on the drawings.
C. For Water Tanks and Cooling Towers: Luminaires shall be FAA, AC 70/7460-1K, and
AC 150/5345-43E, Type L-810 duplex units with red Fresnel lenses and 100 W, type
A-21, clear, traffic-signal lamps.
2.13 LED LIGHT FIXTURES
A. General:
1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified.
2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-
compliant.
3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.
b. Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C - +55 ˚ C.
c. Input Voltage: refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule
d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.
e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.
f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.
g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise

specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.
d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
2.14 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Control systems (timers, photocell,…) to be specified, discussed and approved during

design stage with the client.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION & PREPARATION
A. Upon receipt at the site, inspect for damage and notify the Company if any damage
occurs prior to installation. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for location
and for the lamps specified.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures, mounting poles, mounting brackets, and photocells of the
various types in accordance with this Specification or as shown on the drawings in an
approved workmanlike manner in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions, the
Drawings and the NEC.
B. Where the cataloged fixture bases are provided with mounting holes, do not support
with the fixture solely from connection conduit or conduit fittings. Install expansion
bolts in masonry to mount the fixture.
C. Pole Foundations:
1. Excavate only as necessary to provide sufficient working clearance for
installation of forms and proper use of tamper to the full depth of the excavation.
Prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation. Thoroughly compact
backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor,
jacket, or sheath, and the end of conduit.
2. Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by the pole
manufacturer.
3. Install poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the
bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.
4. After the poles have been installed, shimmed, and plumbed, grout the spaces
between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout
material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not less than 0.375 in [9 mm] inside
diameter through the grout, tight to the top of the concrete base to prevent
moisture weeping from the interior of the pole.
D. Ensure that each fixture installed is complete with all appurtenances, such as ballasts
and individual lighting fixture transformers shown as part of the assemblies on the
lighting fixture detailed drawings.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Wire the fixtures in accordance with the latest requirements of the NEC with minimum
1.5 mm2 (#14 AWG) fixture wire.
F. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper
connections and operation.
G. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed by
the lighting consultant.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment, including metal poles, luminaires,

mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures, as specified in Section 26 05 26,
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Where copper
grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially-
treated or lined connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.
3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Test all installed fixtures and lamps for operability and maintain them in a satisfactory
operating condition until time of system acceptance by the Company.
1. Replace all lamp ballasts, which fail or generate abnormal or objectionable
noise.
2. Re-lamp luminaires which have failed lamps.
B. Provide support brackets and hardware for mounting the fixtures as required for a
complete assembly.
C. Measure illumination levels and record restrike times and battery discharge time.
D. Verify operation after installing luminaires and energizing circuits.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 05 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
INSTALLATIONS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 3
1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 3
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)..................................................... 3
1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS .................................................................................. 4
1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 5
1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION ....................................................................................... 5
1.7 WORK PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................. 5
1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 6
1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................. 6
1.10 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 6
1.11 TRAINING ................................................................................................................... 9

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of

Division 27.
B. Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of transformers,
cable, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.
1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum
installation requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where
requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as

one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this
project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three
installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.
2. The Client reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations
where the products have been in operation before approval.
C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or
trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within
four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be
available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be
the product of a single manufacturer.
C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by
others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the
intended service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring
diagrams.
E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. The Client shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall
notify the Client through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior
to the manufacturers making the factory tests.
2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the
Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after
completion of the tests.
3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the
contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the
Client.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the
GENERAL CONDITIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the
connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or
changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls,
panels and installation methods.
1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective
devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and
be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and
repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in
first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or
replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft
paper, sheet vinyl or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same
quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are
not obvious.
1.7 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
B. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure communications
service for other buildings at all times.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed
or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions.
D. Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize
interferences.
1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.

B. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Client determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be
removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Client.
2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the
use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but
not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit
and raceways.
1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved
lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws.
Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other
method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. The Client's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to
the job site. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had
prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings,
and other data necessary for the Client to ascertain that the proposed equipment and
materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval
shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than
one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial
submittals will not be considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".
2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
E. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the
manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data
sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal
systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring
shall be identified on wiring diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the
equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals:
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and
equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in
hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent.
Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case
later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the
remaining manuals prior to contract completion.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building,
name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or
equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of
contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The
instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain
detailed operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
g. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on
the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of
supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
j. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the
equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.
G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.
H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of
each of the following:
1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the
tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Raceway and pathway hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
I. In addition to the requirement of SUBMITTALS, the Client reserves the right to request the
manufacturer to arrange for a Client representative to see typical active systems in
operation, when there has been no prior experience with the manufacturer or the type of
equipment being submitted.
1.11 TRAINING
A. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each
associated specification.
B. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by
the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

SECTION 27 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................ 3
1.2 RELATED WORK........................................................................................................ 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS.............................................................................................................. 3
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ............................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS ..................................................... 5
2.2 GROUND RODS .................................................................................................... 5
2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS .................................................... 5
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM GROUND BUSBARS ...................................... 5
2.5 GROUND CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................... 6
2.6 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS ............................................ 6
2.7 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS.............................................................................. 6
2.8 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES ............................................................. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 7
3.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 7
3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS .................................................... 7
3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS ......................................................... 7
3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS .................................................................................... 9
3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING ........................................................................................... 9
3.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ...................................................................... 9
3.7 COMMUNICATION ROOM GROUNDING ............................................................ 11
3.8 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE GROUNDING ......................................................... 12
3.09 COMMUNCIATIONS RACEWAY GROUNDING ................................................... 12
3.10 GROUND RESISTANCE ...................................................................................... 13
3.11 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 13

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of

telecommunication installations for equipment operations.
B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as

including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.
C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and
have the same meaning.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS:

General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of
Division 27.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine

compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing
of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings
and specifications.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly
installed and tested.
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements,

referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B1-2001................................ Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
B8-2004................................ Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
81-1983 ................................ IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground

Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground
System
70-2005 ................................ National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)
J-STD-607-A-2002 ............... Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
44-2005 ............................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
83-2003 ............................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
467-2004 ............................. Grounding and Bonding Equipment
486A-486B-2003 ................. Wire Connectors
F. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except

that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be
continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25
mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.
B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm²
(10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.
C. Isolated Power System: Type XHHW-2 insulation with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or
less.
D. Telecom System Grounding Riser Conductor: Telecommunications Grounding Riser

shall be in accordance with J-STD-607A. Use a minimum 50mm² (1/0 AWG) insulated
stranded copper grounding conductor unless indicated otherwise.
E. Earthing loop main conductor, shall not be less than 185 mm² (350 mcm) bare copper
cable tin-plated to prevent corrosion.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Copper clad steel, 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 feet) long, conforming
to UL 467.
B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.
2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the
manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM GROUND BUSBARS
A. Provide solid copper busbar, pre-drilled from two-hole lug connections with a minimum
thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch) for wall and backboard mounting using standard
insulators sized as follows:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Room Signal Grounding: 300 mm x 100 mm (12 inches x 4 inch).
2. Master Signal Ground: 600 mm x 100 mm (24 inches x 4 inch).
2.5 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.
B. Above Grade:
1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and

external tooth lockwashers.
2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or

copper alloy bolts and nuts.
3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-
plated or copper alloy fasteners.
A. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with

metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.
2.6 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS
Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or
cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm
wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch).
2.7 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS
At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures)
where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal
blocks.
2.8 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES
Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case
manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated ground wire
with shield bonding connectors.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter

specified.
B. System Grounding:
1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary

disconnecting means and at the related transformers.
2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service

entrance): Ground the secondary neutral.
3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system

grounded.
C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel),

enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and
other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and
grounded.
3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible

(except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.
3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the
service equipment.
B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):
1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service
equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building
steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that
conform to UL 467.
2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode

system.
F. Conduit Systems:
1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an
equipment grounding conductor.
2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor,

except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from
exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment
need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.
3. Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for

mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the
entrance and exit from the conduit.
G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders
and power and lighting branch circuits.
H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:
1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet
box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor
passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other
critical units shown).
2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor
termination.
3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to
terminate the equipment grounding conductors.
I. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a
jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and
the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components. See details on the
drawings.
3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS
When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to
all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection
between the metals used.
3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the
grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical
to the equipment ground bus.
3.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding

electrode system.
B. Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and
connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to
a ground source.
C. Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length
of bonding jumper possible.
D. Provide ground paths that are permanent and continuous with a resistance of 1 ohm or
less from raceway, cable tray, and equipment connections to the building grounding
electrode. The resistance across individual bonding connections shall be 10 milliohms
or less.
E. Below-Grade Grounding Connections: When making exothermic welds, wire brush or

file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use exothermic welding cartridges and
molds in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. After welds have
been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly cleaned the joint
area. Notify the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Above-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to

attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding
where necessary; thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and
apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.
G. Bonding Jumpers:
1. Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use
a minimum of 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire.
2. Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with

compression connectors.
3. Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use

connector manufacturer’s compression tool.
H. Bonding Jumper Fasteners:
1. Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or

conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When
screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain
end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut
clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated
external tooth lockwashers.
2. Wireway and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts,
external tooth lockwashers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated
acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wireway or cable tray to prevent cable
damage.
3. Ground Plates and Busbars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole

compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth
lockwashers, and nuts.
4. Unistrut and Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated,
self-drill screws and external tooth lockwashers.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.7 COMMUNICATION ROOM GROUNDING
A. Telecommunications Ground Busbars:
1. Provide communications room telecommunications ground busbar hardware at

950 mm (18 inches) at locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Connect the telecommunications room ground busbars to other room grounding

busbars as indicated on the Grounding Riser diagram.
B. Telephone-Type Cable Rack Systems: aluminum pan installed on telephone-type

cable rack serves as the primary ground conductor within the communications room.
Make ground connections by installing the following bonding jumpers:
1. Install a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding between the telecommunications ground

busbar and the nearest access to the aluminum pan installed on the cable rack.
2. Use 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers across aluminum pan junctions.
C. Self-Supporting and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment Rack Ground Bars:
1. When ground bars are provided at the rear of lineup of bolted together equipment
racks, bond the copper ground bars together using solid copper splice plates
supplied by the ground bar manufacturer.
2. Bond together nonadjacent ground bars on equipment racks and cabinets with 16
mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire bonding jumpers attached at each end with
compression-type connectors and mounting bolts.
3. Provide a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper between the rack and/or cabinet
ground busbar and the aluminum pan of an overhead cable tray or the raised
floor stringer as appropriate.
D. Backboards: Provide a screw lug-type terminal block or drilled and tapped copper strip
near the top of backboards used for communications cross-connect systems. Connect
backboard ground terminals to the aluminum pan in the telephone-type cable tray
using an insulated 16 mm² (16 AWG) bonding jumper.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Other Communication Room Ground Systems: Ground all metallic conduit, wireways,
and other metallic equipment located away from equipment racks or cabinets to the
cable tray pan or the telecommunications ground busbar, whichever is closer, using
insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) ground wire bonding jumpers.
3.8 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE GROUNDING
A. Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multipair communications cables together at each
splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity
throughout the communications distribution system.
1. At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud
connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield
connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar.
2. Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield
bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories
provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection
is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and
all other metallic components and equipment at that location.
3.09 COMMUNCIATIONS RACEWAY GROUNDING
A. Conduit: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at
each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.
B. Wireway: use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic
wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section
junctions.
C. Cable Tray Systems: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable
tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately
every 16 meters (50 feet).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.10 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 1 ohm. Make necessary
modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without
additional cost to the Client. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.
B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal

fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall
be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in
normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance
measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the
systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate
systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of
electrodes must still be provided.
C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company
ground resistance requirements.
D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to

backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the
connections are ready for inspection.
3.11 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION
A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.
B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the

connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible
ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.
C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or
grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.
- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 27 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 RELATED WORK ................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ............................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 MATERIAL .............................................................................................................................. 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 PENETRATIONS .................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ................................................................................................... 8
3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 9
3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... 10
3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................................................................... 11
3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 11
3.7 BOX INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 12
3.8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUIT .............................................................................. 12

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes
to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all
communications cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.
B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway
types specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division
27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.
B. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground
fault currents: Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the
following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of panels and pull boxes
2. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
3. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog
cuts.
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has
been properly installed.
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text
by the basic designation only.
70 .....................................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1-03 .................................................Flexible Metal Conduit
5-01 .................................................Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings
6-03 .................................................Rigid Metal Conduit
50-03 ...............................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
360-03 .............................................Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
467-01 .............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment
514A-01 ...........................................Metallic Outlet Boxes
514B-02 ...........................................Fittings for Cable and Conduit
514C-05 ...........................................Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers
651-02 .............................................Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
651A-03 ...........................................Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
797-03 .............................................Electrical Metallic Tubing
1242-00 ...........................................Intermediate Metal Conduit
TC-3-04 ............................................PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
FB1-03 .............................................Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless otherwise
shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap
connections to recessed lighting fixtures.
B. Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.
3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size
not to exceed 105 mm (4 inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or
less.
5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.
6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.
7. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or
high density polyethylene (PE).
8. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.
C. Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or
malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings
are also acceptable.
c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an
enclosure.
d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or
locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or
nonmetallic material are not permitted.
e. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete
are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in
concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to
firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers
is prohibited.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
f. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings
to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel
boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical
plates in the room.
2. Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:
a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron,
steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings.
Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.
b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.
c. Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.
3. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having
insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors
for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with
four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of
case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit
for positive grounding.
d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.
e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are
prohibited.
4. Flexible steel conduit fittings:
a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.
5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic
compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated
throats.
6. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.
b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
7. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.

8. Expansion and deflection couplings:
a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.
b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any
direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.
c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity
and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground
conductors.
d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant
molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
D. Conduit Supports:
1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.
2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure
bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch),
12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter
steel hanger rods.
4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt
expansion.
E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:
1. UL-50 and UL-514A.
2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.
3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.
4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front
face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be
installed with surface style flat or raised covers.
F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PENETRATIONS
A. Cutting or Holes:
1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs
or beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural
sections.
2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond
core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer
type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required
by limited working space.
B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other communications raceways pass through fire
partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective
barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant
only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop
material.
C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances
around the conduit and make watertight.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install conduit as follows:

1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the
damaged conduits with new undamaged material.
3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room,
walkways, or doorways.
4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.
5. Mechanically continuous.
6. Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e.,
(suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits,
mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).
7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of
each enclosure to which connected.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of
debris, until wires are pulled in.
9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.
10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding
type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of
the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box
covers.
11. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.
B. Conduit Bends:
1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.
3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.
C. Layout and Homeruns:
1. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings
showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident
Engineer.
3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION
A. In Concrete:
1. Conduit: Rigid PVC conduit.
2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.
3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:
a. Where shown on the structural drawings.
b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of
drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.
4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is prohibited.
a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.
b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except
one conduit diameter at conduit crossings.
c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum
of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.
5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL
approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the
conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Furred in Walls:
1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is
prohibited.
2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:
a. Rigid PVC Conduit.
3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of
flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.
5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.
3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical
and electrical rooms or for systems that are object to “MAC” Move Add Change.
B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
1. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
2. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is
prohibited.
C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:
1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed
indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.
D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.
F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.
G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.
H. Painting:
1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section09 91 00, PAINTING.
2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section
09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint
legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable
voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at
maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite
sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the
couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the
expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to
produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a
copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and
deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are
acceptable.
C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.
3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION
A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.
B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum
distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.
C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to
support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger
itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.
D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars,
angle supports, and similar items.
E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:
1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to
placing the concrete.
2. Existing Construction:
a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28
mm (1-1/8 inch) embedment.
b. Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration
not less than 75 mm (3 inches).
c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete
ceilings.
F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.
G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.
I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and
bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.
J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.
K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and
vertical supports/fasteners within walls.
L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance
with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include
internal wedges and retaining collars.
3.7 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:

1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables
and wires during pulling in operations.
C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast
metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
D. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams.
3.8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUIT
A. Install the communication raceway system as shown on drawings.

B. Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.
C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.
D. All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90
degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.
E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches)
below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.
F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom
of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with
the backboard.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. Where drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural
sections such as ribs or beams.
H. All empty conduits located in communication closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a
standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases
and to meet fire resistance requirements.
I. Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull
boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows
(special long radius):
Sizes of Conduit Radius of Conduit Bends

Trade Size mm, Inches
3/4 150 (6)
1 230 (9)
1-1/4 350 (14)
1-1/2 430 (17)
2 525 (21)
2-1/2 635 (25)
3 775 (31)
3-1/2 900 (36)
4 1125 (45)
J. Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood on the wall of communication
closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot)
above the finished floor.
K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).
- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 27 11 16
COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, FRAMES AND
ENCLOSURES
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS COMPLIANCE ................................................................ 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
1.04 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE ..................................................... 4
1.05 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 4
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE............................................................................................... 4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 6
2.01 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 6
2.02 EQUIPMENT RACKS .................................................................................................. 6
2.03 WALL CABINET (INDOOR USE, UP TO 4 RACK UNITS) ........................................... 7
2.04 WALL CABINET (INDOOR USE, 18 RACK UNITS)..................................................... 8
2.05 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU) ....................................................................... 8
2.06 COLD AISLE CONTAINMENT ..................................................................................... 9
2.07 CAGING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................11
PART 3 - EXECUTION..........................................................................................................13
3.1 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................13
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY ...............................................................................................13
3.3 TESTING ....................................................................................................................13

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section specifies the general requirements for Communications Cabinets, Racks,
Frames, Enclosures, Aisle Containments & Caging System used in structural cabling
system.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
A. All materials shall comply with the applicable sections of the following Codes for installation
of telecommunications cabling:
1. Uniform Building Code (UBC)
2. National Electrical Code (NEC/NFPA 70)
3. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC IEEE C 2)
4. Local Codes, amendments, and ordinances.
B. All materials and installation practices shall comply with the applicable sections of the
following Telecommunications Industry Standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2-2009 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3-2010 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Standard.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-2001
(Including 5 addendums) Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/EIA/TIA-570-1991 Residential and Light Commercial Telecommunications
Wiring Standard

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-1993 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

infrastructure of Commercial Building
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-1994 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
C. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data on structural cabling system products
stated in the document.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit all necessary layout drawings of structural cabling system and
accessories.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit all necessary wiring diagrams for structural cabling system.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which

properly protect equipment from damage.
B. Store equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a well-ventilated
space protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.
C. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of
finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturers’ written warranty for period of 2 year from substantial completion for
the repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of systems and

ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialist subcontractor with at least 5 years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing systems and equipment similar to that required
for this project. Subcontractor shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
C. Materials and installation shall comply with the specified Codes and Standards.
D. Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Provide racks equipped as detailed on the Drawings and as follows:

1. Specified finish is manufacturer’s standard black finish.
2. Where finish is indicated on the drawings to be other than black; that finish shall apply
to all rack components with optional “custom/finish” selections
3. Provide 19 inch or 23 inch racks with 42RU or 47RU spaces
4. The number of vertical rack sections as required to allow space for terminating all
communications cabling indicated on the drawings, plus mounting space for all owner
supplied active components/equipment required to cross-connect to any/all modular
jack ports on the patch panels.
B. Special Grounding Requirements
1. Distribution Rack Grounding
2. Furnish ground terminal block for each rack section located in the MC.
3. Rack shall be grounded using #6 AWG stranded, insulated copper conductor.
4. Furnish all required bonding material (racks and runway) and hardware, and bond to
nearest TMGB. Refer to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-1994, Commercial Building Grounding and
Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, for details.
C. Power Protection Strips:
1. Equip each equipment rack or section thereof; with one plug strip (do not power station
cable racks).
D. Cable Runway:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Equip each rack with cable raceways as shown on the drawings.

2. Securely attach to backboard and rack in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
E. Cable Raceway Bend Radii:
1. Equip each 19.0” rack as necessary.
F. Cable management:
1. Provide and install cable management in 5”, 8”, or 12” sizes to manage cables and
cords and achieve best performance.
G. Cable management panel:
1. Provide and install 1RU cable management with finger spacing alignment per patch
panel. Cable management panel must be plastic with snap on cover. 100% Metal
cable managers are also acceptable.
H. Optical fiber cable management panel:
1. Provide and install 1RU cable management with finger spacing alignment per patch
panel. Cable management panel must be plastic with snap on cover. 100% Metal
cable managers are also acceptable.
2. Mount directly below the optical fiber cabinet.
3. Provide and install 1.75”H cable management panels for wire management in wall
mount enclosures.
I. Blanking panels
1. Blanking Panels shall be provided to cover empty Rack Units
J. Doors
1. Provide for 600mm Wide Cabinets a single mesh front & rear doors
2. Provide for 800mm Wide Cabinets a single mesh front door & a double mesh rear door
2.03 WALL CABINET (INDOOR USE, UP TO 4 RACK UNITS)
A. Wall-mount enclosure with reversible, lockable front door

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Lock keyed to a CH751 key.

C. Rail system, with 12-24 threaded mounting holes, that can be rotated for use horizontally or
vertically
D. Removable top panel and ventilated sides
E. Constructed from 16-gauge steel, with a 100 pound static load rating
F. Material: sheet steel
G. Construction: Welded and/or bolted
2.04 WALL CABINET (INDOOR USE, 18 RACK UNITS)
A. Wall-mount enclosure with lockable front door and swing-out rear access to equipment.
B. Lock keyed to a CH751 key.
C. 19” L-shaped adjustable equipment mounting rails with 12-24 threaded mounting holes.
D. Rated for 200 pounds, open or closed.
E. Material: sheet steel
F. Construction: Welded and/or bolted
2.05 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)
A. PDU OUTLETS
1. PDU Shall be provided with 20 or 30 Amp IEC-C13 & IEC-C19 receptacles; L6-20P or
L6-30P plug connection, 3 input power cord.
B. PDU MONITORING
1. PDU systems shall be provided with web based remote monitoring via a direct IP
network connection.
2. Each power strip module must provide the monitoring functionality described below:
a) Remote Monitoring of overall PDU Power and Energy usage
b) Measure in real time and provide trend analysis for Volts/Amps/Watts/Power
Factor & kWh

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c) Measure and record how much energy an individual power outlet is taking
d) Remote turn off and on of individual sockets on a power strip
e) Environmental monitoring Measures in-cabinet temperature, humidity, airflow and
dew point remotely to prevent environmental factors that can cause equipment to
overheat or malfunction
f) Alarm messaging capability Provides user-defined alarm/messaging capabilities
for specific events that exceeded thresholds to help minimize network downtime
C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Ambient Temperature
a) Operating: 0°C ─ 55°C for altitude 1000 meters above sea level.
b) Storage:-20°C ─ 60°C
2. Relative Humidity
a) 0 ─ 95% non-condensing, non-corrosive
3. Altitude:
a) 3,000 m without power de-rating when operated within the temperature specified in
“section A”. Ambient temperature shall not de-rate more than be 5°C for each
additional 500 m
4. Electrostatic Discharge
a) PDU units are able to withstand an electrostatic discharge compliant to EN61000-
4-2, level 3, Criteria A,; without damage and without affecting the connected
load.
2.06 COLD AISLE CONTAINMENT
A. The aisle containment system shall be used with uniform rack heights and row lengths of
racks.
B. STANDARDS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
The product shall be designed in accordance with the following agency standards or
certifications. Where a conflict arises between these documents and statements made
herein, the statements in this specification shall govern.
1. Polycarbonate Panel:
a) UL 94VL
b) CPSC 16 CFR 1201
c) ANSI Z97.1-2004
d) UL 972
C. ROOF PANELS WITH ACTIVE TILES
1. The frame of the roof panel shall be constructed from a 1" x 1" (25.4 x 25.4mm) T-slot
aluminum extrusion and 0.236" (6mm) thick clear polycarbonate.
2. The roof structure (frame) shall be kept intact and incapable of causing any
deformation due to its own load, and shall be free from interference from the doors of
the rack. The roof frame should have fixture holes with fixed interval so that various
types of sensors, cameras or accessories can be installed.
2. The modular roof panels are transparent polycarbonate panels, allowing the room
lighting to be used. Since the modular roof system attaches to the cabinets, the two
rows of equipment must have a uniform height along the total length of the aisle.
3. The roof frame shall be installed with emergency opening which automatically open
when the fire panel sends a signal to the Aisle containment roof element. The
emergency open roofs are automatically opened through control signal from controller
and are manually closed upon recovery.
D. DOORS
1. Modular double sliding shall be provided and also each door shall be capable of being
opened individually and shall have the function to be closed automatically using the
self-closing function.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. The material of sliding door frame and outer frame shall be Aluminum die casting, and
sliding door shall be installed with tempered glass.
3. Each door shall be integrated with an electromagnetic lock with interface port to be
connected with the building Access control system.
E. HEADERS
1. Headers are required with every system to square up the roof panels and attach the
sliding doors.
F. CLUSTER KITS AND SPACERS
1. Cluster kit and spacers are required for each piece of equipment in the row.
G. SENSORS
1. Pressure, temperature and humidity sensors shall be provided in each containment
and shall be connected to BMS system.
2.07 CAGING SYSTEM
A. Rack Caging system is a modular steel cage and partitioning system used for creating
secure areas for each client equipment racks. The rack caging system is a pre-fabricated
modular unit, which is assembled on site using two operatives.
B. The modular construction involves assembling pre formed support posts to specified
placements and adjoining with mesh panel and interlocking door mechanism.
C. The caging system is secured together using 5.5x25 screws and M6 machine screws and
nuts. Cage construction does not require any onsite welding.
D. Caging system standard finish is polyester powder coated as standard in Pale Grey RAL
7035
E. CAGE WALLS
1. Steel Sheet: 1.5mm Thick (Standard).
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Punched Hole Pattern: 38mm square with 9mm ribs between the holes and 3mm
rounded corners (STANDARD).
3. Wall Height: 2.2m
4. Cage Frame: 50mm x 50mm x 1.5mm Box Section.
F. UNDERFLOOR BARRIER
1. Pedestals: 40mm x 40mm x 2.0mm box section with welded 2.0mm fixing plate at the
bottom.
2. Bars: 25mm x 25mm x 2.0mm box section in lengths of 2.0m connected with 2.0mm
connector plates.
3. Height: Available from 200mm –1200mm.
4. Style: Available as bars or panels to the same specification as the cage walls as
described above.
G. CAGE DOORS
1. Type: hinge
2. Size: 900mm width
3. Each door shall be integrated with an electromagnetic lock with interface port to be
connected with the building Access control system.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The entire system shall be installed by specialist subcontractor approved by the Engineer.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with the approved drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
A. Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical system and electrical
equipment shall conform to the latest publications of Articles 800-3 (a) and 820-13 of
National Electric Code (NEC).
B. An earth or ground shall be provided and extended to the termination box and connected to
each station protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded in accordance
with Article 250, 800 and 820 of National Electric Code (NEC).
3.3 TESTING
A. After installation of entire system and prior to acceptance of work, manufacturer's standard
tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer to show proper operation of each
equipment and the system entirely.

SECTION 27 11 19
COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS
AND PATCH PANELS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
EPC Works for Establishment of New System Control Centre:
CONTENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 6
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 COPPER BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR ....................................................................... 6
2.3 FIBER .......................................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 -EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 8
3.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 COPPER BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR ....................................................................... 8
3.3 FIBER .......................................................................................................................... 9

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the products and installation of communications termination blocks
and patch panels for copper twisted-pair and optical fiber cables.
B. The product performance (e.g., category 6A, OM4, OS2) shall be as specified on drawings.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The latest editions of the following codes, standards, and guidelines shall be followed. Bring
to ITS’ immediate attention where construction documents or conditions differ from the
requirements in codes, standards, guidelines or specifications.
B. The following codes, as required by law
1. ANSI/NFPA-70, National Electrical Code® (NEC®)
C. The following standards
1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and
Components Standards
3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
4. ANSI/TIA-569-C, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
5. ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
6. ANSI/TIA-607-B, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for
Customer Premises
D. The following guidelines
1. BICSI, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
2. BICSI, Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM)
E. The following project specifications
1. 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

3. 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
F. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
A. Termination blocks and patch panels shall be covered by the Advanced System Warranty
with 2 years starting after the completion of the final testing and commissioning.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals that are incomplete shall be returned without review.

B. The following submittals shall be provided at the Pre-Construction Phase. The contractor
shall have final approval of products for the installation.
1. Product Information
a) Provide manufacturer’s product information cutsheet or specifications sheet with
the specific product number identified or filled out.
b) Provide manufacturer’s product information showing system performance is
maintained when using a variety of modular jacks (e.g., wall, patch panel), cable
and patch cords (be manufacturer and product specific).
c) All product information shall be provided at one time, in one submittal package.
2. Shop Drawings
a) Provide scaled drawings indicating location and type/part number of product to be
installed. Additionally, provide drawing elevations for equipment cabinets, racks,
frames, enclosures and wall terminations indicating locations of termination blocks
and patch panels.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. The following submittals shall be provided three (3) weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
1. Record Drawings
a) Provide scaled drawings indicating location and type/part number of product to be
installed. Additionally, provide drawing elevations for equipment cabinets, racks,
frames, enclosures and wall terminations indicating installed locations of wall
termination blocks and patch panels.
b) All record drawings shall be provided at one time, in one submittal package.
2. Manufacturer and Maintenance Manuals for installed equipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All connectivity components either for copper or fiber (e.g., patch panels, modular jacks,
optical fiber enclosures) shall be by the same manufacturer and covered under the same
manufacturer Advanced System Warranty.
2.2 COPPER BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR
A. Wall-mounted 110-termination blocks and connectors (e.g., copper backbone termination,

wall-to-rack termination)
1. Performance shall meet the performance requirements of ANSI/TIA 568-C.2.
B. Angled patch panels
1. Size as identified on the drawings. Typical size is 48-port, 2RU.
2. Shall accept modular jacks that meet the required performance of the specified
category system.
C. (Straight; flat) patch panels
1. Specifications are the same as angled patch panels
2. To be used where appropriate, such as for wall racks and enclosed cabinets.
2.3 FIBER
A. Rack-mounted Fiber Enclosures

1. Shall be 4RU in height and fit into a standard 19” wide rack. a) Refer to drawings for
location.
2. Shall have a front cover that swings down. Labeling shall be integrated either on the
fiber enclosure cover or on the fiber adapter panels.
3. Shall have a minimum capacity of 144-strands.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Shall include fixtures to maintain the cable and optical fiber manufacturer’s minimum
bend radius.
5. Shall include a splice tray option.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Termination block and patch panel installation (copper and optical fiber) shall be in
conformance to ANSI/TIA-568 standards, BICSI methods, industry standards and
manufacturer’s instructions and guidelines.
B. Termination blocks and patch panels terminated in areas prior to final cleaning (e.g.,
painting, carpet installation, where dust may be created) shall be protected to ensure dust,
debris, moisture and other foreign materials do not settle onto contacts or optical fiber end-
faces.
C. Cables shall be terminated in consistent consecutive order.
D. Coordinate with all other trades prior to pre-construction submittals and installation.
E. Quantity on drawings is illustrative. Provide the quantity of wall-termination blocks and
connectors, patch panels, enclosures and inserts to support the necessary quantity of cable
pairs and strands plus 10%.
3.2 COPPER BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR
A. Cables shall be supported and loosely tied off by means of a strain relief bar on the back of
patch panels.
B. Contractor shall terminate copper backbone (riser) cables onto wall-mounted 110
termination blocks using C-5 connectors.
C. Wall-to-rack cables shall be terminated between the backbone 110 termination field and
patch panel(s). The wall-to-rack cables shall be 100 pair category 3. The 110 termination
block shall be terminated with five (5) C4 connectors and one (1) C5 connector per 25-pair
row. Four pair per port shall be terminated on the patch panels.
D. Provide a separate patch panel(s) in each Communications Room for Wireless Access
Points.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Provide a separate patch panel(s) in each Communications Room for Building Automation
Controls, Security and Elevators, and wall-to-rack copper backbone.
3.3 FIBER
A. The contractor shall furnish and install separate fiber enclosures for single-mode and
multimode optical fiber in-building cables.
B. The contractor shall furnish and install LC/APC adapter panels (12-fibers per adapter panel)
in each single-mode fiber enclosure.
C. The contractor shall furnish and install LC/UPC to MTP cassettes (12-fibers per cassette)
for the installed multimode cable and LC/UPC adapter panels (12-fibers per adapter panel)
for non-cassette spaces in each multimode fiber enclosure.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 11 23
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ..................................................................................................... 3
1.02 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................... 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ..................................................................................................... 4
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .......................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 6
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ........................................................................................................ 6
2.02 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.03 CABLE TRAYS MATERIALS AND FINISHES .................................................................... 7
2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................... 7
2.05 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS .......................................................................................... 8
2.06 LADDER RACK............................................................................................................... 8
2.07 FIBER RUNNER ............................................................................................................. 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 10
3.01 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION .............................................................. 10
3.02 CABLE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 10
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................. 10
3.04 PROTECTION .................................................................................................................. 11

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This Section to include the supply, installation and commissioning of Fiber runners, Cable
trays, Ladder racks, Wire basket cable Trays, and accessories work in accordance with the
Project Documentation.
1. Cable trays and accessories
2. Wire basket cable trays and accessories
3. Ladder racks and accessories
4. Fiber runners and accessories
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition and publishing addenda of the following publications in effect on the date of
Contract Award are a part of this Specification and, where referenced to by title or basic
designation only, are applicable to the extent indicated by the specific reference:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A 123, “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.”
b. A 1008, “Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.”
c. A 1011, “Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.”
d. B 633, “Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.”
e. B 766, “Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium.”
2. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code-Steel.”
a. VE1, “Metal Cable Tray Systems.”
a. 70, “National Electrical Code.”

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Where the above referenced codes and standards contain recommendations in addition to the
requirements, the recommendations shall be considered requirements and shall be followed
unless stated otherwise by this Specification.
C. In the event of any conflict between codes, or Specifications and codes, the more stringent
regulation shall apply.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray/
ladder racks indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray/ ladder racks.
1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray/ ladder racks, including plans,
elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction
elements. Designate components and accessories to include clamps, brackets, hanger
rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray/
ladder racks layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical,
and mechanical elements. Show the following:
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays/ ladder racks.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays/ ladder racks above the floor or bottom of ceiling
structure.
A. Comply with the requirements of the local RCDD engineer.

B. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain cable tray/ ladder racks components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Select a firm experienced in manufacturing cable trays/ ladder
racks, which has a record of successful in-service performance.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Store indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining or adhering of cable
tray/ ladder racks.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 GENERAL
A. The cable tray ladder racks system shall include factory-made trays/ladders, tray/ladders
fittings, connectors and necessary accessories and supports to form a complete cable support
system.
B. The cable tray/ladders system shall include the following factory-made tray elements:
1. Straight cable trays, ladder racks
2. Fittings as horizontal and vertical bends of various angles, crosses, tees, wyes,
reducers, vertical riser elements
3. Connectors
4. All necessary fixing accessories.
C. Manufacturer’s standard accessories shall be used and site fabrication shall not be permitted.
D. Horizontal run of cables laid on cable tray/ladder racks and exposed to direct sunlight shall be
provided with covering at higher level to allow for ventilation.
E. Determine the sizes of the pathways based on the number and size of cables laid on the
pathways with 50% space for future growth.
F. Design calculations to validate suitability of selected trays to support permissible cables loads
(weight) over a continuous span in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Submit manufacturers loading graphs.
G. The tray and support systems for covered trays shall be designed considering the effect of
ice, snow, and wind loadings, as applicable.
H. Connect the fittings to the trays in a manner that provides a smooth interior for the tray; bolt
ends to be of the convex head type. Use lock-washers with bolts and nuts.
I. Cable trays are not to be used in place of copper conductors as an equipment grounding
conductor.
J. Unless otherwise specified, support trays on 10 foot (3 meter) maximum intervals; provide
additional tray supports at changes in tray direction and at fittings in accordance with NEMA
VE1.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
K. Additional bracing shall be provided for the hangers where necessary to ensure rigidity.
L. Barriers for cable trays shall be the same height as the inside loading depth. The barriers
shall be securely anchored to the trays with smooth head bolts, nuts, and lock-washers.
Where tray changes direction, care shall be exercised in bending the barrier to maintain width
of path in the tray.
M. Provide dropout fittings wherever cables must exit the bottom of the tray; maintain the
minimum cable bending radius. Cable openings exiting the top of covered trays to have
protection against cable damage from sharp edges.
N. Grounding of Tray System: In accordance with the Specification 26 05 26 and as follows:
1. Provide continuity between tray components.
2. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical connectors.
3. Install a bonding jumper across gaps in tray runs to provide continuity.
2.03 CABLE TRAYS MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Materials and finishes:

1. The cable tray material shall be hot rolled steel sheet. The whole of the tray work,
trays, fittings, and supports shall be of mild steel hot dipped galvanized after. The
thickness of the protective sheath on any element shall not be less than 55 microns.
2. Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel hot dip galvanized.
3. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated.
4. Tray work shall have oval perforations.
5. All trays (straight and fittings) shall be welded construction and be a heavy duty
returned flanged, perforated type, unless specified otherwise. The minimum thickness
of heavy duty returned flanged cable trays shall be 1.5mm for trays up to 300mm wide
and 2.0mm for trays up to 1000mm wide.
6. Tray components shall be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerances and all edges
rounded. Flanges shall have full round smooth edges.
7. For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
8. Cable tray width and radius of curved sections shall be selected to suit the number of
cables as shown on drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
9. Cable trays and accessories installed in hazardous and extremely corrosive
environments shall be heavy duty GRP or stainless steel.
B. Sizes and Configurations: As shown on the Drawings.
2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B. Covers: Same materials and finishes as cable tray to be used for outdoor installations.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable
tray manufacturer.
2.05 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Tray Materials:

1. Carbon steel wire. Wire welded, bent, and surface treated after manufacture.
B. Cable Tray Finishes:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing after fabrication.
C. Cable tray shall consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management
system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL
Classified splices where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC). Provide splices,
supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously grounded system. Wire
mesh cable tray shall have continuous Safe-T-Edge T-welded top side wire to protect cable
insulation and installers.
1. Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).
2. Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm).
3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application load
requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight.
4. Safety Edge: Patented Safety Edge technology on side wire to protect cable insulation
and installers’ hands.
5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Cable Tray Size:
1. As shown on the drawings
E. Load Span Criteria:
1. Install and support cable management system in accordance with one of the following:
2.06 LADDER RACK
A. Ladder rack shall be supplied and installed in the locations indicated on the drawings.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. The cable ladder system shall be based on two longitudinal outward facing side members with
returned edge flanges to improve safety during handling, installation and cable pulling
activities. The longitudinal side members shall form the main structural elements of the cable
ladder system and shall be longitudinally ribbed for enhanced stiffness and rigidity.
C. The profile of the side members shall remain constant for the straight cable ladder and the
cable ladder fittings.
D. The longitudinal side members shall have a height of 125mm and a flange width of 25mm.
E. The longitudinal side member shall have a wall thickness of 2.0mm.
F. The two longitudinal side members shall be connected by individual transverse members
(rungs) which shall be welded at low level to the inside face of the side members.
G. The transverse members shall be evenly spaced at 300mm centers along the length of the
straight cable ladder.
H. The transverse members shall have a wall thickness of 1.5mm.
I. Ladder racks shall be manufactured from Steel and shall be deep galvanized after
manufacture and capable of carrying cables in a single layer formation with a maximum
deflection of 14mm (between supports) when the rack is fully loaded.
J. Racks, unless otherwise stated, shall be of heavy duty.
K. The couplers shall be profiled to match the profile of the cable ladder. The couplers shall be
secured using M10 square-shouldered bolts with rounded heads. The bolts shall be secured
with M10 hex nuts and M10 shake-proof washers as standard. The couplers shall have a slot
pattern which prevents slip between adjacent straight ladder lengths and between cable
ladder fittings. The couplers shall have a slot pattern which allows for easy connection to cut
lengths of straight cable ladder without the need for onsite drilling.
2.07 FIBER RUNNER
A. Fiber Runner is the optical fiber routing system.

B. Fiber Runner shall be used to route, segregate and protect fiber optic communication cabling.
C. It shall have a 2” minimum ben radius through-out the pathway
D. It shall be made from an impact resistant and flame retardant material
E. Color yellow
F. It shall include all mounting hardware, waterfalls, directional fittings and other accessories
required for installation

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE TRAY/ LADDER RACK INSTALLATION
A. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate
support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers,
tees, and crosses.
B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays/ ladder rack.
C. Fasten cable tray/ ladder rack supports to building structure.
D. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray/ ladder rack and to
equipment. Support cable tray/ ladder rack independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray/ ladder rack on equipment enclosure.
E. Install expansion connectors where cable tray/ ladder rack crosses building expansion joint.
Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
F. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
G. Make cable tray/ ladder rack connections using standard fittings.
H. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke.
I. Workspace: Install cable trays/ ladder rack with enough space to permit access for installing
cables.
A. Install cables only when cable tray/ ladder rack installation has been completed and
inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties. Tighten clamps only enough
to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket.
C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 450 mm. Install intermediate supports when cable
weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray/ rungs.
D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray/ ladder rack.
E. Install covers (where indicated) after installation of cable is completed.
A. After installing cable trays/ ladder racks and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable tray/ ladder rack, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions,
which may cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and
any blockage of tray/ ladder rack ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray/ ladder rack joint and each ground connection for
mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean
and re-torque in suspect areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray/ ladder rack earthing;
verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray/ ladder rack.
B. Report results in writing.
3.04 PROTECTION
C. Protect installed cable trays.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray/
ladder rack manufacturer.
2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays/ ladder racks to protect exposed
cables from falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for
cables and cable tray/ ladder rack can be constructed of wood or metal materials until
the risk of damage is over.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 27 11 26
COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER
PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ...................................................................................................... 3
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................... 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 5
2.01 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 5
2.02 RACK MOUNTED POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) ....................................... 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................13
3.1 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................13
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY ...............................................................................................13
3.3 TESTING ....................................................................................................................13

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for the complete installation of work called for in
the Contract Documents.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes the minimum requirements for rack mounted power protection and
power strips used in cabinets, racks, frames and enclosures in data centers, computer
rooms, and communications equipment rooms.
B. Included in this section are the minimum composition requirements and installation
methods for the following:
1. Rack Mounted Power Distribution Units (PDUs)
A. All cable and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods
of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents
shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner or Owner Representative.
Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment
specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is
stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and
subject to approval.
B. Strictly adhere to all Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI), Electronic
Industries Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) recommended
installation practices when installing communications/data cabling.
C. Material and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

2000-2004
TIA – 569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces, 2004
ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
of Commercial Buildings, 2002
ANSI-J-STD – 607-A Joint Standard for Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and
Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, 2002
ANSI/TIA-942-2005 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers,
2006
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for the following:

1. Manufacturers data sheets/cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all
products (submit with bid).
D.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 RACK MOUNTED POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUS)
A. General PDU Information

1. The Rack Mounted Power Distribution Unit (PDU) shall be vertical, single-input and
able to be mounted within a freestanding equipment rack or cabinet that is used to
store computer, network and data storage equipment in a data center, computer room
or network/ telecommunications equipment room.
2. The PDU shall provide reliable power distribution to equipment with optional local and
remote monitoring capabilities.
B. Dimensions
1. The PDU shall have a rectangular low profile chassis that is 70.5”H (1791 mm), no
more than 2.2”W x 2.2”D (56 mmm x 56 mm) at the outlets and 2.8”D (71 mm) at the
breakers for PDUs with up to three single-pole or double-pole breakers.
2. The PDU shall have a rectangular low profile chassis that is 72”H (1829 mm), no more
than 2.4”W x 2.2”D (61 mm x 56 mm) at the outlets and 2.8”D (71 mm) at the breakers
for PDUs with up to six single-pole breakers.
3. The PDU shall have a rectangular low profile chassis that is 75”H ( 1905 mm), no more
than 2.7”W x 2.2”D (69 mmm x 56 mm) at the outlets and 3.2”D (82 mm) at the
breakers for PDUs with up to six double-pole breakers.
C. Mounting Style

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The PDU shall include universal tool-less mounting hardware – a pair of aluminum
shoulder washers attached to the back of the PDU chassis that can be spaced 64.75”
(1645 mm) or 61.25” (1556 mm) apart to match most rack/cabinet mounting brackets.
D. Power Input (Plug)
1. The PDU shall include one (1) single input cord permanently attached to the PDU and
10’ (3m) in length.
2. The PDU shall have a nominal input voltage range as specified on drawings.
3. The input amperage shall be 16A, 20A, [30A], [32A], [50A] or [60A].
The PDU input plug shall be:
a. [C20 Inlet – no power cord],
b. [L5-20P], [L5-30P],
c. [L6-20P], [L6-30P],
d. [IEC 16A 2P+E], [IEC 32A 2P+E],
e. [L14-20P], [L14-30P],
f. [L15-20P], [L15-30P],
g. [L21-20P], [L21-30P],
h. [50A CS8365C 3P+E] or [60A IEC 3P+E]
i. [L22-20P], [L22-30P],
j. [IEC 16A 4P+E], [IEC 32A 4P+E].
E. Breakers
1. The PDU shall have [1], [2], [3] or [6] UL489 hydraulic magnetic breakers fully rated to
[16A] or [20A] each, [Single-Pole] or [Double-Pole] depending on input plug type and
UL requirements. The chassis design shall be minimized to reduce the breaker box
height and include flush mounted breakers to prevent accidental discharge.
F. Power Output (Outlets)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The PDU shall have a mix of [NEMA 5-20R], [IEC C13] and/or [IEC C19] outlets. The
nominal output voltage for 5-20R outlets is 120V and for C13/C19 is 208V. Outlet
layout should have alternating phases to improve load balancing, cabinet airflow and
reduce server cord length.
The PDU shall have one these standard outlet combinations:
a. (12) C13 (12) C19
b. (12) C13 (18) C19
c. (18) C13 (6) C19
d. (24) 5-20R
e. (24) C13
f. (24) C13 (12) C19
g. (24) C13 (6) C19
h. (24) C13 (6) C19 (6) 5-20R
i. (24) C13 (9) C19 (3) 5-20R
j. (30) C13 (6) C19
k. (36) 5-20R
l. (36) C13
m. (36) C13 (6) C19
G. Alternating of Phases
1. The PDU shall have outlets with alternating phases throughout the PDU in order to
facilitate load balancing, wiring and avoid circuit overload. This feature should apply to
both single phase and three phase PDUs.
H. Cable Management
1. The PDU shall have an integrated non-intrusive method of securing server power cords
to the chassis. A separate, nylon, flexible power cord manager shall be attached to the

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
server power cord either through a proprietary method or tie wrap designed to firmly
attach to the server cord.
I. PDU Temperature Rating
1. The PDU shall be rated for use in high temperature ambient air up to 149°F (65°C) and
suitable for use in hot aisle containment and ducted exhaust cabinet applications.
J. Grounding/Bonding
1. The PDU shall have a grounded inlet/power plug and a separate external M5 threaded
ground attachment point. The PDU shall include a grounding kit with a 12”L (300 mm),
#12 AWG, stranded copper grounding jumper.
K. Certifications
1. The PDU shall be UL Listed, and shall meet the applicable requirements of the
following certifications: UL, CSC C22.2 for Canada; CE for the EU; FCC Part 15, Class
A; EN 55022 and RoHS Compliant.
L. Color & Finish
1. The exterior of the PDU shall be painted black with epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat
paint. Power outlets will be molded black. Color coded labels shall identify the breakers
and associated outlets.
M. Included Hardware
1. The PDU shall include (2) aluminum shoulder washers, (50) plastic power cord
managers and (1) grounding kit. Rack/cabinet mounting brackets are sold separately.
N. PDU Type and Functionality
1. The PDU shall have one or more of the following main features, which are further
detailed in this document.
a. [No local meter or remote monitoring – Basic]
b. [Local and remote monitoring at PDU Breaker/Input Level – Monitored]

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. [Local and remote monitored at PDU Breaker/Input and Outlet Level – Monitored
Pro]
d. [Local and remote monitoring at PDU Breaker/Input Level with Outlet Control –
Switched]
e. [Local and remote monitored at PDU Breaker/Input and Outlet Level with Control –
Switched Pro]
O. Main Monitoring Features for:
a. Monitored (1-8),
b. Monitored Pro (1-8, 9),
c. Switched (1-8, 10)
d. Switched Pro (1-8, 9, 10)
1. Power Measurement
The PDU shall have a built-in power meter with ±1% metering accuracy. Power (kW),
Energy (kWh), Voltage (V), Current (A) and Power Factor (PF) will be measured at
input and each breaker.
2. Graphical Display
The PDU shall have a centrally located LCD display. The display screen will present
combined voltage, current, power (kW) for the PDU and voltage, current, power (kW)
and power factor values for each breaker on the PDU. The display screen will also
present line input current on three-phase units.The dislpay screen will presnt current
values per outlet for Monitored Pro and Switched Pro PDUs. Display screens and
options shall be navigated with three push buttons located under the display. Alarms
will be indicated by a flashing red LED above the display and indicator on screen. The
image on the display screen will rotate 180° for easy viewing when the PDU is
mounted with the power cord toward the top of the rack/cabinet. The display can be
used to setup PDU Linking settings, fixed IP address and firmware update.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Temperature and Humidity Sensor Port

The PDU shall have a sensor port that will support up to two external temperature and
humidity sensors. When attached, the PDU will display measured temperature and
humidity values. These sensors are sold separately.
4. Ethernet Connection
The PDU shall have a 10/100 Mbps RJ45 Ethernet connection to allow remote access
using a web browser to view the built-in webpage or automated monitoring with a third-
party software or appliance that can receive SNMP traps. The built-in webpage shall
allow the user to view detailed power, temperature and humidity readings; to set upper
and lower alarm limits for measured values; and to view summarized alarms. For quick
setup, users shall be able to enter the IP address using the graphical display. The
connection shall support an IPv4 or IPv6 address. The PDU must also be capable of
web authentication, multiple user accounts, and download and export of data logs.
5. IP Consolidation
The PDU shall include two serial PDU Linking ports that allow multiple PDUs to be
connected in a continuous chain of up to 20 PDUs for IP consolidation. All linked PDUs
shall be remotely accessable though a single, primary Ethernet connection on one of
the linked PDUs using either a third-party software (SNMP) or the built-in web interface
(web browser and IP address). The built-in web interface will list all connected PDUs in
a tree-like directory structure allowing easy click-through to view individual PDU details
and all alarms will be summarized on a separate tab. If a linked PDU is removed from
the chain, an alarm will notify the user. For redundancy, the linked PDUs will also
support an optional, alternate Ethernet connection from a second PDU. For quick
setup, users shall be able to select the PDU’s role within the chain (primary, alternate
or secondary) using the PDU’s local display. If the alternate PDU assumes the primary
role, an alarm will notify the user.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. USB Port
The PDU shall include one USB port for installing firmware upgrades locally. Firmware
upgrades may also be installed using the network connection or mass firmware update
program.
7. Software integration to Third-Party Software
The PDU shall communicate with any third party DCIM, power monitoring software or
building management system through SNMP protocol using the Ethernet connection.
8. Built-in Web Interface
The PDU shall have a built-in interface that can be accessed through any web browser
using the PDU’s assigned IP address. For quick setup, users shall be able to enter the
IP address using the PDU’s graphical display. The connection shall support an IPv4 or
IPv6 address. Access to the web interface shall be login protected. The PDU must be
capable of four user accounts and web authentication, data logging, and download and
export of data logs.The interface shall allow authorized user accounts to view all
monitored information including power, temperature and humidity readings and
summarized alarms; set upper and lower alarm thresholds; change PDU and outlet
names; designate data to log and export recorded data. In addition, administrator
accounts shall also be able to create user or administrator accounts and setup detailed
network, SNMP and web authentication settings.
9. Outlet Monitoring and Grouping
The PDU shall measure voltage, current and power (kW) at each outlet. The built-in
webpage shall allow the user to name each outlet, to view detailed power readings
(voltage, current, kW) for each outlet; to set upper and lower alarm limits for each
outlet; to view summarized alarms; and to group monitored outlets on individual and
linked PDUs to see combined power usage for redundantly powered or multiple pieces
of equipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
10. Outlet Control and Grouping

The PDU shall have switched outlets that can be turned on, off or cycled remotely. The
built-in webpage shall allow the user to name each outlet, to set on and cycle delays
for each outlet, and to group switched outlets on individual and linked PDUs to turn
redundantly powered or multiple pieces of equipment off or on with a single click. Each
outlet should have an LED indicating if the outlet is ON or OFF. In case of an alarm,
the LED should blink to facilitate location of the alarm.
F.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
instructions.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
with Article 250, 800 and 820 of National Electric Code (NEC).
3.3 TESTING
equipment and the system entirely.

SECTION 27 13 00
COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 3

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................... 3
1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................. 3
1.3 REFERENCES ....................................................................................................... 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................... 4
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .............................................................. 5
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 7
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................... 7
2.2 BACKBONE CABLING ........................................................................................... 7
2.3 TERMINATION AND SPLICING FOR BACKBONE CABLE .................................. 11
2.4 PATCH CABLES .................................................................................................. 12
2.5 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM ............................................................. 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 15
3.1 EXAMINATION ..................................................................................................... 15
3.2 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 15
3.3 POST-INSTALLATION TESTING ......................................................................... 16
3.4 ACCEPTANCE ..................................................................................................... 21

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, apply
to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to
this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them, including but not limited to
the following:
1. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems
2. Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. This section includes the backbone cabling portion of a structured cabling

system (SCS) including:
a. Optical fiber
b. Copper and coaxial backbone cabling
c. Splicing
d. Termination and patch cables
B. Provide all backbone cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting

hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located
in Communications rooms.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards,

manufacturer’s instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the
latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is
shown dated.
C. Codes and Standards:
ANSI/TIA-568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring

Standard
ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
ANSI/TIA-758-A, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications

Infrastructure Standard
ANSI/TIA – 1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure

Standard
NEC National Electrical Code (NEC), based upon year approval by

local codes or AHJ
TDMM Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM),
current edition
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cable Pulling Plan: The contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan, as follows:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Indicate the installed backbone conduit layout in schematic format, including

junction boxes and distances between junction boxes.
2. Indicate contents of each conduit.
3. Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs
and tensions.
4. Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of

communications rooms.
5. Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling plan
and calculations by the engineer.
B. Splice Plan: The contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended cable
splice points, mounting method and equipment list.
C. Cable Testing Plan: The contractor shall provide a test plan for media testing as
described in the article “Field Quality Control” prior to beginning cable testing.
D. Cable Testing Reports: The contractor shall submit cable test reports as follows
1. Submit certified test reports of contractor-performed tests in accordance with the

“Field Quality Control” article of this document.
A. Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of five years splicing experience and
shall have completed a minimum of five major splicing projects.
A. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C)
B. The fiber optic cable shall be shipped on reels in lengths as required by the project:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The cable shall be wound on the reel so that unwinding can be done without
kinking the cable.
2. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be accessible for testing. All
optical fiber shall be tested on the reel for continuity and distance compliance
before installation.
3. Marking: Each reel shall have a permanent label attached showing length, cable
identification number, cable size, cable type, attenuation, bandwidth, and date of
manufacture. Labels shall be water resistant and the writing on the labels shall
be indelible.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2 BACKBONE CABLING
A. Optical Fiber General Requirements
1. Optical Fiber shall be certified to meet all parts of TIA-455 and comply with TIA-
492, ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 and ANSI/ICEA S-83-640 and the NEC.
2. Fibers shall have D-LUX coating or approved equivalent to ensure color

retention, minimize micro bending losses and improve handling. The coating
shall be mechanically strippable.
3. Cable installed in plenums or air-handling spaces shall meet UL 910 and shall
be marked OFNP (optical fiber non-conductive plenum) in accordance with the
NEC.
a. Plenum Fiber rated cable consisting of multiple fibers shall have a Plenum
PVC outer jacket. Each group of fibers shall have a color-coded Low
Smoke PVC buffer. The buffered fibers are organized in subunits of fibers,
reinforced with aramid yarn for extra strength and surrounded with a color-
coded low smoke tube.
b. Within the premises, all optical fiber shall be placed in plenum rated
innerduct the entire length of the cable for protection. Use manufacturer
plenum rated couplings for all connections.
4. Riser cable shall meet UL 1666 and be marked OFNR (optical fiber
nonconductive riser) in accordance with the NEC. Non-plenum, riser rated cable
consisting of multiple fibers, shall have an orange, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
outer jacket.
5. Outside Plant Optical Fiber:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Stranded loose tube dielectric fiber optic cable shall be utilized for
underground conduit, direct buried, or aerial applications.
b. Underground cable, including cable installed in conduits or duct banks,

shall contain an additional moisture barrier in the form of a flooding
compound.
c. Outside plant optical fiber strength members shall be all dielectric

without any metallic elements.
6. Optical fibers conductors shall follow standard color code schemes. Fiber
numbers and binders shall correspond to the color codes as follows:
a. Fiber/Binder No. 1 – blue
b. Fiber/Binder No. 2 – orange
c. Fiber/Binder No. 3 – green
d. Fiber/Binder No. 4 – brown
e. Fiber/Binder No. 5 – slate
f. Fiber/Binder No. 6 – white
g. Fiber/Binder No. 7 – red
h. Fiber/Binder No. 8 – black
i. Fiber/Binder No. 9 – yellow
j. Fiber/Binder No. 10 – violet
k. Fiber/Binder No. 11 – rose
l. Fiber/Binder No. 12 – aqua
7. Cable Minimum Bending Radius:
a. During Installation: 20 times cable diameter
b. After Installation: 10 times cable diameter
8. Operating temperature range: -76°F to 185°F (-60°C to 85°C)
B. Multi-mode Optical Fiber

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Fibers shall have dual wavelength capability; transmitting at 850 and 1300 nm
ranges.
2. 50 µm ± 2.5 µm core
3. Core non-circularity: = 5%
4. 125 µm ± 1 µm cladding diameter
5. Cladding non-circularity: =1%
6. Colored fiber diameter: 254 µm ± 7 µm
7. Buffering diameter: 890 mm ± 50 mm
8. Minimum tensile strength: 100,000 psi
9. Maximum Attenuation: multimode 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300
nm (inside premises).
10. Minimum Bandwidth: 3500 MHz per km OFL at 850 nm and 500 MHz at 1300
nm.
11. Additional component and transmission requirements for a 50/125 µm optical

fiber cable capable of supporting 10 Gb/s serial transmission up to 550 m using
850 nm nominal wavelength lasers. These cables are suitable for use in
accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-B.1.
C. Single Mode Optical Fiber
1. Fibers shall have dual wavelength capability, transmitting at 1310 and 1550 nm
ranges.
2. 8.3 µm core
4. Cladding non-circularity: =1%
5. Core/cladding concentricity error: = .5 µm
6. Colored fiber diameter: 254 µm ± 7 µm

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
7. Maximum Attenuation: .40 dB/km at 1310 nm and .30 dB/km at 1550 nm
8. Minimum Bandwidth: 20 GHz
9. The mechanical and environmental specifications for outside plant optical fiber
cable shall be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. Outside plant optical
fiber cables shall be of a water-block construction and meet the requirements for
compound flow and water penetration as established by ANSI/ICEA S-87-640.
Outdoor cable shall have a minimum pull strength of 2670 N (600 lbf).
D. Copper Cable Requirements
1. 100-ohm balanced twisted-pair.
2. Plenum-rated cabling: Cable installed in plenums or air-handling spaces shall

meet UL 910 and shall be marked CMP (communications multipurpose plenum)
in accordance with the NEC. Plenum cable shall consist of #24-AWG solid
copper conductors insulated with color-coded FEP
3. Non-plenum riser-rated cabling shall meet UL 1666 and be marked CMR

(communications multipurpose riser) in accordance with the NEC. And shall
consist of 24 AWG copper conductors insulated with color-coded PVC copper
cables.
4. ASP-filled multi-pair copper cables shall be utilized for underground conduit or

direct buried applications. All outside plant (OSP) cable shall be transitioned to
inside cable within 50 feet of building entry. The metallic portion of the cables, if
present, must be bonded to the building ground upon entry.
5. The bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables
shall be observed during handling and installation.
E. Coaxial Cable Requirements
1. All Backbone cable must be plenum-rated .500 hard line or RG-11
2. Shielded, with a copper clad aluminum center conductor; expandable

polyethylene dielectric; continuous aluminum outer conductor, and a flame
retardant jacket.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Tested and marked to comply with the NEC requirements for (CATVR) riser
rating.
2.3 TERMINATION AND SPLICING FOR BACKBONE CABLE
A. Optical Fiber
1. Interconnect Units and Distribution Shelves.
a. Modular in design and used in fiber optic interconnection, cross-connection,

and splicing applications.
b. 19-inch rack-mountable
c. Accept 12-strand, 24-strand, 48-strand or 72-strand terminations
d. Owner approved industry standard connector
2. Splicing and closures: The fiber splice module shall be utilized for all outside
plant terminations. The link shall consist of the fiber cable, the splice, the splice
tray holder/closure, the fiber panel/coupler, a pre-manufactured fiber pigtail with
pre-polished fiber connector, and a fiber jumper to connect the pigtail-coupled
link to the appropriate electronic switch. The fiber splice module shall meet the
following specifications:
a. Fusion: Optical fiber splices shall not exceed a maximum optical attenuation
of 0.3 dB when measured in accordance with ANSI/TIA-455-34, Method A
(factory testing) or ANSI/TIA-455-59 (field testing). Optical fiber splices
shall have a minimum return loss of 20 dB for multimode, 26 dB for single
mode, when measured in accordance with ANSI/TIA-455-107. The
minimum single mode return loss for broadband analog video (CATV)
applications is 55 dB.
b. All fusion splices shall be mounted in protective trays within the closure.
c. Joins single mode or multi-mode fibers
d. Establishes a permanent fusion splice
e. May be used in OSP and/or premises applications

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
f. Accept 250 and 900 micron fibers
g. Re-enterable, portable and reusable
h. Require no polishing
i. Require no adhesives
j. No loose parts
k. Unlimited shelf life
B. Copper
1. 110-type Wiring Blocks using C5 clips, Insulation Displacement Connector

Systems, with proper patch cord
a. Compatible with all voice and data circuits
b. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed
2. Protector Panels shall be provided for all outside plant installed copper circuits.
The protectors shall provide pair-for-pair protection and be mounted on a ¾” fire-
rated wallboard.
2.4 PATCH CABLES
A. Copper
1. 24 AWG, Cat 6A stranded UTP
2. Standard modular non-keyed, 8-position 8-conductor plug,
3. 94V-0 rated
4. UL listed
5. complies with TIA-568-B requirements
6. Meets FCC Part 68
B. Optical Fiber Patch Cables

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Buffered, graded-index fiber with a 50 µm core and a 125 micron cladding for
multi-mode and a stepped-index 8.3 µm core with a 125 µm cladding for single
mode.
2. Aramid yarn and a jacket of flame-retardant PVC shall cover the fiber cladding.
3. Owner approved connectors
4. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturers
5. Operating temperature: -4° to 158° F (-20 to 70° C)
6. Cable Retention: 50 lb. (220 N) minimum
7. Multi-mode patch cables shall meet or exceed the following additional

requirements:
a. Mated Connector Loss: µ = 0.3 dB, σ = 0.2 dB
b. Connection Repeatability: 0.20 dB maximum changes per 100 reconnects.
8. Single mode patch cables shall meet or exceed the following additional
requirements:
a. Return Loss: -50 dB maximum
b. Mated Connector Loss: µ = 0.35 dB, σ = 0.2 dB
c. Connection Repeatability: 0.20 dB maximum changes per 200 reconnects.
9. The multi-mode connector or a visible portion of it shall be beige in color. The

multi-mode adapter or outlet shall be identified by the color beige. The single-
mode connector or a visible portion of it shall be blue in color. The single-mode
adapter or outlet shall be identified by the color blue.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM
A. Labeling system shall consist of a computer generated system and labels appropriate
to the application. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
B. Fiber termination hardware (designation strip): Thermal transfer printable label with a
permanent acrylic adhesive, preferably .75 inch by .25 inch

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. 110-type copper termination hardware: Laser printable, non-adhesive label designed

for 110 terminal block marking.
D. Outside plant copper cable: Permanent acrylic adhesive, self-laminating vinyl wire and
cable identification 1.5 inches Wide by 1.5 inch long.
E. Outside plant fiber cables: Permanent acrylic adhesive, self-laminating vinyl wire and
cable identification 1.5 inches wide by 1.5 inches long.
F. All labels shall be permanent, i.e. will not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment
or time.
G. Refer to drawing for patch panel, face plate & cable label format (LINK).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the following before proceeding:
1. Conduits, cable trays and pull boxes are properly installed following section
270533
2. Grounding system is properly installed and tested following section 270526
3. All high-pair count copper cables are routed properly and attached.
4. All optical fiber links are terminated and tested.
5. All backbone cabling service loops are installed and protected.
6. Liquid-carrying pipes are not installed in or above voice and data system
communications rooms. Do not proceed with installation in affected areas until
removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Copper and Fiber Backbone Cables
1. Contractor shall:
a. Terminate onto rack-mounted patch panels.
b. Install riser cables according to manufacturer’s instructions for compliance to

warranty requirements.
B. OSP Cable
1. The Contractor shall verify pulling material (pull rope, mule tape, etc.) average
breaking strength based on cable type and size, pulling distance and pathway,
and other pertinent factors.
C. Copper and Fiber Cable and Connectors
1. Contractor shall

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Install connectors according to manufacturer’s instructions for compliance to

warranty requirements.
b. Provide 10Gig capable MM fiber connectors
D. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-B standards, BICSI

methods, industry standards. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling
tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends
maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the
appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the
additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also
apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the
implementation.
E. Documentation:
1. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated

with and approved by owner so that data can be incorporated into existing
databases.
2. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination,

type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers.
3. Complete cross connect documentation is required. It shall include detailed

documentation of each pair of all copper backbone cable and strand of fiber.
3.3 POST-INSTALLATION TESTING
A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. (100%
PASS)
B. Contractor shall supply all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance
tests.
C. Contractor shall submit acceptance documentation as defined below. No cabling

installation is considered complete until test results have been completed, submitted
and approved.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Standards Compliance and Test Requirements:
1. Copper backbone shall exceed ANSI/TIA-568-B.2 Backbone Cabling

requirements and meet the manufacturer’s specifications for the installed
product.
2. Optical fiber shall exceed ANSI/TIA-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components

Standard requirements and meet the manufacturer’s specifications for the
installed product.
3. Contractor shall certify to TIA/TSB-140 Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing

Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems.
E. Cable Test Documentation:
1. Cable test documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic

formats. If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary
software application required to view test results. If the results are delivered in a
standard format like Excel, Access, CSV files, etc., software to read these files is
not required. Electronic reports shall be accompanied by a certificate signed by
an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy
of the electronic report. Certificate shall reference traceable circuit numbers that
match the electronic record.
2. Each test record shall contain the cable ID as follows: “MEDIA TYPE – SOURCE
ROOM – DESTINATION ROOM – STRAND/PAIR #”, e.g. MM-MC-HC23-001.
3. Copper: Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling
element tested:
a. Wire map results that indicate that 100 percent of the cabling has been tested
for shorts, opens, splits, polarity reversals, transpositions, presence of AC
voltage and end-to-end connectivity.
b. Copper cabling: Attenuation and NEXT data that indicate the worst case
result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the
margin. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
to 250 MHz. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations.
Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be
marked as a FAIL.
c. Outside plant cabling: The test equipment shall be capable of making

frequency sweeps at an impedance of 135 Ohms at the following
frequencies (kHz): 20, 30, 50, 69, 90, 110, 138, 276, 400, 600, 800, 1000,
1100. A far-end device shall be used for all frequency measurements. The
loss at 138 kHz shall not exceed 46 dB. The test set shall have the ability to
store 100 tests and be able to upload to a PC. The test set shall be able to
measure resistance between the following conductors: tip to ring, tip to
ground, and ring to ground. All measurements shall be greater than 999
Ohms.
d. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any
individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be
marked as a FAIL.
e. Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP
f. Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version, and software

version.
g. Cable ID and project name
h. Auto-test specification used
i. Overall pass/fail indication
j. Date of test
4. Optical Fiber: Testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end-to-
end system.
a. Power Meter and Source Loss Reports: Testing shall consist of a bi-
directional, dual wave length end to end test. The system loss
measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1300 nanometers for multi-
mode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Reports: Testing shall consist of

a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per TIA/EIA 455-61.
Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.75 dB.
c. Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.3 dB.
d. Fibers shall be inspected at 250X or 400X magnification. 250X magnification

is suitable for inspecting multimode and single mode fibers. 400X
magnification may be used for detailed examination of single mode fibers.
e. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (connector to

connector).
f. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the
same fiber type as the cabling under test. The test cords for optical loss test
set (OLTS) testing shall be between one meter and five meters in length.
The test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately 100 meters for the
launch cable and at least 25 meters for the receive cable.
g. Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel (equipment to

equipment) that is planned for use per the owner’s instructions.
5. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a
Windows™ based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection
and archiving of the test records. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC
unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the field-test instrument”. The file format, CSV
(comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these
records and shall not be used.
6. The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic

database for each tested optical fiber and shall contain the following information:
a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user.
b. The name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results.
c. The name of the personnel performing the test.
d. The date and time the test results were saved.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
e. The manufacturer, model and serial number of the test instrument.
f. The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held
within the test instrument.
g. The fiber identification number.
h. The length for each optical fiber.
i. The index of refraction used for length calculation when using a length
capable OLTS.
j. Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at

the appropriate wavelength(s) and the margin (difference between the
measured attenuation and the test limit value).
k. Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces and event tables at the
appropriate wavelength(s).
l. The length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR
m. Overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR

measurements.
n. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label
ID.
F. Cable Test Equipment:
1. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from a manufacturer that has a
minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturer
shall be ISO 9001 certified.
2. Test equipment for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/TIA-526-14-A. The light source shall meet the launch requirements of
ANSI/TIA-455-50B, Method A. Test equipment for single mode fiber cabling
shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA-526-7. The cable installers shall have
a copy of these references in their possession and be familiar with the contents.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. The test instrument shall be within the calibration period recommended by the
manufacturer.
4. Test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed.
5. All test tools of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have
compatible electronic results output.
6. The manufacturer of the test equipment shall approve test adapter cables.
Adapters from other sources are not acceptable.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and
approved, and the owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance
with contract documents, the owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal
acceptance of the system.
B. Contractor’s RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the
requirements specified herein.
C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation

testing which yields 100 percent PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full
documentation as described above. Tests with the “* PASS” (asterisk) will not be
acceptable. These circuits must be repaired to meet “PASS”.
- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 27 15 00
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 3
1.2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 3
1.3 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 4
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................... 5
PART 2 – PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 6
2.01 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 6
2.02 ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................... 6
2.03 HORIZONTAL CABLING ............................................................................................. 6
2.04 TERMINATION HARDWARE......................................................................................13
2.05 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM ...................................................................15
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................16
3.01 EXAMINATION ...........................................................................................................16
3.02 INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................16
3.03 TESTS ........................................................................................................................21
3.04 ACCEPTANCE ...........................................................................................................24

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, apply to
this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this
Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems
2. Section 27 13 00 - Communications Backbone Cabling
1.2 SUMMARY
1. This section includes the horizontal cabling portion of a structured cabling system
(SCS) including:
a. Optical fiber
b. Copper and coaxial cabling
c. Termination and patch cables
B. Provide all horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting

hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in
communications rooms.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.
B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of
each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. ANSI/TIA-568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard
2. ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces
3. ANSI/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure
4. ANSI/TIA-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications
5. ANSI/TIA-758-A Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure

Standard
6. ANSI/TIA-1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
7. National Electrical Code (NEC), based upon year approval by local codes or AHJ
8. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications

Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), current edition
9. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of
purchase

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
10. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. It shall be
indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any,
and the country of origin.
A. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. The Contractor shall:
1. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as-built floor plan designating
workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard
copy size with Owner. As-built floor plan shall be scalable, and shall have an
identified standard scale.
2. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall
of the servicing communications rooms. To ease accessibility the Plexiglas
encasement shall be in either flip-down format or file folder format.
2.03 HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the
communications room shall include the following:
1. Four-pair Category 6A UTP cable
2. 50 µm multi-mode optical fiber
B. Optical Fiber Requirements – Refer to Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone

Cabling for additional general requirements:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Multi-mode fibers shall have dual wavelength capability; transmitting at 850 and
1300 nm ranges.
2. Laser optimized 50 µm ± 2.5 µm core
4. Maximum Fiber Loss: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm
5. Minimum Bandwidth: 3500 MHz at 850 nm and 500 MHz at 1300 nm
6. Single mode shall not be used for horizontal cabling.
C. Category 6A UTP Cable Requirements: High performance Category 6A UTP shall adhere
to the following:
1. 23/24 AWG solid bare copper
2. Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall
be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum).
3. Cable shall terminate on an eight-pin modular jack at each outlet. All horizontal
cabling shall meet or exceed the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling
Components.
4. Cables shall be marked as UL verified with a minimum of Category 6A rating.
5. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Base band Video/Audio, Fax, Modem,
Switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10BASE-T Ethernet, Token
Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital
Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-
bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77
channels (550 MHz) of analog broadband video

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. The maximum horizontal cable length for Category 6A copper cable from the
termination of the cable in the communications room to the outlet is 90m.
7. Cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical characteristics:
8. Cable shall be specified to 500 MHz and shall meet the manufacturer’s guaranteed
electrical performance and physical specifications.
D. Cabling Method:
1. The Contractor shall:

a. Provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed
raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system. Within consoles,
racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in
gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used. Use UL or
ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces.
b. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical.
c. Utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings.
d. Route data and voice cables separately in a neat and orderly fashion. No
cable ties or wraps shall be used to secure the cables in the runway outside of
the communications rooms. Hook and loop fasteners shall be used for any
final cable securing needed. Fasteners shall be rated for the area they are
used in, (Plenum as required).
e. Examine pathway elements intended for cable.
f. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations,
installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other
conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Application of Media:
1. Horizontal cabling
a. The Contractor shall:
1) Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are
consistent with specified data cabling and the installed components and
that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal
paths, end to end.
2) Install cables in continuous lengths from communications outlet to
specified patch panels for data and termination blocks for voice.
3) Terminate horizontal voice cables into termination blocks without
damaging twisted pairs or jacket.
4) Terminate horizontal data cables onto 8P8C modular patch panels
without damaging twisted pairs or jacket.
5) Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent
cable kinking.
6) If necessary use approved cable pulling lubricant.
7) Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and
moisture proof barrier materials/envelopes. If wiring is terminated on
patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and
general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective
envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do
not settle onto jacks’ contacts. Envelope will be removed on final trim
out after other trades have completed their finish work. It shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective
measures throughout the life/installation of the project.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
8) Do not bind cables tightly together with tie or other wraps. Wraps shall
slip loosely around cables. Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for
all bundling in the communications rooms.
9) Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the
same raceway/pathway.
10) Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave
wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway.
11) Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural
members following surface contours where possible.
12) Do not bend cable less than a bend radius of 1 inch.
a) Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be

routed and dressed in such a manner that prior to termination the
cables are not subject to damage and misuse such as installers
walking on the bundles that are lying on the floor. Cable pulling
force shall not exceed 25 pounds of pulling tension or cable
manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.
b) When exiting runway and/or conduit via a means to ensure

support of the cable, shall thereafter be supported with approved
materials, and space supporting hardware to maintain
performance characteristics, or as listed below.
F. Separation of Wires and Cabling Installation Practices:

a. Comply with NEC / TIA rules for separating unshielded copper communication
and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including
electrical power lines and equipment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. Maintain a minimum spacing of 18 inches from electrical feeders and/or

branch circuit wiring.
c. Maintain a minimum spacing of 12 inches from auxiliary systems cabling.
d. Maintain a 1-inch separation where UTP cables must pass perpendicularly to
electrical, plumbing, or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems. Use non-
conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the
addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future.
e. Maintain communications pathways away from electrical apparatus such as
motor driven equipment and transformers, minimum separation distance of
10-feet is recommended.
f. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to
perform insulation displacement type terminations at all data outlets, patch
panels, and voice termination materials.
g. Dress and terminate horizontal cables in consistent consecutive order.
h. Arrange cables on patch panels and voice termination hardware in ascending
order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms.
i. Provide a 3-foot 6-inch service loop for horizontal cables at I/O’s. Locate
service loop above or below I/O were vertical cable run transitions to
horizontal run.
j. Maintain twists in cable pairs to within .5-inch of termination.
k. Group all specialty cables such as the pay phone cables, elevator line, etc
which do not have their own termination hardware, in one group, clearly
labeled as to cable number and function, in the last positions on the horizontal
cabling blocks in each communications room.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
l. Limit cable-bending radius for fiber optic cable to 20 times the cable diameter
during installation, and 15 times the cable diameter after installation. Follow
manufacturer’s requirements for copper cable bending radius.
m. Do not leave cables on the floor unprotected or cable bundles hanging from
the ceilings. Coil them up in a temporary manner and protect them from
damage.
n. Start numbering at the left of the main door to the room and continue in a
clockwise direction around the room.
o. The cables within the room will be terminated starting with the cables located
to the left of the main door to the room and continue around the room in a
clockwise direction.
2. Fiber Optic Cable Installation

a. Fiber optic cable shall be installed in inner duct from near end termination
point to far end termination point. Only UL-approved plenum-rated inner duct
shall be in-stalled in all plenum areas. Metallic conduit may be used in lieu of
inner duct in plenum-rated ceilings if it is bonded and grounded correctly.
b. Only technicians-trained and certified by the product manufacturer shall
perform terminations. Terminations shall be made in a controlled
environment. Cables may be assembled off -site, although testing must be
completed with the cable in its final installed condition. Test optical fiber on
the reel for distance and continuity verification before installation.
c. At each location where fiber cable is exposed to human intrusion, it shall be
marked with warning tags. These tags shall be yellow or orange in color, and
shall contain the warning "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE". The text shall
be permanent, black, block characters, and at least .1875-inch high. A
warning tag shall be permanently affixed to each exposed cable or bundle of

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
cables, at intervals of not less than 5 feet. Any section of exposed cable that
is less than 5 feet in length shall have at least one warning tag affixed to it.
G. Coaxial Cable Requirements:
1. RG-11 shall be considered if distances are long; designer shall evaluate distance,
bandwidth and frequency of operation.
2. Shall consist of a #20 AWG solid-copper center conductor with 95% copper braided
shield. The cable shall be UL and (UL) Listed for Fire Safety and ISO 9001
Certified.
3. Characteristic Impedance shall be 75 Ohms at 50 MHz.
2.04 TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Station Hardware
1. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box.
2. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors,

or access hatches without prior Owner approval.
3. 8P8C Jack Pin Assignments - Pin connections for voice and data information outlets
and patch panels shall match T-568B termination standard under the EIA/TIA 568-
A code.
4. Pin assignments at all voice and data panels or connecting blocks shall match pin
assignments at the information outlets.
B. Optical Fiber Interconnect Units, Distribution Shelves, and Adapter panels

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Modular in design and used in fiber optic interconnection and cross-connection.
2. 19-inch rack-mountable
3. Owner approved industry-standard connectors.
C. Optical Fiber Outlets:
1. Modular in design
2. Duplex Type LC fiber optic coupling/adapter
D. Copper patch panels:
1. Copper patch panels shall be rated to match installed cable plant.
2. Horizontal copper cables shall be terminated in eight position/eight conductor

(8P8C) modular patch panels with no distinction between voice and data.
3. The termination block on the patch panel shall support the appropriate applications,
including 100 Base-T, 52/155 Mbps ATM, and 1000 BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet, and
facilitate cross connection and inter connection using modular patch cords.
4. All Modular jack panels shall be wired to T-568B unless requested otherwise by
Owner.
5. The wiring block shall accommodate #23 AWG cable conductors.
6. All modular cross connect panels shall be UL-listed.
E. Work area outlets:
1. 8P8C non-keyed modular outlets for applications up to one Gbps and ANSI/TIA/EIA-
568-C compliant for the specified transmission requirements.
2. Part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Universal eight-position jack pin/pair assignments.
4. White in color for data outlets and blue in color for voice outlets.
F. Outlet Faceplates:
1. Match electrical outlets in color and material type.
2. Four-position with blanks inserted in unused ports.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM
A. Refer to sections 27 13 00.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the following before proceeding:
1. Conduits, cable trays and pull boxes are properly installed following section 270533.
3. Grounding system is properly installed and tested following section 27 05 26.
4. All high-pair count copper cables are routed properly and attached.
5. All optical fiber links are terminated and tested.
6. All backbone cabling service loops are installed and protected.
7. Liquid-carrying pipes are not installed in or above voice and data system
communications rooms. Do not proceed with installation in affected areas until
removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C standards, BICSI

methods, industry standards and manufacturer's installation guidelines. The Contractor
shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not
exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the
facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide
in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the
situation. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the
Contractor during the implementation.
B. The Contractor shall:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Provide a 3-foot service loop above the access ceiling or cable trays unless
specified otherwise. All service loops shall be a minimum of 18 inches in diameter
and be accessible for maintenance.
2. Coordinate loop placement and orientation with the technology consultant. This
allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables.
C. Cabling between communications rooms and workstation locations shall be made as

individual “home runs”. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or
utilized between the communications rooms and the information outlets at the workstation
location.
D. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance
specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the
connection points at both ends of the cable. There shall never be more than .5 inches of
unsheathed Category 6 or 6A UTP cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation
termination locations.
E. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of
available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair
equipment's efficient use of their full capacity.
F. Exposed Cable
1. All station cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever
possible.
2. Exposed station cable will only be run where indicated on the drawings and will only
be allowed when no other options exist. Owner must approve all exceptions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
G. Wireless Access Point Cable Requirements

a. Install one (1) Category 6A CMP cable from dedicated wireless patch panel(s)
in telecommunications room terminated with a modular plug on the WAP
location (wired to T568B).
b. All WAP locations and cables shall be accessible by use of a 6’ ladder.
H. Special Circuits
1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the cable termination plan for
special circuits (cables to wireless access point locations, IP security cameras,
emergency analog telephone lines (elevators, fire alarms, etc.), service provider
special circuits, security circuits, etc.).
a. WAP’s (wireless access point) and IP security cameras shall be terminated
with a 8P8C modular plug at the device end.
b. Location and termination field description
1) Room location
2) Rack-mount or wall mount
3) Termination field type
a) Specific patch panel ports versus a separate dedicated patch
panel
b) 110-type or M66 blocks
c. Unique identifiers
1) Segregation and position on equipment rack
2) Port color-coding
3) Unique labeling

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the finalized plan in writing to the Owner’s
representative for review and authorization to proceed.
I. All cabling placed above drop ceilings must be supported by cable tray, saddle bags or
conduit. The Contractor shall permanently affix cable supports to the building structure or
substrates and provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to
which attached and are suitably sized to sustain the weight of the cables to be supported.
Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Communication
cables shall be routed so as to provide a minimum of 18 inches spacing whenever
possible from light fixtures, sources of heat and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be
attached to ceiling grid wires. Multiple cables are to be dressed every 5 feet to 7 feet.
Maximum cable sag between cable hooks is 3”-6”. Plastic/nylon tie-wraps are not allowed
to permanently secure cables inside the Telecommunications Rooms.
J. In the Telecommunications Room (TR), cables shall be combed and dressed with Velcro
ties in a manner as to prevent twists, “braiding” and crossed cables in the cable bundle
from the telecommunication room entrance to the termination point at the rear of the patch
panel. Behind the patch panel, the cable bundle shall be attached to the rear cable
support bar, and shall drop out each cable in a neat, cascading manner to prevent
crossed and/or interwoven cables to each patch panel port termination point.
K. Identification - The Contractor shall:
1. Label cable terminations on designation strips.
2. Label all cable at each terminating point.
3. Label each port of the work area outlet.
4. Cable identification numbers shall not be duplicated.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Labeling convention to be coordinated with Owner.
6. Label data patch panels and voice blocks in the communications rooms to match
those on the corresponding voice and data outlets. The font shall be at least .125-
inch in height.
7. Where a wireless access point is installed above an acoustical ceiling, label the
ceiling grid frame below the access point, displaying the data port number and, if
applicable, the access point identification number. Coordinate with the Owner for all
access point identification information.
8. All labels shall correspond to as-built drawings and to final test reports.
9. Coordinate with Owner for specifications on labeling of all hardware, cabling, and
related equipment prior to any testing.
10. Label each distribution rack, block and other terminating equipment unit and field
within that unit within 4 inches from the block or patch panel termination. Keep
labels in a neat and orderly lineup.
11. Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting
hardware within connector fields, in wiring closets and equipment rooms. Where
similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data-processing
equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
12. Post the cable schedule in a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment
room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and
destinations.
13. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project in software and
format selected by Owner.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
L. Documentation:
1. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with
and approved by the Client so that data can be incorporated into existing databases.
2. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination,

type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers.
3. Complete cross connect documentation is required. It shall include detailed

documentation of each pair of all copper backbone cable and strand of fiber.
3.03 TESTS
A. Interim Inspection:
1. This inspection shall verify that the equipment provided adheres to the installation
requirements of this document. The interim inspection will be conducted by a
factory-certified representative and witnessed by a Client Representative. Each item
of installed equipment shall be checked to insure appropriate UL certification
markings. This inspection shall verify cabling terminations in telecommunications
rooms and at workstations adhere to color code for T568B, T568A pin assignments
and cabling connections are in compliance with ANSI/EIA/TIA standards. Visually
confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, faceplates, outlet/connectors and patch
cords.
2. Perform fiber optical field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory
reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests.
Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.
3. The Contractor shall notify the Client, in writing, of the estimated date the Contractor
expects to be ready for the interim inspection, at least 20 working days before the
requested inspection date.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. Results of the interim inspection shall be provided to the Client. If major or multiple
deficiencies are discovered, a second interim inspection may be required before
permitting the Contractor to continue with the system installation.
5. The Client shall determine if an additional inspection is required, or if the Contractor

will be allowed to proceed with the installation. In either case, re-inspection of the
deficiencies noted during the interim inspection(s), will be part of the proof of
performance test. The interim inspection shall not affect the Systems’ completion
date. The Contracting Officer shall ensure all test documents will become a part of
the Systems record documentation.
B. Pretesting:
1. Upon completing the installation of the System, the Contractor shall align and
balance the system. The Contractor shall pretest the entire system.
2. Pretesting Procedure:
a. During the system pretest, the Contractor shall verify (utilizing the approved
spectrum analyzer and test equipment) that the System is fully operational
and meets all the system performance requirements of this standard.
b. The Contractor shall pretest and verify that all System functions and
specification requirements are met and operational, no unwanted aural
effects, such as signal distortion, noise pulses, glitches, audio hum, poling
noise, etc. are present. The Contractor shall measure and record the aural
carrier levels of each system telephone and data channel, at each of the
following points in the system:
1) Local Telephone Company Interfaces or Inputs.
2) EPBX interfaces or inputs and outputs.
3) MDF interfaces or inputs and outputs.
4) EPBX output S/NR for each telephone and data channel.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5) Signal Level at each interface point to the distribution system, the last
outlet on each trunk line plus all outlets installed as part of this contract.
3. The Contractor shall provide four (4) copies of the recorded system pretest
measurements and the written certification that the System is ready for the formal
acceptance test shall be submitted to the Client.
C. Acceptance Test: After the System has been pretested and the Contractor has submitted
the pretest results and certification to the RE, then the Contractor shall schedule an
acceptance test date and give the Client 30 days written notice prior to the date the
acceptance test is expected to begin. The System shall be tested in the presence of a
Client Representative and an OEM certified representative. The System shall be tested
utilizing the approved test equipment to certify proof of performance and Life Safety
compliance. The test shall verify that the total System meets the requirements of this
specification. The notification of the acceptance test shall include the expected length (in
time) of the test.
D. Verification Tests:
1. Test the UTP STP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens,
intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors and
shield, if cable has an overall shield. Test the operation of shorting bars in
connection blocks. Test cables after termination and prior to cross-connection.
2. Multimode Fiber Optic Cable: Perform end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance

with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A using Method A, Optical
Power Meter and Light Source and/or Method B, OTDR. Perform verification
acceptance test.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Single mode Fiber Optic Cable: Perform end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance
with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-7 using Method A, Optical Power
Meter and Light Source and/or Method B, OTDR. Perform verification acceptance
test.
E. Performance Testing:
1. Perform Category 6 5 5e tests in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1 and

ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2. Test shall include the following: wire map, length, insertion
loss, return loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, propagation delay and
delay skew.
2. Fiber Optic Links: Perform end-to-end fiber optic cable link tests in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3.
F. Total System Acceptance Test: The Contractor shall perform verification tests for UTP,
STP, copper cabling system, and the multimode and single mode fiber optic cabling
system(s) after the complete telecommunication distribution system and workstation outlet
are installed.
1. Voice Testing: Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go
off-hook and receive dial tone from the LEC. If a test number is available, place and
receive a local, long distance, and FTS telephone call.
2. Data Testing: Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log
onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network is achieved.
3.04 ACCEPTANCE
A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and
approved, and the Owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
contract documents, the Owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the
system.
B. Contractor’s RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the
requirements specified herein.
C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing

which yields 100% PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full documentation as
described above. Tests with the “* PASS” (asterisk) will not be acceptable. These circuits
must be repaired to meet “PASS”.

SECTION 27 20 00
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 4

1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 4
1.02 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 4
1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 5
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 6
1.06 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................... 9
2.1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 CORE SWITCH ..........................................................................................................10
2.3 SERVER FARM SWITCH ...........................................................................................11
2.4 AGGREGATION/DISTRIBUTION SWITCH ................................................................12
2.5 ACCESS SWITCH ......................................................................................................13
2.6 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS....................................................................................15
2.7 ROUTER AND VOICE GATEWAY: .................................................................................17
2.8 IP TELEPHONY SYSTEMS: ..........................................................................................18
2.9 FIREWALL: ....................................................................................................................18
2.10 SERVERS (19” RACK-MOUNTED): ..............................................................................19
2.11 SAN STORAGE: ...........................................................................................................20
2.12 SAN SWITCH:...............................................................................................................20
PART 3 -EXECUTION ..............................................................................................................21
3.01 EXAMINATION........................................................................................................21
3.02 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................21

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.03 LOCATIONS ...........................................................................................................21

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS........................................................21
3.05 ACCEPTANCE TESTING .......................................................................................22
3.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION ...............................................................23

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the data communications network infrastructure including electronics
and software needed to support Local Area Networks and network management.
B. Each meeting room shall have minimum: projector system, 60” TV screen, conference
call system, printer, etc…
C. Each workstation shall have minimum: telephone unit, personal computer, etc…
D. Each control room shall have a video wall system video wall system installed along the wall
facing the workstations according to architecture drawings.
E. Products Installed Under this Section: Only new equipment and material, produced by
manufacturers that are recognized nationally by the telecommunications industry and
approved by Underwriters Laboratory shall be used as specified in this Section or on the
Drawings.
1. All mounting hardware
2. All mounting brackets
3. All power cords
F. Related Sections
1. Section 27 13 00: Communications Backbone Cabling
2. Section 27 15 00: Communications Horizontal Cabling.
3. Section 27 30 00: Voice Communications
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

B. ANSI – American National Standards Institute
C. NEC – National Electric Code
D. RSEF – Relevant State Electrical and Fire Codes

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

F. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
G. ANSI/EIA/TIA -568A-1995 Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard
H. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 568-B-2-1 Transmission Performance Category 6 Cabling Specifications for
4-Pair 100 Ohm
I. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 569A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
J. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
K. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
L. ANSI/EIA/TIA – 598 Color Coding of Optical Fiber Cables
M. EIA/TIATSB – 67 Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded
Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems
N. BICSI – Building Industry Consulting Service International publications:
1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
2. LAN and Internetworking Design Manual
3. Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual
4. Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual
5. Manufacturer’s recommendations and installation guidelines
O. All cabling shall comply with all appropriate requirements of NEC Articles 770 and 800.
P. All publications referred to in this document shall be the latest publicized edition.
Q. All British standards equivalent to the above standards shall be used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Product Data
1. Provide a list of complete current part numbers and confirm with Client during submittal
phase.
2. If additional equipment is required to meet performance specifications of the system
the contractor shall provide the equipment with Client written approval prior to
installation.
B. Qualification Statements
1. The Installing Contractor shall provide proof of certification to the Client. The installing
contractor must be certified with the manufacturer for at least twelve (12) months prior
to the bid.
2. Contractor shall assign competent person as project manager who has demonstrated
the ability to supervise a project of similar size and scope. Submit a resume of the
proposed Project Manager for the Client’s review and acceptance. The Project
Manager must attend meetings as required.
3. Contractor shall provide documentation to the Client to demonstrate that it has been in
the telecommunications contracting business for a minimum of five (5) years under the
same name.
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced on the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for the proper performance of the work of this Section.
A. Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's unopened containers fully

identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Store materials in unopened containers. Store off ground and under cover, protected from
damage.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. LAN electronics and associated software shall be warranted for three (3) years with full
service materials and labor. Contractor shall be available 24-hour/7-day-per-week for on-
site service to correct defects in installation, workmanship, product failure, or material
without charge for labor, materials or parts.
B. All major component failures must be replaced within a four-hour period. A major
component shall be considered any hub or switch component that affects fifty or more user
devices.
C. The contractor must provide a four-hour response time to problem calls during the Prime
Period of Maintenance (PPM). For problems reported outside of PPM, response time can
occur no later than the beginning of PPM for the next day. Response time is defined as on-
site presence of authorized maintenance personnel equipped with appropriate spare parts
and diagnostic tools.
G. Once work has begun on repair of a critical problem, a technician shall remain on-site until
the problem has been repaired. The contractor shall be allowed to change technicians at
shift changes, however, the first technician shall not leave the site until the second has
arrived and has been briefed on the problem.
H. The contractor shall provide the Client with the manufacturer support center to assist the
Client personnel in the installation, tuning, maintenance and updating of the systems
hardware and software.
I. Any additional equipment and software purchased from the contractor by the Client shall be
priced at no more than three (3) percent above the actual price paid by the Contractor.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Contractor shall provide the Client with actual invoices from manufacturer or distributor to
substantiate price paid for the equipment and software.
J. During the warranty period, the contractor shall maintain an inventory of critical spare parts
that shall be available locally, in a location approved by the Client, so as to ensure the
repair response times required in this section.
K. If parts are required to fix a critical problem that is not available locally, they shall be
shipped by the fastest possible means at no cost to the Client.
L. During the warranty period, the contractor shall keep on-site detailed maintenance and
repair records of all calls made to the facility.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUMMARY
A. The LAN includes the following types of devices:
1. Core Switches: To switch traffic at the core level using 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Technology
2. Server Farm Switches: To connect servers to the network using 10/100/1000 Mbps
Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet to the Core layer switches.
3. Aggregation/Distribution Switches: To aggregate and route traffic using Gigabit
Ethernet to the Access layer switches and 10 Gigabit Ethernet to the Core layer
switches.
4. Access (Edge) Switches: To connect devices and equipment to the network using
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet over copper and Fiber to the Distribution Layer
switches or Core layer switches
5. Network Management: To administer and manage the entire building network
B. The LAN shall utilize the building Information and Communications Technology (ICT)
Infrastructure to provide connectivity and communication between various LAN devices and
equipment.
C. LAN traffic shall be logically separated into Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and
prioritized depending on traffic type and criticality.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.2 CORE SWITCH
A. A Core switch shall be a chassis-style multi-layer switch. The Core switch shall support 10
Gigabit Ethernet standards.
A. Core switch shall meet the following performance requirements at a minimum:
1. Basic Requirements:
2. Core switch shall provide multi-function network modules and a common bus or
back plane
3. Core switch shall provide multiple power supplies (international 220VAC) to be
connected to at least two different power distribution units (PDU)
4. Core switch shall provide adequate ventilation to operate in 15 to 45 degrees C dry
bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing
5. Core switch shall provide all required supervisory functions, including software, to
manage internetworking operations in a master / hot standby mode
6. Core switch shall include switch fabric supporting up to 720 GBPS bandwidth
including all required Internetworking Operating System
7. Core switch shall have 1000 Base-X gigabit ports to connect access switch.
8. Core switch shall have 10 gigabit ports to connect server farm and distribution
switches.
9. Core switch shall support modules that have 40 gigabit ports for future network
requirements.
10. Packet processing performance of Switch fabric or supervisor modules shall be 720
MBPS for IPv4.
11. Core switch shall have distributed packet routing feature. In this way any supervisor
module failure shall not have any effect to network performance, core switch shall
continue packet routing process over redundant supervisor without any interruption.
12. Conforms to 19-inch rack mounting requirements
13. Management
14. Core switch shall have In Service Software (ISSU) and Non Stop Forwarding (NSF)
features.
15. Core switch shall support dynamic routing protocols such as RIPv2, OSPF, IS-IS.
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
16. Core switch shall support Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) or similar
Layer 3 network redundancy protocols.
17. Switch fabric, supervisor, power supply, fan and network modules shall have hot-
swap feature.
18. Core switch shall support SNMP v1, v2 and v3.
19. Core switch shall support SSHv2.
20. Core switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network traffic
analysis.
21. Security
22. Core switch shall have hardware based access control list support.
23. Core shall have features to prevent network infrastructure against to DOS and man-
in- the-middle attacks.
24. Core switch shall support IEEE 802.1x user authentication feature.
25. Core switch shall support DHCP Snooping feature.
2.3 SERVER FARM SWITCH
A. Server farm switch shall be standalone architecture.
B. Server farm switch shall meet the following performance requirements at a minimum:
2. Server farm switch shall provide redundant power supplies (international 220VAC)
to be connected to at least two different power distribution units (PDU)
3. Server farm switch shall provide adequate ventilation to operate in 15 to 45
degrees C dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing
4. Server farm switch shall have minimum 17 MB buffer capacity to prevent data
packet loss.
5. Server farm switch shall have 10 gigabit ports for connecting to core switches.
6. Server farm switch shall have 10/100/1000 MBPS ports to connect application and
data servers and service controllers.
7. Server farm switch support minimum 32000 MAC addresses.
8. Server farm switch shall support spanning tree protocols for Layer2 network
redundancy following;
9. IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree
10. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
11. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree

12. Conforms to 19-inch rack mounting requirements.
13. Server farm switch shall have jumbo frame support. The length of jumbo frames
shall be minimum 9000 bytes.
14. Management
15. Server farm switch shall support dynamic routing protocols such as RIPv2, OSPF.
16. Server farm switch shall store minimum 12000 routing information on switch’s
routing table.
17. Server farm switch shall support SNMP v1, v2 and v3.
18. Server farm switch shall support SSHv2.
19. Server farm switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network
traffic analysis.
20. Server farm switch shall have operation system upgrade feature with Trivial File
Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
21. Server farm switch have local and remote port mirroring features for real time
network traffic analysis.
22. Security
23. Server farm switch shall have BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) Guard feature.
24. Server farm switch shall have Spanning Tree Root Guard feature.
25. Server farm switch have feature that creating MAC address based user list on each
network port.
26. Server farm switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network
traffic analysis.
27. Server farm switch shall have access control feature for switch management with
telnet or SSH over RADIUS server.
2.4 AGGREGATION/DISTRIBUTION SWITCH
A. Distribution switch shall be standalone architecture.
B. Distribution switch shall meet the following performance requirements at a minimum:
2. Distribution switch shall provide redundant power supplies (international 220VAC)
to be connected to at least two different power distribution units (PDU)
3. Distribution switch shall provide adequate ventilation to operate in 15 to 45 degrees
C dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing
4. Distribution switch shall have 10 gigabit ports for connecting to core switches.
5. Distribution switch shall have 1000 Base-X gigabit ports to connect access
switches.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Distribution switch support minimum 12000 MAC addresses.

7. Distribution switch shall support spanning tree protocols for Layer2 network
12. Distribution switch shall support IEEE 802.1Q VLAN trunking protocol.
13. Distribution switch shall support minimum active 1000 VLANs
14. Distribution switch shall have IGMP v1, v2, v3 and IGMP Snooping v1, v2, v3
features for multicasting switching.
15. Management
16. Distribution switch shall support dynamic routing protocols such as RIPv2, OSPF.
17. Distribution switch shall store minimum 10000 routing information on switch’s
routing table.
18. Distribution switch shall support SNMP v1, v2 and v3.
19. Distribution switch shall support SSHv2.
20. Distribution switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network
traffic analysis.
21. Distribution switch shall have operation system upgrade feature with Trivial File
Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
22. Distribution switch have local and remote port mirroring features for real time
network traffic analysis.
23. Security
24. Distribution switch shall have BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) Guard feature.
25. Distribution switch shall have broadcast, multicast and unicast storm protection
features.
26. Distribution switch have feature that creating MAC address based user list on each
network port.
27. Distribution switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network
traffic analysis.
28. Distribution switch shall have access control feature for switch management with
telnet or SSH over RADIUS server.
2.5 ACCESS SWITCH
A. Access switch shall be standalone architecture.
B. Access switch shall meet the following performance requirements at a minimum:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Access switch shall provide adequate ventilation to operate in 15 to 45 degrees C
dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing
3. Access switch shall have 10/100/1000 gigabit ports to connect devices and
equipment.
4. Access switch shall have 1000 Base-X gigabit ports for connecting to core
switches and distribution switches.
5. Access switch support minimum 8000 MAC addresses.
6. Access switch shall support spanning tree protocols for Layer2 network
11. Access switch shall support IEEE 802.1Q VLAN trunking protocol.
12. Access switch shall support minimum active 250 VLANs
13. Access switch shall have IGMP snooping v1, v2, v3 features for multicasting
switching.
14. Access switch 10/100/1000 MBPS ports shall have 802.3af feature to support
power over Ethernet wireless, voice, video and data applications.
15. Management
16. Access switch shall support dynamic routing protocols such as RIPv2, OSPF.
17. Access switch shall store minimum 10000 routing information on switch’s routing
table.
18. Access switch shall support SNMP v1, v2 and v3.
19. Access switch shall support SSHv2.
20. Access switch shall have NETFLOW protocol support for detailed network traffic
analysis.
21. Access switch shall have operation system upgrade feature with Trivial File
Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
22. Access switch have local and remote port mirroring features for real time network
traffic analysis.
23. Security
24. Access switch shall have BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) Guard feature.
25. Access switch shall have broadcast, multicast and unicast storm protection
features.
26. Access switch shall have IEEE 802.1x user authentication feature and support
features following;
27. 802.1x VLAN assignment

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
28. 802.1x Port Security

29. 802.1x Guest VLAN
30. v802.1x Web authorization
31. Access switch shall have IP Source Guard Feature against to IP Spoofing attacks.
32. Access switch shall have Dynamic ARP Inspection feature.
33. Access switch have feature that creating MAC address based user list on each
network port.
34. Access switch shall have access control feature for switch management with telnet
or SSH over RADIUS server.
2.6 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS
A. RF Management:
1. RF management shall be set to restrict performance-impacting operations such as
channel changes when voice over IP traffic is present.
B. User Bandwidth Control:
1. The bandwidth contract shall be implemented to ensure that one single user cannot
monopolize bandwidth and can limit users to a maximum amount of bandwidth.
Bandwidth contracts can be specified by user role for simple administration, and can
be applied per-user (one user cannot exceed 2Mbps, for example) or per-group (all
guest users together cannot exceed 2Mbps.)
C. Privacy Protection:
1. AP’s shall contain no configuration, passwords, encryption keys, or security
information. The AP shall have no exposed serial port, no recoverable passwords, no
vendor-installed certificates, and no way for an intruder to tap into the wired side of the
AP to eavesdrop on wireless communication.
2. AP’s shall be FIPS-140 Level 2 compliant.
D. Simplified Management:
1. The system shall be manageable through a single interface and a single web-based
URL. Each of these devices shall have a software image, configuration file, and run-
time statistics, as well as different configuration and operation commands.
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. The system shall not require a separate management appliance or software package
for basic functionality such as RF visualization, location tracking, or multi-controller
management.
E. Security:
1. All security functionality shall be centralized and housed in the mobility controller
(including encryption) and not the AP, guaranteeing that AP does not have to be
replaced as security standards evolve to protect the investment, and ensure the
continuous security of the network.
F. Application Bandwidth Control:
1. The system shall support a stateful protocol inspection for voice protocols with
automatic mapping to bandwidth control and quality of service schemes. These
schemes shall limit the maximum bandwidth and/or guarantee a minimum bandwidth,
latency, and jitter for an application. This way, a mixed-use wireless network can
support both voice and data with both getting sufficient resources.
G. User/device Controls:
1. The system shall support the ability to restrict the types of protocols on a wireless LAN,
as well as to restrict the types of resources a wireless device can access (for example,
the system permits administrators to block or restrict client-to-client communication,
dramatically reducing malicious attacks, viruses, and worms).
2. The system shall possess the ability to allow modification of network access
permissions at any time during the life of a session, based on both internal controls and
integration with external systems through SNMP, syslog, XML, and RADIUS.
H. Secure Guest Access:
1. The system shall differentiate between internal users and guest users through
integrated authentication, encryption, and authorization. All three functions shall be

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
managed by the mobility controller. The external firewall, knowing users only through
IP addresses, will pass the traffic into the network.
2. The system shall not be vulnerable to such an attack, making it safe to deploy internal
and guest users on the same infrastructure.
I. Integrated Intrusion Protection:
1. The system shall support a wireless intrusion detection system that is integrated with
the wireless infrastructure. By placing these two functions in the same device, the
system becomes a protection system rather than simply a detection system.
2. The system shall detect then lock out rogue APs, ad-hoc networks, bridges, DoS
attacks, man in the middle attacks, impersonation attacks, and many others.
J. Users shall be capable of using wired access, wireless access, remote access, or a
combination of these accessed.
K. Extended policy criteria shall be capable make access control decisions based on
parameters, such as identity, physical location, time of day, authentication method, device
type, device integrity state, protocol, and application. Put in more general terms, a per-
packet access control decision can be made based on:
1. Who the user is
2. How the user is accessing the network
3. Where the user is
4. When the access is made
5. What resource the user is trying to access
L. Provide the required number of Access Point antenna devices needed to provide 100%
coverage to all areas of the Building and provide an additional 25% spare amount of APs.
M. Provide a minimum of -50 dBm RSSI
2.7 ROUTER AND VOICE GATEWAY:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Modular Services Performance Engine (SPE) 250 or even higher

B. 4 integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports with 2 SFP ports
C. 4 service module slots
D. 3 Enhanced High-Speed WAN Interface card slots
E. 3 onboard digital signal processor (DSP) slots
F. Dual integrated power supplies
G. Fully integrated power distribution to modules supporting 802.3af Power over Ethernet
(PoE)
H. Embedded hardware-accelerated VPN encryption for secure connectivity
I. Identity management using authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) and public
key infrastructure.
J. High-Density packet voice DSP module, optimized for voice and video support
K. Standards certified Voice XML browser services
L. Conforms to 19-inch rack mounting requirements.
2.8 IP TELEPHONY SYSTEMS:
A. Support of on-premise and hosted and third-party hosted call control platform
B. Power over Ethernet class 1
C. Integrated IEEE switches
D. Full wideband capability throughout the handset (headset & speaker) for clear audio
E. Conferencing, messaging & directory keys and a two way navigation.
2.9 FIREWALL:
A. Size: 2-19”rack-unit (RU)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Supports up to 16-node clustering for 640 Gbps of throughput

C. Supports 8 SFP/SFP+ Ports
D. Provides 2-port 10/100/1000 Integrated network management ports
E. Supports up to
• 40 Gbps maximum firewall throughput
• 350,000 connections per second
• 10 million concurrent connections
• 250 security contexts
• 1,024 VLANs
2.10 SERVERS (19” RACK-MOUNTED):
A. Two Processors: Intel® Xeon® Processor (8core)

B. Supports SATA,SAS and SSD Drives, Hot-plug hard drives.
C. Supports multiple RAID configurations (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 10) with an
onboard RAID Controller
D. 4 x Embedded Gigabit Ethernet NIC with failover and load balancing or equivalent.
E. 2 x Power Supply 110/220 volts
F. Applicable to:
• Back up server
• Clustered Integrated Security database server
• Clustered BMS servers
• Clustered Access control servers
• CCTV servers

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.11 SAN STORAGE:
A. Storage system with at least 20TB RAW capacity upgradable to 2PB Raw capacity.
Offered Array should be scalable to at-least minimum of 1000 Drives.
B. Storage system should have redundant hot-swappable controllers, cooling fans, power
supplies and optics.
C. Support hardware based RAID 0, 0+1, 1, 5 and 6 levels
D. Conforms to 19-inch rack mounting requirements.
2.12 SAN SWITCH:
A. Delivers up to 24 ports of 8 Gbit/sec performance in optimized 1U form factor

B. Supports ISL Trunking: Frame-based trunking with up to eight 8 Gbit/sec ports per ISL
trunk with optional license; up to 64 Gbit/sec per ISL trunk
C. Aggregate Bandwidth:192 Gbit/sec: 24 ports × 8 Gbit/sec (data rate)
D. Maximum fabric latency: 700 ns with no contention, cut-through routing at 8 Gbit/sec
E. Management access : 0/100 Ethernet (RJ-45), in-band over Fibre Channel; serial port
(RJ-45);

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Property damage caused by the contractor during the installation and testing process shall
be replaced at no cost to the Client.
B. The contractor will be responsible for all mounting kits and brackets for the LAN electronics
and Wireless equipment.
C. The contractor will be responsible for providing and patching ALL fiber and copper data
cables into LAN electronics and Wireless equipment per the specifications.
3.03 LOCATIONS
A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those
trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of agencies having jurisdiction, and the
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall provide a full suite of installation services and a turnkey solution.
Specifically, this includes:
1. The contractor shall submit a short written report on a weekly basis to the Client
Project Team. This report should contain the following information:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Summary of work completed for the week concluded.

b. Summary of work anticipated for the following week.
c. Any action items requested of the Client personnel.
d. Any deviations from the implementation schedule.
2. Turnkey installation is defined as having all networking components including cabling,
LAN electronics and LAN servers working as individual components as well as a
homogenous system.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All LAN electronics specified in this document must meet manufacturer’s standard tests.
Testing must include the ability to successfully “ping” from one device to another and to and
from PC end stations and servers. PC’s must be able to connect to their appropriate
servers.
B. Device configurations must be reviewed and approved by the Client before deployment in
production environment to allow for changes and acceptance.
C. Predictive surveys are not acceptable. Physical surveys are required.

D. The contractor shall prepare detailed coverage heat maps, after the installation of the
WAP’s, using AirMagnet Wi-Fi Pro, AirMagnet Survey Pro or equal approved by the Client.
Predictive site surveys are not acceptable such as utilizing Cisco LMS software. Provide
current certifications for the site surveyor for AirMagnet or Client approved equal. Provide a
copy of the physical survey to Client Technology Representative prior to installation of
Wireless Access Points (“WAP”). Heat maps shall identify:
1. Access point quantity
2. Access point locations (room & building)
3. Access point protocol 802.11 a/b/g/n
4. Access point channel and signal strength

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Common access point configuration

6. Seamless subnet roaming
7. Non 802.11 interference in 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands
8. Special antenna
9. Physical end environmental requirements for access point placement
10. Upgrades to existing access points (including hardware and/or software)
3.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Prepare and submit copies of configurations, as-builts and logical network diagrams
updated to reflect the new work completed (i.e. site plans, cable, pathways, MDF/IDF
cabinet elevations, equipment configuration spreadsheets, etc.).
B. These documents must be delivered to the Client upon completion of work and before Final
Inspection.
End of Section

SECTION 27 30 00
VOICE COMMUNICATIONS
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 DESCRIPTION: ........................................................................................................... 3
1.2 REFERENCES: ........................................................................................................... 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS: ............................................................................................................. 4
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ............................................................................................. 4
1.5 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE: .................................................... 4
1.6 WARRANTY: ............................................................................................................... 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................... 6
2.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................................... 6
2.2 SYSTEM SIZING ........................................................................................................16
2.3 SYSTEM FEATURES .................................................................................................17
2.4 ATTENDANT (OPERATOR) POSITIONS: ..................................................................19
2.5 TELEPHONE TERMINALS (HANDSETS) ..................................................................21
2.6 POWER SUPPLY .......................................................................................................24
2.7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION: .....................................................................................25
2.8 VOICE MESSAGING ..................................................................................................34
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................37
3.1 INSTALLATION: .........................................................................................................37
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY: ..............................................................................................37
3.3 TESTING: ...................................................................................................................37

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work shall consist of furnishing and installation of IP based telephone system as
specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
NFPA 78 Lightning Protection Code
B. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturer Association
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
C. EIA - Electric Industries Association
RS-453 Dimensional, Mechanical and Electrical Characteristics Deferring Phone Plugs

and Jacks
RS-464 Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for Voiceband

Applications
D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Measuring Transmission Performance of Telephone Sets
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
All Relevant Standards
F. CCITT - International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data on telephone systems and

components.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of telephone systems and accessories including,
but not necessarily limited to, service-entrance penetrations, mounting panels, apparatus,
racks, terminals, and switching equipment.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for telephone systems, including rack and
terminal connections. Also show wiring connections to electrical power feeders.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture telephone systems

and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialist subcontractor with at least 5 years of successful

installation experience with projects utilizing telephone systems and equipment similar to
that required for this project. Subcontractor shall be subject to approval of Engineer.
C. Materials and installation shall comply with the specified Codes and Standards.
D. Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.
1.5 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver telephone equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or

wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. Store telephone equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a well-
ventilated space protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme
temperatures.
C. Handle telephone equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and
scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Submit manufacturers’ written warranty for period of 2 year from substantial completion for
the repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. The architecture is unification of the voice and data communication infrastructures, to build-
up a communication platform that is standards based, interconnecting the different
elements of a distributed system. Elements such as: Control, Media Gateways with or
without intelligence, IP phones, IP application phones, and servers; that work collectively as
a single system over the same common transport infrastructure.
The communication platform required should provide the links necessary to integrate
multimedia and business applications via open standard interfaces that deal with the
most recent IP and Web technology standards. The telecommunications system must
be composed of two distinct parts: the software that controls the communications and
the hardware components supporting the communications interfaces.
B. Hardware: The system should offer great flexibility and support versatile configurations and
types of “Media Gateways”. The same hardware components should permit multiple
architectural configurations:
1. PBX type centralized architecture of mixed architecture centralized / distributed on

network: or on network packet:
2. Switched Circuit network

a. Copper cable
b. Single mode or multi-mode fiber optic cable
3. Packet network
a. LAN / WAN IP network

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
In a distributed IP architecture, "Media-Gateways" must be configured with adequate

resources (i.e. VoIP Codecs) to support the expected traffic coming from the configured
non-IP end points in the system, including those for:
1. Digital stations
2. Analog stations
3. Wireless services: Radio base station for DECT type (if required)
4. Analog public network (PSTN) trunking
5. ISDN type and T2/T0 public network trunking (as required)
6. PBX-PBX automatic digital and/or analogue tie lines (as required)
7. Leased lines: complete or fractional T2 ISDN
To facilitate the integration of the systems in a structured plan, "Media-Gateways" can be

packed as standard 19-inch stackable cabinets, and standard RJ45-type connections in
order to allow consolidation of the voice and data elements via a unified wiring plan.
The CPUs shall either based on standard 19” industrial grade Servers or the standard
Cards in Media Gateways. Both architectures shall support IP or TDM or mixed IP + TDM
implementations. Redundancy (one duty and one standby) of servers and control
architecture shall be provided to ensure uninterruptible service. It is essential that total
system support Carrier Class (99.99%) reliability is available.
C. Software: The proposed system shall be based on an “open” software architecture and
standardized encouraging the functional integration thus with the systems of information.
Software control of the real-time communications shall be based on the LINUX operating
system. This communications management software or "soft-switch" should follow the
standard "Appliance/server" platform,

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Redundancy of Sensitive Elements: It is required that in addition to the information storage

devices (hard disk), that the real-time switching software shall also be duplicated
(redundant). The architecture based on soft-switches should permit the geographical
relocation of the communication servers through a standard IP network. The interface cards
should generate their own feeds from a common source, and the analog and digital user
should be individually equipped with the supplemental devices necessary for proper DTMF
operation, three-party conference circuits, etc
The system shall offer maximum availability, with the switchover of a CPU or soft-switch to
the other in case of a problem should conform with the model used in computer systems:
the complete "mirroring" of the information such as fixed or variable data.
In addition to the configuration data and the dynamic data, (call status, call detail records,
traffic collection, etc.) the complete set of programs and software modules must be
duplicated in real time. In case of problems in the main system (hardware or software), the
standby system (emergency mirror) must take over the control of communications
instantaneously:
1. Within the same system, the switchover must be transparent to the users
2. The switchover must not initiate reloading of the system
3. At least internal and PSTN calls should not be cut
4. External calls on hold will be redistributed to the operators
The system will also be equipped with a device permitting the automatic backup
(programmable) of the data and the programs necessary to be in good working order in a
third system and which will be stored automatically in the Buyer organization's computer
back-up system.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Security: Dedicated technical areas are locked, controlling access to the system and to the
cabling system cabinets. The system must offer standard protection for password control
features as well as system access by password / shadow password file / aging passwords.
In addition to this basic rule, the system must incorporate these other security aspects.
1. Controlled access to management platform: One of the most important security

considerations is protecting access to system management. The system must control
the identity of the management terminals and the user accessing that terminal. During
a connection, (local or remote) the system must check the consistency between the
management platform name, management platform password, and user name before
authorizing the connection.
2. Secure remote access via a public switch exchange: The system must offer several
secure management and maintenance access through the public switch exchange.
The remote access proposed, either via PSTN or ISDN, must provide a high security
level for remote management/maintenance terminals at a predetermined location, as
well as the normal user name and password control.
3. Remote access through Internet or Intranet: A firewall is the only mechanism that can
adequately protect the computing and communication resources via Internet or Intranet
access. But to protect and control remote access through IP networks, the proposed
system must support a filtering engine to control IP devices and services that have
access to the system; a light and cost effective embedded protection mechanisms such
as a trusted host and TCP wrapper.
F. IP Communications
1. IP station support: The system must manage, control and support a range of IP
telephone stations for both voice and telephony applications as well as IP application
stations for voice, telephony, and Web services support. IP telephone and IP

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
application telephone stations will be referred herein as “IP stations,” and when
necessary, the type of IP station will be clearly stated.
2. Quality of Service: The proposed system supports native IP communications in direct

or "peer-to-peer" with only the telephone signaling transiting back toward the
controlling communications server. The speech will be switched over the IP network
and exchanged directly from client to client. The voice and signaling frames should be
marked [tagged] in order to be recognized and should be classified by the network. The
standards of marking supported will be:
a. Level 2: IEEE 802.1p /Q
b. Level 3: TOS / DiffServ
In the case of a PC connected to an IP station, (IP telephone or IP application

telephone), the frames transmitted by the PC, tagged or untagged, must be treated by
the IP station in a transparent manner.
3. Client DHCP: The client IP Media Gateway (the IP stations) will support either a static
IP address or a dynamic address (manageable from the terminal) by the Client’s
compatible DHCP within their server.
4. Automatic VLAN Assignment: Although voice and data traffic flow over different
VLANs, they will be managed simultaneously because of their distribution over one
network. When a user station is moved, it’s possible to perform the IP activation for a
VLAN voice connection that is different from the one initially programmed in the
terminal. In this case, the telecommunications system should have the capability to
support a procedure, based on standard mechanisms, to assign the corresponding
VLAN number to the IP station clients during IP station initialization.
5. IP Communication Zones: An IP communication zone (IP domain) is defined by IP

stations and / or media gateways within a geographical area. Because bandwidth is

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
shared by the data and voice communications, it’s necessary to limit the bandwidth
assigned. The goal is to take into account the underlying IP infrastructure to avoid
congestion in the WAN links and maintain good quality voice communications.
The system must be able to control and limit the number of simultaneous
communications between the different communication zones. In addition, the
compression algorithms used for the communications inside the same IP
communication zone and between different IP communication zones can be different
and must be activated on a call-by-call basis. For example, inside the same IP
communication zone (same LAN), communications will not be compressed but
digitized in G.711 in order to have toll quality voice; whereas inter-zone
communications will use the compression algorithm defined by the administrator:
G723.1 or G.729A.
6. System Availability: In the distributed IP architecture with a soft switch controlling the IP
stations and the media gateways, their operation must be maintained by an emergency
arrangement. In case the IP network goes down, the link with the soft switch must
recover automatically via the analog public network or ISDN. In this case, the media
gateway will behave like an autonomous PBX, and if some IP stations are located on
the same site as the media gateway, they will also recover their signaling to the
communication server through the MG.
7. H323 Compatibility: The proposed telecommunications system must support H.323

technology and should permit the following functions:
• Management of communications between H.323 terminals
• Interoperability between the H.323 terminal and the traditional telephony
devices (digital stations, IP, analog, private or public lines)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Gatekeeper Server: The proposed system should integrate an H.323 gatekeeper

server that offers the following services:
• Automatic registration of the H.323 terminal and assignment of a call number by
the RAS protocol (registration admission status)
• Resolution of the address, the terminal H.323 can be identified by its call
number or by its IP address that can be assigned dynamically by a DHCP
server
• Establishment of communications in direct mode
If it is necessary to communicate with another external gatekeeper (Internet,

LEC/CLEC/IXC, corporate, etc.), the system should be capable of registering itself with
these entities.
H.323 Gateway: The proposed system should include a gateway that allows the
Buyer’s H.323 devices to interoperate with the traditional telephony devices (digital
stations, IP, analog, private or public lines) and the SIP terminal. The main H.323
gateway features required are:
• Support of the H.225 and H.245 protocols
• "Fast-connect" setting
• H.245 tunneling
• Registration, admission, status (RAS)
• Direct mode and routing mode
• Connection to an external gatekeeper
• H.323 attachment D for T38 fax
• Direct RTP
8. SIP compatibility: The proposed system should permit the integration of SIP terminals
with other terminals and private or public external lines used by the company. The SIP

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
software should conform to the normalized architecture and be integrated in real-time

communications management to benefit from the duplicated services. The SIP
modules are:
• SIP Proxy
• SIP Registrar
• SIP Gateway
The SIP terminal will use either UDP or TCP to communicate. The supported
standards must conform to the following RFC:
• RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
• RFC 3262 Reliability of Provisional Responses
• RFC 3264 An Offer/Answer Model with the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
• RFC 3265 SIP – Specific Event Notification
As well as the RFC in development (draft)
9. SIP terminal support: The proposed system should allow the SIP terminal to register
itself on the system via the SIP proxy module AND to see itself. It’s also assigned a
directory number in the communication server so that traditional telephone services are
also available. The following services are required to be available to the SIP terminal:
• Caller name and number of the caller or the requestor (on the terminal screen)
• Hold
• Retrieve from hold
• Transfer
• Unconditional forwarding
• Conditional forwarding on busy or no-answer
• Three-party conference
• Do not disturb

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• DTMF signaling (in band or out-of-band, the RFC 2833 protocol)

• Message waiting indication for the voice messaging system
• Classes of service for external calling
• Call records for external calls
10. Authentication: An HTTP Digest (MD5) authentication procedure must be defined

between the terminal and the SIP proxy of the Buyer organization, or any other SIP
point, or external proxy SIP, at the time the call or message is initiated or in operation.
11. External SIP communications: The SIP terminals in the organization, as well as the
traditional stations should be able to communicate with facilities behind a SIP
connection or external SIP proxy (service provider class or enterprise). All SIP calls
must pass through the system SIP proxy, which controls the maximum number of calls.
It must also be possible to arrange interception and prohibition of calls from unknown
SIP terminals to all Client stations.
G. XML/VxML Compatibility: The proposed telecommunication system should allow the use of
high level XML APIs based on Web technology standards (XML/SOAP/ VxML) to ease
creation of telephony and call control features for integrating telephony services into web
applications. The solution must be able to handle a high capacity of clients using XML
services. The access to the XML telephony application must be protected by user login
name and password. The following XML telephony features are required to be available to
users equipped with one of the following phone types: analog, digital, wireless
(DECT/PWT), and IP telephone stations.
Login / logout
Password
Telephony services

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Multi-line
• Make call
• Take call
• Clear call
• Transfer
• Conference call
• MF sending
• Call progress information
• Forwarding
• Immediate
• No answer
• Busy
• Busy or no answer
The IP application station that accesses system telephony services and web services from
corporate or external Web application servers must also be XML compatible.
H. Connectivity interfaces: The telecommunication system will support the following

connectivity:
Public Switched Telephone Networks (PSTN):

• Analogue Trunks (Ground start, Loop start, etc.) with polarity reversal /
Metering Pulses
• Analogue Trunks with Caller ID
• Analogue DID code R2
• Digital DID code R2
• ISDN Basic rate access
• ISDN Primary rate access T2

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Frame relay interface

• Ethernet TCP-IP interface
Pubic Packet Networks

• X24/V11 or V36 Frame relay
• Ethernet 10 BT
WAN Voice
• Analogue Tie lines, 2,4,6 wires, E&M, 50HZ, L1, DC5A protocols
• Digital Tie lines, E&M, 50HZ, L1, DC5A protocols
• ISDN Basic rate access, private network protocol, QSIG
• ISDN Primary rate access, private network, DPNSS protocols
• ISDN Fractional primary rate access, private network, QSIG, DPNSS protocols
WAN Data
• ATM, 2 MBPS/VTOA, private network protocol
• X24/V11 or V36 Frame relay, Private network, QSIG protocols
• Ethernet TCP-IP, Private network protocol
Terminal connectivity
• Analogue interface for analogue stations and fax machines
• Digital interface, for proprietary stations
• ISDN 2B + D, interface bus for S0 stations
• IP telephone stations
• IP application stations
• H.323 terminals
• SIP terminals
2.2 SYSTEM SIZING

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. The system shall capable to support all stations shown on drawings with 25% spare
capacity for future growth. The system shall be expandable for adding new stations in
future.
2.3 SYSTEM FEATURES
A. Unified Communications: The system will offer a complete suite of telecommunications

applications that enable users to control and manage their calls, voice messages, email,
fax, directories, and collaboration tools. Unified access to these applications will be possible
via an HTML interface, or through the use of a telephone terminal.
B. The system shall include the following features:
1. Last number redialing
2. Company directory
3. Music on hold
4. Hands free telephone sets
5. Paging interface
6. Manual Message waiting
7. Display the dialing number and intercom calling station number for some sets
8. Ring again
9. Follow me
10. Facilities of tie lines with other PABX
11. Facility of using extension lines as data lines for computer
12. Classification of extensions

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
13. Extension to operator calls
14. Outgoing calls
15. Booking outgoing calls
16. Operator to extension calls
17. Inquiry calls
18. Transfer calls
19. Conference calls up to 8 parties per call
20. Priority
21. Common night service
22. Universal night service
23. Individual night service
24. Direct in lines
25. Automatic call back
26. Individual call diversion
27. Individual call diversion when no answer
28. Flexible numbering
29. Line lockout
30. Choice of individual trunk line
31. Group hunting
32. Control of long-distance dialing

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
33. Direct speech connection
34. Call pick up
35. Grouping of trunk lines
36. Call waiting indication to extension
37. Common abbreviated dialing
38. Hot line
39. Trunk to trunk transfer
40. Calling names numbers display on digital instruments
41. Incoming external calls with:
• Camp-on busy
• Break-in and forced release
• Operator recall
42. Additional Facilities:
• Push-button dialing
• Night time classification of extension
2.4 ATTENDANT (OPERATOR) POSITIONS:
A. Propose a range of attendant stations for Engineer’s approval, with a precise description of
the features provided by each of them. Attendant terminals are required to have a color
screen, as well as attendant station software that can be used on PCs that are not
dedicated to the attendant operation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
B. The answering device will be designed specifically for answering calls; the presentation of
calls; chaining of calls, and re-dialing will be entirely controlled by the communications
system. Nevertheless, it will be possible to hold specific individual calls on keys reserved for
this purpose. The capacity of the different waiting queues should be unlimited. Signaling or
indications displayed on the terminal should be sufficiently explicit and unambiguous to
facilitate the handling of calls, and will give a maximum of information about the calls
(normal, urgent, status of the waiting queues, name of internal callers making requests,
status of the terminal, etc.)
C. Propose a device that allows the operators of the attendant positions to continuously
supervise (view) the state of some stations in the installation (free, busy internal, busy
external, unavailable). There must be at least 40 supervised terminals. The attendant will
be able to modify the mode of answering calls at their answering console. In automatic
answer mode, calls coming into the attendant console will be presented and connected
without requiring manual intervention by the operator
D. The specific central answering position requirements are specified below:
• Call by name to internal or external parties
• Text messaging
• Hands-free and amplified listening
• Ringer levels
• DTMF Signaling
• Attendant withdrawal from attendant group
• Withdrawal of last attendant
• Multiple attendant positions

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Automatic switchover of the attendant consoles
• Attendant position locking
• Call recording
• Directories access
• Management services
2.5 TELEPHONE TERMINALS (HANDSETS)
A. General: Submit for Engineer’s approval a range of digital telephone equipment as well as
IP stations, each capable of meeting one or more of a variety of needs, ranging from basic
equipment for use in public areas to that of business or management class. Type and
number of telephone terminals shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by
Engineer. Telephone Handsets shall be provided by the contract .
B. Analog Terminals: The analog terminals shall be able to respond to either pulse or DTMF
dialing signals, and automatically recognize the type of signal being received.
C. Analog Terminals with Caller ID: Any standard analog Call ID telephone from well known
manufacturer suitable for interfacing with the system. The terminal shall show the incoming
internal and external caller ID in case CLI information is available on analog/digital/ISDN
trunks. The analog terminals shall be able to respond to either pulse or DTMF dialing
signals, and automatically recognize the type of signal being received.
D. Digital Telephone Stations: Propose a range of digital terminals for Engineer’s approval and
provide precise descriptions of the features available with each of them. Only electronic
digital terminals will be accepted. For each type of terminal proposed, specify if the
terminals support the following features:
• Power feed over the twisted pair wiring

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Maximum operating distance on 22 and 24-guage twisted pair wiring
• Distribution on a single pair
• Communications at 256 Kbps between the terminal and the equipment
• An additional analog interface
The additional analog interface must provide ringing generator, power feeding, in the
following configurations:
• Common or different extension number
• Analogue interface dial independent of the host terminal
• Analogue interface dial for the host terminal
E. IP Telephone Stations: Propose a range of IP telephone stations for Engineer’s approval.

These IP telephone stations shall be identical to the digital stations in aspect and function.
For every type of station proposed, specify if the stations support the following features:
• Remote power feed per the 802.3af standard or local 120 / 230 -volt feed
• Auto-sensing 10/100 Ethernet switch interfaces
• 2 Port 10/100 switch
• QoS (Internal the station and priority to the voice signal
• Frame marking voice level 2 802.3 p / Q and level 3 ToS / DiffServ
• Transparent recovery of frames by the associated PC (not by the station)
• Fixed or dynamic assignment of the IP address by customer DHCP
• Agent SNMP integrated with MIB 2

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Voice compression standard – G711, G723.1, G729a
F. IP application Stations: Submit for Engineer’s approval, a range of IP application stations

full-featured with integrated IP connectivity and telephony, capable of supporting any web-
based business application that is compatible with XML. At least 2 IP application stations
shall be provided, unless indicated otherwise for each type of terminal proposed, provide
precise descriptions of the features available with each of them as well as specify if the
terminals support the following features:
• 10BT/100BT connection: half/full duplex with auto negotiation
• PC port
• VoIP standard: H.323 voice compliance, RTP, RTCP
• Voice compression standards: G711, G723.1, G729a
• Integrated Ethernet switch with QOS support Frame Marking voice level 2
802.3 p / Q and level 3 ToS / DiffServ
• Support for both: External power supply and Ethernet cabling system IEEE
802.3af full standard compliant
• Fixed or dynamic assignment of the IP address by customer DHCP
IP application stations should be equipped with:
• Large color or black and white adjustable screen
• Context-sensitive keys associated to the display – These contextual keys are

linked to the context displayed on the screen to directly activate functions
• Navigation keys to navigate inside the graphical interface (change of application

or context, return to the home page)

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Numeric keypad to dial a number or enter digits in a entry field
• Integrated alphabetic keyboard for functions such as text messaging and dial by
name
• Full duplex hands-free mode with echo cancellation
• Audio operation to tune audio levels, mute, loudspeaker, …
• Connector for headset or additional speakerphone
• Automatic and transparent switch from one to another communication mode

(headset, handset, hands-free, etc.)
• Wireless Bluetooth® capabilities (Based on 1.1 Bluetooth© specification)
• Open to applications: Access to corporate or external Web based application

via third party SDKs, APIs (XML, …)
• Options:
• 10 or 40-key add-on modules
• External conferencing device (with Bluetooth® or cable)
IP application station shall be an open platform allowing the integration of corporate, external,
hosted or third party Web applications via XML/SOAP. It shall provide a set of tools
customizing their communications to the specific day-to-day demands of work and to fit
specific enterprise, group and individual needs.
2.6 POWER SUPPLY
A. Power Supply: Device for controlling the designated minimum and maximum values of the
continuous power delivered. When one of these thresholds is reached, the energy feed to
the telecommunications system must be cut automatically. Control devices will provide both

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
automatic and manual control of the float and balancing, with automatic return to float mode
when the battery has been charged to the required level. The rectifier and power supply will
be sized to feed the power requirements of the telecommunications system at the
designated cabled capacity, and should be able to recharge the batteries within 10 hours
B. Battery: Batteries in the power supply will be the maintenance-free type. Batteries will be
installed to power the telecommunications system automatically in case of a failure of the
electric power or the rectifier. This uninterruptible power supply will maintain the
telecommunications system at full traffic for a minimum period of four hours.
C. Distributed Power Architecture: For an IP network with a distributed architecture where the
media gateway’s power is connected directly on the sector, an UPS should be integrated to
provide standby operation of at least for two hours.
2.7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION:
A. Management Terminal: The system management server will be based on the latest
technologies, such as JAVA/JEE. Provided at least one management server, unless
indicated otherwise. The server shall support a minimum of five (5) clients having different
access rights to the applications. Access to the server must also be possible by a light
Netscape or Microsoft Explorer client. The management server will offer a suite of
integrated management tools:
• System programming
• Control and allocation of communications costs
• Traffic data collection
• Alarm system synchronized with the topology (For multi-site application only)
• Topology with auto-discovery

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Company directory
The set of these applications must be interactive. For example, any modification to the
telephone data will automatically generate a change in the telephone data, and vice versa,
any modification of the user station parameters will generate an update in the directory.
For example, all directory data that is modified will automatically update the telephone
system and reciprocally, all subscriber parameter changes will update the directory. A user
shall also have a complete station information in a window:
• Management parameters
• Information on communications costs
• Information on telephone traffic
B. Connectivity and Modem Access Security Management: The management server must be
able to be situated anywhere on the premises, and accessible to the communications
system(s) via an IP network, the PSTN, or ISDN. The telecommunications system must be
able to control remote access coming in via the PSTN or ISDN. In an ISDN (CLIP)
environment, the system must be capable of authenticating the identification of the
requestor transported by the network. If the number does not correspond to an authorized
access, the request is denied and an alarm is generated, indicating the calling number
information for the unauthorized request. In the PSTN environment, when the network does
not transport information, the remote (CLIP) must present a user name and password for
the connection. If the identification is correct, the system releases the call and calls a
predefined number in memory that corresponds to the user name.
C. Management Access Security: The access to the services offered by the management
server should be protected in the following manner:
• Authentication of the management server

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Authentication of the client user
Authentication of the server and customer should be based on a user name and
password. During the connection phase, the voice communications system should test
the coherency of three items:
• Name of the management server
• Management server password
• User name
To ensure connection and information exchanges securely, the management server

should employ sftp and scp SSH/SSL for telnet sessions. In addition, it should use
IPsec mechanisms between the server and the management clients.
The management server authenticates the user password in order to permit domain
management.
D. Domain Management: A primary administrator who has access to the suite of applications
and information residing in the management server (including masked numbers and
personal codes) can define domain management. This primary administrator will have the
right to create user profiles defining the following:
• Access rights to one or more applications: yes or no (e.g., telephone cost

administration)
• Access level to the applications: read, read / write, or read / write / create /
delete
E. System Management: The telecommunications system configuration and management

application must permit management of all the parameters via a graphical user interface.
The configuration application should have the following features:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Independence in relation to software releases for the communication system,

but with automatic synchronization with the new releases.
• Capability to configure several systems in the same session
• The configuration will be able to operate in a batch mode via import / export
utilities
• Selection of items with the help of menus and automatic modification of all the
elements or of selected items
• Configuration of the parameters of an item (e.g., user) from a single window
• Configuration of digital, and IP stations via a graphical interface
• Configuration of the messaging system directly from the application
• List of management actions giving the date and list of operations performed
F. Traffic History and Collection: The system administrator shall have access to data regarding
system traffic, use of telephone features, and overall system operation at all times.
Collection of traffic data is required for measuring system use and to detect possible system
sizing problems. The application results must be presented in a graphical format. Bidder will
describe and propose the various traffic history approaches possible. The specific needs
are as follows:
• Collection of the following elements by ½ hour, hour, day and per month:
• Speed of answer by the called stations
• System station traffic
• "Top ten" users by cost or by call length
• Attendant group traffic

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Holding time waiting for attendant(s)
• External trunk traffic bundled in trunk groups
• Traffic on individual trunks
• Data collection on the components that ensure the telecommunication system's

proper operation
• Data collection on client IP traffic (station or media gateway) or between two IP

addresses defined by the administrator seeking the following information:
• Number of frames exchanged
• Number of lost frames
• Jitter
• Delay
The traffic history data will be protected, by period, on a storage device that permits the
reloading and subsequent use of the information.
G. Communications Cost Management: Call record storage on the system hard disk shall be
for a minimum of 100,000 call records. Management and sorting of these tickets will be
performed using the management and traffic analysis application residing on an external
server. Call records will be automatically downloaded by the application at night; for security
reasons, a sliding file of the most recent seven (7) days will be maintained continuously on
the system hard disk.
H. General Characteristics: On ISDN connections, the proposed system will not use direct or
per-call costing means from the carrier. On calls transferred by a station or attendant,
outgoing call costs should be assigned in a manner that accurately reflects the amount of
time each party was in control of the call. For reasons of organizational confidentiality,

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
some stations will never be tracked for any reason; the costs generated by these stations
will, nevertheless, be reflected on the cost counters. If it is not possible to receive cost
reference information from the carrier, the call accounting management system must be
able to accurately calculate communications expenses by an alternate means. The
application must be able to handle up to five carriers (service providers) simultaneously; a
simulation utility integrated into the application will permit the system to use the stored
information to identify the lowest cost service provider for external traffic. Indicate the
various types of information storage and will specify the following elements:
• The type of support and the maximum capacity of record storage capacity
• Storage devices
• The different alarms that inform the attendant(s) of heavy memory use. Two
successive thresholds are required: 75% and 90% of the storage capacity.
To facilitate the overall management, automatic updating of the application is required to

reflect when a user's parameters (e.g., number, assignment, deletion, etc.) are changed in
the telecommunications system.
I. Organization: To adapt to the Client organization, the application should permit multiple
organizations with up to eight levels each. Access to each of the levels in an entity will be
granted to multiple users as needed (department director, general manager, etc.) by the
system administrator. These users will be assigned an access code that provides access to
all the system features (such as creating reports, program a prerecorded observation, etc.)
for their organizational grouping. The ability to manage as many as 10 users, in addition to
the primary administrator, shall be part of the feature. The hierarchy information must be
automatically synchronized when the telecommunications system undergoes a relevant
change (stations, attendant(s), trunking, cost centers, etc.) to reflect the organizational
structure. The hierarchy information must be printable.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
Call detail records for cost reports: For every outgoing call, the system shall provide the
following information:
• Caller name
• Name of the service
• Department name
• Number dialed (with masking of the last four digits)
• Date, hour, and minute that the call ended
• Length of the call
• Number of cost units
• Cost for the call
• Type of call
• Service features used
For every incoming call, the system should provide the following information:
• Name of called station
• Name of the service
• Department name
• Caller number when it exists
• Date, hour and minute that the call ended
• Length of the call
• Type of call

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• ISDN service features used
The proposed service shall offer the attendants a set of ready-to-use pre-defined reports, in
addition to a management report utility to customize the existing reports or to create
completely new ones. It will be possible to create graphs from these reports, in pie and
histogram format. The following points will be determinants in the selection of the call cost
accounting system:
• Invoicing utility with data import and (where needed) removal of taxes or other designated
charges
• Cost utility for allocating stationary costs of different items
• Alarm reporting service, to indicate when defined parameters are met or thresholds are
exceeded on the following factors:
- Call numbers, costs, or length, or important variation in these data
- Length of time a call remained on hold, abandoned DID calls
- Volume of IP packets transmitted and received, and abnormal packets
When the various thresholds are reached, alarms must be generated, and email advice
should be sent to one or more administrators.
J. Management of the System Alarms: The management server should offer an application
that centralizes the alarms and relevant systems’ communication events, as well as any
generated by the management server itself. These events must be filtered and displayed in
real time, according to the administrator's needs.
These alarms should be categorized according to the six-level ISO severity definitions, and
identified by different colors to facilitate direct attention to specific categories. Every alarm

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
should have a detailed explanation at the second level; in addition to likely causes, the
application should indicate the appropriate troubleshooting actions to resolve the problem.
In the case of a major alarm, an email must be automatically sent to one or more system
administrators. The list of alarms and events, as well as their detailed explanations must be
printable and archive-able. A report generator will provide statistical reports.
K. Topology (For multi-site application only): The management server should provide an
application that offers a topological view of the telecommunications system that constitutes
the organization's network, as well as the links that exist between sites. The presentation
should be the simplest possible, and consider the need for an automatic discovery utility
that will automatically display the sub-networks and nodes that exist. This application must
be completely customizable in terms of the screens and the icons that represent the
objects. The different objects that represent the organization's network must be
synchronized with the alarms application in real time, and items that are affected by alarm-
generating conditions must indicate the event, using the same severity and color format.
When a problem appears, the administrator will access the faulty element by a mouse-click,
and will move through the system architecture, following the network hierarchy (node,
cabinet, media-gateway, board, etc.) until the problem element is found. The administrator
will be able to automatically launch system configuration and maintenance utilities while
viewing this element.
Printing of reports: The management application should allow the automatic printing of all
types of reports on a daily basis, in addition to being able to send it by email in different
formats, including:
• Text format: .txt
• PDF format: .pdf

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• HTML Format
• Excel format: xls
2.8 VOICE MESSAGING
A. The basic telecommunications system must be equipped with a voice messaging

application. An integrated system is preferred because it provides the best possible inter-
operation. Describe all the services available to the users and the voice messaging system
administrator, the maximum number of voice mailboxes, the maximum recording capacity,
and number simultaneous links that can be handled. In addition to the required services
described below:
1. Answering or answering with date stamp: The system shall provide voice mailbox
holders the choice of two functions: answering the messages or answering them with a
date stamp.
2. Customizable Announcements: When a call is forwarded to the voice messaging

system, the box holder will be able to choose between two personalized
announcements. If the personal announcement has not been recorded, the standard
system announcement will be substituted automatically.
3. Call forward to the voice messaging system from a box holder: When a box holder
agrees to have his or her call forwarded, or after a set amount of time that there is no
response, the internal or external caller is automatically directed to the voice
messaging system. After the caller hears the announcement, the caller can record a
message or decide to be forwarded to an attendant or a specific station.
4. Overflow of Internal Calls: After a set amount of time, the system will offer voicemail to
internal callers for those who have a voice mailbox.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Recording of Calls: The holder of a voice mailbox will be able to take advantage of this
service to record internal or external calls. Recorded calls will receive the same service
as messages that have been left by callers. The minimum recording length will be 10
minutes; This service shall be automatically provided to digital station users.
6. Message waiting Indication: The box holder is advised, by a lit lamp on the station
(either digital or analog equipped with a message lamp) that there are messages in the
mailbox. Users who have terminals without a message lamp should be advised by a
voice prompt that there are messages waiting, when user picks up the handset to
make a call.
7. Message Review or Access: The box holder can review or access waiting messages
from any internal station or an external station via the general telephone network.
When using a digital terminal, the display will offer dynamic context-sensitive soft keys
that operate the message system features on an interactive basis: fast forward, stop,
rewind, storage, continue, previous message, etc.
8. Access security: Security and privacy for the recording of personal announcements
and in the review of messages will be assured by a personal code.
9. Spoken Newspaper: A spoken word "newspaper" or "information" service with a

minimum length of 30 minutes should be available.
10. Broadcast Lists: The box holder will have access to general and personal distribution
or broadcast lists.
11. Forwarding of Voice Mail Messages: The box holder will be able to send a copy of
previously received messages to other boxes (with or without requesting
acknowledgement of receipt).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
12. Message Storage: The messaging system will store messages automatically, for a
programmable period of time, after which the message will be automatically erased;
only a specific action to erase a message will override the storage of the message, and
erase it immediately.
13. Call by Name: To provide universal access, it must be possible to select a voice
mailbox by its name by using the telephone dialing keypad. The caller will be guided in
this operation by voice prompts. The service should be as available to an outside
caller, in which case, the caller will be given the choice to deposit a message or having
the system call the desired party directly.
14. Multiple Languages: To ensure consistency with the system voice prompts, the
proposed system should be multi-lingual, offering four different languages (as selected
by Client). The service voice prompts played to a user will follow the same language
the user has selected in the telecommunications system. In no case will a mix or
combination of languages on the same voice prompt be accepted.
15. Automated Attendant: The messaging system should offer an integrated and
interactive automated attendant service. The application of messaging should propose
a service of integrated and interactive automatic operator. The user either calling or
routed to the AA will receive a welcome message, and be able to select a language for
the following interactions. Two (2) different languages must be supported by the
application.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
instructions.
C. The incoming external cables will be jointed after entering the building with dry plastic type
cable prior to connection to the MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
D. For excavation and backfilling refer to Section 02200 - EARTHWORK.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY:
with Article 250, 800 and 820 of National Electric Code (NEC) and conforming to Section
16452 - GROUNDING.
3.3 TESTING:
equipment, and the system entirely.

SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 3

1.2 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
1.5 WARRANTY ................................................................................................................ 5
1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION ..................................................... 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................... 6
2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM ............................................................... 6
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .................................................................................. 6
2.3 POWER AMPLIFIERS ................................................................................................. 6
2.06 COMPONENTS........................................................................................................ 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................. 9
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 9
3.2 GROUNDING .............................................................................................................. 9
3.3 TESTING ....................................................................................................................10
3.4 TRAINING ..................................................................................................................10

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Complete Public Address/Voice Evacuation System consisting of equipment and required

accessories required to make a complete operating system as specified herein.
B. System should include: Amplifier 120W, Sound managing rack, microphone, round
speaker ceiling or recessed 2W/4W etc…
1.2 REFERENCES
A. BS 5839 Part 8: Code for Practice for the design, installation and servicing of voice alarm
system.
B. EN 60849: International Standards Sound System for Emergency Purposes.
C. IEC - International Electrical Commission
IEC 60268 Sound System Equipment.
IEC 60849 Sound System for Emergency Purposes.
D. NFPA 72 – 2007: I Interfacing with Fire alarm system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Datasheet: For the following:

1. Power amplifiers.
2. Microphone.
3. Equipment cabinet and rack.
4. Speakers.
5. Microphone outlets.
6. Battery backup power unit.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
1. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
2. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.
3. Cabling diagram showing cable routing.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling-mounted items related to all electro-mechanical trades.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For public address and music equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain public address equipment through a single source authorized
by manufacturer to distribute each product.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of all equipment to assure
equipment.
E. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
shipment.
F. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
G. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
H. The above conditions (E,F and G items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
B. The system shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 24 months
from the date of handover to the owner and after the final testing and commissioning.
1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION
A. Storage handling and transportation of Public Address/Voice Evacuation System

components shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Pack all equipment for protection during transportation.
C. Store in a dry, clean location.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. The fully digital public address system shall interface with the Fire Alarm System in
accordance with NFPA 72 and BS 5839 part 8.
B. System Functions: Include the following:
1. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels.
2. Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and other inputs.
3. Communicating simultaneously to all zones regardless of zone or channel switch
settings.
4. Paging, by dialing an extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking into
the telephone.
5. Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers,
overriding signals currently being distributed.
6. Reproducing high-quality sound that is free of noise and distortion at all loudspeakers
at all times during equipment operation including standby mode with inputs off; and
output free of non-uniform coverage of amplified sound.
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and

interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty,
unless otherwise indicated
C. Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations.
2.3 POWER AMPLIFIERS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA SE-101-A.

B. Mounting: Rack mounted.
C. Output Power: 120W RMS or as indicated on drawings.
D. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 1 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.
E. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Master volume minimum 90dB, maximum 77dB.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Total Harmonic Distortion: 0.02% at 1 kHz.
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Microphone shall be of the dynamic, low-impedance, unidirectional type with built-in

compressor circuit and level indicator to prevent distortion, and suitable for announcement
to each or all zones. Microphone shall be desk-top type complete with stand, gooseneck
and holder and shall comply with TIA/EIA SE-105.
1. Output: 0dBv, 600Ohms, balanced.
2. Gooseneck electric condenser with wind screen.
3. 4-tone chime.
B. Equipment Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D.
1. House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment at each location.
2. Cabinet Housing: Construct of steel, with front and rear-locking doors. Arranged for
floor or wall mounting as specified on drawings. Size of the rack shall be enough to
house all equipment in addition to 20 percent minimum spare capacity for future.
3. Power Provisions: Install a single power outlet to supply cabinet power distribution unit
that is connected to all equipment in the rack.
4. Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation. Equip fan with a filtered
input.
C. Ceiling mounted speakers: Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103.
1. Rated input: 2W and 4W
2. Rated impedance: 1.7 kΩ at 2W and 4W.
3. Sensitivity: 94dB (1W, 1m).
4. Frequency response: 40 – 20000 Hz
D. Wall mounted speakers: Comply with TIA/EIA SE-103.
1. Rated input: 2W and 4W.
2. Rated impedance: 1.7kΩ at 2W and 4W.
3. Sensitivity: 90dB (1W, 1m)
4. Frequency response: 120 – 18000 Hz.
E. Conductors and Cables:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Speakers: Multicore insulated and sheathed cables with minimum cross section of
1.25 - 1.5sq.mm for copper conductors. The cable shall be fire rated type.
2. Microphones: The conductors with a diameter of 0.5 mm shall be of stranded copper
wires. Two conductors shall be twisted to a pair which is screened with tinned copper
wires.
F. Message recorder:
1. Up to 12 messages and 12 trigger imputs
2. Downloads messages from PC in WAV format
3. CD quality audio reply messages
4. Front panel control and remote control

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles, desks, and counters.
Conceal cables and raceways except in unfinished spaces.
B. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or
similar fittings so designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at
intervals not exceeding 760 mm and not more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, or
fittings.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
D. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as recommended by system
manufacturer for control functions indicated.
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
F. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable
marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with
system wiring diagrams.
G. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
H. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.3 TESTING
A. All system functions shall be tested for proper performance. All test results shall be
documented for inclusion in the as-built manuals.
B. Complete system programming shall be done by a person who has received factory
training in the programming of the installed system.
C. The system shall be tested for intelligibility in every room after all installation and testing is
finalized. The intelligibility tests shall follow NFPA 70.
3.4 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of four hours of on-site in-service training in the operation of the Public
Address/Voice Evacuation System. The training shall be provided by a training specialist
specifically trained in the operation, programming and features of the installed system.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 05 13
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 3
1.02 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 5
2.01 UTP CABLE ................................................................................................................. 5
2.02 UTP CABLE HARDWARE ........................................................................................... 5
2.03 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE ............................................................................................. 6
2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE ........................................................................ 7
2.03 RS-232 CABLE ............................................................................................................ 7
2.04 RS-485 CABLE ............................................................................................................ 8
2.05 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE ............................................................................ 9
2.06 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS ........................................................................10
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................................10
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................12
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ...................................................12
3.02 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS ........................................................................14
3.03 CONNECTIONS .........................................................................................................14
3.04 FIRESTOPPING .........................................................................................................15
3.05 GROUNDING .............................................................................................................15
3.06 IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................................................15

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. UTP cabling.
2. Optical Fiber cabling.
3. RS-232 cabling.
4. RS-485 cabling.
5. Low-voltage control cabling.
6. Control-circuit conductors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship
between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the
following:
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
4. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating
for tray and its support elements.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field
inspector.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 UTP CABLE
A. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a blue
thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG [; or MPP, CMP, MPR,
CMR, MP, or MPG].
b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with NFPA 262.
c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR complying with UL 1666.
d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX
e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG.
f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR [or MPP], complying with UL 1666.
2.02 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down
caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category
or higher.
B. Connecting Blocks: [110-style for Category 5e] [110-style for Category 6] [66-style for
Category 5e]. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus [25]

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
<Insert percentage> percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and
jacks where indicated.
2.03 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A. Description: Multimode, [50/125] [62.5/125]-micrometer, [24] <Insert number>-fiber,

[nonconductive,] tight buffer, optical fiber cable.
1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with [TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B] [TIA/EIA-492AAAA-A] for detailed specifications.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG [, or OFNR, OFNP].
b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.
c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR [or OFNP], complying with UL 1666.
d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG [; or OFNG, OFN, OFCR,
OFNR, OFCP, or OFNP].
e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP [ or OFNP], complying with NFPA 262.
f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR [; or OFNR, OFCP, or OFNP], complying
with UL 1666.
5. Conductive cable shall be [steel] [aluminum] armored type.
6. Maximum Attenuation: [3.50] <Insert number> dB/km at 850 nm; [1.5] <Insert number>
dB/km at 1300 nm.
7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
B. Jacket:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Jacket Color: [Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable] [Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer

cable].
2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.
3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to
exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).
2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards
(FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply
with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, [Type SC] [Type ST] [Type LC] [Type MT-RJ]
connectors. Insertion loss shall be not more than 0.75 dB.
2. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment
packages.
2.03 RS-232 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.
1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield
coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper
drain wire.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Plastic insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield
coverage.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper
drain wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.04 RS-485 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM[ or CMG].
1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Unshielded.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
2.05 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
C. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
2. PVC insulation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
2.06 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway complying with
UL 83.
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper complying with UL 83.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying
with UL 83.
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-
B.3.
E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall
test the frequency response or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a
voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the
results.
F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
5. Cables may not be spliced.
6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.
9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
C. Open-Cable Installation:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or
other potentially damaging items.
D. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install
corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed Orings to keep out moisture.
E. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating

unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways

and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 100mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300 mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 600mm.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 50mm.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and
Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm.
6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 100mm.
3.02 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for

connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for connecting,

terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Access Control" for connecting,

D. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting,

E. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and
Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connecting,
G. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for
connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, "Firestopping" Annex A.
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. For communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,
"Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party
certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin
assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-
B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,

equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Master Antenna
Television System."
D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the
instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 13 00
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – ACCESS
CONTROL
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 4

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES.................................................................................................................... 4
1.02 references ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 5
1.04 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................ 6
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.01 ACCESS CONTROL system includes ........................................................................................... 9
2.02 APPLICATION SOFTWARE ......................................................................................................... 9
2.03 SYSTEM DATABASE .................................................................................................................. 25
2.04 TAMPER PROTECTION ............................................................................................................. 31
2.05 CENTRAL-STATION HARDWARE ............................................................................................. 31
2.06 STANDARD WORKSTATION HARDWARE ............................................................................... 32
2.07 Access Control Proximity cards ................................................................................................... 32
2.08 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS ................................................................................................. 33
2.09 DUAL READER MODULE (DRM) ............................................................................................... 35
2.10 Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 35
2.11 Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 37
2.12 KEYPADS .................................................................................................................................... 41
2.13 CARD READERS ........................................................................................................................ 41
2.14 Biometric readers ......................................................................................................................... 42
2.15 electro-magnetic lock ................................................................................................................... 43
2.16 ENROLLMENT CENTER ............................................................................................................ 43
2.17 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES ....................................................................................................... 44
2.18 FLOOR SELECT ELEVATOR CONTROL (IF APPLICABLE) ..................................................... 44
2.19 biometric & card reader in one unit (IF APPLICABLE) ................................................................ 45
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 47

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.01 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................ 47

3.02 CABLING ..................................................................................................................................... 47
3.03 GROUNDING .............................................................................................................................. 47
3.04 IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................ 47
3.05 SYSTEM SOFTWARE................................................................................................................. 48
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................ 48
3.07 STARTUP SERVICE ................................................................................................................... 48
3.08 DEMONSTRATION ..................................................................................................................... 48
3.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .................................................................................. 49

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section includes a security access system consisting of Central Station and Control
Stations (workstations), operating system and application software, and field-installed
Controllers connected by a high-speed electronic data transmission network.
B. The system shall be provided as and form part of a fully integrated Security Management
System (SMS)
C. The SMS shall integrate CCTV, access control and other security related functions that
are specified for this project. It may require additional software, hardware and associated
equipment, including servers, storage, backup devices, field-installed controllers, control
and operator stations and system peripherals (all connected by a high-speed data
transmission network), and include all other elements necessary to provide complete,
working system.
D. The SMS shall in turn (if indicated on drawings) form a part of a fully integrated overall
Facility Management / Integrated Building Management/Monitoring System
E. The system shall include: Biometric/card reader, break glass door release, push button,
electro-magnetic lock, door contact, panic bar, buzzer, alarm and report printer,
workstation, card encoder, photo imaging device, video phone system, access control
server etc…
F. ISSD is utilizing Lenel HID (Model Lenel Onguard 7.3) for Access Control System. The
system Servers shall be similar and comply to the requirements of ISSD.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

B. NACOSS – National Accreditation Committee on Security System
C. ISSD regulations.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Security access system shall use a single redundant database for access-control and
credential-creation functions.
B. System Network Requirements:
1. Interconnect system components and provide automatic communication of status
changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required
for proper system operation.
2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response, and shall return to
normal after partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient
upset.
3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and
identify the communication link that has experienced a partial or total failure.
4. Communications Controller may be used as an interface between the Central
Station display systems and the field device network. Communications Controller
shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications
performance.
C. Central Station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display, control, and dynamic
and real-time monitoring. Central Station shall control system networks to interconnect all
system components, including workstations and field-installed Controllers.
D. Field equipment shall include Controllers, sensors, and controls. Controllers shall serve as
an interface between the Central Station and sensors and controls. Data exchange
between the Central Station and the Controllers shall include down-line transmission of
commands, software, and databases to Controllers. The up-line data exchange from the
Controller to the Central Station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status
reports, and entry-control records. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or
entry-control type.
E. System Response to Alarms: Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end
response time of 1 second(s) or less for every device connected to the system. Alarms
shall be annunciated at the Central Station within 1 second of the alarm occurring at a
Controller or device controlled by a local Controller, and within 100 ms if the alarm occurs
at the Central Station. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after
receipt of data by the Central Station. All graphics shall be displayed, including graphics-

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
generated map displays, on the console monitor within 5 seconds of alarm receipt at the
security console.
F. False Alarm Reduction: The design of Central Station and Controllers shall contain
features to reduce false alarms.
G. Error Detection: A cyclic code error detection method shall be used between Controllers
and the Central Station, which shall detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of
eight bits or less, and at least 99 percent of all other multi-bit and burst error conditions.
Interactive or product error detection codes alone will not be acceptable. A message shall
be in error if one bit is received incorrectly. System shall retransmit messages with
detected errors. A two-digit decimal number shall be operator assignable to each
communication link representing the number of retransmission attempts. When the
number of consecutive retransmission attempts equals the assigned quantity, the Central
Station shall print a communication failure alarm message. System shall monitor the
frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.
H. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing,
shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics,
furnished specialties, and accessories. Reference each product to a location on Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Diagrams for cable management system.
2. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are
part of the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2
and 3.
3. Wiring Diagrams. Show typical wiring schematics
4. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in Part 3 "Identification" Article.
5. Battery and charger calculations for Central Station, workstations, and Controllers.
C. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.
D. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates for color
selection and evaluation of technical features.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Microsoft Windows software documentation.
2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and
all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot
diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.
3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design
guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the
hard-copy submittal.
4. System installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record options
and setup decisions.
5. All issues related to safety and security should be subject to approval from ISSD
during detailed engineering design stage with the selected Contractor.
6. All related documents and specifications shall comply with ISSD regulations.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer
certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain Central Station, workstations, Controllers, Identifier readers,
and all software through one source from a single manufacturer.
the equipment.
D. Vendor/manufacturer shall provide regular software updates and upgrades. In case of
obsolescence of the software/application, new version of shall be backward compatible
without involving expensive and complex hardware replacement.
E. Vendor shall provide minimum 2 year warranty started from final Testing and
commissioning.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
F. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
shipment.
G. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
H. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
I. The above conditions (F,G and H items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INCLUDES
A. The security access system shall include the following:

1. Access Control:
a. Visitor assignment.
b. Time and attendance.
c. Surge and tamper protection.
d. Secondary alarm annunciator.
e. Credential cards and readers.
f. Biometric identity verification equipment.
g. Push-button switches.
h. Credential creation and credential holder database and management.
i. Monitoring of field-installed devices.
j. Reporting.
k. Redundant servers
l. ACS Monitoring and Control server 19” rack mountable
2.02 APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. System Software: Based on Microsoft Windows central-station and workstation operating

system and application software. Software shall have the following features:
1. Multiuser multitasking to allow independent activities and monitoring to occur
simultaneously at different workstations.
2. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree format.
3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.
4. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with
other systems that are compatible with operating system.
5. Password-protected operator login and access.
B. Peer Computer Control Software: Shall detect a failure of a central computer, and shall
cause the other central computer to assume control of all system functions without
interruption of operation. Drivers shall be provided in both central computers to support
this mode of operation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry control
Controllers, to monitor sensors, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports, and
help train system operators. Software shall have the following functions:
1. Resides at the Central Station, workstations, and Controllers as required to perform
specified functions.
2. Operate and manage peripheral devices.
3. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and
automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of each
sequential and random-ordered record.
4. Import custom icons into graphics views to represent alarms and I/O devices.
5. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same Location,
without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the
Controller.
6. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O with the
same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be
at the Controller.
7. Messages from PC to Controllers and Controllers to Controllers shall be on a polled
network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each message.
Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if
message is not acknowledged.
8. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle bandwidth
and latency issues for TCP/IP by changing the polling frequency and the amount of
time the system waits for a response.
9. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be
automatically stored at a selected workstation and encrypted with a nine-character
alphanumeric password, which must be used to restore or read data contained in
backup.
10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to database and
system software.
D. Workstation Software:
1. Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to allow or
disallow operator access to program functions for each Location.
2. Workstation event filtering shall allow user to define events and alarms that will be
displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not handled by

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will automatically appear
on the filtered workstation.
E. Controller Software:
1. Controllers shall operate as an autonomous intelligent processing unit. Controllers
shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking functions, and
door locking schedules for its operation, independent of other system components.
Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing control network. The portion
of the database associated with a Controller and consisting of parameters,
constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that Controller,
shall be maintained in the Controller.
2. Functions: The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within
each Controller:
a. Monitoring inputs.
b. Controlling outputs.
c. Automatically reporting alarms to the Central Station.
d. Reporting of sensor and output status to Central Station on request.
e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the Central Station at least
once a day.
f. Communicating with the Central Station.
g. Executing Controller resident programs.
h. Diagnosing.
i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the Central Station.
3. Controller Operations at a Location:

a. Location: Up to 64 Controllers connected to LAN globally operating I/O linking
and anti-passback functions between Controllers within the same Location
without central-station or workstation intervention. Linking and anti-passback
shall remain fully functional within the same Location even when the Central
Station or workstations are off line.
b. In the event of communications failure between the Central Station and a
Location, there shall be no degradation in operations at the Controllers at that
Location. The Controllers at each Location shall be connected to a memory
buffer with a capacity to store up to 10,000 events; there shall be no loss of
transactions in system history files until the buffer overflows.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. Buffered events shall be handled in a first-in-first-out mode of operation.
4. Individual Controller Operation:

a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the
Central Station when communications circuits are operable. If
communications are not available, Controllers shall function in a stand-alone
mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally
transmitted to the Central Station, shall be stored for later transmission to the
Central Station.
b. Card-reader ports of a Controller shall be custom configurable for at least
120 different card-reader or keypad formats. Multiple reader or keypad
formats may be used simultaneously at different Controllers or within the
same Controller.
c. Controllers shall provide a response to card-readers or keypad entries in
less than 0.25 seconds, regardless of system size.
d. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a non-powered state, shall
automatically request a parameter download and reboot to its proper working
state. This shall happen without any operator intervention.
e. Initial Startup: When Controllers are brought on-line, database parameters
shall be automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is
completed, only database changes shall be downloaded to each Controller.
f. Failure Mode: On failure for any reason, Controllers shall perform an orderly
shutdown and force Controller outputs to a predetermined failure mode
state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control
device.
g. Startup after Power Failure: After power is restored, startup software shall
initiate self-test diagnostic routines, after which Controllers shall resume
normal operation.
h. Startup after Controller Failure: On failure, if the database and application
software are no longer resident, Controllers shall not restart, but shall remain
in the failure mode until repaired. If database and application programs are
resident, Controllers shall immediately resume operation. If not, software
shall be restored automatically from the Central Station.
5. Communications Monitoring:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
a. Communication status window shall display which Controllers are currently

communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which
Controller last missed a poll.
b. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O
board, and the amount of RAM memory for each Controller.
6. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds,
minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically
synchronized with the Central Station at least once a day to plus or minus 10
seconds. The time synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and
without requiring system shutdown.
F. PC-to-Controller Communications:
1. Central-station or workstation communications shall use the TCP/IP LAN network
interface cards.
2. TCP/IP network interface card shall have an option to set the poll frequency and
message response time-out settings.
3. PC-to-Controller and Controller-to-Controller communications (TCP/IP) shall use a
polled-communication protocol that checks sum and acknowledges each message.
All communications shall be verified and buffered and retransmitted if not
acknowledged.
4. Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-Controller
communications link.
5. Loss of communications to any Controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs running
the communications software.
6. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload
to the PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the Controller.
G. Controller-to-Controller Communications:
1. Controller-to-Controller Communications shall be TCP/IP.
H. Database Downloads:
1. All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between Controllers at a
Location, shall include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the
transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be
automatically retransmitted.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. If a Controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a
database download from the PC. The download shall restore data stored at the
Controller to their normal working state and shall take place with no operator
intervention.
I. Operator Interface:
1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and
one for the abnormal state.
2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to
the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also
display the input's state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed
or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.
3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked)
state and one for the open (unlocked) state.
4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their
current real-time condition without prompting by the operator.
5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar
button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function.
6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall
include the following:
a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input,
output, and override group icons to be placed on maps.
b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points
assigned to them.
c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different
maps.
d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be
displayed.
7. Override Groups Containing I/Os:
a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the
status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon.
b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in
that group.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to time
zone points in the group.
d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons
representing the live status for each point in the group, individual control over
each point, and the ability to compress the individual icons back into one
summary icon.
8. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:
a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the
holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules
individually for each input, output, or override group.
b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate
times for each date.
c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall
advance to, when the time and date become current.
d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return
to, when the time and date become current.
9. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for
specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.
J. Operator Access Control:
1. Control operator access to system controls through three password protected
operator levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password
clearances shall be able to change operator levels for operators.
2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined
level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.
3. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be available with the system software. System
shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall
print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at
login and logoff.
4. The password shall not be displayed or printed.
5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:
a. Commands usable.
b. Access to system software.
c. Access to application software.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
d. Individual zones that are to be accessed.

e. Access to database.
K. Operator Commands:
1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use
the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System
prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym.
2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than
1 second.
3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following:
a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed
the alarm message.
b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion alarm circuits (if
applicable) emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured so that
console operator cannot disable tamper circuits.
c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion alarm circuits (if
applicable) emanating from a specific zone.
d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test.
e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific
zone.
f. Print reports.
g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.
h. Run system tests.
i. Generate and format reports.
j. Request help with the system operation.
1) Include in main menus.
2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and

functions with the press of one function key.
3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help window.
4) Help shall be accessible outside the applications program.
k. Entry-Control Commands:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to four
times a day through time-zone programming.
2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day through time-
zone programming.
3) Enable or disable readers or keypads up to twice a day through time-

zone programming.
4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times per day per entry point
through access-level programming.
4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot
be executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-
language words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed.
Error responses that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other
document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages
include the following:
a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete.
b. Operator is restricted from using that command.
c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service.
d. Command addresses a point that does not exist.
e. Command is outside the system's capacity.
L. Alarms:
1. System Setup:
a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming point status change or
alarms.
b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, operator-
response plans, unique sound with use of sound files, and maps or images
that graphically represent the point location.
c. 60-character message field for each alarm.
d. Operator-response-action messages shall allow message length of at least
65,000 characters, with database storage capacity of up to 32,000 messages.
Setup shall assign messages to alarm originating device.
e. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to
provide further information and shall be editable by the operator.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
f. Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of 4 lines of 60 characters each.

g. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the report
generator.
2. Software Tamper:
a. Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system database
files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto
system shall generate a software tamper alarm.
b. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other individual
makes three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke functions beyond
their authorization level.
c. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at the each
Central Station to serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write access
to system transcript files by any person, regardless of their authorization level.
d. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.
3. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the
highest password authorization level available in system.
4. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on graphic
maps; display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs and outputs
in real time through animated icons.
5. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: sound files to be associated with alarm events for
audio annunciation or instructions.
6. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be cleared
unless it has returned to normal, with options of requiring the operator to enter a
comment about disposition of alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when
alarm is acknowledged.
7. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and control cameras from
graphic maps.
M. Alarm Monitoring
1. Controllers shall notify operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority
alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm
first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered
acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary
alarm messages.
3. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to
nearest second) of occurrence, and operator responses.
4. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that
map, if that option is selected for that input location.
5. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by
operators:
a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds
associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged"
but "Un-Resolved."
b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment,
giving the disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear.
6. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and total unresolved alarms.
7. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until
the alarm point has returned to its normal state.
8. Alarms shall transmit to Central Station in real time.
9. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different windows.
a. Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking icon.
Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm.
b. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red text.
Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
c. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red.
Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
d. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing each alarm
input location. Change icon to flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change
icon from flashing red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.
10. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter comments
about the nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's comments may be
manually entered or selected from a programmed predefined list, or a combination
of both.
11. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed
comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
12. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall
be recorded in the database.
13. Identical alarms from same alarm point shall be acknowledged at same time the
operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the
first alarm is resolved.
14. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating
database from workstations and Controllers.
15. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point
shall be automatically bypassed.
N. Monitor Display
Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated into the display. Colors
are used for the various components and current data. Colors shall be uniform throughout
the system.
1. Color Code:
a. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that
primary power has failed.
b. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has been
acknowledged.
c. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access.
d. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.
2. Graphics:
a. Support 1000 graphic display maps and allow import of maps from a minimum
of 16 standard formats from another drawing or graphics program.
b. Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop method.
c. Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's name by
moving the mouse cursor over the point on graphic map.
d. Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The operator shall
be able to toggle to view graphic map associated with inputs or outputs.
e. Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number associated
with it to provide a predetermined order when toggled to different views.
f. Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps that, when
selected by an operator, will open a video window, display the camera
associated with that icon, and provide pan-tilt zoom control.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
g. Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to arm or
bypass an input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-tilt-zoom
function of the selected camera.
3. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a
particular portion of the system.
4. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout.
The report shall document the operational status of system components.
O. Report Generator Software
1. Include commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk
and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time. Report printing shall be
the lowest priority activity. Report generation mode shall be operator selectable but
set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date printed
and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats may be configured
by operators.
2. Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be generated;
the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between reports; the
end of period; and the default printer.
3. Printing on Requests: An operator may request a printout of any report.
4. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include alarms
recorded by system over the selected time and information about the type of alarm
such as door alarm, intrusion alarm, tamper alarm, etc. the type of sensor, the
location, the time, and the action taken.
5. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time placed in
access, and the time placed in secure mode.
6. Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what, when, and
where. As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future printing.
7. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic generation.
8. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the ability
to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the user-defined
fields.
9. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader or
group of readers by selecting the readers from a list.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
10. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been assigned to
the specified access level.
11. Who Is In (Muster) Report:
a. Emergency Muster Report: One click operation on toolbar launches report.
b. Cardholder Report. Contain a count of persons that are "In" at a selected
Location and a count with detailed listing of name, date, and time of last use,
sorted by the last reader used or by the group assignment.
12. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation including the
actual location of equipment, programming parameters, and wiring identification.
Maintain system installation data within system database so that they are available
on-site at all times.
13. Activity and Alarm On-Line Printing: Activity printers for use at workstations; prints
all events or alarms only.
14. History Reports: Custom reports that allows the operator to select any date, time,
event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or cardholder to be
included or excluded from the report.
a. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC.
b. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history to any system
printer.
c. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times with the ability to
have a daily start and stop time over a given date range.
d. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event description, device,
or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and cardholder name or code
number.
e. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that the integrity of
the report has not been compromised.
f. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end of the report. If the
report is run for a single event such as "Alarms," the total shall reflect how
many alarms occurred during that period.
15. Reports shall have the following four options:
a. View on screen.
b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and "Print To" options
if more than one printer is connected to system.
c. "Save to File" with full path statement.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating status of system
inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are abnormal, out of time zone,
manually overridden, not reporting, or in alarm.
16. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to be sorted and
printed according to the following criteria:
a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate.
b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number.
c. Group, Location, access levels.
d. Start and stop code range.
e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of days.
f. In, out, or either status.
g. Codes with trace designation.
17. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every data field may be
printed.
18. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual position of
the printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-entry
windows.
P. Anti-Passback:
1. System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by Location.
System shall support hard and soft anti-passback.
2. Timed Anti-Passback: A Controller capability that prevents an access code from
being used twice at the same device (door) within a user defined amount of time.
3. Provide multiple separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring
interaction with the host PC (done at Controller). Each reader shall be assignable to
one or multiple anti-passback zones.
4. The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback.
5. System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential holder or
the entire credential holder population anti-passback status to a neutral status.
Q. Visitor Assignment:
1. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The
visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only
access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and whom
visitor contacted.
3. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder.
4. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be
assigned to credentials that are issued to visitors.
5. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential holder file, once a visitor is enrolled in the
system.
6. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after
use at that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential.
7. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports.
Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.
R. Training Software (if indicated on drawings/BOQ): Enables operators to practice system
operation including alarm acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force
deployment, and response force communications. System shall continue normal operation
during training exercises and shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received
at the console.
S. Entry-Control Enrollment Software:
1. Database management functions that allow operators to add, delete, and modify
access data as needed.
2. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions.
3. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and
modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel
enrollment functions.
4. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is
unattended to prevent unauthorized use.
5. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into
the entry-control database files through enrollment stations. In the case of personnel
identity verification subsystems, this shall include biometric data. Allow entry of
personnel identifying information into the system database using menu selections
and data fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user
and site needs. Personnel identity verification subsystems selected for use with the
system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the
entry-control database files.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run
searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field
shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features:
a. MASK: Determines a specific format that data must comply with.
b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving.
c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique.
d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional
deactivates date for all cards assigned to this cardholder.
e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder.
7. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by
last name, first name, group, or any predetermined user defined data field; by codes
not used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.
8. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as
additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.
9. Batch card printing.
10. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card
data are similar.
11. Enhanced ACSII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and
images.
12. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a
card is used at selected devices.
2.03 SYSTEM DATABASE
A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in
database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and constraints
associated with each system device.
B. Database Operations:
1. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu tree format, with
navigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of menus
and icons in a main menu and system toolbar.
2. Navigational Aids:
a. Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate,
deactivate, and muster report.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation.

c. Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database fields to
facilitate navigation from one record to the next.
d. Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one record to
create a new similar record.
3. All data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and shall
verify that data are in a valid format.
4. Provide a memo or note field for each item that is stored in database, allowing the
storing of information about any defining characteristics of the item. Memo field is
used for noting the purpose the item was entered for, reasons for changes that were
made, and the like.
C. File Management:
1. Provide database backup and restoration system, allowing selection of storage
media.
2. Provide manual and automatic mode of backup operations. The number of
automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup becomes overwritten; FIFO
mode shall be operator selectable.
3. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any PC on the LAN and shall
operate while system remains operational.
D. Operator Passwords:
1. Software shall support up to 1000 individual system operators, each with a unique
password.
2. Operator Password: One to eight alphanumeric characters.
3. Allow passwords to be case sensitive.
4. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered.
5. Provide each password with a unique and customizable password profile, and allow
several operators to share a password profile. Include the following features in the
password profile:
6. Allow for at least 1000 operator password profiles.
7. Predetermine the highest-level password profile for access to all functions and
areas of program.
8. Allow or disallow operator access to any program operation, including the functions
of View, Add, Edit, and Delete.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
9. Restrict which doors an operator can assign access to.

10. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to system.
a. This username and password is used to access database areas and
programs as determined by the associated profile.
11. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully exiting program. User
may be logged off but program will remain running while displaying the login window
for the next operator.
E. Access Card/Code Operation and Management
1. Access authorization shall be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a
combination of both (card plus PIN).
2. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-PIN
validation second, and the access level (time of day, day of week, date), anti-
passback status, and number of uses last.
3. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access levels. Access authorization
entry management system shall maintain and coordinate all access levels to prevent
duplication or the incorrect creation of levels.
4. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder.
5. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location to a cardholder.
Each access level may contain any combination of doors.
6. Each door may be assigned four time zones.
7. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.
8. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be shared by
all locations in the group.
9. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge, without assigning that person a card or code,
for data tracking or photo ID purposes.
10. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing. Make a special
audible and visual annunciation at control station when a selected card or code is
used at a designated code reader. Annunciation shall include an automatic display
of the cardholder image.
11. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or a number
from 1 to 9998 that regulates the number of times the card can be used before it is
automatically deactivated.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
12. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually or
automatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to be preprogrammed.
F. Security Access Integration:
1. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use same database as the security
access and may query data from cardholder, group, and other personal information
to build a custom ID badge.
2. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based on photo verification
shall also be a means of access verification and entry.
3. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group or other characteristic
for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and enabling or disabling, cards or
codes.
G. Key control and tracking shall be an integrated function of cardholder data.
1. Provide the ability to store information about which conventional metal keys are
issued and to whom, along with key construction information.
2. Reports shall be designed to list everyone that has possession of a specified key.
H. Facility Codes: System shall accommodate up to 2048 facility codes per Location, with the
option of allowing facility codes to work at all doors or only particular doors.
I. Operator Comments:
1. With the press of one appropriate button on toolbar, the user shall be permitted to
make operator comments into history at any time.
2. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur before the resolution of each
alarm.
3. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and operator number.
4. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and history.
5. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or both may be used:
a. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed), up to 65,000
characters per each alarm.
b. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request.
6. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator comments with up to 30
characters per comment.
J. Group:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow the operator to
determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or any other
designation of a group to which the person belongs.
2. System software shall have the capacity to assign 1 of 1000 group names to an
access authorization.
3. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access authorizations
assigned to a particular group.
4. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name.
K. Time Zones:
1. Each zone consists of a start and stop time for 7 days of the week and three holiday
schedules. A time zone is assigned to inputs, outputs, or access levels to determine
when an input shall automatically arm or disarm, when an output automatically
opens or secures, or when access authorization assigned to an access level will be
denied or granted.
2. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and outsputs to allow up to four
arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or unlock periods per day; up to three
holiday override schedules may be assigned to a time zone.
3. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar graph showing active and
inactive times for each day and holiday, as start and stop times are entered or
edited.
4. System shall have the capacity for 100 time zones for each Location.
L. Holidays:
1. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Holiday schedule
consists of date in format MM/DD/YYYY and a description. When the holiday date
matches the current date of the time zone, the holiday schedule replaces the time
zone schedule for that 24- hour period.
2. System shall have the capacity for 100 holidays.
3. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time zone.
4. Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the designated date each
year. These holidays remain in system and will not be purged.
5. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be automatically purged from
database after the date expires.
M. Access Levels:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. System shall allow for the creation up to 100 access levels.

2. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master Access Level
shall work at all doors at all times and override any anti-passback.
3. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by time.
Access levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is authorized.
4. System shall be able to create multiple door and time zone combinations under
same access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different time periods at
different readers even if the readers are on the same Controller.
N. User-Defined Fields:
1. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50
characters, for specific information about each credential holder.
2. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20 characters.
3. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected,
forces the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the credential can
be saved.
4. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, will
not allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered.
5. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will require the
data to be entered with certain character types in specific spots in the field entry
window.
6. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. The
selection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windows
MM/DD/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be deactivated on that
date.
7. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-
defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The search function
shall include search for a character string.
8. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by the
user-defined fields.
O. Code Tracing:
1. System shall perform code tracing selectable by cardholder and by reader.
2. Any code may be designated as a "traced code" with no limit to how many codes
can be traced.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Any reader may be designated as a "trace reader" with no limit to which or how
many readers can be used for code tracing.
4. When a traced code is used at a trace reader, the access-granted message that
usually appears on the monitor window of the Central Station shall be highlighted
with a different color than regular messages. A short singular beep shall occur at the
same time the highlighted message is displayed on the window.
5. The traced cardholder image (if image exists) shall appear on workstations when
used at a trace reader.
2.04 TAMPER PROTECTION
A. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes junction
boxes cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper alarm signal when
unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall
identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.
B. Surge protection (SPD) shall be incluced and to follow the latest standards of NEMA,
NFPA, ANSI/UL
2.05 CENTRAL-STATION HARDWARE
A. Central-Station Computer: Standard unmodified PC of modular design. .

1. Memory: 8 GB of usable installed memory, expandable to a minimum of 16 GGB
without additional chassis or power supplies.
2. Power Supply: Adequate capacity.
3. LAN Adapter Card: 100/1000 Mbps PCI bus, internal network interface card.
4. Sound Card: For playback and recording of digital sound files that are associated
with audible warning and alarm functions.
5. Color Monitor: Not less than 19 inches LCD screen
6. Special function keyboard attachments or special function keys to facilitate data
input of the following operator tasks:
a. Help.
b. Alarm Acknowledge.
c. Place Zone in Access.
d. Place Zone in Secure.
e. System Test.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
f. Print Reports.
g. Change Operator.
7. Disk storage shall include a minimum 500 GB hard disk, maximum average access
time of 10ms.
8. Audible Alarm: Manufacturer's standard.
9. DVD-ROM Drive:
10. Dot Matrix Alarm Printer:
11. Report Printer:
B. Redundant Central Computer: One identical redundant central computer, connected in a
hot standby, peer configuration. This computer shall automatically maintain its own copies
of system software, application software, and data files. System transactions and other
activities that alter system data files shall be updated to system files of redundant
computer in near real-time. If central computer fails, redundant computer shall assume
control immediately and automatically.
2.06 STANDARD WORKSTATION HARDWARE
A. The workstation shall have as a minimum the following hardware components required to
support digital video integration:
1. Intel xeon CPU E5-2603 V3 of higher version
2. 16 GB RAM
3. 100/1000 Mbps NIC
4. Printer
2.07 ACCESS CONTROL PROXIMITY CARDS
The access control proximity cards used for the gate card readers shall be:
A. Proven and reliable Technology: shall offer extremely consistent read range, unaffected
by body shielding, or variable environment conditions, even when close to keys and coins.
B. Thin and can be carried with credit/debit cards in a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and
clip as a photo ID badge.
C. Photo ID compatible: Shall print directly to the card with a direct image or thermal transfer
print. Slot punch vertically for easy use.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Cross-reference: A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the
programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration.
E. Security: Shall offer over 137 billion unique codes.
F. Long Life: Passive, no-battery design to allow an infinite number of reads.
G. Durability: shall be strong, flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking
H. Custom Artwork: shall accommodate custom multicolor graphics and text.
I. Card Dimensions: 2.125” x 3.375” x 0.033” maximum (5.40 cm x 8.57 cm x 0.084 cm).
J. Card Construction: Shall be thin flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) laminate. It shall also
include ABA standard.
K. Operating temperature: -45 Deg. Celsius to 65 Deg. Celsius.
L. Weight: shall not more than 7.1 gm
M. Description: RF-programmable 125 KHz.
N. Shall be of anti-forge materials and encryption-capable.
2.08 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS
The security management system shall be equipped with access control field hardware
required to receive alarms and administer all access granted/denied decisions.
The Intelligent Controller shall link the security management system software to all other
field hardware components (card reader modules and input & output control modules).
The Intelligent Controller shall provide full distributed processing of access control and
alarm monitoring operations. Access levels, hardware configurations, and programmed
alarm outputs assigned at the administration workstation shall be downloaded to the
Intelligent Controller. All access granted/denied decisions shall be made at the Intelligent
Controller to provide fast responses to card reader transaction. The System shall provide
the user, the capability to query the Intelligent Controller to get a snapshot of memory
availability, stored transactions and events, etc.
Intelligent controllers shall have following minimum requirements:

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. The intelligent controller shall include a network-based interface module for networking.
The intelligent controller network interface module shall be able to communicate back to
the database server though industry standard switches and routers.
B. Off-line operation - In the event that the Intelligent Controller loses communication with
System software, it shall continue to function normally. Events shall be stored in local
memory and uploaded to the System software after communications are restored.
C. The intelligent controller shall include embedded Web Server for ease of configuring key
hardware attributes.
D. Ports for connecting card readers and data gathering panels via RS485 multi-drop wiring
configuration.
E. Up to 32 devices consisting of reader interface modules, alarm input modules (AIM), and
relay output modules (ROM) shall be supported.
F. Readers Capacities—Reader functionality and connectivity will be achieved through
reader modules, and not directly to the IC. The IC will, however, support at a minimum the
following:
1. Up to 8 card formats and facility codes
2. Multiple card technologies
3. Biometrics & Smart card interface support
4. Issue code support for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers
G. Reporting: ID-card transactions, tamper alarm, power failure, low battery, loss of
communication, access control violations.
H. Redundant Communication - The System shall provide a redundant or secondary means
of communications with System intelligent controllers configured on a communication
channel.
I. Input Voltage: 12VDC, 400mA
The System shall include a mechanism to save card user data in case of power failure.
The Controller shall have self-recover software TO be automatically launched in case of
controller internal errors.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.09 DUAL READER MODULE (DRM)
The Dual Reader Module shall provide an interface between the intelligent controller and
the card readers. The dual reader module shall operate with any card reader that produces
a standard Wiegand (Data 1/Data 0 or Clock and Data) communication output. A single
intelligent controller shall be able to multi-drop up to 32 dual reader modules on four
separate RS485 ports. The following requirements shall also apply:
A. Each dual reader module shall support 2 card readers, each of which may be up to 500
feet from the dual reader module.
B. Up to 32 dual reader modules shall be connected to each intelligent controller, distributed
across ports.
C. Each dual reader module shall include 8 supervised inputs and 6 relay outputs.
D. Up to 8 unique card formats shall be supported.
E. The dual reader module shall support an integrated card reader/keypad.
F. The dual reader module shall support 3 access modes upon loss of communication with
the intelligent controller. These modes shall be locked, unlocked, or facility code.
G. Input power shall be 12 VDC +/- 10% @ 400mA.
2.10 REPORTS
The CONTRACTOR shall use a report generation tool based on GUI to allow the ease of report
generation. These tools shall allow the development of Structured Query Language (SQL)
based reports to be produced as follows:
• Reports generated from server databases
• Reports generated from server and external SQL compliant databases.
• Reports can be saved for system wide operator use.
• Reports can be saved for individual use
• Reports can be printed on any connected system printer(s).
• Data can be retrieved by any element, or combination of elements, including, but not
limited to, badge number, serial number, time, date, location and door number.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
It shall be possible for all reports to be displayed on a workstation screen or be printed on a

report printer.
A. Design
1. All reports shall contain at a minimum the following information:
2. Report title and column headers
3. Time and date of the report
4. If applicable, time period the report covers
5. Field devices shall be clearly identified
6. The status of the field device during the report period must be indicated
B. Preset-Reports for ID Transactions and Alarms

1. The following reports shall as a minimum be provided as templates.
2. Report of user data; containing all required information on a specific cardholder
3. Report on activities of a selected single card holder or group of selected card holders
4. Report on rejected access attempts
5. Report on manual override commands such as manual opening
6. Report of all activities of a selected Card reader
7. Report of all access devices (gates, portals, doors)
8. Report of details of all valid, voids, lost, stolen and returned ID-cards.
9. Report of all points in alarm
10. Report of all unacknowledged alarms
11. Events type filter
12. Sorting by user defined fields
13. Sorting by data base fields
14. Sorting by card reader holder department, cardholder or event name, ID number
issuing date, validation period of Id-card and pin (where applicable).

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
15. Besides the predefined reports the system shall provide the capability for the operator
to define its own reports.
16. These custom made reports must be stored as templates and protected by password.
17. Reports shall be available by manual operator command or by time schedule.
C. Preset-Reports for ID card holder data

1. The following reports shall, as a minimum, be provided as templates:
a. Standard card holder report with data sorted numerically by ID-card number or
alphabetically by name.
b. List of employees who are present in the facility (emergency management)
D. Ad-Hoc Reports
1. Special ad-hoc reports shall be available by the operator to provide ID-card holder
record listings in sorted order or listings of selected other data.
2.11 ALARMS
The system shall include a Graphical User Interface (GUI) based alarm annunciation screens
for system associated alarms and events. These screens shall be provided at the operator
workstations. The Alarms shall be relayed to the Control Center for reporting.
The alarms to be monitored shall include hardware, software or communication failures at any
system location.
These alarms shall also be printed in a printer logger.
A. Alarm Priority
It shall be possible to assign a priority level to each alarm.
An operator must have the correct access level for handling (acknowledge or ignore) an alarm.
When an alarm occurs, the system shall display the alarm queue in front of all other active
windows to attract the attention of the operator.
The alarm presentation shall rank the alarms and show the highest priority alarms at the top.
The total number of alarms to be processed shall be displayed.
When multiple alarms are detected, the highest priority alarm shall be displayed at the top until
processed by the operator. Then the next highest priority alarm shall be displayed at the top

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
until processed. If a higher alarm is received before a lower priority alarm is processed, the
higher priority alarm shall install the lower one at the top. The lower one shall be kept in
memory to be processed afterwards. The operator shall have the capability of stepping /
scrolling thru the list of alarms and dealing with them in any order.
B. Configuration
The system shall allow an alarm to be configured to:
• Require or not require operator acknowledgment.
• Display a user defined text message upon event activation.
• Display a user defined text message when event is acknowledged.
• Be associated to an APSD so the window opens automatically on the
Monitoring Station when that event occurs.
• Allow the user to associate an audible alarm with an event.
C. Alarm Actions
The system shall allow an event to be configured to cause other system actions to occur.
These system actions shall include but not be limited to:
• Lock door(s) and/or door group(s).
• Unlock door(s) and/or door group(s)
• Activate reader(s).
• Deactivate reader(s).
• Activate event(s) and/or event group(s)
• Deactivate event(s) and/or event group(s)
• Activate output control relay(s) and/or output control relay group(s)
• Deactivate output control relay(s) and/or output control relay group(s)
D. Standard Alarm Points

At a minimum the system shall generate alarms for the following:
• Anti-Pass Back violations
• Rejected access requests
• D card related alarm (wrong PIN, etc.)
• Enclosure tampering
• Controller communication loss

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
• Reader tampering
• Reader communication loss
• AC power loss
• Low battery
E. Documentation of Alarm Response

In addition to acknowledge the alarm the operator shall be able to document the action that he
selected in response to the alarm by entering a text into an alarm response window.
F. Site Plan Graphics
The system shall be capable of creating user defined site plans, which include dynamically
updated icons or symbols representing Card readers and input/output points. Site maps shall
be able to be viewed at any of the operator workstations. Icons and symbols representing
Card readers and alarm points shall flash or change color dynamically depending on their
state. The site plan graphics shall be based a maps provided by COMPANY as AutoCAD.
Any site plan graphics shall be able to link with another by single click to enable overviews or
details.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide enough dynamic floor plan graphics to display all dynamic
elements (doors, gates, alarms). The graphics shall not be overloaded; the maximum number
of dynamic elements per floor plan graphics shall therefore be limited to 20.
G. Action After an Alarm is Detected
When the system detects an alarm, printer in the relevant security gate shall print out that
alarm
The associated site plan graphics shall automatically pop-up.
The system alarm monitor line shall display the alarm as text information in English and
Arabic.
H. Alarm Indication
An alarm condition shall be indicated by flashing icons or symbols changing colors (details
shall be decided during detail design phase).Each access point shall be clearly defined and
easy to locate on screen using individual icons or symbols.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
The status of an alarm shall be indicated as shown below (example):

Normal closed = icon for this status shows green color
Normal open = icon for this status shows green color
Forced open status = icon for this status is red flashing
Forced closed = icon for this status flashing green
Device open too long = icon for this status shows red color, not flashing
Device permanently open = icons for this status shows yellow color
Emergency opening = icon for this status shows pink color
Device alarm was acknowledged = icon for this status shows blue color
Using two different icons for displaying the status of a portal or a gate provides fast information
regarding whether the device is locked, unlocked, in alarm or controlled.
I. Manual Control of Access Point
The site plan graphics shall provide means for opening an access device manually by
clicking at the corresponding icon on the screen. This action shall be automatically logged
into the System log.
This shall be true for normal opening of the door or gate and for opening the device
permanently. Any status change of the access device shall result in a change in icon or
symbol.
• Clicking at an icon or symbol the following functions should be available:
• Display access point name and description
• Acknowledgment
• Resetting alarm
• Open/close an access control point
• Permanently open an access control point
• Emergency open all access points of this site

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
J. Alarm Log
Alarms shall be displayed on operator screen and printed out. Each alarm point shall have a
14 character identifier (minimum).
Each alarm shall be programmable as either an alarm or event. Events shall not be displayed
or printed out in alarm log but in event log.
The text output shall consist of: date stamp, time stamp, site ID, device ID, card ID, name of
card holder, alarm text, alarm priority, alarm category where applicable.
All alarms shall be automatically logged into the Alarm log.
2.12 KEYPADS
A. Designed for use with unique combinations of alphanumeric and other symbols as an
Identifier. Keys of keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbol
keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending ASCII-code ordinal sequence.
Communications protocol shall be compatible with Controller.
1. Duress Codes: Provide duress situation indication by entering a special code.
2.13 CARD READERS
A. Power: Card reader shall be powered from its associated Controller, including its standby
power source.
B. A built-in tamper switch shall secure electronics.
C. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal
that is sent to the Controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the
card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.
D. Two wires will be provided for data and two wires for power. The reader shall operate in a
bus or star or mixed configuration.
E. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi flushes, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall
additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:
1. Indoors, controlled environment.
2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the

operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site.
F. Display: LED or other type of visual indicator display shall provide visual [and audible]
status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on/off, whether user passage
requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked.
G. The reader head life shall be designed for greater than 1 million proximity accesses.
H. Touch Plate and Proximity Readers:
1. Active detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential
cards through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique
identification code number transmitted from the credential card.
2. Passive detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field
generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into
compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a
unique identification code number.
3. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from contact with to at least
150 mm from the reader.
2.14 BIOMETRIC READERS
A. Power: Reader shall be powered from its associated Controller, including its standby
power source.
B. Display: LED or other type of visual indicator display shall provide visual [and audible]
C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi flushes, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall
additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:
1. Indoors, controlled environment.
2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
D. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the operating
temperature range as needed for operation at the site.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Features:
1. Scanner Type: Optical sensor (500dpi) minimum requirement.
2. Communication Interface: RS485, TCP/IP LAN
3. Status Indication: By LED & Beeper
4. Radio Frequency: 125Khz
5. Verification Time: <1 sec
2.15 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC LOCK
The magnetic lock assembly is to be a F.S.H. weather resistant surface mounted

magnetic lock, part number FEM5000G with the following specifications as a minimum:
• Holding Force – 630kg
• Dual voltage 12/24 VDC:
• 12vDC @ 480mA
• 24vDC @ 240mA
• Monitoring – Integral Lock Status Sensor monitoring
• P66 rated for external use
2.16 ENROLLMENT CENTER
A. System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge
templates and images shall be in color, supporting the maximum color capability of
Microsoft Windows operating system.
B. Badge Configuration:
1. Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of
background and predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data
fields for text, and bar-code and biometric information. Include automatic sizing of
data fields placed on a badge to compensate for names, which may otherwise be
too large to fit in the area designated.
2. Allow different badge templates to be used for each department, tenant, or visitor.
3. As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on
the group the credential holder is assigned to. Allow the operator to override the

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
automatic template selection and use a template chosen by the operator for creating
a badge.
4. Setup shall determine which graphics and credential holder information will be
displayed and where on the card it will be placed. All data in the security access
system such as name, code, group, access level, and any of the 99 user-defined
fields shall be selectable, with the ability to place them anywhere on the card.
5. System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and
shapes that can be placed on the badge.
6. Allow multiple images on same badge, including, but not be limited to, bar codes,
digital photos, and signatures.
7. Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended
background, but not its immediate background.
2.17 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
A. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons, with stainless-steel

switch enclosures.
1. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush
mounting in the switch enclosures.
2. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
c. Outdoors.
3. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated Controller,
using dc control.
2.18 FLOOR SELECT ELEVATOR CONTROL (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Elevator access control shall be integral to security access.

1. System shall be capable of providing full elevator security and control through
dedicated Controllers without relying on the control-station host PC for elevator
control decisions.
2. Access-control system shall enable and disable car calls on each floor and floor
select buttons in each elevator car, restricting passengers' access to the floors
where they have been given access.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. System setup shall, through programming, automatically secure and unsecure each
floor select button of a car individually by time and day. Each floor select button
within a car shall be separately controlled so that some floors may be secure while
others remain unsecure.
4. When a floor select button is secure, it shall require the passenger to use his/her
access code and have access to that floor before the floor select button will operate.
The passenger's credential shall determine which car call and floor select buttons
are to be enabled, restricting access to floors unless authorized by system's access
code database. Floor select button shall be enabled only in the car where the
credential holder is the passenger.
B. Security access system shall record which call button is pressed, along with credential
and time information.
1. System Controller shall record elevator access data.
2. The Controller shall reset all additional call buttons that may have been enabled by
the user's credential.
3. The floor select elevator control shall allow for manual override either individually by
floor or by cab as a group from a workstation PC.
2.19 BIOMETRIC & CARD READER IN ONE UNIT (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Power: Reader shall be powered from its associated Controller, including its standby
power source.
B. Display: LED or other type of visual indicator display shall provide visual [and audible]
C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi flushes, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall
additionally be suitable for installation indoor and outdoor
D. Features:
1. Fingerprint: 500 dpi optical sensor as minimum requirement
2. Card reader: RF Card Mifare (13.56MHz)
3. Identification speed 2000 matches in 1 second.
4. Fingerprint capacity: 5000 fingerprints
5. Multi-color LED and multi-tone buzzer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. TCP/IP RS-485 network interface.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, Controllers, card
readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back
boxes before device installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 CABLING
A. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 28 05 13 "Conductors and

Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to requirements in Section 26 05 33
"Raceways & Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Section

26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA-606.
B. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks,
connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. Use logical and
systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.
C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular
device as shown.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected
and numbered within the panel or cabinet.
3.05 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Develop, install, and test software and databases for the complete and proper operation of
systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections. Report results in writing.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.
3.07 STARTUP SERVICE
C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup

service. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management,
and security personnel.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system
B. Develop separate training modules for the following:
1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and
databases and to update and maintain software.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and
workstations and to enroll personnel.
3. Security personnel.
4. Hardware maintenance personnel.
5. Corporate management.
A. Central Station, Workstations, and Controllers:

1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in original manufacturer's
sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 20 and 30 deg C, and not
more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list, and file copy of packing
list, complete with container identification for inclusion in operation and maintenance
data.
3. Mark packing list with designations that have been assigned to materials and
equipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by
cable and asset management system specified in Part 2.
4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as
directed under provisions covering extra materials.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 23 00
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – VIDEO
SURVEILLANCE
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 3

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ............................................................................................................. 3
1.02 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.03 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 4
1.05 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.06 QUALIFIED VENDORS .......................................................................................................... 6
1.07 DESIGN GUIDELINES ............................................................................................................ 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 7
2.01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 7
2.02 CAMERAS............................................................................................................................... 7
2.03 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR) ................................................................................ 9
2.04 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS) ............................................................................. 11
2.05 WORKSTATION.................................................................................................................... 11
2.06 MONITORS ........................................................................................................................... 12
2.07 REDUNDANT SERVER ........................................................................................................ 12
2.08 NETWORK SWITCH ............................................................................................................. 14
2.09 POWER SUPPLIES .............................................................................................................. 15
2.10 INTEGRATION ...................................................................................................................... 15
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 16
3.01 WIRING ................................................................................................................................. 16
3.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION ............................................................ 16
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................. 16
3.04 ADJUSTING .......................................................................................................................... 17
3.05 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................ 18
3.06 DEMONSTRATION ............................................................................................................... 18

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section includes the Video surveillance system consisting of cameras, data
transmission wiring, digital management, recording, storage and playback facilities,
and control stations with associated equipment.
B. The system shall be provided as a part of a fully integrated Security Management
System (SMS)
C. The SMS shall integrate CCTV, access control and other security related functions that
are specified for this project. It may require additional software, hardware and
associated equipment, including servers, storage, backup devices, field-installed
controllers, control and operator stations and system peripherals, and include all other
elements necessary to provide complete, working system.
D. The SMS shall in turn (if indicated on drawings) form part of a fully integrated overall
Facility Management / monitoring - Integrated Building Management/monitoring
System
E. The CCTV system shall utilize IP cameras residing on the project LAN as much as
practicable. In areas where LAN does not exist, other solutions are acceptable.
F. The system shall utilize Network Video Recorders residing on the project LAN and disk
arrays sized to meet stipulated storage capacity minimum 24 hours per 30 days, 5-12
frame/sec, and additional hardware and equipment to form complete working system.
G. The system shall also include: monitor LCDs, workstation, keypad, CCTV server, etc…
H. All software shall be delivered with licenses. This applies to system software as well as
application software, including Windows licenses, database licenses, Video
Management System licenses, etc… for the system operation.
1.02 REFERENCES

B. UL – Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.
UL983 Surveillance Cameras
C. ANSI – American National Standards Institute

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
ANSI208 Measurement of Resolution of Camera System

D. ISSD regulations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, data shall be submitted including the
following but not limited to: dimensions, features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom
assembled for specific application on this Project.
1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between
components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes.
2. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and
consoles. Show access and workspace requirements.
3. UPS: Sizing calculations (in case a separate UPS system is indicated for security
system)
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring, and grounding.
C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer,
serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each
piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of
adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of
alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators,
monitors, HDD, digital video recorders or network video recorder, video switches, and
control-station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
F. All issues related to safety and security should be subject to approval from ISSD
during detailed engineering design stage with the selected Contractor.
G. All related documents and specifications shall comply with ISSD regulations.
.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the
video surveillance system. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.
C. The security system shall be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully
compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems,
whether the security system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information
Technology (IT) computer network.
D. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL
E. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of 2
year from the date of substantial completion started from final Testing and
commissioning. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective
materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1.06 QUALIFIED VENDORS
A. Below are the qualified venders by ISSD for implementation of video surveillance
system:
1. United Technology
2. Siemens WLL
3. PKE Gulf WLL
4. LSS Technologies WLL
5. Bahrain& Kuwait Computer SE
6. Almoayed Group WLL
7. S3tel Incorporated (Foreign Branch)
1.07 DESIGN GUIDELINES
A. All cameras shall be mounted at a minimum height of 2.5m.

B. All conduits to be used shall be 25mm GI conduits.
C. Poles shall be of a minimum height of 5m from floor level.
D. ISSD is using Milestone Video Management System (Milestone 2017 R3). The System
servers for network video recorder shall be similar, and comply to the requirements of
ISSD elaborated in subsequent sections/items.
E. ISSD is using following makes of cameras:
1. Indoor Cameras (FLEXIDOME IP indoor 5000 HD) from Bosch
2. Outdoor Cameras (PTZ) - AUTODOME IP 5000 IR) from Bosch
3. Optera IMM Series with SureVision 2.0, 270° PANORAMIC, 12 MPX IP Cameras
from Pelco
4. Bullet Camera Mega View 2 from Arecont Vision
The cameras provided in the scope of this Tender shall be similar, unless newer models
of the above are available.
F. Local Network Video Recording System shall be provided at New System Control
Centre, with redundant Network Video Recording facility available at the Main Security
Control Centre of ISSD. Accordingly, the major storage of video recording shall be
available at the ISSD main storage, and only a limited storage shall be provided at the
New System Control Center.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to

equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or
sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry
connection to components. Shall follow the latest standards of NEMA, NFPA,
ANSI/UL.
B. Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Section 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY, as recommended by
manufacturer for type of line being protected.
C. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction
boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal
when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station, control-unit alarm
display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.
D. All video surveillance products/equipment listed in this specification and not limited to,
shall be as per Bahrain Ministry of Interior & EWA-ISSD regulations and must follow
any update to this regulation.
2.02 CAMERAS
A. Indoor Fixed Camera

1. Shall be as a minimum 3MP @ 12fps 1280x960 Resolution on Live View and
Recording modes .
2. Dual-codec: H.264 & MJPEG formats.
3. The camera shall have 3MP CMOS Progressive Scan Image Sensor for high
quality image and low noise for surveillance.
4. Variable-Focal lens CS, F1.8, 6.2mm,H-FOV = 47°.
5. Wide Dynamic Range up to 120dB
6. Vandal Resistant and IK-10 Rated Dome
7. Noise Reduction for clear image in low light environment
8. Day & Night with True Night Function and IR Cut Filter
9. Bit Rate Control, Privacy Mask and Multi-Streaming
10. It shall be possible to program the camera to output a variety of lower resolution
images
11. The camera shall have Auto Gain control, White balance mode, Back Light
Compensation.
12. The cameras shall be equipped with a 100Mbps LAN connector

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
13. The cameras shall be ONVIF compliant.

14. The cameras shall be Power over Ethernet type.
15. The cameras shall have forensic zooming.
16. Housing dome type with optional wall mount bracket
17. IR LED built-in, and capability of clear view in complete darkness.
18. Operating temperature -40°C (-40°F) to +65°C (149°F) w/fan
B. Outdoor Fixed Camera
1. Shall be as a minimum 5MP @ 15fps Resolution and be 2MP @ 1280x960
resolution in Live View and Recording Modes.
2. Dual-codec: H.264 & MJPEG formats.
3. The camera shall have 3MP CMOS Progressive Scan Image Sensor for high
quality image and low noise for surveillance.
4. 4.5–10mm vari-focal lens with IR correction
5. 3-axis bracket
7. The cameras shall have external lens adjustment and extended motion
detection.
8. 5-megapixel CMOS image sensor.
9. 48 pcs 850nm LEDs/25 meter IR distance (max)/45° IR angle
10. Wide Dynamic Range up to 120dB
11. Noise Reduction for clear image in low light environment
12. IR 40 pcs 850nm LED built-in with illumination distance of 25 meters and 45° IR
angle and capability of clear view in complete darkness.
13. Day & Night with True Night Function and IR Cut Filter
14. The cameras shall have Image enhancement feature.
15. The cameras shall have auto-gain control and white balance mode.
16. The cameras shall be equipped with a 100Mbps LAN connector
18. The cameras shall be Power over Ethernet type.
19. The cameras shall have Outdoor weather proof and vandal resistant dome
housing (IP 66) rating.
C. PTZ Cameras (Pan-Tilt-Zoom)
1. The cameras shall be IP, Day/Night type and as a minimum 3MP @ 12fps
1280x960 resolution in Live View and Recording Modes.
2. CMOS progressive scan sensor.
3. Pan 360° continuous rotation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4. H.264/MJPEG, configurable dual stream encoder.

5. CS, F1.8, 6.2mm,H-FOV = 47°
6. IR LED built-in with a minimum illumination distance of 100 meters, and
capability of clear view in complete darkness.
7. 3MP with 30x (4.3 to 129mm) optical zoom, 10x digital zoom and forensic
zooming.
9. 10/100Mbps Ethernet compatible; RJ-45 Lan port.
10. Supports RTP/RTSP Unicast/Multicast
11. Variable Bit Rate and Constant Bit Rate
12. PTZ Data RS-422,
13. OSD Display of Camera ID, PTZ Coordinates
14. Bracket / Pole Concealed cable entry within the bracket / pole
16. For Outdoor type: shall have Outdoor weather proof and vandal resistant dome
housing (IP 66) rating.
2.03 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR)
A. Shall record video to a hard drive-based digital storage medium in M-JPEG, MPEG-4
or H.264 format.
B. Shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. All cameras shall be recorded for minimum 30 days at 15 fps for motion detection
recording
2. Device shall record at full frame up to 60 seconds (user-selectable from 5 - 60
sec) of pre-alarm and up to 60 seconds of post alarm video from the CCTV
cameras covering the zone in the alert/alarm state.
3. Two (2) minute buffer for each camera (for video storage of pre-alarm and post
alarm).
4. Operate in 24/7 mode, 365 per year.
5. On board RAID-5 support.
6. On-Board Battery backup in the event that the AC cord is removed.
7. Dual hot swappable power supply.
8. All monitors shall be LCD monitors.
9. CD/DVD writer/layer media.
10. 10/100/1000 GB Ethernet transmission.
11. SNMP Network Management and Control.
12. If one NVR is used per site, the controlling server shall be redundant.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
13. Flexible and scalable CCTV management system in an easy to use versatile
design.
14. View, record, control cameras, handle alarms and check device status through
one interface.
15. Simultaneously view and record video from up to 32 different video sources
16. Field replaceable hard drives, accessible via the front without uninstalling the unit
from the application.
17. Manual export and backup of video via USB device, DVD or network.
18. Two (2) monitor outputs on VGA, CVBS, and Y/C outputs
19. Shall be IP addressable.
20. High performance dual core microprocessor.
21. Synchronized playback of multiple recording.
22. Storage browser presents recording and associated alarms on a time line.
23. Global view of multiple recorders in the network.
24. Single click snapshot for visual verification, printing and sending.
25. Search criteria such as camera, location, time, alarm …etc.
26. The video archive exported from the recorder should be in multiple formats like
avi, mov, mkv etc.
27. All videos should be played using general open standard video players.
28. Support alarm and event triggered recording.
29. Possibility to check the validity and authentication of the exported material. (This is
used to proof that the recording is original and not tempered in case of any
criminal activity and for the law of court).
30. A Central Management Server Appliance shall manage the Storage System with
Server and Client Software capable of receiving Video Alarms.
31. System shall provide the highest level of reliability & availability to the video
surveillance application with 99.9% availability
32. The storage system must provide the ability to change the protection settings on
the fly while in production with no downtime.
33. System must be able to delete or rename permission settings, which cannot be
changed from the client computer’s operating system.
34. The system must be able to change available space of each directory in the same
namespace within the system, without any downtime and cannot be changed from
the client computer’s operating system.
35. Must have an automatic alarm system to notify the administrator of the system
health status anytime by either Email or SMS Text
C. NVR technical characteristics shall be of the latest technology and best quality
available in the market.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.04 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS)
A. Key Features
1. System shall be open IP based platform for video managing, streaming,
transmission, switching and recording.
2. Video Management system shall be modular system for surveillance application
containing video streams, transmission, switches, recording and video
management.
3. Management and control of unlimited video streams across the network
4. Integration to Gigabit Ethernet backbone to provide multicasting and quality of
service.
5. Network design to allow for dynamic bandwidth control between network nodes
and system resilience and redundancy.
6. Decoding of the video streams and still pictures to the internet.
7. Remote real time monitoring control for diagnostics and maintenance
8. The Intuitive GUI shall allow user to show only the dialogs preferred or needed
or surveillance tasks or hide them all for a pure full screen mode of viewing if
desired.
9. The software shall offer new innovative combination of tools for improving the
user’s expansion and efficiency on the job, which translate to more rapid
response and better security.
10. Public/Private video switching – In Public mode video shall be available for all
user having access rights to the camera, In private mode video is available for
users having the access right to both the camera and the camera current
position. This is very important for viewing the areas that are not seen by all
operators.
11. Multiple language support: Let operators use the system in their native language
with minimum support for Arabic and English languages.
2.05 WORKSTATION
A. Minimum requirements
1. Intel xeon CPU E5-2603 V3 or the higher version
2. 16 GB RAM
3. 100/1000 Mbps NIC
4. Latest operating system
5. Proprietary hardware platforms are not acceptable.
6. Equipped by a USB joystick for an easy operation.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.06 MONITORS
A. Full High resolution (1920 * 1080p) LED screens with high contrast ratio shall be
provided. LED screens shall be built for 24/7 application.
B. Screen size shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.07 REDUNDANT SERVER
A. Database server
1. The system shall utilize redundant database server pair (using two separate
database servers executed on separate computers in the system) containing a
database of all network-connected cameras and their configuration. The backup
database server shall be continuously synchronized with the master database
server to ensure that it is always up-to-date and ready for a fail-over, when
required.
2. The database server shall:
a. Manage the system database, containing details including
1) System configuration
2) Camera configuration and settings
3) Recording configuration and settings.
4) Configuration of split / multiple views and sequences
5) Schedules and details of recordings
6) Operator security details
7) Configuration of surveillance and Alarm Monitors
8) Configuration of Video Motion Detection
9) Manage communication between the operator stations and the video

servers
10) Allow alarms/events in the SMS to initiate recordings
11) Report any camera failures or recording failures to the integrated SMS
12) Provide a full audit log of all system status (camera, server availability) and
operator actions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. The database duplication must be performed on a per-transaction basis to ensure

that the duplicated backup database is consistent at all times with the Primary
database, and to avoid unnecessary loading of video servers caused by duplicate
polling.
4. It must be possible to remove one of the redundant systems for maintenance
without interrupting operation, and upon its reinstatement, re-synchronize the
databases, again without interruption to system operation.
5. The database server shall be able to operate with no performance degradation
using the following hardware and operating system configuration:
a. Intel xeon CPU E5-2603 V3 or the higher version
b. 16 GB RAM
c. Hard Disk storage minimum 10TB on RAID 5 configuration to meet application
software functions requirements.
d. 100/1000 Mbps NIC for network connection to the other components of the
DVRMS
e. Latest windows (64 bit) server edition
f. The database server must provide the following system fault tolerance:
1) Support RAID 1, 3 and 5 for the Operating System
2) Support RAID 0+1 and 1 for the DVM database (SQL Server 2000)
g. If equivalent hardware is proposed then the supplier must demonstrate

compatibility of software. Proprietary hardware platforms are not acceptable.
B. Video server
1. The system shall utilize redundant video server pair (using two separate video
servers executed on separate computers in the system).The video servers must be
capable of supporting a large amount of disk space for video storage and access to
high capacity archiving mechanisms for the removal of stored.
2. The Video Server shall:
a. Manage live video from cameras.
b. Transmit live video to operator stations.
c. Receive camera control commands from operator stations and then send the
commands to cameras.
d. Store live video to hard disk.
e. Transmit previously stored video to operator stations.
f. Archive previously stored video to storage media
g. Retrieve archived video from storage media
h. Provide video motion detection

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
i. Export the recordings into format that can be viewed using standard tools.
3. The video servers shall rely on the database servers for all camera database
information.
4. The system shall support multiple video servers, with no limit to the number of
servers used in the DVM system.
5. It must be possible to remove one of the redundant systems for maintenance
without interrupting operation, and upon its reinstatement, re-synchronize the
databases, again without interruption to system operation.
6. The video server shall be able to operate with no performance degradation using
the following hardware and operating system configuration:
a. Intel xeon CPU E5-2603 V3 or higher version
b. 16 GB RAM
c. Hard Disk storage minimum 10TB on RAID 5 configuration to meet application
software functions requirements
d. 100/1000 Mbps NIC for network connection to the other components of the
DVRMS
e. Latest windows (64 bit) server edition
f. The database server must provide the following system fault tolerance:
• Support RAID 0+1, 1, 3 and 5 for the Operating System
• Support RAID 0+1 and 1 for the DVM database (SQL Server
2000)
g. For the failure of a video server, all cameras which were managed by that
video server shall be able to be dynamically re-allocated to other video
servers. This shall only be done through the DVM software, without requiring
changes to cabling or the network.
h. If equivalent hardware is proposed then the supplier must demonstrate
compatibility of software. Proprietary hardware platforms are not acceptable.
2.08 NETWORK SWITCH
C. Network Switch to be used shall comply with the following and all port should be
1Gbps (PoE):
• Layer 3 Switch
• Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
• Turbo Ring Ver.2
• VLANS
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Compatibility
• SFP Compatible
• Web GUI

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.09 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Power supplies shall be a low-voltage power supplies matched for voltage and current
requirements of cameras and accessories, type as recommended by camera, infrared
illuminator, and lens manufacturer.
2.10 INTEGRATION
A. The system shall be fully integrated and connected to EWA-ISSD Security System in
order EWA-ISSD has full control of the system.
B. It shall be possible to manage and configure the NVR and its related hardware
remotely, copy historical information such as alarms and video from its database to
industry database format such as SQL or Oracle.
C. As New SCC Building shall have fibre optic connectivity on the EWA’s telecom
network under the scope of this Tender, it shall be used to establish the data
transmission network with the EWA-ISSD Security System. All necessary equipment,
e.g., ethernet switches, etc… shall be provided to exchange the necessary data with
EWA-ISSD Security System.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in cable trunks, EMT exposed conduit in ceiling and
above false ceiling and embedded in walls or otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding for video equipment.
3.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.

B. Install cameras with 2100-mm minimum clear space below cameras and their
mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.
C. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged
to detect unauthorized entry into system component enclosures, and mounted in self-
protected, inconspicuous positions.

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise
pretesting, testing, and adjusting of video surveillance equipment.
B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and
labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to
verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting
levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video surveillance
equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. Prepare equipment list described in Part 1 "Submittals" Article.
2. Verify operation of auto-focus lenses.
3. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate
nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a
clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.
4. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting
conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image.
Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in
place.
5. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.
6. Set sensitivity of motion detection.
7. Connect and verify responses to alarms.
8. Verify operation of control-station equipment.
D. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a
minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.
E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies
with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper
operation in all functional modes.
F. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above.
G. Record test results for each piece of equipment.
H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions and to optimize performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Check cable connections.
2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-focus
lenses and adjust as needed.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve
Owner' utilization of video surveillance system.
5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
B. Clean video surveillance system components, including camera-housing windows,
lenses, and monitor screens.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video surveillance equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of
components and settings for system controls.
3. Review equipment list and data in maintenance manuals.
4. Conduct a minimum of six hours' training.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 4

1.01 SECTION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................. 4
1.02 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.03 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................ 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 8
2.02 FACP ............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES ................................................................................................. 12
2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS ................................................................................................ 12
2.05 HEAT DETECTORS ................................................................................................................... 14
2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES ................................................................................................... 14
2.07 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS ........................................................................ 15
2.08 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ......................................................................................................... 15
2.09 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE ...................................................................................... 15
2.10 PANIC BAR ................................................................................................................................. 16
2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.12 WIRE AND CABLE ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.13 AIR SAMPLING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 17
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 23
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. ................................................................................................... 23
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 23
3.03 IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................ 24
3.04 GROUNDING .............................................................................................................................. 24
3.06 ADJUSTING ................................................................................................................................ 25
3.07 AIR SAMPLING DETECTION ..................................................................................................... 26

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.08 DEMONSTRATION ..................................................................................................................... 28

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION DESCRIPTION
A. This section consists of furnishing, installing and testing of a complete addressable fire
alarm system.
B. Fire alarm system shall report all alarm signals to the MFACP located at security room
C. The building will be divided into three parts: The Datahall, the non-critical areas, the
critical areas covered with gas suppression except the Datahall.
D. The Datahall & the non-critical areas shall be covered with addressable smoke detectors
loop for notification
E. The Datahall shall be covered with a clean agent release panel that is connected to two
smoke detection zones.
F. For other critical areas only the gas release panels that are connected to two smoke
detections zones shall be present
G. All gas release panels, and air sampling detection panels shall have addressable modules
to connect through a loop to the MFACP
H. Audio and visual notification shall be arranged to distinguish between gas suppression,
pre-action and common base building alarms.
I. All devices in the gas suppression and pre-action zones shall be labeled for their
respective function
J. NFPA style 6 Fault isolators shall be installed before and after each protected zone and
after every 20 devices.
1.02 REFERENCES

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
B. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
UL864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling systems
UL38 Manual signaling boxes for fire alarm system

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
UL268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL464 Audible signal appliances
UL521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL1971 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
UL1424 Cables for power-limited fire alarm circuits
UL2196 Tests for fire resistive cables
1.03 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method
of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for
manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's
standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes cable and wire types and
sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment
and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color
code.
6. Batteries: Size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each
detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
8. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
9. Calculations for the air sampling smoke detection system.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A,
recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for
mounting at the FACP.
F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: make during the period of construction an
identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of
annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if
required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments
from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Client for review.
G. Upon completion of construction work make a submittal of the final as-built drawings to
the Authorities Having Jurisdiction for their approval for the purpose of their inspection and
testing of the fire alarm system installations.
H. Documentation:
1. Record of Completion Documents: Submit the "Permanent Records" according to
NFPA 72
a. Electronic media may be provided to the Client, and concerned local fire authority.
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100 and acceptable to authorities of the local fire Authority.
C. For air sampling smoke detection system, The Laser Detection Chamber shall be of the
mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types
of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of:
1. Preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.
2. Monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify when
maintenance is required.
D. A smoke-hours method shall be used for the purpose of monitoring contamination of the
filter (dust & dirt etc.) to automatically notify when maintenance is required.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
E. The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from
the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical detector optics to eliminate internal
detector contamination.
F. The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from that set during
commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to ensure the best selection of
appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process.
G. The vendor shall submit an undertaking from the manufacturer of equipment to assure us
that all spare parts and consumables will be available for 10 years life span of the
equipment.
H. Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped)
shipment.
I. Third party assemblers who purchase vendors components and assemblies in lieu of on-
J. All products shall be rated to work under 50-55 degrees Celsius ambient conditions
K. The above conditions (H,I and J items), shall superseded all other statements,
documents.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Flame detectors.
4. Smoke detectors.
5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
7. Fire extinguishing system operation.
8. Fire standpipe system.
B. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators (repeaters).
3. De-energize electromagnetic door holders.
4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode.
9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated.
10. Record events in the system memory.
11. Record events by the system printer.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tampers.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and
notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.

6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator (repeater).
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system.
11. Fault or trouble signal from the air sampling smoke detection system (ASD).
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
FACP and remote annunciator (repeater). Record the event on system printer.
2.02 FACP
A. General Description:
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed and/or EN/BS
compliant.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
3. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.
4. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range
of the device.
5. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the
programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three lines of 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control
of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
2. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, emergency voice communications,
annunciation, smoke control, elevator recall, and actuation of suppression systems
shall occur within 20 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.
2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E. Elevator Controls: Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator machine room
shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt trip
circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator (repeater).
F. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the
dc component shall be from the ac supply.
G. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and
remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and
activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is
retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification
appliances until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
H. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of
initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP
and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing
ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return
to normal.
I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and
control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-
scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory,

and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.
J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble,
and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator
transmitter and telephone lines.
K. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in
terminal unit.
1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes and
system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted
password algorithm.
L. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble),
and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed
indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for device,
location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal and supervisory signal shall
be powered by the 24-V dc source.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of
the power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the
service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM POWER."
N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger
and an automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of
the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL 38 listed and/or EN/BS compliant; finished in red with molded, raised-
letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of
operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide
manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Manual Station: breaking-glass type with integral addressable module, arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
2. All outdoor breaking-glass shall be outdoor type IP65, with aluminum enclosure.
2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Description:
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:
a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 3 m according to UL 464.
c. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the
fixed base for connection of building wiring.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-
on status.
6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 8 or 11
deg C per minute.
b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall
be settable at the FACP to operate at 57 or 68 deg C.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Multiple levels between 0.2% and 3.7% per feet of smoke
obscuration.
3. UL 268 listed.
C. Ionization Smoke Detector :( Used where indicated deliberately; otherwise use
photoelectric)
1. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-
compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Multiple levels between 0.5% and 1.3% per feet of smoke
obscuration.
3. UL 268 listed.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Multiple levels between 0.2% and 3.7% per feet of smoke
obscuration.
2. Ionization Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-
compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Multiple levels between 0.5% and 1.3% per feet of smoke
obscuration.
3. UL 268A listed.
5. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be
designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector.
The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
6. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.
7. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-
on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station where indicated.
8. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
9. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
10. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
11. Relay Fan Shutdown: Controlled by FACP. Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.05 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General: UL 521 listed.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C or
rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 8 deg C per minute, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 88 deg C.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. 254-mm size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.
D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.
E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA,
measured 3 m from the horn.
F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 25-mm high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 Candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
2.07 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is
flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification
plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal
and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the
identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow
switch.
2.08 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and
trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including
acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, unless indicted specifically otherwise on the drawings.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP.
Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing
functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
2.09 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address
for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall for designated level and to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown
2.10 PANIC BAR
A. Mounted on all fire exit doors from inside. (all fire exit doors shall be with no handle from
outside)
B. Suitable for use on single and double door applications
C. Self-handed - will suit both left and right handed doors
D. One or two point locking for extra security
E. Equipped with an Electric Latch Retraction so it electrically retracts latch bolt(s) when
energized by power supply
F. Equipped with a Monitor Switch that monitors movement of touch bar and used to signal
an external light, horn etc…
2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
2.12 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system
manufacturer but not less than No. 18 AWG.
1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI,
for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with
requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-
coded insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multi-conductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN
conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red
identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and
complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
2.13 AIR SAMPLING SYSTEM
A. The air sampling smoke detection system shall be installed throughout the areas
nominated on the drawings.
B. The system consists of highly sensitive laser based smoke detector using aspirated air
sampling and is connected to sampling pipes. It shall be provided with sample pipe inlet,
internal flow monitoring, smoke detection and a facility for exhaust pipe connection.
Reset, disable, test and fault determination functions will be available via the field service
access door. System configuration will be provided through AutoLearn Smoke and Flow
functions, also available via the field service access door.
C. The system shall support Pre-Engineered sampling pipe network designs with verified
calculations in addition to custom sampling pipe network designs using a computer based
design modeling tool. Sampling pipe material shall be UL 1887 approved for use in air
sampling smoke detection systems.
D. The Very Early Warning Smoke Detection System must be of a type submitted to, tested,
approved, and/or listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.
E. The smoke detector shall be installed to comply with one or more of the following codes or
standards:
1. Fire Industry Association (FIA), Code of Practice for Design, Installation,
Commissioning & Maintenance of Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) Systems
2. NFPA Standards.
F. System Description
1. Design Requirements
a. The detector shall consist of a highly sensitive laser based smoke detector, an
aspirator, and a filter. The detection unit (if applicable) shall also include a
scanning valve mechanism to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
b. The detector shall have control switches for Reset, Disable, Test and restricted
access switches for Alarm Setup and Flow Setup.
c. It shall be modular, with each detector optionally monitored by a Display featuring
LEDs and a sounder. The system shall be configured by a Programmer that is
either integral to the system, portable or PC based. The system shall allow
programming of:
1) Four smoke threshold alarm levels.
2) Time delays.
3) Faults including airflow, detector, power, filter and network as well as an

indication of the urgency of the fault.
4) Seven or twelve configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and
fault conditions.
d. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection
system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modeling tool
approved by manufacturer.
e. Optional equipment shall include (if applicable) intelligent remote displays and/or a
high level interface with the building fire alarm system.
2. Performance Requirements
a. The detector shall be tested and approved to cover up to the required area as
shown on drawings.
b. The detector shall be approved to provide very early warning smoke detection and
provide up to four output levels corresponding to Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2.
These levels shall be programmable and able to be set at sensitivities ranging from
0.005-20% obs/m (0.0015–6% obs/ft) as indicated on drawings.
c. The detector shall provide fault indication on the unit & report fault using
configurable fault relay outputs.
d. The detector shall be self-monitoring for filter contamination.
e. The detector shall provide staged airflow faults via the use of a flow sensor in the
pipe inlet port.
G. Detector Assembly

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The Detector, Filter, Aspirator and Relay Outputs shall be housed in a mounting box
and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn from the fire risk area and a
sample passed through the Dual Stage Filter and Detector by the Aspirator.
2. If indicated on drawings, the detection unit shall also include a scanning valve
mechanism to identify which sampling pipe is carrying smoke. The valve mechanism
shall:
a. Be integrated into the detector
b. Begin to sample each pipe individually upon detection of smoke
c. Be used to identify the level of smoke in each pipe
d. Be used to indicate in which pipe an alarm was first detected
e. Operate upon manual activation of the scan button on the VLS display
f. Be automatically tested fortnightly to ensure uninterrupted protection
3. The system shall utilize the principle of sampling all sectors simultaneously. When a
scan smoke level is reached, an automatic sequence shall be initiated to sample each
sector individually. If an alarm threshold level is reached a First Alarm Sector is
indicated and signalled. The unit shall then continue its sequence monitoring until the
smoke level signal reduces below the scan level.
4. The Detector shall have four independent field programmable smoke alarm thresholds
across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0-
60 seconds.
5. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault either via a relay or via
a communication card.
6. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be
capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second
stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3
microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detector’s optics to prevent
contamination and increase service life.
7. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed aspirator assembly.
8. The Assembly shall be able to be surface mounted to a wall or recessed in the wall
cavity (the unit may be inverted in either option).
9. The assembly must contain relays for basic alarm and fault conditions. The relays shall
be software programmable (latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 A
at 30 VDC.
10. The assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall have separate
event log storage for smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (zone) shall be capable
of storing up to 12,000 events.
H. Displays
1. The detector will be provided with LED indicators.
2. Each Detector shall provide the following features at a minimum:
a. Alert, Action, Fire 1 and Fire 2 corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the
detector.
b. Circular Smoke Dial display to represent the level of smoke present in protected
area.
c. Fault indicator.
d. Power indicator.
e. Disabled indicator.
f. Buttons supporting the following features shall be accessible to authorized
personnel:
1) Reset – (press and release) un-latches all latched alarm and faults.
2) Disable – (press and release) disables the fire relay outputs from actuating and
indicates a fault.
3) Test – (press and release) simulates a Fire 1 condition.
3. Each Detector shall have a display module if applicable.

I. Programmers (If required)
1. A Programmer module may be located within the detector, a remote mounting box, a
19 inch remote rack, or in a portable hand-held unit. Alternatively, programming may
be performed using a Windows® application running on a PC connected through a
High Level Interfacing unit (PC-Link HLI).
2. Each Programmer shall support the following features at a minimum:
a. Programming of any device on the system.
b. Viewing of the status of any device in the system.
c. Adjustment of the alarm thresholds for each pipe (sector).
d. Software configuration for either 7 or 12 relays
e. Setting of Day/Night, weekend and holiday sensitivity threshold settings.
f. Initiation of Auto Learn, to automatically configure the detector’s alarm threshold
settings to suit the current environment.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
g. Multi-level password control.

h. Programmable latching or non-latching relay operation.
i. Programmable energized or de-energized relays.
j. Programmable high and low flow settings for airflow supervision.
k. Programmable aspirator speed control.
l. Programmable maintenance intervals.
m. Facilities for referencing with time dilution compensation.
n. Testing of relays assigned to a specific zone to aid commissioning.
J. Device Networking Requirements (If required)
1. The devices in the smoke detection system shall be capable of communicating with
each other via twisted pair RS485 cable. The network shall be able to support up to
200 devices (detectors, displays and programmers), of which 100 detectors can be
supported.
2. The network shall be capable of being configured in a fault tolerant loop for both short
circuit and open circuit. Any communication faults shall be reported unambiguously
and shall be clearly attributable to an individual device or wire link in the fault
messages.
3. PC based configuration tools shall be available to configure and manage the network
of detectors.
K. Initial Detection Alarm Settings
1. Initial settings for the alarm levels shall be determined by the requirements of the fire
zone. Default settings of the unit shall be:
a. Alarm Level 1 (Alert) 0.08% obs/m (0.025% obs/ft)
b. Alarm Level 2 (Action) 0.14% obs/m (0.0448% obs/ft)
c. Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1) 0.20% obs/m (0.0625% obs/ft)
d. Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2) 2.0% obs/m (0.625% obs/ft)
L. Fault Alarms
1. The Detector Fault relay shall be connected to the appropriate alarm zone on the Fire
Alarm Control Panel (FACP) in such a way that a Detector Fault would register a fault
condition on the FACP. The fault relay shall also be connected to the appropriate
control system.
M. Power Supply and Batteries

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. The system shall be powered from a regulated supply of nominally 24V DC. The
battery charger and battery shall comply with the relevant Codes, Standards or
Regulations. Typically 24 hours standby battery backup is required followed by 30
minutes in an alarm condition.
N. Sampling Pipe Design
1. Sampling Pipe
a. The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore. Normally, pipe with an outside diameter
(OD) of 25mm or 1.05” and internal diameter (ID) of 21mm or ¾” should be used
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
b. The pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed.
c. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement,
except at entry to the detector.
d. The pipe shall be identified as Air Sampling/Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe (or
similar wording) along its entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the
manufacturer’s recommendation or that of local codes and standards.
e. All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5m (5ft) centers, or that of the local
codes or standards.
f. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted with an end-cap and made
air-tight by using solvent cement. Usage of an end-cap as a hole will be dependent
on calculations.
2. Sampling Holes
a. Sampling holes shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance
allowed for conventional point detectors as specified in the local codes and
standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations.
b. Consideration shall be given to the manufacturer’s recommendations and
standards in relation to the number of sampling points and the distance of the
sampling points from the ceiling or roof structure and forced ventilation systems.
c. Sample port size shall be as specified by calculations.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION.
A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 10 meters between smoke detectors and 7
meters between heat detectors.
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for
high ceiling areas, shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in
NFPA 72.
B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than one meter from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
C. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler
water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing
position.
E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
F. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
G. FACP: Surface mounted with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
H. Annunciator (Repeater): Install with top of panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway if exposed and in pvc raceways if
embedded in slab according to section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems."

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wire or cable.
B. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring
associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Type MI, is not
permitted.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the
same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits unless separated properly as
recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to
the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

B. Paint the power-supply disconnecting switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.04 GROUNDING

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire
from main service ground to the FACP.

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using
the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.
Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct
supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at
Level III.
3. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.
4. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built
drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located,
damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
5. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
6. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration
of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm
system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform
tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test the
fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA
72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods.
Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.07 AIR SAMPLING DETECTION
A. The Capillary Sampling Network

1. Where false ceilings are installed, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the
ceiling, and Capillary Sampling Points shall be installed on the ceiling and connected
by means of a capillary tube.
2. The typical internal diameter of the capillary tube shall be 5mm or 3/8”, the maximum
length of the capillary tube shall be 8m (26 ft) unless the manufacturer in consultation
with the engineer have specified otherwise.
3. The Capillary tube shall terminate at a Ceiling Sampling Point specifically designed
and approved by the manufacturer. The performance characteristics of the Sampling
Points shall be taken into account during the system design.
B. Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations
1. Air Sampling Pipe Network Calculations shall be provided by Air Sampling Pipe
Network modeling program. Pipe network calculations shall be supplied with the
proposed pipe layout design to indicate the following performance criteria
a. Transport Time: Wherever possible the transport time (i.e. the time taken by smoke
sampled to reach the detector) for the least favorable sampling point shall be less
than 60 seconds for open hole sampling and less than 90 seconds for capillary
tubes. Longer transport times may be tolerated where long pipe runs are required
and where local codes and standards permit.
b. Balance %: The sample point balance for the pipe shall not be less than 70% as
indicated. That is, the volume of air drawn from the last sampling point shall not be
less than 70% of the average volume of air through the other holes.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
C. Commissioning Tests
1. The contractor shall allow for the manufacturer’s representative to attend
commissioning of the entire installation in the presence of the owner and/or its
representative.
2. All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labor shall be provided by the
Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these
results shall be retained on site in the System Log Book.
D. System Checks
1. Visually check all pipes to ensure that all joints, fittings, bends, sampling points, etc.,
comply with the Specification.
2. Check the system to ensure the following features are operational and programmed in
accordance with the specification.
a. Alarm threshold levels (for both day and night settings).
b. Detector address,
c. Time and date,
d. Time delays,
e. Air flow fault thresholds,
f. External buttons operable
g. Referencing (if used)
h. Units set to U.S./S.I. (for US only) or metric for other regions
3. Check to ensure that all ancillary warning devices operate as specified.
a. Check interconnection with Fire Alarm Control Panel to ensure correct operation.
4. Tests
a. Introduce smoke into the detector assembly to provide a basic Go / No-Go
functional test.
b. Verify that transport time from farthest sampling port does not exceed the local
code requirements.
c. Activate the appropriate Fire Alarm zones and advise all concerned that the system
is fully operational. Fill out the logbook and commissioning report accordingly.

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3.08 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices.
END OF SECTION

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
EPC Works for Establishment of New System Control Center
APPROVED VENDOR LIST

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1 General
1.1 All vendors should have ISO 9000 QC Certificate, valid for particular facility and equipment.
1.2 Procurement of a product made by a manufacturer not listed in Sections 2 - 4 of this document is not allowed without
approval, Requests for approval of an alternate manufacturer must be supported by documentation identifying how the
alternate manufacturer would better serve the OWNER over the manufacturers listed in this standard. All vendors, not
listed in this document, shall submit ISO 9000 certificates for pre-qualification and approval.
1.3 If the request to procure from an alternate manufacturer is not approved, the OWNER is under no obligation to present
the reasons for the refusal.
1.4 Only products manufactured in Europe (CE stamped) or the United States (UL stamped) are approved. Products made
in China, Taiwan or any other similar Origin are not accepted. Certificate of Country of Origin shall be submitted with the
product at delivery to the site for inspection by the Engineer
1.5 The prequalified vendor lists in Sections 2, 3 & 4 shall be followed.
2 PREQUALIFIED VENDORS FOR CCTV SYSTEM

• UNITED TECHNOLOGY
• PKE GULF WLL
• LSS TECHNOLOGIES WLL
• BAHRAIN & KUWAIT COMPUTER SERVICES (BKCS)
• SIEMENS WLL
• ALMOAYED GROUP WLL
• S3TEL INCORPORATED (FOREIGN BRANCH)
• OLIVE SOLUTIONS (RESTRATA)
• THALES
APPROVED VENDORS’ LIST REV 09/07/19

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
3 LIST OF EWA APPROVED VENDORS FOR TRANSFORMER & RMU
OIL FILLED TRANSFORMERS UP TO 1000 kVA
APPROVED PRE-
MANUFACTURER VENDOR
QUALIFIED
NO
1 Federal, UAE  KHAYBER TRADING
2 Emirates, UAE.  Y.K. ALMOAYYED
3 Saudi Transformers, K.S.A.  UNEECO
OIL FILLED TRANSFORMERS UP TO 1500 kVA
APPROVED PRE-
MANUFACTURER VENDOR
NO QUALIFIED
1 Saudi Transformers, KSA  UNEECO
2 Emirates, UAE  Y.K. ALMOAYYED
3 Federal, UAE  KHAYBER TRADING
SILICONE FILLED TRANSFORMERS UP TO 1500 kVA
APPROVED PRE-
MANUFACTURER VENDOR
QUALIFIED
NO
1 Federal, UAE  EUROTURBINE
2 Emirates, UAE.  Y.K. ALMOAYYED
3 EHN, Netherlands  Y.K. ALMOAYYED
4 Saudi Transformers, K.S.A.  UNEECO

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
CAST RESIN TRANSFORMERS UP TO 1500 kVA
APPROVED PRE-
MANUFACTURER VENDOR
QUALIFIED
NO
1 Areva T&D (Alstom), Turkey  CAPITAL GROUP
RING MAIN UNITS (SF6)
APPROVED PRE-
MANUFACTURER VENDOR
QUALIFIED
NO
1 Schneider, Merlin Gerin - France  UNEECO
2 W. Lucy, U.K.  SHAHEEN GROUP
ABDUL AAL / SHAHEEN

3 Lucy, U.A.E. 
GROUP

Tender No: 4605/2019/3100
4 LIST OF MEP CONTRACTORS
ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS AT EWA SUBSTATIONS
CATEGORY
NO CONTRACTOR
Electrical Works Air Conditioning Drainage/Plumbing
Works
1 Alkomed Engineering do do do
2 Kartech Services SPC do do do
3 Almoayed Air-Conditioning do do do
4 Yatheem Air-Conditioning do do do
5 Ameri Electrical Services do ----- -----
Al kooheji Electrical Contractors do

6 ----- -----
& Construction
Note: The above is the list of MEP Contractors working on EWA's projects. However, this list changes
from time to time depending on the performance and loading of those contractors.

HIDD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

HIDD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HIDD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TENDER NO: 4605/2019/3100

EPC WORKS FOR ESTABLISHMENT OF NEW

PART 1: GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 4

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 2 of 49

2.19 CONTROL VALVES ............................................................................................. 37

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 3 of 49

A. This Specification is intended to define the minimum functional, configuration and

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 4 of 49

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers / Installers

a. The entire Building Automation System shall be approved and listed by

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 5 of 49

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 6 of 49

1.05 SURGE / TRANSIENT PROTECTION

1.06 DUAL SOURCE OF POWER

1.07 24V TRANSFORMER

B. This Transformer shall be sized to support the power load needed

1.08 CABLE SPECIFICATION

1.09 SYSTEM STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION

A. Provide the following system components:

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 7 of 49

4. Main Operator Workstations - (PC, Monitor, Printer).

1.10 EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS

1.11 EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 8 of 49

2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

A. Security shall be assured. Up to date authentication and encryption techniques shall be

B. Password Protection: A minimum of three levels of password access protection shall be

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 9 of 49

2. Level 2 - Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands.

C. A minimum of four passwords shall be supported at each Digital Panel

D. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to

2.03 NETWORKING / COMMUNICATIONS

B. Local Area Network

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 10 of 49

f. Use of an approved, industry standard protocol

a. The supervisor shall directly connect to the Communication Controller’s internal

a. The server shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 4 concurrent clients

3. Support for animations in HTML pages

4. Automatically created tables for alarms, set-points, hardware points

5. Automatically created menus and corresponding HTML pages for

6. Automatically created network page with navigation to other

2.04 MAIN OPERATOR WORK STATION

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 11 of 49

B. The operator station shall have the following minimum specifications:

D. Color LCD Display

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 12 of 49

4. The unacknowledged change-of-state occurrences shall output in double size

a. Point identifier and expanded identifier.

2.05 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL

B. Functionality to include ability to:

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 13 of 49

2.06 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES

B. Basic Interface Description

a. Scheduling and override of building operations, Time Scheduling, Holiday

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 14 of 49

k. Maximum demand load shedding program

Volume 2: Section 4 Page 15 of 49